FOREWORD
This manual  is for reference use of students enrolled  in scheduled training courses of the  U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). While it will  be useful to anyone who needs information
on the subjects covered, it will  have its greatest value as  an adjunct to classroom presentations
involving discussions among the  students and the instructional staff.

This manual  has been developed with a goal of providing the best available current information;
however, individual instructors may provide additional material to cover special aspects of their
presentations.

Because of the limited availability of the manual, it should  not be cited in bibliographies or other-
publications.

References to products and manufacturers are for illustration only; they do not  imply endorsement
by EPA.

Constructive  suggestions for improvement of the content and format of the manual are welcome.

-------

-------
                                    CONTENTS
Section 1

Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
Section 5



Section 6

Section 7

Section 8

Section 9
Section 10
Data Quality Objectives

Sample Plan Development

       Quality Assurance Sampling Plan for Emergency Response

       Appendix II of Guidance for Data Useability in Risk Assessment
       (Part A)

Field Screening

       Environmental Photographic Interpretation Center (EPIC)

Sample Analysis

       Target Compound List

       Priority Pollutant and Superfund Comparison Lists

       Sample Collection Requirements

Containerized Material Sampling

       Hazard Categorization

Soil Sampling

Surface Water and Sediment Sampling

Groundwater Sampling

Documentation

       Section 4 of A Compendium of Superfund Field Operations Methods

       NEIC Policies and Procedures

Sample Packaging and Shipping

       DOT Regulations

       Excerpt  from Section  6 of A Compendium of Superfund Field
       Operations Methods

-------
Contents (continued)

Section 11          Field Exercise
Section 12
Problem Session:  Sample Plan Development Exercise

Appendices

      Appendix A - Removal  Program:     Representative-  Sampling
                   Guidance, Volume I:  Soil          -
                                                 - •>   !/**
      Appendix B - Compendium ofERT Waste Sampling Procedures

      Appendix C - Compendium  of ERT Soil  Sampling land Surface
                   Geophysics Procedures
                          Appendix D -  Compendium of ERT Surface Water and  Sediment
                                       Sampling Procedures          " ! - ^ซ

                          Appendix E -  Compendium  of   ERT   GroundWatet*  Sampling
                                       Procedures                       - -cv
                                          VI

-------
                  SAMPLING FOR HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

                                        (165.9)

                                        3  Days


This course-provides individuals who have little or no sampling experience with practical information
for effectively sampling hazardous materials at Superfund sites. The course focuses on sampling plan
development, types of equipment suitable for  hazardous materials sampling, and procedures for
safely coHecting.samples.  It is intended for personnel responsible for inspections, investigations, and
remedial actions at Superfund sites.  Air sampling is specifically addressed in Air Monitoring for
Hazardous Materials (165.4)  and is not discussed in this course.

The objectives of the course are:
    /  *     \ ^ V
•      Instruct participants on the basic concepts of an effective  sampling strategy.

•  •„.•   Present available equipment used to obtain representative samples  from solid and liquid'
      wastestreams.

•      Compare applications and limitations of various sampling devices.

•     Develop safe and effective sampling plans for environmental sampling  events.

After  completing  the  course, participants  will be more  familiar with fundamental  concepts  of
sampling, sample plan development, and sampling equipment.
                                            111

-------

-------
Acronyms and Abbreviations (continued)

QAO         quality assurance officer
QAP         quality assurance plan
QAPjP       quality assurance project plan
QA/QC       quality assurance/quality control

RA          remedial action
RAS         routine analytical services
RCRA       Resource Conservation and Recovery Act
RD          remedial design
RDCO       regional document control  officer
REAC       Response Engineering and Analytical Contract
RI           remedial investigation
ROD         record of decision
RPM         remedial project manager
RSCC       Regional Sample Control Center

SAP         sampling and analysis plan
SARA       Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act
SAS         special analytical services
SCS         Soil Conservation Service
SDWA       Safe Drinking Water Act
SIC          standard industrial classification
SM          site manager
SMO         Sample Management Office
SOP         standard operating procedure
SOW         statement of work
SW-846      Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste (SW-846) (EPA document)

TAL         Target Analyte List
TCDD       tetrochlorodibenzo-/?-dioxin
TCL         Target Compound List
TDS         total dissolved solids
TIC         tentatively identified compounds
TOC         total organic carbon
TOX         total organic halogens
TR          traffic report
TSCA       Toxic Substances Control  Act

USGS       U.S. Geological Survey

VOA         volatile organic  analysis
VOC         volatile organic  compound
                                          IX

-------

-------
                      ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
AMD        Advanced Monitoring Systems Division
AMS        air monitoring system
API          American Petroleum Institute
ARAR       applicable or relevant and appropriate requirements
ASCS        Agricultural Stabilization and Conservation Service
ASTM       American Society for Testing and Materials

BNA        base/neutral and acid extractables
BTEX        benzene, toluene, ethylbenzene, and xylenes

CBI          confidential business information
CDP        common depth point
CERCLA     Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act
CFR         Code of Federal Regulations
CGI          combustible gas indicator
CLP         Contract Laboratory Program
COC        chain of custody
COE        U.S. Army  Corps of Engineers
COLIWASA  composite liquid waste sampler
CRDL       contract-required detection limit
CRQL       contract-required quantitation limit
CWA        Clean Water Act

DCO        document control officer
DL          detection limit
DOT        U.S. Department of Transportation
DQO        data  quality objectives

EAU        evidence audit unit
Eh           oxidation-reduction  potential (redox potential)
EM          electromagnetic
EMSL-LV    Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory-Las Vegas
EPA         U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
EPIC        Environmental Photographic Interpretation Center
ESD         Environmental Services Division (EPA)

FID          flame ionization detector
FIPS         federal information  processing standards
FIT          field  investigation team
FS           feasibility study
FSP          field  sampling plan
FTS          federal telephone system
                                          vn

-------
Acronyms and Abbreviations (continued)

GC          gas chromatograph or gas chromatography
GC/MS      gas chromatography/mass spectroscopy
GIS          geographic information system
GPR         ground-penetrating radar

HAZCAT    hazard categorization
HRS         hazard ranking system
HSL         hazardous substance list

IATA        International Air Transport Association
IDL         instrument detection limit

LEL         lower explosive limit

MDL        method detection limit

NAPL       nonaqueous phase liquid
NAPP       National Aerial  Photography Program
ND          nondetect
NEIC        National Enforcement Investigation Center
NHAP       national high altitude photography
NMO        normal movement
n.o.s.        not otherwise specified
NPDES      National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System
NPL         National Priorities List
NTIS        National Technical Information Service

OD          outside diameter
OSHA       Occupational Safety and Health Administration
OSWER     Office of Solid  Waste and Emergency Response
OVA        organic vapor analyzer

PAH         polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbon
PARCC      precision, accuracy, representativeness, completeness, and comparability
PCB         polychlorinated biphenyl
PE          performance evaluation
PID         photoionization detector
POTW      publicly owned treatment works
PPM         parts per million
PPB         parts per billion
PRP         potentially responsible party
PTFE       polytetrafluoroethylene
PVC         polyvinyl chloride
                                          vm

-------
          DATA QUALITY
            OBJECTIVES
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES
At the end of this lesson, participants will be able to:

•   Identify the three stages of the data quality objective (DQO)
    process

•   Identify the various data uses within the DQO framework

•   Explain the five levels of sample analysis (analytic levels)
    available

•   Relate the DQO process to a conceptual model

-------
                                                NOTES
    DATA QUALITY OBJECTIVES
    DATA QUALITY OBJECTIVES
  	(DQOs)	
   A process that yields quality and
   cost-effective:
      • Sampling
      • Analysis
      • Data
  DQO DEVELOPMENT PROCESS

  •  Stage 1 - Identify decision types
  •  Stage 2 - Identify data uses and needs
  •  Stage 3 - Design data collection program
6/93
Data Quality Objectives

-------
      NOTES
                                   STAGE 1 - IDENTIFY DECISION
                                                TYPES
                                  • Identify and involve data users

                                  • Evaluate available data

                                  • Develop a conceptual model

                                  • Specify objectives and decisions
                                    IDENTIFY AND INVOLVE DATA
                                    	USERS	

                                    Primary users:  Those involved in ongoing
                                    remedial investigation and feasibility study
                                    (RI/FS) activities

                                    Secondary users: Those who rely on RI/FS
                                    outputs to support their activities
                                     EVALUATE AVAILABLE DATA

                                   • Information from the EPA, the United States
                                    Geological Survey (USGS), and state and local
                                    regulatory agency files


                                   • Other sources: Town hall, library, and
                                    site maps
Dam Quality Objectives
6/93

-------
                                                   NOTES
DEVELOP A CONCEPTUAL
MODEL

Qoiir^o fc I Ro^ontot"!


)

EXAMPLE OF A CONCEPTUAL
MODEL
a ^ Wind Dปrmal
Jr\ *- Direction Expose
Jjf ~3&-~ " ' •I-^\V|
[.SU—a^a-n^Q — ^^!
Ingestlon/ r >>^1&J an
Inhalation ^ — -
Exposure \
	 1 ~ ^ Groundwater ^^^ /
i ^ Flow 	 ^
	 	 	 . -^

I

SPECIFY OBJECTIVES AND
DECISIONS
• Identify problems to be solved
• Determine:
- Presence or absence of contaminants
- Types of contaminants
- Concentrations of contaminants
- Contaminant pathways
- Public and environmental health effects
6/93
Data Quality Objectives

-------
      NOTES
                                  STAGE 2 - IDENTIFY DATA USES
                                  	AND NEEDS	
                                  • Identify data uses
                                  • Identify data types
                                  • Identify data quality needs
                                  • Identify data quantity needs
                                  • Evaluate sampling and analysis options
                                  • Review PARCC parameters
                                         IDENTIFY DATA USES
                                   • Site characterization
                                   • Health and safety
                                   • Risk assessment
                                   • Alternatives evaluation
                                   • Monitoring
                                   • Potentially responsible party (PRP)
                                    determination
                                        IDENTIFY DATA TYPES
                                      Analytical requirements
                                      - Chemical analytical parameters
                                      - Physical parameters
Data Quality Objectives
6/93

-------
                                                     NOTES
      STAGE 2 - IDENTIFY DATA
   	USES/NEEDS	

    Identify data quality needs

    Analytical levels:
    -  LEVEL I   Field screening
    -  LEVEL II  Field analysis
    -  LEVEL III Laboratory analysis
    -  LEVEL IV Laboratory analysis CLP RAS
    -  LEVEL V  Laboratory analysis SAS
  IDENTIFY DATA QUALITY NEEDS

  • Contaminants of concern

  • Levels of concern

  • Detection limit requirements

  • Critical samples
 IDENTIFY DATA QUANTITY NEEDS
    Data unavailable:  Develop a phased
    sampling approach


    Data available:  Use statistical techniques
6/93
Data Quality Objectives

-------
      NOTES
                                     EVALUATE SAMPLING AND
                                         ANALYSIS OPTIONS
                                 Decrease %
                                 of samples
                                 analyzed
Data
quality
                                                               Cost and
                                                               turnaround
                                                               time
                                   REVIEW PARCC PARAMETERS

                                   • P recision

                                   1 A ccuracy

                                   • R epresentativeness

                                   • C ompleteness

                                   1 C omparability
                                                PARCC
                                  • Precise - Consistent, reliable sampling
                                    and analysis results

                                  • Accurate - Free from error

                                  • Representative - Thoroughness in selecting
                                    sampling locations and sufficient numbers
                                    of samples

                                  • Complete - Sufficient amount of valid data

                                  • Comparable - Consistency among data
Data Quality Objectives
                           6/93

-------
                                              NOTES
     STAGE 3 - DESIGN DATA
     COLLECTION PROGRAM

   Assemble data collection components

   Develop data collection documentation
  ASSEMBLE DATA COLLECTION
  	COMPONENTS	

  • Develop a comprehensive data
   collection program
   DEVELOP DATA COLLECTION
        DOCUMENTATION

  • Sampling and analysis plan
  • Work plans
  • Enforcement concerns
6/93
Data Qualify Objectives

-------
ft
                SAMPLE  PLAN DEVELOPMENT
                  PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES


                  At the end of this lesson, participants will be able to:

                  •    Discuss the necessary elements of a sampling plan

                  •    Describe various sampling designs relative to sample location

                  •    Discuss the differences between composite and grab samples

                  •    Describe procedures for field decontamination of sampling
                      equipment

-------
                                                NOTES
   SAMPLE PLAN DEVELOPMENT
   SAMPLE PLAN DEVELOPMENT
    REQUIRES COORDINATION
      SAMPLING OBJECTIVES
  • Establish threat to public health or welfare or
   to the environment
  • Locate and identify potential sources of
   contamination
  • Define the extent of contamination
  • Determine treatment and disposal options
  • Document the attainment of cleanup goals
6/93
Sample Plan Development

-------
      NOTES
                                 SAMPLE PLAN DEVELOPMENT
                                • Review existing historical site information
                                • Perform site reconnaissance
                                • Evaluate potential migration pathways
                                  and receptors
                                • Determine sampling objectives
                                • Establish data quality objectives
                                 SAMPLE PLAN DEVELOPMENT

                                • Use field screening techniques
                                • Select analytical parameters
                                • Select sampling approach
                                • Determine sampling locations
                               ELEMENTS OF A SAMPLING PLAN
                                 • Location and description of site
                                 • Media to be sampled
                                 • Analytical parameters
                                 • Container requirements
                                 • Field measurements
                                 • Well purging procedures
Sample Plan Development
6/93

-------
                                                  NOTES
  ELEMENTS OF A SAMPLING PLAN
   • Preservation and filtration
   • QA/QC samples
   • Sample collection techniques
   • Documentation and transportation
   • Special equipment
   • Decontamination
 LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF SITE
      MEDIA TO BE SAMPLED

  • Air
  • Water
  • Soil and sediments
  • Bulk and containerized materials
6/93
Sample Plan Development

-------
     /VOTES
                              ANALYTICAL PARAMETERS
                            • Container requirements
                            • Field measurements
                            • Well purging procedures
                              Preservation and filtration
                              QA/QC samples
                              Sample collection techniques
Sample Plan Development
6/93

-------
                                             NOTES
        SAMPLING DESIGN
    Simple random sampling
    Stratified random sampling
    Systematic sampling
    Cluster sampling
   SIMPLE RANDOM SAMPLING
     !•—•ซ	99  • ซ•••[
 STRATIFIED RANDOM SAMPLING
     Strata
      Strata
6/93
Sample Plan Development

-------
     NOTES
                               SYSTEMATIC SAMPLING
                                     SynemMIc Grid Sampling
                                CLUSTER SAMPLING
                                   Clusters
    i
                              Documentation
                              Transportation
Sample Plan Development
6/93

-------
                                               NOTES
  • Special equipment
  • Decontamination
       SPECIAL EQUIPMENT
      SAMPLING EQUIPMENT
 	ATTRIBUTES	

  • Disposable or easily decontaminated
  • Inexpensive, especially disposable items
  • Easy to operate
  • Nonreactive
6/93
Sample Plan Development

-------
      NOTES
                                       DECONTAMINATION
                                 •  The goal of most sampling efforts is to
                                   acquire representative samples

                                 •  Even trace amounts of contaminants from
                                   prior sampling may invalidate the entire
                                   project
                                   DECONTAMINATION GOALS
                                 • No nationwide standards; some states
                                   and regions have their own standards

                                 • The goal of decontamination is to
                                   remove or reduce contaminants below
                                   detection limits in order to avoid cross-
                                   contamination
                                    FIELD DECONTAMINATION
                                 	PROCEDURES	


                                 • Wash with nonphosphate detergent

                                 • Rinse with tap water

                                 • Second rinse with distilled/deionized water

                                 • Appropriate solvent rinse

                                 • Final rinse with distilled/deionized water
Sample Plan Development
6/93

-------
                                              NOTES
     FIELD DECONTAMINATION
          PROCEDURES
    Air dry equipment
    Wrap in aluminum foil
    Collect equipment blanks daily
       REDUCE EQUIPMENT
  DECONTAMINATION PROBLEMS

  •  Use disposable equipment
  •  Use nonpermeable equipment
  •  Bag equipment
  •  Follow safe work practices
6/93
Sample Plan Development

-------
       Office of Emergency and Remedial Response
       Emergency Response Division
       Environmental Response Branch, MS-101
                                          United States
                                          Environmental Protection
                                          Agency
          Office of
          Solid Waste and
          Emergency Response
January 1992
                                          QualityAssurance
                                          Sampling  Plan  for
                                          Emergency Response
                      Quality Assurance Technical
                      Information Bulletin
   What is QASPER?

   QASPER is a PC-based software package which compiles
   generic text and user-provided site-specific information
   into a draft Quality Assurance / Quality Control (QA/QC)
   Sampling Plan for Che Removal Program. QASPER ad-
   dresses the nine sections of a QA/QC Sampling Plan, as
   specified in OSWER Directive 9360.4-01, QA/QC
   Guidance for Removal Activities, Sampling QA/QC Plan,
   and Data Validation Procedures (April 1990, EPA/540/G-
   90/004).

   Who is the Anticipated QASPER User?

   The On-Scene Coordinators (OSCs) or the Technical As-
   sistance Team (TAT) contractors are the primary users of
   QASPER. These individuals wilfhave access to the site-
   specific information and the sampling objectives that char-
   acterize the site.  They are also the ones responsible for
   assembling that information into an acceptable game plan
   for implementation.

   Why was QASPER Designed?

   QASPER was created to facilitate the timely assembly of a
   comprehensive sampling plan for emergency response ac-
   tions.  By thorough consideration and  attention  to the
   necessary requirements  of QA/QC sample planning
   through an automated process, it is anticipated that  reli-
   able, accurate, and quality data will be generated to meet
   the intended use.

   Requirements

   QASPER runs on an IBM  PC or 100% compatible, with a
   hard drive, 640K RAM, and a printer (for hardcopy out-
   put).
Features of QASPER

   •  Requires no other software for support. A uord
      processing package is included with the QASPER
      program.                            "

   •  Generates ASCII output in both file and hardcopx
      formats. Files may be uploaded to other woid
      processing packages  (i.e., WordPerfect) for  fur-
      ther manipulation.
   •  Creates a hard copy QA/QC Sampling Plan ready
      for approval signatures and implementation
   •  Retains database files on all previous sampling
      plans created. This allows for future manipulation
      of an existing plan without having to recreate the
      document or search for a similar sampling plan by
      location, facility type, or contaminant.
   •  Improves the consistency and comprehensiveness
      of sampling plan creation efforts throughout ihe
      office, region, or zone by prompting the user to
      consider the same set of questions for each site to
      be addressed.
   •  Improves efficiency  for creating and reviewing
      QA/QC Sampling Plan documents by allowing easy
      modification of the document text cither through
      the editor or through the word processing package.
   •  Picks up information that has repetitive use in the
      plan and imports the information  to all sections
      after the first entry, thus avoiding redundant data
      entry.

   •  Provides  the user with access to standarc'.i/cd
      generic text  in various sections of the plan. Based
      on the user's needs, this text  may be imported
      directly or may be edited to fit site-specific condi-
      tions.
6/93
                                              11
               Sample Plan Development

-------
   •   Has flexible data entry throughout piangenerating
       activities and informs the user as to which sections
       are complete and which sections require addition-
       al information.

Contents of QASPER

QASPER addresses the nine sections of a QA/QC Sam-
pling Plan, as specified in OSWER Directive 9360.4-01,
QA/QC Guidance  for Removal  Activities, Sampling
QAyQC Plan and Data Validation Procedures:
   0.0  Title Page Information
        Section 00 identifies information required to
        complete the title page of a sampling plan. This
        information includes site name, relevant work
        order numbers, primary site personnel and tit-
        les, and  the date.  Some of this information is
        utilized elsewhere throughout the plan and will
        automatically appear in the proper places.

   1.0  Background Information
        Section  1.0  solicits  background  information
        about the site. This includes the location and
        type of  facility, type and volume  of  material
        handled by the facility, current facility status and
        proximity and type of sensitive environments.
   2.0  Data Use  Objectives
         Section 2.0 requests  information regarding the
         data use objectives and about decisions the data
         will support.  The purpose(s)  of the sampling
         event is specified and this information is for-
         warded  to other sections of the plan. The data
         quality objective (DQO) logic pathway begins in
         this section and is carried forward to Sections
         3.0, 4.0,  6.0 and 8.0.
   3.0   Quality Assurance Objectives
         Section  3.0 facilitates the linkage of the DQO
         logic with the matrix and parameters being in-
         vestigated. The user must also specify the pur-
         pose and OA objective (QA-1, QA-2, or QA-3)
         related to the selection. The same sequence will
         be repeated for all parameters of concern at the
         site.
    4.0  Approach and Sampling Methodologies
         Section 4.0  addresses the approach and sam-
         pling methodologies that will be employed. In-
         cluded  are  sections on sampling equipment,
         sampling  design, standard operating proce-
         dures, schedule of activities and tables.

         In the  case of equipment, there are pull down
         menus for type of equipment and materials of
         construction   Where dedicated sampling
         equipment is not utilized, QASPER  assists in
         the development of a decontamination se-
         quence. The sampling design section requires
         the user  to input information related to the
        proposed design or grid  to achieve the sample
        event objectives.  In conjunction wilh the sam-
        pling design, the user must specify the standard
        operating  procedures  (SOPs)  that will be
        employed.  QASPER contains generic text for
        approximately 20 SOPs that can be imported as
        is or modified to  fit a  specific scenario  A
        schedule of activities detailing site activities and
        tentative start and completion dates is in the next
        section. The last components of this section arc
        the  sample  summary tables  and  QC  sample
        tables.
   5.0   Project Organization and Responsibilities
        Section 5.0 helps the user organize information
        about what personnel are assigned which respon-
        sibilities and which labs will be analy/.ing which
        samples.
   6.0   QA Requirements
        Section 6.0 is automatically completed based on
        the QA selections made in Section  3.0
        Capabilities exist to edit the generic  text as
        needed.
   7.0   Deliverables
        Section 7.0 allows the user to import generic text
        for  standard deliverables that will be prepared
        for the site or input specific requirements.
   8.0   Data Validation
        Section 8.0 contains the requirements for validat-
        ing the data generated  under this  plan as per
        OSWER  Directive 9360.4-01,  Part  II, Data
        Validation Procedures (April, 1990). The criteria
        used ensure that analytical results received from
        the laboratory are valid and accurate  for the
        objective  chosen.  The section is automatically
        completed based on the QA selections made in
        Section 3.0. Capabilities exist to edit the  generic
        text as needed.
Once all the sections are completed, the user can compile
the plan, make  any necessary modifications, and print a
hard copy of the site-specific QA/QC Sampling Plan.
          For copies of the software, contact:

                 Mr. William Coakley
                   U.S. EPA, ERT
                Phone: (908) 906-6921

                Ms. Christine Andreas
              RoyF. Weston, Inc./REAC
                Phone: (908) 632-9200
       4
       Sample Plan Development
 12
6/93

-------
                             Sampling QA/QC Work Plan
                                Example Sample Plan
                                     Prepared by
                                 Amazing Consultants
                               EPA Project No.: **.***
                            Contractor Work Order No.: NA
                                EPA Contract No.:  NA
      Amazing Consultants
                                     Approvals
                   EPA
Task Leader
                                Date
             O.S. Cee
             Cm-Scene Coordinator
                Date
Fred Amazing
Project Manager
Date
6/93
         13
Sample Plan Development

-------
1.0  BACKGROUND

The  [suspected] contamination is a result of:

       •      Leaking drums

The  following information is known about the site:

The  site is located in the  city of Swartz Creek in the county of Genesse in the state of Michigan.
The  nearest residents are  located within 500 feet of the site,  in a  south direction.  Other residents
or significant environments in proximity to this site are located 1000 feet due north of the site.

It is a landfill site on an unknown number of acres which had been operating for an unknown period
of time and is now abandoned since 1980.

The types of material(s) handled at this site were:

       •      Inorganics
       •      Petroleum  products
       •      Unknown

The volume(s) of  contaminated  materials to be addressed are:

       •      Unknown

The contaminants  of concern are:

       •      Unknown

The basis of this information may be found from:

       •      Citizens
       •      Records


2.0  DATA USE OBJECTIVES

The objective of this project/sampling event is to determine:

       •      The presence  of contamination
       •      The extent of contamination
       •      The magnitude of contamination

For the purpose of:

       •      Site characterization
       •      Risk assessment
6/93                                       15                    Sample Plan Development

-------
      •      Field personnel health and safety
      •      Enforcement plan

The data will be evaluated against:

      •      Federal/state action levels
      •      Michigan and federal ARARs
3.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE OBJECTIVES

As identified in Sections 1.0 and 2.0, the objective of this project/event applies to the following
parameters:
Parameters
BNA (semivolatiles)
Metals
Metals
PAHs
PAHs
Matrix
drum liquid
groundwater
potable water
soil
waste material
Intended Data Use
site characterization
risk assessment
risk assessment
site characterization
site characterization
QA Objective
QA1
QA3
QA3
QA2
QA2
4.0 APPROACH AND SAMPLING METHODOLOGIES

4.1 Sampling Equipment

The following equipment  will be used to obtain environmental  samples from  the respective
media/matrix:
 Sample Plan Development                  16                                     6/93

-------
  Parameter/Matrix
   Sampling
  Equipment
 Fabrication    Dedicated
                 Decontamination
                      Steps
 BNA
 (semivolatiles)
 Metals in
 groundwater
 PAHs in soil
 PAHs in waste
 material
COLIWASA
 Metals in potable    sample bottle
 water
trowel
glass
No
bladder pump     stainless steel   Yes
                 glass
               Yes
stainless steel   No
bucket auger     stainless steel   No
Physical removal
Nonphosphate detergent
 wash
Potable water rinse
10% nitric acid rinse
Organic-free water rinse
Air dry
             Physical removal
             Nonphosphate detergent
             wash
             Pesticide-grade acetone
              rinse
             Distilled/deionized water
              rinse
             Organic-free water rinse
             Air dry

             Physical removal
             Nonphosphate detergent
              wash
             Potable water rinse
             10%  nitric acid rinse
             Distilled/deionized water
              rinse
             Organic-free water rinse
             Air dry
4.2  Sampling Design

The  sampling design is depicted on the attached Sample Location Map (Figure 4-1) and is based on
the following rationale:
4.3  Standard Operating Procedures
6/93
                        17
                             Sample Plan Development

-------
4.3.1 Sample Documentation

All sample documents will be completed legibly, in ink.  Any corrections or revisions will be made
by lining through the incorrect entry and by initialling the error.
Field Logbook

The field logbook is essentially a descriptive notebook detailing site activities and observations so
that an accurate account of field procedures can be reconstructed in the writer's absence. All entries
will be dated and signed by the individuals making the entries,  and should include (at a minimum)
the following:

       1.  Site name and project number.
       2.  Name(s) of personnel on-site.
       3.  Dates and times of all entries (military time preferred).
       4.  Descriptions of all site activities, including site entry and exit times.
       5.  Noteworthy  events and discussions.
       6.  Weather conditions.
       7.  Site observations.
       8.  Identification and description of samples and locations.
       9.  Subcontractor information and names of onsite personnel.
       10. Date and time of sample collections, along with chain-of-custody  information.
       11. Record of photographs.
       12. Site sketches.
Sample Labels

Sample labels will clearly identify the particular sample and should include the following:

        1.  Site name and number.
        2.  Time and date sample was taken.
        3.  Sample preservation.
        4.  Analysis requested.

Optional, but pertinent, information is the sample location.

Sample labels will be securely affixed to the sample container.  Tie-on labels can be used if properly
secured.


Chain-of-Custody Record

A  chain-of-custody record will be maintained  from the time  the  sample  is  taken to its final
deposition. Every transfer of custody must be noted and signed for, and a copy  of this record kept
by each individual who has signed.  When samples (or  groups of samples)  are not under direct
 Sample Plan Development                     18                                        6/93

-------
control of the individual responsible for them, they must be stored in a locked container sealed with
a custody  seal.

The chain-of-custody record should include (at minimum)  the following:

       1.  Sample identification number.
       2.  Sample information.
       3.  Sample location.
       4.  Sample date.
       5.  Name(s) and signature(s) of sampler(s).
       6.  Signature(s) of any individual(s) with control over samples.
Custody Seals

Custody seals demonstrate that a sample container has not been tampered with or opened.

The individual in possession of the sample(s) will sign and date the seal, affixing it in such a manner
that the container cannot be opened without breaking the seal. The name of this individual, along
with a description of the sample packaging, will be noted in the field logbook.


4.3.2  Sampling SOPs

Drum Sampling

Prior to sampling, drums  must be inventoried, staged, and opened.  Inventory entails  recording
visual qualities of each drum and any characteristics pertinent to the contents' classification. Staging
involves the  organization, and sometimes consolidation of drums which have similar wastes or
characteristics.  Opening of closed drums can be performed manually or remotely.
Remote drum opening is recommended for worker safety.

The most widely used method of sampling a drum involves the use of a glass thief.  This method
is quick, simple, relatively inexpensive, and requires  no decontamination.  The thief is inserted into
the drum until a solid layer  or bottom of the drum is encountered.  The waste  is allowed to
equilibrate in the sample tube, which is then capped and removed for discharge by gravity into the
sample container.

Another drum sampling device is the Composite Liquid Waste Sampler (COLIWASA).  Collection
with a COLIWASA allows a  sample to be collected  from the full depth of a drum and maintain it
in  the  transfer  tube until delivery to the sample bottle. The COLIWASA is  designed  to permit
representative sampling of multiphased wastes from containerized wastes. However, unlike the glass
thief, a COLIWASA is extremely difficult to field decontaminate and relatively expensive, thereby
making it impractical to throw away.
6/93                                        19                    Sample Plan Development

-------
Groundwater Well Sampling

Prior to sampling well, the well will be purged.  For this project, this will be accomplished with a
[(bailer), (submersible pump), (non-gas contact bladder pump) or (suction pumps)].

Brush off well cap prior to opening, unlock and open well cap.  A photoionization detector (HNU)
or flame ionization  detector (OVA) will be used on the escaping gases to determine the need for
respiratory protection.   Using a decontaminated water  level  indicator,  the water  level will  be
measured to the nearest 0.01 foot. Total depth of the well will be obtained with a depth sounder and
the volume of water in the well will be calculated using the following procedure:

       Well Volume = nr2h (7.48 gal/ft3)

       where:
              n =  pi
              r =  radius of well casing in feet.
              h =  height of water column of well from water level.
              7.48 =  conversion from ft3 to number of gallons.

Three well volumes at a minimum should be purged if possible. Equipment must be decontaminated
prior to use and between wells.

Approximately  10 feet  of plastic sheeting will be placed around the well upon which the assembly
of the decontaminated purging equipment will be placed. The assembly will be lowered into the well
to a  point just below the surface of the water.

When pumping the well,  lower the pump slowly to  a point 3 feet above the bottom of the  well.
Record the flow rate and calculate the length of pumping time required to purge the  requisite three
casing volumes.  [Discharged to ground surface adjacent to the well or containerized if necessary.]
Should the well yield be insufficient to produce the requisite three volumes, purging will continue
to the point of well  evacuation, then terminated and the well will be sampled upon recharge.

Once purging is completed and the correct sample jars and/or vials  have been  prepared, sampling
will  proceed. The sampling device (which may or may not be  the same as the purging device) has
been selected so as to  not affect the integrity of  the sample.   Sampling  equipment will be
decontaminated as outlined elsewhere in Section 4.0.  Sampling will occur in a progression from the
least to most contaminated well, if known.

The  water sample will  be collected using a Teflonฎ or  stainless steel bailer.  The  bailer will be
attached  to a clean,  dedicated, nylon rope and introduced into the well.  The bailer will be lowered
to the approximate  mid-point of the screened interval. Once the sample is collected, care will be
taken not to unduly  agitate or aerate the water while pouring into the  appropriate sample containers.

Measure the conductivity, temperature, and pH of the groundwater in a separate container. Record
all field measurements  on the field data sheets and in the field  logbook.
Sample Plan Development                     20

-------
Potable Water Sampling

Potable water samples will be collected from the discharge spigot nearest the pump.  Water will be
purged  from the system for  approximately  15  minutes to remove all standing water in the holding
tank.   Any  aerators or  filtering systems will be bypassed  if possible.  Samples will be collected
directly into sample bottles from the spigot.  Samples will  be iced and packaged in coolers as per
the applicable shipping and handling SOPs.
Soil Sampling

(This text requires modification for site-specific application)

Collection of samples from near-surface soil will be accomplished with tools such as spades, shovels,
and scoops.  Surface debris will  be removed to  the required depth with this  equipment, then a
stainless steel or plastic scoop can be used to collect the sample. This method can be used in most
soil types but is limited to sampling near surface areas.  The use of a flat, pointed mason trowel to
cut a block of the desired soil can be helpful when undisturbed profiles are required.  A stainless
steel scoop, lab spoon, or plastic  spoon will suffice in most other applications.

Sampling a depth will be accomplished with augers and thin-walled tube samplers.  This system
consists of an auger, a series of extensions, a "T" handle, and a thin-walled tube sampler.  The auger
is  used to bore a hole to desired sampling  depth, and  is then  withdrawn.   The auger tip is then
replaced with a tube  core sampler, lowered down the bore hole,and driven into  the soil  at the
completion depth. The core is then withdrawn and the sample collected.
Several augers  are available.  These include bucket type, continuous flight (screw), and post hole
augers.  Bucket types are better for direct sample recovery because they provide a large volume of
sample in a short  time. When continuous flight augers are used, the sample can be collected directly
off the flights, which  are usually  at 5-foot intervals.  The continuous flight augers are satisfactory
for use when a composite of the  complete soil column is desired.  Post hole augers  have limited
utility for sample collection as they are designed to cut through fibrous, rooted, swampy soil.)

Depth samples  will be collected via split spoon samplers.  A series of consecutive cores may be
sampled to give a complete soil column, or an auger may be used to  drill down to the desired depth
for sampling. The split spoon  is then driven to its sampling depth through the bottom of the augured
hole  and the  core extracted.

Subsurface soil sample collection will involve test pit/trench excavation activities.  Test pits/trenches
are used for  detailed examination of soil characteristics.  Samples are collected from the pit using
a trowel scoop  or coring device.

All sampling devices  should be laboratory  cleaned, preferably by  the  laboratory  performing the
analysis, using pesticide grade acetone (assuming that acetone is not a target compound) or methanol,
then  wrapped in cleaned and autoclaved aluminum foil, and custody sealed for identification.  The
sampling device should remain in  this wrapping until it is needed.  Each sampler should be used for
one sample only. However, dedicated samplers may be impractical  if there  are a large number of
soil samples required.   In this case, samplers should be cleaned in the field using the decontamination
procedure described elsewhere in Section 4.0.


6/93                                         21                     Sample Plan Development

-------
4.3.3 Sample Handling and Shipment

Each of the sample bottles will be sealed and labeled according to the following protocol.  Caps will
be secured with custody seals. Bottle labels will contain all required information including site name
and sample number, time and date of collection, analysis requested, and preservative used.  Sealed
bottles will be placed in large metal or plastic coolers, and padded with an absorbent material such
as vermiculite.

All sample documents will be affixed to the underside of each cooler lid. The lid will be sealed and
affixed on at least two  sides with custody seals so that any sign of tampering is easily visible.
4.4  Schedule of Activities
                            Table 1:  Proposed Schedule of Work
Activity
Soil sampling
Potable water sampling
Groundwater sampling
Drum sampling
Start Date
07/28/93
07/28/93
08/10/93
08/10/93
End Date
08/10/93
08/10/93
09/10/93
11/22/93
                                                                                             fl
5.0  PROJECT ORGANIZATION AND RESPONSIBILITIES

The EPA On-Scene Coordinator,  O.S. Cee, will provide overall direction to Amazing Consultants
staff concerning project sampling  needs, objectives and schedule.
The Amazing Consultants Task Leader,
            , is the primary point of contact with
the EPA On-Scene Coordinator. The Task Leader is responsible for the development and completion
of the Sampling QA/QC  Plan, project team organization,   and supervision of all project tasks,
including reporting and deliverables.
The Amazing Consultants Site QC Coordinator,
                    ,  is responsible for ensuring
field  adherence to the Sampling  QA/QC Plan  and recording any deviations.   The  Site QC
Coordinator is also the primary project team contact with the lab.

The following sampling personnel will work on this project:

       Personnel                          Responsibility
 Sample Plan Development
22
                                          6/93

-------
The following laboratories will be providing the following analyses:

       Lab Name/Location                Lab Type                   Parameters
       Amazing Analytical Lab
       123 Reading Rd
       Pittsburgh, KN                    Non-CLP                   All
6.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

The following requirements apply to the respective QA Objectives and parameters identified in
Section 3.0:
The following QA Protocols for QA2 data are applicable to all sample matrices and include:

       1.  Provide sample documentation in the form of field logbooks, the appropriate field data
       sheets  and  chain-of-custody records.   Chain-of-custody  records  are optional for  field-.
       screening locations.

       2.  All  instrument  calibration and/or  performance  check  procedures/methods will be
       summarized and documented in the field/personal or instrument log notebook.

       3.  The detection limit will be determined and recorded,  along with the data,  where
       appropriate.

       4.  Document sample holding times; this includes documentation of sample collection and
       analysis dates.

       5.  Provide initial and continuing instrument calibration data.

       6a. For soil, sediment and water samples, include rinsate blanks, field blanks and trip blanks,
       as  specified in the attached table.

       6b. For air  samples, include  lot blanks,  field blanks, collocated samples,  trip blanks,
       breakthrough,  and QC positive samples, as specified in the attached table.

       7.  Performance Evaluation samples are optional, if available.

       8.  Choose any one or combination of the following three options:

              1. Definitive identification - confirm the identification of analytes on 10% of the
              screened (field or lab) or  100% of the unscreened  samples via an EPA-approved
              method; provide documentation such as gas chromatograms, mass spectra, etc.
6/93                                        23                    Sample Plan Development

-------
              2. Quantitation - provide documentation for quantitative results from screening and
              the EPA-approved verification method (for screened samples) or just the quantitative
              results (in the  case of unscreened samples).

              3. Analytical error determination - determine the analytical error by calculating the
              precision, accuracy, and coefficient of variation on a subset of the screened or all of
              the unscreened samples using an EPA-approved method.

The following QA Protocols for QA3 data are applicable for all matrices and include:

       1.  Provide sample documentation in the form of field logbooks, the appropriate field  data
       sheets  and chain-of-custody  records.   Chain-of-custody  records  are optional for field
       screening locations.

       2.   All  instrument calibration  and/or performance check procedures/methods will be
       summarized and documented in the field/personal or  instrument log notebook.

       3.   The detection  limit will be determined and recorded, along  with  the  data,  where
       appropriate.

       4.  Document sample holding times; this includes documentation of sample collection and
       analysis dates.

       5.  Provide initial and continuing instrument calibration data.

       6a. For soil, sediment and water samples, include rinsate blanks, field blanks and trip blanks,
       as specified in the attached table.

       6b.  For  air  samples, include lot blanks,  field blanks,  collocated samples, trip blanks,
       breakthrough, and QC positive samples, as specified in the attached table.

       7.  Performance Evaluation samples are required.

       8.  Definitive identification on 100%  of the "critical"  samples by an EPA-approved method.

       9.   Quantitation - provide documentation for  quantitative results from screening  and
       EPA-approved verification methods (for screened samples) or just quantitative results (in the
       case of unscreened samples).

       10. Analytical error determination on 100% of the "critical" samples by an EPA-approved
       method.    Determine  precision,  accuracy  and  coefficient  of  variation.    Determine
       false-positive and false-negative  values.
7.0  DELIVERABLES

The Amazing Consultants Task Leader,	, will maintain contact with the EPA
On-Scene Coordinator,  O.S.  Cee, to keep  him/her informed about the technical  and financial


Sample Plan Development                    24

-------
progress of this project.   This  communication will commence with  the  issuance of the work
assignment and project scoping meeting. Activities under this project will be reported in status and
trip reports and other deliverables (e.g., analytical reports, final reports) described herein. Activities
will also be summarized in appropriate format for inclusion in monthly and annual reports.

The following deliverables will be provided under this project:

       Final Report

A  (draft) final report will  be prepared to  correlate  available  background  information with data
generated under this sampling event and identify supportable conclusions and recommendations which
satisfy the objectives of this sampling QA/QC plan.


8.0 DATA VALIDATION

QA2

Data generated under this QA/QC Sampling Plan will be  evaluated accordingly with  appropriate
criteria contained in the Removal  Program Data Validation Procedures which accompany OSWER
Directive #9360.4-1.

The results of 10% of the samples in the analytical data packages should be evaluated for all of the
elements  listed  in  Section  6.0  of the  QA/QC  Sampling  Plan.   The  holding times,  blank
contamination,  and detection capability will  be reviewed for all remaining  samples.

QA3

Data generated under this QA/QC Sampling Plan will be  evaluated accordingly with  appropriate
criteria contained in Removal Program Data Validation  Procedures which accompany OSWER
Directive #9360.4-1.

This objective, the most stringent of all objectives, requires that at least  10% of the samples in the
lab data package be evaluated for  all of the elements  listed in Section 6.0 of this QA/QC Sampling
Plan.   Of the  remaining samples, holding times, blank contamination,  precision,  accuracy, error
determination, detection limits, and  confirmed identification will be reviewed.  This objective also
requires  review of all elements for all  samples in each analyte category  (i.e., VOAs and PCBs) in
every tenth data package received from an individual  lab.
6/93                                        25                     Sample Plan Development

-------
                                Example Sample Plan
                             Figure 1-1 Site Location Map
Sample Plan Development                   26                                     6/93

-------
                                Example Sample Plan
                           Figure 4-1 Sample Location Map
6/93                                     27                   Sample Plan Development

-------

















jj
<

S
c/5
U
j
ft.
S
^5
•*
Q
U
ri
U
ca

5














CA
— _ JU
W *7\ CH
Q .32 C
H U- ง
11
I*
., C/]
U O
O C -S
C O CX
P 'i E
c J J?
<ฃ a ^
V]

ฃ ซ
5
U in
ซ •*
C J
ฃ 03
— • Sfl
o "o.
S E
3 a
in in

c o
H5 ,E


u
''S
t
o
e
Q.
c
ซ
0*
u
c
'a
c
o "i u
U g E
o 5
a. o
H>

X
2


O -c
>
> '3!
u c

P3 SJ
O ^
•^ 1
< t2



8
z



^
z

,J.
z


J3
z


8


V]
•o
O
P;




U
"*
r)



U
1
i <"
-J ซ
— > "3)
^
'3
.3"
E
•a



a.
a.

I
"o
< |
z 5
03 -ฃ
o
A
CN rป en S ^
"" V
00 00 CN ^ —
Z



^
Z ฐ

<• < < < <
Z Z Z Z Z


^
n fs m ~ —
Z


O O in Q S,
r) ri en O ฐ


sซ co w sn
•ฃ •ฃ ซ M
C C "O "O
1 I S '< S
vo vo ?^ Z r-


o .. o ..
"^ CM ** CN
y cj y cj u cj cj
I O.TC S O.TJ- -* Tf Tt
„ „



u a)
S S <• M M
_W 11 t/l vt V)
JZ ฃ. CJ) OX) W)
, >> , >•> N N N
J -3 J "3 ฐ ฐ ฐ
— CX — CX 00 00 CO
S 1
1 * -
•^ O rt eg
c 3 o 'C u 'g
2 o ^ ill!
&U d. v; > C f C

g
a
CX P M C C
^ Q. - ^ 0. ft.
q ex o BO ex a
O — o S in —


C/) C/3 U
— • — w: c/j e/j
S 2 I X X
^ ^ < < <
S S & a. a.






































1 1
s ง
S |
•o ^2
>>
."2 '1-|
y p j^ t/5
11! it
U O ™™ ป W
jlllj
^ "o S. ^ c
< ' rc ^ ^S
z < < a ง
03 Z S U. O
" * " ' ฐ
Sample Plat: Development
28
6/P3

-------













Oi
•
1
S
O
Q
Z
•^
en
53
^^
[j

O
"re
_J



o
•ฃ
^j
"c3 ^
.- c
•*-* 0}
>^ b>
c 13

'C
re
S




'ง
03
Z
CO

CO
^^
CX






C/2
C
1>
E
CO
re
0)
C/5






Z





oo






0
^*
op
oo

groundwater








VI
f!
^

^
.^
ex






c
4>
|
o
re
4J
UO






z





00







^f
op

i
0)
I
s.








<ซ
ง
•^

fs
^f
CX






o
s
f\
CX
ซ
"re
re






Z





(N








O
O
00

1








•o
VJ
Z
0.

cs cs
^C ^C
a a






o o
1C ซC
*o *o
CX Q-
6C C*0

s ^
.^
waste materi









S
(X

re
C
E
c
o
L.
C
UJ
00
D

1
j>5
5-5
^
•g
1

s
's
"3
_^j
^
^
^^4
1
1
"^3
•^
o
&o
•*^4
a
3
1

t
1
S
s
vd
OO
•o ^
'i
" • ^
" a) p,
i: 3 w
3 "

** •- OO
C — • ,
D. — ^

o
O
o
>
o
^^
o
CX
1
ac
0-
•o






































oil
'S

o

2
1C

t
"8
in
u
29
Sample Plan Development

-------
                         TARGET COMPOUND LIST (TCL) AND
                            QUANTITATION LIMITS (QL) (1)
Volatiles
CAS Number
                                                            Quantitation Limits (2)
                                                            Water Low Soil/Sediment (3)
/ig/L
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.

Chloromethane
Bromomethane
Vinyl Chloride
Chloroethane
Methylene Chloride
Acetone
Carbon Disulfide
1,1-Dichloroethene
1,1-Dichloroethane
1 ,2-Dichloroethene (total)
Chloroform
1 ,2-Dichloroethane
2-Butanone
1,1,1 -Trichloroethane
Carbon Tetrachloride
Bromodichloromethane
1 ,2-Dichloropropane
cis-1 ,3-Dichloropropene
Trichloroethene
Dibromochloromethane
1,1,2-Trichloroethane
Benzene
trans- 1 ,3-Dichloropropene
Bromoform
4-Methyl-2-pentanone
2-Hexanone
Tetrachloroethene
Toluene
1 , 1 ,2,2-Tetrachloroethane
Chlorobenzene
Ethyl Benzene
Styrene
Xylenes (total)

74-87-3
74-83-9
75-01-4
75-00-3
75-09-2
67-64-1
75-15-0
75-35-4
75-34-3
540-59-0
67-66-3
107-06-2
78-93-3
71-55-6
56-23-5
75-27-4
78-87-5
10061-01-5
79-01-6
124-48-1
79-00-5
71-43-2
10061-02-6
75-25-2
108-10-1
591-78-6
127-18-4
108-88-3
79-34-5
108-90-7
100-41-4
100-42-5
1330-20-7

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

(1)    Specific quantitation limits are highly matrix dependent. The quantitation limits listed herein are
       provided for guidance and may not always be achievable.
Sample Plan Development
   30
                        6/93

-------
(2)     Quantitation limits listed  for soil/sediment are based on wet weight.  The quantitation limits
       calculated by the laboratory for soil/sediment on dry weight basis will be higher.

(3)     Medium Soil/Sediment Quantitation Limits (QL) for Volatile TCL Compounds are 125 times the
       individual Low Soil/Sediment QL.

Based on the Contract Laboratory Program Statement of Work, OLM01.6 (6/91).
6/93                                         31                     Sample Plan Development

-------
                       TARGET COMPOUND LIST (TCL) AND
                          QUANTITATION LIMITS (QL) (1)
Semivolatiles
CAS Number
Quantitation Limits (2)
Water Low Soil/Sediment (3)
pg/L
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
Phenol
bis(2-Chloroethyl)ether
2-Chlorophenol
1 ,3-Dichlorobenzene
1 ,4-Dichlorobenzene
1 ,2-Dichlorobenzene
2-Methylphenol
2,2-oxybis( 1 -chloropropane)
4-Methylphenol
N-Nitroso-di-n-propylamine
Hexachloroethane
Nitrobenzene
Isophorone
2-Nitrophenol
2,4-Dimethylphenol
bis(2-Chloroethoxy)methane
2,4-Dichlorophenol
1 ,2,4-Trichlorobenzene
Naphthalene
4-Chloroaniline
Hexachlorobutadiene
4-Chloro-3-methylphenol
2-Methylnaphthalene
Hexachlorocyclopentadiene
2,4,6-Trichlorophenol
2,4,5-Trichlorophenol
2-Chloronaphthalene
2-Nitroaniline
Dimethylphthalate
Acenaphthylene
2,6-Dinitrotoluene
3-Nitroaniline
Acenaphthene
2,4-Dinitrophenol
4-Nitrophenol
108-95-2
111-44-4
95-57-8
541-73-1
106-46-7
95-50-1
95-48-7
108-60-1
106-44-5
621-64-7
67-72-1
98-95-3
78-59-1
88-75-5
105-67-9
111-91-1
120-83-2
120-82-1
91-20-3
106-47-8
87-68-3
59-50-7
91-57-6
77-47-4
88-06-2
95-95-4
91-58-7
88-74-4
131-11-3
208-96-8
606-20-2
99-09-2
83-32-9
51-28-5
100-02-7
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
25
10
25
10
10
10
25
10
25
25
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
800
330
800
330
330
330
800
330
800
800
 69.    Dibenzofuran
 132-64-9
 10
330
 Sample Plan Development
   32
                      6/93

-------
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
86.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
(1)

(2)

(3)
2,4-Dinitrotoluene 121-14-2
Diethylphthalate 84-66-2
4-Chlorophenyl-phenylether 7005-72-3
Fluorene 86-73-7
4-Nitroaniline 100-01-6
4,6-Dinitro-2-methylphenol 534-52-1
N-nitrosodiphenylamine 86-30-6
4-BromophenyI-phenyl ether 101-55-3
Hexachlorobenzene 118-74-1
Pentachlorophenol 87-86-5
Phenanthrene 85-01-8
Anthracene 120-12-7
Carbazole 86-74-8
Di-n-butylphthalate 84-74-2
Fluoranthene 206-44-0
Pyrene 129-00-0
Butylbenzylphthalate 85-68-7
3,3-Dichlorobenzidine 91-94-1
Benz(a)anthracene 56-55-3
Chrysene 218-01-9
bis(2-Ethylhexyl)phthalate 117-81-7
Di-n-octylphthalate 117-84-0
Benzo(b)fluoranthene 205-99-2
Benzo(k)fluoranthene 207-08-9
Benzo(a)pyrene 50-32-8
Indeno(l,2,3-cd)pyrene 193-39-5
Dibenz(a,h)anthracene 53-70-3
Benzo(g,h,i)perylene 191-24-2
Specific quantitation limits are highly matrix dependent. The
provided for guidance and may not always be achievable.
10
10
10
10
25
25
10
10
10
25
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

330
330
330
330
800
800
330
330
330
800
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
660
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
330

quantitation limits listed herein are

Quantitation limits listed for soil/sediment are based on wet weight.
calculated by the laboratory for soil/sediment on dry weight
basis will
Medium Soil/Sediment Quantitation Limits (QL) for Semivolatile TCL

The quantitation limits
be higher.
Compounds are 60 times
       the individual Low Soil/Sediment QL.




Based on Contract Laboratory Program Statement of Work, OLMO1.6 (6/91).
6/93
33
Sample Plan Development

-------
                          TARGET COMPOUND LIST (TCL) AND
                             QUANTITATION LIMITS  (QL) (1)
Pesticides/PCBs
    CAS Number
                                                              Quantitation Limits (2)
                                                              Water  Low Soil/Sediment (3)
98.
99.
100.
101.
102.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
111.
113.
114.
115.
116.
117.
118.
119.
120.
121.
122.
123.
124.
125.
126.

alpha-BHC
beta-BHC
delta-BHC
gamma-BHC (Lindane)
Heptaclor
Aldrin
Heptachlor epoxide
Endosulfan I
Dieldrin
4,4'-DDE
Endrin
Endosulfan II
4,4'-DDD
Endosulfan sulfate
4,4'-DDT
Methoxychlor
Endrin ketone
Endrin aldehyde
alpha-Chlordane
gamma-Chlordane
Toxaphene
Aroclor-1016
Aroclor-1221
Aroclor-1232
Aroclor-1242
Aroclor-1248
Aroclor-1254
Aroclor-1260

319-84-6
319-85-7
319-86-8
58-89-9
76-44-8
309-00-2
1024-57-3
959-98-8
60-57-1
72-55-9
72-20-8
33213-65-9
72-54-8
1031-07-8
50-29-3
72-43-5
53494-70-5
7421-36-3
5103-71-9
5103-74-2
8001-35-2
12674-11-2
11104-28-2
11141-16-5
53469-21-9
12672-29-6
11097-69-1
1 1096-82-5

0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.50
0.10
0.10
0.5
0.5
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0

1.7
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.7
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
17.0
3.3
3.3
1.7
1.7
170.0
33.0
33.0
67.0
33.0
33.0
33.0
33.0

(1)    Specific quantitation limits are highly matrix dependent.  The quantitation limits listed herein are
       provided for guidance and may not always be achievable.

(2)    Quantitation limits listed for soil/sediment are based on wet weight.  The quantitation limits
       calculated by the laboratory  for soil/sediment on dry weight basis will be higher.

(3)    Medium Soil/Sediment  Quantitation Limits  (QL)  for Pesticides/PCB TCL compounds are  15
       times the individual Low Soil/Sediment QL.

Based on the Contract Laboratory Program Statement of Work, OLMO1.6 (6/91).
 Sample Plan Development
34
6/93

-------
                      INORGANIC TARGET ANALYTE LIST (TAL)
                                              Detection Limit
             Analyte                          (Mg/L - water [1])
             Aluminum                               200
             Antimony                                60
             Arsenic                                  10
             Barium                                  200
             Beryllium                                5
             Cadmium                                5
             Calcium                                 5000
             Chromium                               10
             Cobalt                                  50
             Copper                                  25
             Iron                                    100
             Lead                                    3
             Magnesium                              5000
             Manganese                              15
             Mercury                                 0.2
             Nickel                                  40
             Potassium                                5000
             Selenium                                5
             Silver                                   10
             Sodium                                  5000
             Thallium                                10
             Vanadium                                50
             Zinc                                    20
             Cyanide                                 10
(1)     Sediment detection limit 100x water 0*g/kg - soil/sediment).

Based on the Contract Laboratory Program Statement  of Work, ILMO2.1 (9/91).
6/93                                      35                   Sample Plan Development

-------
                                                  PB92 - 963356
                                                  Publication 9285.7-09A
                                                  April 1992
                             Appendix II

                                  of the

                 "Guidance for Data Useability in
                     Risk Assessment (Part A)"
                                  Final
                   Office of Emergency and Remedial Response
                      U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
                           Washington, D.C. 20460
6/93                                37                Sample Plan Development

-------
                                      APPENDIX II
      LISTING OF COMMON POLLUTANTS GENERATED BY SEVEN INDUSTRIES
      Appendix II identifies seven industries that generate waste which contains pollutants that
are known to pose human and environmental  hazards.  This appendix is intended to aid the
reader in three ways:

    o   To assist in the identification of target compounds and potential  exposure pathways.

    o   To predict associated  contaminants that potentially yield interferences.

    o   To assist  in early identification of sites that contain high levels of compounds  that
        may not  be included as target analytes for routinely available methods.

The data for these tables were obtained by searching the USEPA Toxic Release Inventory
System using the Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) codes listed below:

       Industry                                         SIC Code

       1       Battery Recycling                         3691, 3692
       2      Munitions/Explosives                      2892
       3      Pesticides Manufacturing                   2842, 2879
       4      Electroplating                             3471
       5      Wood Preservatives                        2491
       6      Leather Tanning                          3111
       7      Petroleum Refining                       2911

      The appendix consists of seven tables and depicts the pollutants associated with each of
the seven industries, the CAS number of each pollutant, and the matrices  where each pollutant
has been found.  The  list is not inclusive  of  all pollutants or  industrial sources.  The  seven
industries were selected based  on the recommendation of the Risk Assessment Subgroup of the
Data Useability Workgroup because of the frequency of occurrence of the pollutants produced
by those industries in Superfund sites.
                                             39                    Sample Plan Development

-------
            o
            V)
            3
            o
            a.


            o
            U
           1
           a:
                                                                                i
zp t
OD 3
P J o


I|S

-------
I
6
I
E


Z
S-3S232$

   agsjcaa
   r* P* o so fi r*
      •ป• f^
                IIP
                           41
                         Sample Plan Development

-------
jo!
         I
         i.

         I
o o     > s >• s  u
H to H 2 Q X U S U to <
 Sample Plan Development
                           42

-------
               B
                o
               U
                    S882SSR
— or-nt-'vooo — -* dmn^ — rit-eo —o^-cซ'ซ't-O-"fปซnซ^-"ซ9r4tf>-"v6rtซn*'fปoo<ปoซo-ปQt1ปvปelQซoปซo—ซt~Qr4t—ซ
r-n — Soi"eoo\oซปr-'Jooot-ซ9ปeso\*9>rป*i~-'Oปot~t~oซ —o>orto

                                                                           *i—.^or-r-o^ —Cvo

                              J

                              2

                              ^

                              a

                              x
                                                  UJ
                Ul
              uiz

              ZO
                          tu
        UJ

        <
P     ui|C

|  clSg

|   5Si
d  ,zซ>s
  UJCLflO/C   '^'S     ~r\4C*'
                                           1>*
                                           JH
                      u
                      o
                      K.
Ul
Q


ง

        - Q H - S - Z Zu.Mซ0.*o^o\O'iO^or—f*~f^ir""'r*r-f*f"-C"**^**|Or~	"*
6/93
                                                     43
                                                     Sample Plan Development

-------

          I
          z
Compou
                                                                       M-rU
OOOOOOOOOO^CACT>OO^OVCT>OO\
                                                                                        c! 6
Sample Plan Development
                                44

-------
I
I

Of
   ^iilisi  i>งi „;
O

O


u
                              V)
                              a


                             •*ง
 iงhi  ill!
 ™. n S  se ae  Q ง
    1S8J

WZDmSoz
            Euio^ss
            j?Z
53|jso5o2r^i2 u u
                         ^ Ju
                                                      5
                                                      s
                                                    •2
                                                    o  o

                                                    H  ป



                                                    I  6
                     45
                Sample Plan Development

-------

        o
        U
                     1
•111!
Sample Plan Development
                       46
6/93

-------
I
1
s.
I
   ti i-   rปr~
                 P -;
  i
  !,
$$iia.
        )W
         U]
         e
         s
        uqdujงS5s
        V? -4 ?" -y S S 2; j J
  Q
  U
Q <
3 3
0 3

iii
llงV
u2
-------
 30'
       o


       5
       o
       vt
       I
       3

       O

       Q.
       a:
               o

     bซs
     jZW
     oPS

     -is
     UlK"

=9ง  $si8
ซซoง  "iS"  351

i^Ji=!i^
                           I
                           B
                              m




SoK
-------
            I
            I
            I
6/93
                                         49
Sample Plan Development

-------
         I
          I
          3
          co
          3
          •o
          c
          I
          J
Sample Plan Development
50

-------
          3
          O
          o.


          O
          U
                     >    >
aessisBs
6/93
                                51
                                    Sample Plan Development

-------
         FIELD  SCREENING
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES
At the end of this lesson, participants will be able to:

•    Describe the use of aerial photography and Sanborn Fire
     Insurance maps in site screening

•    Determine the advantages and limitations of soil gas and x-
     ray fluorescence techniques

•    Describe the advantages and limitations of the following
     geophysical  techniques in locating drums and trenches:

         Magnetics
         Electromagnetics
         Ground-penetrating radar

-------
                                              NOTES
             FIELD
         SCREENING
    VISUAL RECONNAISSANCE


  • Aerial photographs

  • Sanborn Fire Insurance maps

  * Topographic and land use maps

  • Site walkover
      AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY
    Historical photography
    (1920 - present)

    Contract photography
    (current site)
6/93
Field Screening

-------
       NOTES
                                                  EPIC	

                                         Environmental Photographic
                                             Interpretation Center
                                    Western Region - EMSL/Las Vegas, Nevada
                                   Eastern Region - EPA-EPIC/Warrenton, Virginia
                                               USDA ASCS
                                   Agricultural Stabilization and Conservation Service

                                         Aerial Photography Field Office
                                             Salt Lake City, Utah
                                               (801)525-5856

                                                1945 - present
                                                black & white
                                                color infrared
                                     SANBORN FIRE INSURANCE
                                   	MAPS	

                                    • 1869 to 1950s
                                    • Communities with populations >2000
                                    • Updated periodically
                                    • Locations of industries, pipelines, storage
                                     vats, old dumps,  and wetlands
Field Screening
6/93

-------
           OTHER MAPS
  USGS, ASCS, and states
  • Topographic
  • Land use
  • Geologic
  • Hydrologic
         FIELD SCREENING
    X-ray fluorescence
    Soil gas
    Geophysics
       X-RAY FLUORESCENCE

   • Field portable instrument
   • Metals identification
   • Real-time quantitative analysis
                                                  NOTES
6/93
Field Screening

-------
      NOTES
                                             SOIL GAS
                                 • Field portable or truck-mounted
                                   instrument
                                 • Primarily volatile organics identification
                                 • Real-time semiquantitative analysis
                                          SOIL GAS USES
                                  • Delineate groundwater plumes
                                  • Locate source of soil contamination
                                  • Locate groundwater monitoring wells
                                            GEOPHYSICS
                                    Magnetics
                                    Electromagnetics (EM)
                                    Ground-penetrating radar (GPR)
Field Screening
6/93

-------
                                                     NOTES
             MAGNETICS
    Earth's magnetic field intensity measured
    Total field or vertical component
    Ferromagnetic material detected
    Passive method
        ELECTROMAGNETICS
   •  Electric field induces secondary fields
   •  Electrical conductivity of ground
     measured
   •  Conductive material detected
   •  Active method
   GROUND-PENETRATING RADAR

   • Electromagnetic energy transmitted/
     received
   • Reflections at material horizons
   • Metal or changes in geology detected
   • Active method
6/93
Field Screening

-------
     NOTES
                                 GPR PENETRATION
                             Shallow for clay
                             Deeper for dry sands
Field Screening
6/93

-------
    ENVIRONMENTAL PHOTOGRAPHIC INTERPRETATION CENTER
           Advanced Monitoring Systems Division
        Environmental Monitoring Systems Lab - Las Vegas
             Products and Services
      vvEPA
6/93
Field Screening

-------
   THE ENVIRONMENTAL PHOTOGRAPHIC INTERPRETATION CENTER (EPIC)

              Advanced Monitoring Systems Division
     Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory - Las Vegas
                      Products and Services


     EPA's Environmental Photographic Interpretation Center
(EPIC)  provides a wide range of remote sensing and aerial
photographic analyses, mainly in support of investigations under
Superfund, RCRA,  the Clean Water Act and the National Contingency
Plan.  The comprehensive aerial photographic analyses are
supported by a wide array of services including aerial photo
overflight planning, collateral data acquisition, aerial film
processing, historical aerial photo search and acquisition, and
CIS data base development.  EPIC produces fully annotated maps
and photos accompanied by descriptive text to document historical
or current analyses of hazardous waste disposal and handling,
emergency response efforts, inventories of potential hazardous
waste sites, and specialized analyses including wetlands
classification and delineation, photogeology and fracture trace
analysis and photogrammetric mapping.  EPIC maintains a
multidisciplinary staff with backgrounds in geography, geology,
biology, remote sensing, forestry and natural resources
management.

     The following sections present summary descriptions of
EPIC's products and services.

Hazardous Waste Site Analyses

     Analysis of hazardous waste sites using historical and
current aerial photography comprises a major part of EPIC's
workload.  Utilizing the vast archives of aerial photography of
the  country maintained by government and private sources, dating
back to the 1930's, EPIC's analysts can reconstruct the waste
handling and. disposal history of a site in order to support site
cleanup and regulatory or enforcement efforts.  Aerial
photography can be a powerful tool in court in the form of
evidence  and. expert witness testimony.

     Interpretation of aerial photography can yield  information
on site size, drainage patterns, type of  fill materials,
leachate,  burial  sites,  lagoons, impoundments and their contents,
and general condition of the  site. Locations and descriptions  of
tanks,  drums, open  storage  areas,  evidence  of vegetation  stress,
on-site obstacles,  structures,  equipment  and access  routes can
also be provided.   Historical  analysis  provides  the  information
necessary to  obtain a chronological  understanding of a  site's
development and  activities,  and can  lead  to the  identification
of a specific  problem.   The information interpreted  from  the


 5/pj                            9                      Field Screening

-------
photography is provided to the requester on photo enlargements,
with overlays annotated with descriptive findings.  Accompanying
text provides a full site description.

Inventories of Potential Hazardous Waste Sites

     Inventories of potential hazardous waste sites covering
large areas and decades in time are a very cost effective way to
discover sites for future investigation.  The aerial photography
is systematically searched for specific features or types of
sites specified by the requester.  These can include landfills,
open dumps, scrap salvage yards, chemical handling and storage
facilities, impoundments, or abandoned industrial sites.
Identified sites are located on overlays to topographic maps
accompanied by data sheets describing site conditions.  The site
conditions are presented chronologically with the period of site
activity shown on the map overlay.  This approach is helpful in
determining the origin of a progressive problem and in
identifying a hazardous site that is currently hidden by new
development.

Emergency Response

     EPIC has the quick response capabilities to react to
emergency situations such as hazardous material releases and
natural disasters like hurricanes  (Hugo) and earthquakes  (San
Francisco/Oakland, Ca.).  Aerial photography is flown, processed
and  analyzed to provide  immediate  information to on-site
personnel regarding circumstances not easily or safely observed
from the ground.  Typical products  for  an  emergency response
project include an  immediate telephone  report to on-site
personnel  followed by photographs  or  positive film transparencies
with interpretation results  annotated on overlays, annotated
topographic maps, and a  short  letter  report describing  analysis
results.

Wetlands

     Wetland  analyses are performed in  support  of various
sections  of  the Clean Water Act concerning enforcement,
permitting and  advance  identification.   Analysis  of  historical
aerial  photography  is  often the only  means of  establishing the
prior  existence of  wetlands on lands  that  have  been  dredged or
 filled,  and calculating wetland loss  acreages  necessary for
mitigation settlements.   Aerial photographs can also provide
 information concerning vegetative type, periodicity of flooding,
 tidal  influences,  and affected drainage patterns.

      A hierarchical wetlands and deepwater habitats
 classification system developed by Cowardin et al.  for the U.S.
 Fish and Wildlife Service is used in the analyses.
 Jurisdictional delineation procedures are followed in the field
 according to the Federal Manual for Identifying and Delineating
 Jurisdictioral Wetlands.  Field checking  is performed in



Field Screening                      10                             6/93

-------
enforcement cases to verify accuracy of interpretation and
classification by visiting representative areas.  The field
reconnaissance checks representative wetlands in proximity to,
and matching the aerial photographic signatures of, those at the
site being investigated prior to its alteration.

     Simplified studies are also performed on Superfund sites or
on studies where a wetland/upland boundary satisfies the needs of
the requestor.  These studies entail the placement of wetland
symbols or the delineation of wetland boundaries on overlays to
photographic prints.  The aerial photographic analysis is
supported by collateral information regarding the soils,
hydrology arid local vegetation.

Photoqeology

     Photogeology involves the interpretation of the geology of
an area from an analysis of landforms, drainage, tones, and
vegetation distribution on aerial photographs.  EPIC produces two
types of photogeologic products: fracture trace analyses and
lithologic mapping.

     Fracture trace analysis involves the use of aerial
photography and other types of imagery to identify linear
features on the earth's surface that are naturally occurring and
are surface manifestations of subsurface fracture zones in the
bedrock.  When viewed in cross-section, fracture traces are seen
to be vertical or near vertical breaks in the bedrock.  Fractures
are of particular environmental concern because contaminants are
likely to move more easily through zones of  fractured bedrock
than through the surrounding more consolidated bedrock material.
Thus, fracture traces can be used to  identify possible migration
routes of pollutants and are often used in the placement of
monitoring/remedial wells around hazardous waste sites.

     Lithologic mapping  (mapping of distinct rock types or units)
from aerial photographs  involves the  interpretation of  surface
features  in order to produce a more accurate geologic map  in
areas where geologic mapping is incomplete due  to  limited  field
work, small map scale, etc.

Photoqrammetric Mapping

     EPIC produces  highly accurate topographic  and planimetric
maps, generally  at  a  large  scale, which  conform with  National Map
Accuracy  Standards  and EPA  Photogrammetric Mapping
Specifications.   Map  scales, contour  intervals, and  planimetric
details can be  varied  to suit  specific requirements.

      Photogrammetric  techniques can be used  to  measure  the area
and volume  of hazardous  wastes; determine  the height  and
placement of  containment berms, dikes, and impoundments;  and
determine the depth of waste pits.   Changes  in  size,  shape,  and
 other physical  characteristics of  a  waste  site  can be documented


                                                        Field Screening

-------
through sequential photograitunetric mapping.

     Photogrammetric techniques can also be used in establishing
precise location and orientation data to support geophysical
monitoring or monitoring well placement.

Geographic Information Systems (GIB)

      In cooperation with its sister branch, the Remote and Air
Monitoring Branch (AMS), which houses one of EPA's CIS Centers of
Excellence, EPIC has completed several CIS projects.  One project
supported a National Priorities List (NPL) hazardous waste site
investigation using information from diverse sources (including
numerous years of historical aerial photography, geological data,
digital line graph data, soil data, property ownership,
monitoring well data, etc.).  This data was combined to produce
topical maps and analyses for use in the Remedial
Investigation/Feasibility Study decision-making process under
Superfund.  Another project  involved the ecological
characterization of a pilot  site using photo-derived information
on land use, vegetation, wetlands and landforms to produce maps
and overlays for landscape characterization and trend analysis.
Additionally, the CIS has been used to obtain wetland gain and  .
loss measurements for enforcement actions  against violations of
the Clean Water Act.

Miscellaneous Analyses

     Additional analyses  include  interpretation of thermal
infrared  imagery  for detection of  illegal  river discharges  and
landfill  and mine fires;  detection  of abandoned oil, gas  and
water  wells; mapping of submerged  aquatic  vegetation;  and land
use  and  drainage  mapping.


Data Acquisition

      EPIC acquires  historical photography, dating to the late
 1930's,  from a  wide range of Federal,  state and local  government
 agencies and private aerial survey companies.   Current
 overflights,  customized to the requestor's needs as to scale,
 imagery type,  time  of  year, etc,  are obtained through a network
 of private aerial companies across the country.  These aerial
 companies are also available on short notice for emergency
 response efforts.   Additional sources of information acquired
 include U.S. Geological Survey maps, Sanborn Fire Insurance Maps
 and U.S. Department of Agriculture Soil Surveys.

 Photo Lab

      The technical services of EPIC'S photographic  laboratory
 include:

       o    Complete photographic processing and printing  of
 Field Screening                      12                             6/93

-------
          black-and-white, color, color infrared, and
          black-and-white thermal infrared film;

          Custom processing and printing, to include
          reproducing old maps, line work, and historical imagery

          Responding to emergencies, such as oil spills, train
          derailments, and chemical fires
Graphics Support

     EPIC offers graphics, cartography, drafting and ancillary
support for the preparation of finished documents.  Our present
capabilities include:

     o    Preparing camera-ready artwork for publications,
          reports, briefings, and presentations

     o    Preparing inked overlays keyed to aerial photography
          and maps, and preparation of transparencies  for use as
          overlays or in briefings

     o    Assembling completed reports including layout, mounting
          of photographs and text, covers, and binding

     o    Mounting and labeling of photographs for litigation or
          public hearings
 6/93
13
Field Screening

-------
  i  '.VIRONMENTAL  PHOTOGRAPHIC  INTERPRETATION CENTER  (EPIC)

                    AERIAL SERVICES  REQUEST  FORM

                                               Request Date: 	


 I.   SITE  DATA

Site Name:	 Region:	
Program:  (circle) Superfund   RCRA      RCRA Enf.      Other	

 If Superfund:  Site/Spill ID| 	

               Purpose (circle): Remedial   Removal    Enf.  Other_
Geographic Coordinates: 	Long.	Lat.

State: 	   County: 	 Municipality:	

USGS Quad Name (IhTOKIANT: ATTACH PHOTOCOPY OF MAP SHOWING SITE BOUNDARIES
                AND/OR STUDY AREA): 	
Regional Project Manager: 	 Fhone#  FIS	 COMM.
 Brief discussion of site history, specific problems at site, what you hope to
 accomplish through this request.  Elaborate on known or suspected aspects of site
 operation (e.g. barrels believed  dumped between 1967 and 1972 adjacent to north
 lagoon) .  Please attach background  information about the site such as site
 descriptions, action memos, etc.
 II.   STANDARD REQUEST OPTIONS - Check and complete the appropriate section
 for the type of service you are requesting.

          	 1. CURRENT PHOTOGRAPHY ONLY  (new overflight)

               a. Scale: 	  (e.g., 1:24,000)
 ***Average
 tun-around     b. Special conditions (e.g.,  do not fly if snow cover,  leaves time
 = 6 wks.***         on, etc.) 	

               c. Photo size: 9"x9" 	    20"x20"	    Other	

               d. Are stereo pairs needed? 	Y    	N

               e. Number of copies:  	

               f. Desired delivery date: 	
    Field Screening                        14                                6/93

-------
                                       mO _,
***Average
turnaround
t.ijne =
6-10 wks.***
_ 2.  HISTORICAL PHOTOGRAPHY ONLY

 a. Study period (e.g.,  1936-1955) :

 b. Specific years desired: 	

 c. Ifcoto size: 9"x9" 	   20"x20"

 d. l>fumber of cxpies: 	

 e. Desired delivery date: 	
Other
***Average
turnaround
time =
8 wks.***
. 3.  ANALYSIS OF CURRENT (single coverage) PHOTOGRAPHY

 a.  Scale: 	(e.g., 1:24,000)

 b.  Special conditions (e.g., do not fly if snow cover, leaves -
      on, etc.) 	
               c, Photo  size:  9"x9"

               d, Number of copies:
                              20"x20"
Other
                e.  Desired delivery date:
 ***Average
 turnaround
 time =
 12-24 wks.
  4. ANALYSIS OF HISTORICAL PHOTOGRAPHY  (standard site analysis
      package - see attachment)

 a. Study period  (e.g., 1936-1955): 	

 b. Specific years of  interest: 	
 c. ]\re. copies of historical photos  (before analysis)  needed?
      .	Y    	N
                                   20"X20"	   Other	
                   If yes, photo size: 9"x9"_
                d. Is an interim report (unbound format, handwritten photo
                     overlays with typed body of report) needed?  	Y	N

                e. Number of copies of final bound report: 	

                f. Desired delivery date: 	


                  5. SURVEYING AND MAPPING - Complete and attach request form
   6/93
                                        15
                                                     Field Screening

-------
                                       -3-
III. SPECIAL  REQUEST OPTIONS - The following remote sensing services are also
available for  sites  with conditions that warrant  their use.   Check off  items of
interest and contact your remote sensing coordinator for more information.
            a. laj-d use analysis (within specified distance from site)

            b. Fracture trace analysis

            c. Wetland mapping/assessment

            d. Multi-spectral scanner overflights

            e. Thermal infrared scanner overflights
                                           /
            f.  Mensuration  (measurements)  of features  (e.g.,  barrel/drum count,
               terrain transects, building dimensions, lagoon dimensions, etc.)
  Field Screening                         16                                 6/93

-------
                                                 EPA/EPIC
                                                 Remote Sensing Training Course
                                  Sanoorn Maps
      The  Sanborn maps  are  fire  insurance maps  created by the Sanborn Map
 Company of  Pel ham, New York.  The  maps,  produced as early as 1867, were made
 to  provide  insurance companies  with  pertinent  information to make risk.
 assessments  on commercial  buildings,  factories,  and dwellings.   Information
 provided  on  each of these  structures  typically includes a structure's size and
 shape, locations of windows  and doors,  presence  of firewalls, sprinkler
 systems,  types of roofs, distance  to  fire hydrants and the location of water
 mains.
      The  maps  give an  accurate  delineation of  the boundaries of industrial  or
 commercial  activities,  the current state of activity (i.e.,  under construction
 in'1903'), the  number and location  of  storage tanks (and frequently their
 contents),  the type of processing  taking place in specific areas, 'and such
 features  as  the presence of  earthen  fire walls around storage tanks or
 processing  areas which  may serve as  secondary  structures to  restrict the
 spread of any  accidental spills or leaks.
6/93                                   17                          Field Screening

-------
                 COMPREHENSIVE LISTING OF AERIAL  PHOTOGRAPHY

                               libraried  at  the

                        U.S. DEPT OF AGRICULTURE,  ASCS
                        AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY FIELD OFFICE
                             2222 WEST 2300  SOUTH
                                P.O. BOX  30010
                       SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH   84130-0010

The comprehensive listing shows the various  photographic coverages used by the
U.S. Department of Agriculture archived at the Aerial Photography Field
Office.  This library includes photography used by the Agriculture
Stabilization and Conservation Service (ASCS) and it predecessor agencies, the
U.S. Forest Service (FS) and the Soil Conservation Service (SCS).

    Coverage of the Agricultural Stabilization and. Conservation Service and the
    Soil Conservation Service is listed alphabetically by states and counties.
    A Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) numerical code is
    assigned to each county flown by ASCS and SCS after July 1, 1971.

    Coverage of Forest Service photography is listed alphabetically for each
    forest within a region.  Numerical cades used to identify  FS projects are
    assigned by the Forest Service.

    NAPP - National Aerial Photography Program and
    NHAP - National High Altitude Photography - are flown in color  infrared
    positive film.  Coverage is  listed alphabetically by state and  county.
    Due to the constant state of change in the acquisition of  new coverage
    available from NAPP/NHAP, this  part of the listing  is designed  to  allow
    for timely and periodic updates.  New listings by state are available upon
    written  request.

    Photo  indexes or spot  indexes  and microfilm duplicates are available  for
    most projects.  The number of  index sheets required  to cover  a  project  is
    shown.

    Rectified enlargements are  available  from photography used for  ASCS
    programs.  This means  that  scale,  tip, and tilt  data,  computed  through  an
    analytical aerotriangulation system,  is  available  to produce true-to-scale
    enlargements  for indicated  projects.  An increasing amount of
    rectification data  is  also  available  from some  of  the  Soil Conservation
    Service  and  Forest  Service  projects.

 See reverse  side  for a  glossary of terms, however,  if you  have any questions
 please contact  the  Aerial  Photography Field  Office  at (801)  524-5856.
 Field Screening                          18                                   6/93

-------
                                   GLOSSARY OF TERMS
YEAR  - Year the original contract was let.

CONTRACT YEAR(S) - Year the original contract was let^  Not the year  the photography
                   was flown.     (1_ - Cycle 1 NHAP  i.e. 1HAP80
                                   J2. - Cycle 2 NHAP  i.e. 2HAP85
                                   1 - Cycle 3 NAPP  i.e. 3HAP87)

MAJ YR
FLOVJN - (NAPP/NHAP Listing only)  Year the majority of the county was  flown.

(P)   - Partial coverage.  For ASCS projects, partial coverage
        generally occured in counties containing large areas of non-agricultural
        land.

SCALE - Fractional scale [i.e.  (40) = 1:40,000]

INTERNEG - Black & white internegative from NAPP/NHAP photography is  on file.

FILM  - Film Type
        B/W   - Black and White Negative
        CIRP  - Color Infrared Positive
        CIRN  - Color Infrared Negative
        CN    - Color Negative

PI    - Photo index.  A rough mosaic assembly of the prints covering  each  project or
        county area.  The assembly  of prints is copied to a scale of  1" =  1 mile. The
        number listed indicates the number of index sheets needed to  cover a  county
        or project area.

SI    - Spot or Line Index.  A  detailed map with the center of  each photograph
        plotted by flight line  and  exposure number.

RECT  - Rectification data available.  Enlargements can  be photographically rectified
        to produce scale accurate  reproductions of  cropland or  cultural areas.

REMARKS -

         * ~ Scheduled  for rectification.

        BLK   - One  or  more  county  or  project areas  grouped  to  form a larger  block.

        ASCS/
        SCS   - First agency to require  rectification  accuracy.
    6/93                                  19                          Field Screening

-------
        United States
        Department of
        Agriculture
Agricultural
Stabilization and
Conservation Service
Aerial
Photography
Field Office
P.O. Box 30010
Salt Lake City,
Utah 84130
               NAPP PHOTOGRAPHY
               (1937 - Present)

 . NAPP - NATIONAL AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY
          PROGRAM.

 . COLOR INFRARED  POSITIVE PHOTOGRAPHY/
   ORIGINAL FILM HELD BY  APFO.
   (BkW products are  available.)

 . 1:40,000 SCALE.

 . CONTRACTED 3Y STATE/PARTIAL STATE.

 . LEAF-ON AND LEAF-OFF PHOTOGRAPHY
   DEPENDING ON CONTRACTING SEASON.

 . FLOWN IN N/S DIRECTION.

 . 6" FOCAL LENGTH.

 . AVERAGE ENDLAP  62%.

 . AVERAGE SIDELAP  40%.   (Ranges  from
   30% to 50% depending on latitude.)

 . ONE FJLL FRAME COVERS  APPROXIMATELY
   32 SQUARE MILES  OF TERRAIN.

 . 10 STEREOSCOPIC  PHOTOGRAPHS PER USGS
   STANDARD 71/2'  TOPOGRAPHIC MAP.
   (*Quarter-quad centered photography.)
                                 NHAP PHOTOGRAPHY
                                   (1900 -  1987)

                  . NHAP - NATIONAL HIGH ALTITUDE PROGRAM.
                  . COLOR INFRARED POSITIVE PHOTOGRAPHY/
                    ORIGINAL FILM HELD  BY APFO.
                    (B&W products are available.)

                  . 1:60,000 SCALE.

                  . CONTRACTED GEOGRAPHICALLY lฐxlฐ.

                  . CYCLE 1 (1980-1985)  - LEAF-OFF PHOTOGRAPH
                    CYCLE 2 (1985-1987)  - LEAF-ON  PHOTOGRAPHY

                  . FLOWN LN H/S DIRECTION.

                  . 81/4" FOCAL LENGTH.

                  . AVERAGE ENDLAP 65%.

                  . AVERAGE SIDELAP 12%.
                    ONE FULL FRAME COVERS APPROXIMATELY
                    72 SQUARE MILES OF  TERRAIN.

                    4 STEREOSCOPIC PHOTOGRAPHS PER USGS
                    STANDARD 71/2' TOPOGRAPHIC MAP.
                    (*Quad centered photography.)
       *2 FLIGHT LINES PER 7  1/2'  QUAD
                           AREA COVERED
                           BY ONE FRAME
                        *1 FLIGHT LINE  PER 7 1/2' QUAD
                                              AREA COVERED
                                              BY ONE FRAME
Field Screening
           20
                                                                               6/93

-------
        SAMPLE  ANALYSIS
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES


At the end of this lesson, participants will be able to:

•    Define the target compound list

•    Determine the type of analysis necessary to identify specific
     analytes

•    Define quality control and  how it affects the  sampling
     process

•    Determine appropriate sampling containers and preservatives
     based on the sample media

•    Define holding time and its importance to sample analysis

-------
                                                   NOTES
        SAMPLE ANALYSIS
         SAMPLE ANALYSIS
  • Target compound list
  • Quality control
  • Quality control samples
  • Sample containers
  Comprehensive Environmental Response,
  Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA)
             Superfund
               (CLP)

         Target compound list
6/93
Sample Analysis

-------
     NOTES
                                 TARGET COMPOUND LIST

                                Organics

                                 - Volatile compounds
                                 - Semivolatile compounds
                                 - Pesticides and RGBs

                                Inorganics

                                 - Metals
                                 - Cyanide
                              QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY
                                 CONTROL (QA/QC) GOAL
                                Identify and implement correct
                                sampling and analysis methods

                                Limit the error introduced into
                                the sampling and analysis procedures
                                      QA/QC SAMPLES
                               • Analyze in addition to field
                                samples

                               • Provide information on variability
                                and usability of data
Sample Analysis
6/93

-------
                                                   NOTES
     BACKGROUND SAMPLES
  • Collect sample upgradient of
   contaminated area (onsite or
   offsite)

  • Select area with little or no
   contaminant migration
      BACKGROUND SAMPLES
  • Determine the natural composition
    of the soil

  • Determine the constituents of water

  • Provide a basis for comparison for
    samples collected at the site
      COLLOCATED SAMPLES
   Collect adjacent to the routine
   field sample

   Collect 0.5 - 3 feet away from the
   selected field sample
6/93
Sample Analysis

-------
      NOTES
                                     COLLOCATED SAMPLES
                                 • Determine local variability of
                                   contamination at the site
                                 • Can be used to assess site variation
                                   in immediate sampling area
                                 • Cannot be used to assess variability
                                   across the site
                                   FIELD REPLICATE SAMPLES
                                 • Obtain samples from one location
                                 • Homogenize the samples
                                 • Divide homogenized sample into
                                   separate containers
                                 • Treat as separate samples in subsequent
                                   sample handling and analysis processes
                                    FIELD REPLICATE SAMPLES

                                  Assess error associated with:
                                   • Sample heterogeneity
                                   • Sample methods
                                   • Analytical procedures
Sample Analysis
6/93

-------
                                                      NOTES
          RINSATE BLANKS
         (Equipment Blanks)
    Obtain by running analyte-free
    deionized water over decontaminated
    sampling equipment
    Test for residual contamination
            TRIP BLANKS
  • Prepare prior to fieldwork
  • Use certified clean sand or soil or
    analyte-free deionized water
  • Use with volatile organic samples
           TRIP BLANKS
  Assess error associated with:
   • Sampling
   • Sample handling and shipping
   • Laboratory handling and analysis
6/93
Sample Analysis

-------
     NOTES
                                            FIELD BLANKS
                                  • Prepare in the field

                                  • Use certified clean sand or soil
                                    or analyte-free deionized water
                                            FIELD BLANKS
                                   Evaluate contamination errors
                                   associated with:

                                    • Sampling methods

                                    • Laboratory procedures
                                       MATRIX SPIKE SAMPLES

                                    Field sampling

                                     -  Collect triple the volume for organic
                                       water samples
                                     -  Collect double the volume for inorganic
                                       water samples

                                    Laboratory analysis

                                     -  Use selected or requested field samples
                                     -  Spike samples in the laboratory with known
                                       concentrations  of target analytes
Sample Analysis
6/93

-------
                                                   NOTES
     MATRIX SPIKE SAMPLES

   Verify percent recoveries
   Check sample matrix interferences
   Monitor laboratory and method
   performance
   PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
           (PE) SAMPLES
    Third party prepares sample
    Analytes in PE samples are the same
    as analytes of concern
    Analyte concentration(s) known to preparer
    Analyte concentration(s) unknown to laboratory
   PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
           (PE) SAMPLES
  • Evaluate the overall bias of the
   analytical laboratory
  • Detect error in the analytical
   method used
6/93
Sample Analysis

-------
       NOTES
                                                        QA/QC SAMPLES
                                             Sample type

                                              Background
                                              Collocated
    Quantity
At least 1'
Minimum of 8 samples'-'
Individual agency's
regulations may vary

Varies by site
                                              •Source: US EPA, 1991. Re/nova/ Program: Representative Sampling Guidance

                                              'Source: US EPA, 1990. QA/QC Control Guidance lor Removal Activities

                                              •For statistical analysis to be valid
                                                        QA/QC SAMPLES
                                               Sample type

                                             Field replicates
                                             Rinsate blanks
                                             (Equipment blanks)
      Quantity

Minimum of 8 samples1'"'"
or 1 sample per 10
samples, whichever is
greater
One per day per type
of sampling device1
                                              •Source: US EPA, 1991. Removal Program: Representative Samp/Ing Guidance
                                              'Source: US EPA, 1990. QA/QC Control Guidance for Removal Activities
                                              •For statistical analysis to be valid
                                                         QA/QC SAMPLES
                                              Sample type

                                              Trip blanks


                                              Field blanks
      Quantity

    1 per day for VOA
    samples''"

    1 per day for each
    group of samples of
    a similar matrix*
                                              •Source: US EPA, 1990. Samplers Guide to the Contract Laboratory Program

                                              'One per cooler
Sample Analysis
                        6/93

-------
           QA/QC SAMPLES
  Sample type
  Matrix spike-
    liquids
           Quantity
 Organics:   Triple volume for 1
          sample per 20 samples*
Inorganics:   Double volume for 1
          sample per 20 samples*
  Matrix spike-    Organics and  1 sample per 20
   solids         Inorganics:  samples
  •Source US EPA, 1990. Samplers Guide to the Contract Laboratory Program
        SAMPLE CONTAINERS
  • Volatiles
  • Semivolatiles
  • Pesticides and PCBs
  • Metals
  • Cyanide
            HOLDING TIME
   The maximum amount of time that samples may
   be held before analysis and still be considered
   valid
   Starts when the sample is collected in the field
                                                             NOTES
6/93
                                                    Sample Analysis

-------
                                SAMPLE ANALYSIS
To understand the Superfund program and its role in cleaning up abandoned waste sites, some of the
major environmental laws and regulations affecting these cleanups must be understood. These pieces
of legislation introduce several compound  lists that dictate a variety of sampling and analytical
requirements, such as levels of analysis, media to be sampled, and type of sample container.  It is
important to recognize what compound list is associated with each of the laws or regulations  to
properly collect samples  at a cleanup site.
Priority Pollutant List

The federal Water Pollution Control Act of 1972 was designed to keep intact the integrity of the
nation's surface waters, either by maintaining their physical, chemical, and biological parameters or
by restoring them and providing proper maintenance.  In 1977, the act was amended by and became
known as  the  Clean Water Act (CWA).  The CWA is regulated by 40 CFR  (Code of Federal
Regulations) Part 122.  This part of the CFR is the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System
(NPDES).  NPDES states that a permit must be obtained prior to discharge of any "pollutants" from
any "point source" into "waters of the United States" (40 CFR Part 122.Ib).  Before an NPDES
permit will be  issued,  several analyses of the wastestream are required.  These analyses are listed
in the Priority Pollutant List.  This list, which was derived  from an initial list of 65 compounds,
includes those constituents that were believed to be the most toxic and the most frequently discharged
to wastestreams by industries.
Appendix IX of 40 CFR Part 264

Another  important  piece  of legislation  that affects  sampling requirements  is  the Resource
Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976 (RCRA).  The intent of RCRA is to minimize hazardous
waste (as defined in 40 CFR Part 261.3) to protect the public and the environment. There are many
amendments associated with RCRA, but the regulations found in 40 CFR Parts 264 and 270 are most
relevant to  sampling.   Appendix IX of  40  CFR Part 264  (also  known  as the  Groundwater
Monitoring List) contains 230 constituents  that must be  monitored  as part of a groundwater
compliance program before a RCRA permit will be issued (40 CFR Part 270—Hazardous Waste
Permit Programs).
Target Compound List

A third relevant piece of legislation is the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation
and Liability Act of  1980 (CERCLA), which has been most recently amended by the Superfund
Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986 (SARA).  These acts cover the cleanup of abandoned
hazardous waste sites for  which  the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's Contract Laboratory
Program (CLP) offers analytical services of known quality to provide legally defensible results for
use in enforcement actions.  CLP  laboratories  follow the Target Compound  List (TCL), which
contains 147 constituents,  when performing analyses for cleanups at hazardous waste sites. The TCL
is provided on the following pages. Following the TCL is Table 1, which presents a comparison
of the constituents found on the TCL with those found on the Priority Pollutant List.

6/93                                       11                             Sample Analysis

-------
             TARGET COMPOUND LIST
Volatile Compounds
Acetone
Benzene
Bromodichloromethane
Bromoform
Bromomethane
2-Butanone
Carbon disulfide
Carbon Tetrachloride
Chlorobenzene
Chloroethane
Chloroform
Chloromethane
Dibromochloromethane
1,1-Dichloroethane
1,2-Dichloroethene(Total)
1,1-Dichloroethene
1,2-Dichloroethane
    1,2-Dichloropropane
    cis-1,3-Dichloropropene
    trans-1,3-Dichloropropene
    Ethylbenzene
    2-Hexanone
    Methylene Chloride
    4-Methyl-2-pentanone
    Styrene
    1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane
    Tetrachloroethene
    Toluene
    1,1,1-Trichloroethane
    1,1,2-Trichloroethane
    Trichloroethene
    Vinyl acetate
    Vinyl chloride
    Xylene (Total)
BTEX
Benzene
Toluene
Ethylbenzene
Xylene  (Total)
Sample Analysis
12
                                     6/93

-------
 TARGET COMPOUND  LIST  CONTINUED
Semi-Volatile Compounds
Base/Neutral Extractables
Bis(2-chloroethyl)ether
1,3-Dichlorobenzene
1,4-Dichlorobenzene
1,2-Dichlorobenzene
Bis(2-chloroisopropyl)ether
N-Nitroso-di-n-propylamine
Hexachloroethane
Nitrobenzene
Isophorone
Bis(2-chloroethoxy)methane
1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene
Naphthalene
Hexachlorobutadiene
2-Chloronaphthalene
Dimethylphthalate
Acenaphthylene
2,6-Dinitrotoluene
Acenaphthene
2,4-Dinitrotoluene
Diethylphthalate
4-Chlorophenyl-phenylether
Fluorene
4-Bromophenyl-phenylether
Hexachlorobenzene
Phenanthrene
    Anthracene
    Di-n-butylphthalate
    Fluoranthene
    Pyrene
    3-3'-Dichlorobenzidine
    Benzo(a)anthracene
    Chrysene
    Bis(2-Ethylhexyl)phthalate
    Di-n-octylphthalate
    Benzo(b)fluoranthene
    Benzo(k)fluoranthene
    Benzo(a)pyrene
    Indeno(l ,2,3-cd)pyrene
    Dibenz(a,h)anthracene
    Benzo(g ,h, i)pery lene
    Hexachlorocyclopentadiene
    N-Nitrosodiphenylamine
    Butylbenzylphthalate
    4-Chloroaniline
    2-Methylnaphthalene
    2-Nitroaniline
    3-Nitroaniline
    Dibenzofuran
    4-Nitroaniline
Acid Extractables
Phenol
2-Chlorophenol
2-Nitrophenol
2,4-Dimethylphenol
2,4-Dichlorophenol
4-Chloro-3-methylphenol
2,4,6-Trichlorophenol
2,4-Dinitrophenol
4-Nitrophenol
4,6-D initro-2-methy Iphenol
Pentachlorophenol
    Benzyl alcohol
    2-Methylphenol
    4-Methylphenol
    Benzoic Acid
    2,4,5-Trichlorophenol
6/93
13
Sample Analysis

-------
 TARGET  COMPOUND  LIST CONTINUED
Pesticides and PCBs
Aldrin
alpha-BHC
beta-BHC
gamma-BHC (Lindane)
delta-BHC
alpha-Chlordane
gamma-Chlordane
4,4-DDT
4,4-DDE
4,4-DDD
Dieldrin
Endosulfan
Endosulfan II
Endosulfan sulfate
   Endrin
   Endrin ketone
   Heptachlor
   Heptachlor epoxide
   Methoxychlor
   PCB-1016
   PCB-1221
   PCB-1232
   PCB-1242
   PCB-1248
   PCB-1254
   PCB-1260
   Toxaphene
Inorganic Target Analyte List (TAL)
Metals

Aluminum
Antimony
Arsenic
Barium
Beryllium
Cadmium
Calcium
Chromium
Cobolt
Copper
Iron
Lead
    Magnesium
    Manganese
    Mercury
    Nickel
    Potassium
    Selenium
    Silver
    Sodium
    Thallium
    Vanadium
    Zinc
    Cyanide
Reference: "USEPA Contract Laboratory Program Statement of Work for Organic and
           Inorganic Analysis" (refer to the most current publication).
Sample Analysis
14
6/93

-------
TABLE 1: Priority Pollutant and Superfund
Comparison Lists
Chemical Name
Priority Pollutant
Target Compound
List
ORGANICS:
Acenaphthene
Acenaphthylene
Acetone
Acrolein
Acrylonitrile
Aldrin
Anthracene
Aroclor 1016
Aroclor 1221
Aroclor 1232
Aroclor 1242
Aroclor 1248
Aroclor 1254
Aroclor 1260
Benzene
Benzidine
Benz(a)anthracene
Benzo(b)fluoranthene
Benzo (k) fluor anthene
Benzole acid
Benzo(ghi)perylene
Benzo(a)pyrene
Benzyl alcohol
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X
X


X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
6/93
15
Sample Analysis

-------
TABLE 1: Comparison Lists (Cont'd)
Chemical Name
alpha-BHC
beta-BHC
delta-BHC
gamma-BHC
Bis(2-chloroethoxy)methane
Bis(2-chloroethyl)ether
Bis(2-chloroisopropyl)ether
Bis(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate
Bromodichloromethane
Bromomethane
4-Bromophenyl-phenylether
Butylbenzylphthalate
Carbon disulfide
Carbon tetrachloride
*Chlordane
4-Chloroaniline
Chlorobenzene
p-Chloro-m-cresol
Chlorodibromomethane
Chloroethane
2-Chloroethyl-vinylether
Chloroform
Chloro methane
2-Chloronaphthalene
Priority Pollutant
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Target Compound
List
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
Sample Analysis
16
6/93

-------
TABLE 1: Comparison Lists (Cont'd)
Chemical Name
2-Chlorophenol
4-Chlorophenyl-phenylether
Chrysene
2-Methylphenol
4-Methylphenol
4,4'-DDD
4,4'-DDE
4,4'-DDT
Dibenzo(a,h)anthracene
Dibenzofuran
Di-n-butylphthalate
1 ,3-Dichlorobenzene
1 ,2-Dichlorobenzene
1 ,4-Dichlorobenzene
3,3'-Dichlorobenzidine
1,1-Dichloroethane
1 ,2-Dichloroethane
1,1-Dichloroethene
1 ,2-Dichloroethene(Total)
Dichloromethane
2 ,4-DichlorophenoI
1 ,2-Dichloropropane
cis-l,3-Dichloropropene
trans-1 ,3-Dichloropropene
Priority Pollutant
X
X
X


X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

Target Compound
List
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
6/93
17
Sample Analysis

-------
TABLE 1: Comparison Lists (Cont'd)
Chemical Name
Dieldrin
Diethylphthalate
2,4-Dimethylphenol
Dimethlyphthalate
4,6-Dinitro-o-cresol
2,4-Dinitrophenol
2,4-Dinitrotoluene
2,6-Dinitrotoluene
Di-n-octylphthalate
1 ,2-Diphenylhydrazine
Di-n-propylnitrosamine
Endosulfan sulfate
Endosulfan I (alpha)
Endosulfan II (beta)
Endrin
Endrin aldehyde
Endrin ketone
Ethyl benzene
Fluoranthene
Fluorene
Heptachlor
Heptachlor epoxide
Hexachlorobenzene
Hexachlorobutadiene
Priority Pollutant
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Target Compound
List
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Sample Analysis
18
6/93

-------
TABLE 1: Comparison Lists (Cont'd)
Chemical Name
Hexachlorocyclopentadiene
Hexachloroethane
2-Hexanone
Indeno(l ,2,3-cd)pyrene
Isophorone
Methoxychlor
2-Butanone (MEK)
2-Methylnaphthalene
4-Methyl-2-pentanone
Naphthalene
3-Nitroaniline
2-Nitroaniline
4-Nitroaniline
Nitrobenzene
2-Nitrophenol
4-Nitrophenol
N-nitrosodimethylamine
N-nitrosodiphenylamine
Pentachlorophenol
Phenanthrene
Phenol
Pyrene
Styrene
2,3,7,8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin
Priority Pollutant
X
X

X
X




X



X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
Target Compound
List
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

6/93
19
Sample Analysis

-------
TABLE 1: Comparison Lists (Cont'd)
Chemical Name
1 , 1 ,2,2,-Tetrachloroethane
Tetrachloroethene
Toluene
Toxaphene
Bromoform
1 ,2,4-Trichlorobenzene
1 , 1 , 1-Trichloroethane
1 , 1 ,2-Trichloroethane
Trichloroethene
2,4,5-Trichlorophenol
2,4,6-Trichlorophenol
Vinyl acetate
Vinyl chloride
Xylenes (Total)
Priority Pollutant
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X

X

Target Compound
List
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
METALS:
Aluminum
Antimony
Arsenic
Barium
Beryllium
Cadmium
Calcium
Chromium
Cobalt

X
X

X
X

X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Sample Analysis
20
6/93

-------
                     TABLE  1:  Comparison Lists (Cont'd)
            Chemical Name
  Copper
  Iron
  Lead
  Magnesium
  Manganese
  Mercury
  Nickel
  Potassium
  Selenium
  Silver
  Sodium
  Thallium
  Vanadium
  Zinc
  Cyanide
   Priority Pollutant
           X
           X
           X
           X
           X
           X
           X
           X
 •Priority Pollutant List  = Technical chlordane
   Target Compound List = alpha and gamma chlordane
Target Compound
       List
        X
                                  X
        X
                                  X
                                 X
                                  X
        X
                                  X
        X
        X
                                 X
        X
                                 X
        X
 Source:     Priority Pollutant List  =
             Target Compound List =
40 CFR Part 122, App. D
"US EPA Contract Laboratory Program Statement of
Work for Organic and Inorganic Analysis"  (refer to
the most current publication).
6/93
  21
      Sample Analysis

-------
                    SAMPLE COLLECTION  REQUIREMENTS
Sample collection methods are dictated by the analysis required for each sample.  Therefore, it is
important to consider the analytical test or tests that a. sample will undergo before actual sample
collection begins.  To maintain the  integrity of the  sample, the  sample type, type of container,
preservation method, and holding time must be considered before sampling begins.

Table 2 can be used as a guide for sample collection for compounds and/or analytes found on the
TCL. For  example, to collect a liquid sample for a metals  analysis, a 1-L polyethylene container
with a polyethylene-lined cap is the  recommended container.   Nitric  acid should be added to the
sample until it has reached a pH < 2.  The preservative helps to keep the analytes that may be in the
sample in solution.  As shown in Table 2, the holding time for the metals sample is 6 months. The
holding time is a specific time frame that is set from the time of sample collection to the time of
completion  of the laboratory analysis.  If the holding time is exceeded, the sample  analysis is not
valid. If a particular sample  will be  analyzed for more than  one test, it must be collected in the
appropriate  container, preserved properly, and analyzed within its holding time to be  considered
complete.

Table 3 lists the sample types, types of containers, preservatives, and holding times for a variety of
tests other than those recommended on the TCL.
 Sample Analysis                             22                                        6/93

-------
TABLE 2: REQUIRED CONTAINERS, PRESERVATION TECHNIQUES
AND HOLDING TIMES
NAME
ORGANIC TESTS:
Purgeable halocarbons
Purgeable aromatic hydrocarbons
Acrolein and acrylonitrile
Phenols
Benzidines
Phthalate esters
Nitrosamines
PCB's, acrylonitrile
Nitroaromatics and isophorone
Polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons
Haloethers
Chlorinated hydrocarbons
TCDD
Total organic halogens
PESTICIDES TESTS:
Pesticides
RADIOLOGICAL TESTS:
Alpha, beta and radium
CONTAINER*

G, Teflon-lined septum
G, Teflon-lined septum
G, Teflon-lined septum
G, Teflon-lined cap
G, Teflon-lined cap
G, Teflon-lined cap
G, Teflon-lined cap
G, Teflon-lined cap
G, Teflon-lined cap
G, Teflon-lined cap
G, Teflon-lined cap
G, Teflon-lined cap
G, Teflon-lined cap
G, Teflon-lined cap

G, Teflon-lined cap

P, G
PRESERVATION

Cool, 4ฐC, 0.008% sodium
thiosulfate
Cool, 4ฐC, 0.008% sodium
thiosulfate, HC1 to pH2
Cool, 4ฐ C, 0.008%
sodium thiosulfate, adjust
pH to 4-5
Cool, 4ฐC, 0.008% sodium
thiosulfate
Cool, 4ฐC, 0.008% sodium
thiosulfate
Cool, 4ฐC
Cool, 4ฐC, store in dark,
0.008% sodium thiosulfate
Cool, 4ฐC
Cool, 4ฐC, 0.008% sodium
thiosulfate, store in dark
Cool, 4ฐC, 0.008% sodium
thiosulfate, store in dark
Cool, 4ฐC, 0.008% sodium
thiosulfate
Cool, 4ฐC
Cool, 4ฐC, 0.008% sodium
thiosulfate
Cool, 4ฐC, sulfuric acid to
pH <2

Cool, 4ฐC, pH 5-9

Nitric acid to pH <2
HOLDING TIME

14 days
14 days
14 days
7 days until extraction
40 days after extraction
7 days until extraction
40 days after extraction
7 days until extraction
40 days after extraction
7 days until extraction
40 days after extraction
7days until extraction
40 days after extraction
7 days until extraction
40 days after extraction
7 days until extraction
40 days after extraction
7 days until extraction
40 days after extraction
7 days until extraction
40 days after extraction
7 days until extraction
40 days after extraction
7 days

7 days until extraction
40 days after extraction

6 months
6/93
23
Sample Analysis

-------
TABLE 2: REQUIRED CONTAINERS, PRESERVATION TECHNIQUES
AND HOLDING TIMES (Cont'd)
NAME
BACTERIAL TESTS:
Coliform, fecal and total
Fecal streptococci
INORGANIC TESTS:
Chloride
Cyanide, total and amenable to
chlorination
Hydrogen ion (pH)
Acidity and alkalinity
Ammonia
Biochemical oxygen demand
Bromide
Biochemical oxygen demand,
carbonaceous
Chemical oxygen demand
Chlorine, total residual
Color
Fluoride
Hardness
Kjeldahl and organic nitrogen
METALS:
Oxygen, dissolved probe
Chromium VI
Mercury
Metals, except chromium VI and
mercury
Nitrate
Sulfate
Sulfide
Nitrate-nitrite
CONTAINER*

P, G

P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G
P
P, G
P, G

G bottle and top
P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G
PRESERVATION

Cool, 4ฐC, 0.008% sodium
thiosulfate

None required
Cool, 4ฐC, sodium hydroxide to
pH > 12, 0.6g ascorbic acid
None required
Cool, 4ฐC
Cool, 4ฐC, sulfuric acid to
pH <2
Cool, 4ฐC
^None required
Cool, 4ฐC
Cool, 4ฐC. sulfuric acid to
pH <2
None required
Cool, 4ฐC
None required
Nitric acid to pH <2, sulfuric
acid to pH <2
Cool, 4ฐC, sulfuric acid to
pH < 2

None required
Cool, 4ฐC
Nitric acid to pH < 2
Nitric acid to pH <2
Cool, 4ฐC
Cool, 4ฐC
Cool, 4ฐC, add zinc acetate plus
sodium hydroxide to pH >9
Cool, 4ฐC, sulfuric acid to
pH <2
HOLDING TIME fj

6 hours

28 days
14 days
Analyze immediately
14 days
28 days
48 hours
28 days
48 hours
28 days
I
Analyze immediately B
48 hours ||
28 days
6 months
28 days

Analyze immediately I
24 hours ||
28 days
6 months
48 hours
28 days
7 days
28 days f
Sample Analysis
24
6/93

-------
TABLE 2: REQUIRED CONTAINERS, PRESERVATION TECHNIQUES TIMES
AND HOLDING TIMES (Cont'd)
NAME
METALS(cont'd):
Nitrate
Oil and grease
Organic carbon
Orthophosphate
Winkler
Phenols
Phosphorus (elemental)
Phosphorus, total
Residue, total
Residue, Filterable
Residue, Nonfilterable (TSS)
Residue, Settleable
Residue, Volatile
Silica
Specific conductance
Sulfite
Surfactants
Temperature
Turbidity
*G-Glass or P-Polyethylene
CONTAINER*

P, G
G
P, G
P, G
do
G only
G
P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G
P
P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G
P, G

PRESERVATION

Cool, 4ฐC
Cool, 4ฐC, sulfuric acid to
pH <2
Cool, 4ฐC, HC1 or sulfuric acid
to pH <2
Filter immediately, cool, 4ฐC
Fix on site and store in dark
Cool, 4ฐC, sulfuric acid to
pH <2
Cool, 4ฐC
Cool, 4ฐC, sulfuric acid to
pH <2
Cool, 4ฐC
Cool, 4ฐC
Cool, 4ฐC
Cool, 4ฐC
Cool, 4ฐC
Cool, 4ฐC
Cool, 4ฐC
None required
Cool, 4ฐC
None required
Cool, 4ฐC

HOLDING TIME

48 hours
28 days
28 days
48 hours
8 hours
28 days
48 hours
28 days
7 days
7 days
7 days
48 hours
7 days
28 days
28 days
Analyze immediately
48 hours
Analyze immediately
48 hours

  Reference: US EPA, November 1986, SW-846, Third Edition, Volume 1A
6/93
25
Sample Analysis

-------
ADDITIONAL SOURCES OF INFORMATION
NUS. 1987. Analytical Laboratory Guidebook for Environmental Professionals. NUS Corporation,
Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.

CFR.  1991.   Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40, Parts  190  to  299, Protection of the
Environment.  July 1991.

CFR.  1991.   Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40, Parts  300  to  399, Protection of the
Environment.  July 1991.

U.S. EPA.   1987.   Data Quality Objectives  for Remedial Response Activities:   Development
Process. EPA/540/G-87/003.  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC.  March
1987.

U.S. EPA. 1990. Samplers Guide to the Contract Laboratory Program. EPA/540/P-90/006.  U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC.  December 1990.
                                           /
U.S. EPA.  1986.  Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste (SW-846).  Third Edition, Volumes
1A and IB. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC. November 1986.

U.S. EPA. Statement of Work for Organic and Inorganic Analysis. U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, Washington, DC. (Refer to the most  current edition.)

U.S. EPA.  1988.  User's Guide to the Contract Laboratory Program.  EPA/540/8-89/012.  U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
Sample Analysis                           26

-------
CONTAINERIZED MATERIAL
              SAMPLING
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES


At the end of this lesson, participants will be able to:

•   Describe the characteristics of samples from containers

•   List the different types of containers likely to be encountered

•   Describe the various techniques for accessing containers

•   Describe appropriate techniques and devices for sampling
    containerized materials

-------
       CONTAINERIZED
    MATERIAL SAMPLING
       OSHA REGULATIONS
    29 CFR Part 1910.120 (j) and Part 1926

    General requirements and standards
    for storing, containing, and handling
    chemicals and containers
        CHARACTERISTICS
    High concentrations and hazards
    Large quantities
    Multiphase layers/sludge
    Containers under pressure
                                              NOTES
6/93
Containerized Material Sampling

-------
      NOTES
                                 CONTAINER TYPES
                                         TRUCKS
                               Pressurized or nonpressurized
                               Multicompartmented
                               Placards/symbols for identification
                                          TANKS
                              • Horizontal or vertical
                              • Underground vs. aboveground
                              • Safety
                               - Structural integrity
                               - Slip, trip, and fall
Containerized Material Sampling
6/93

-------
             DRUMS
  • Labels
  • Drum construction
  • Exotic materials
   - Aluminum
   - Nickel
   - Stainless steel
   POLY DRUMS AND CARBOYS
  • Contents - strong acids or bases
  • Hazards
  • Configuration of drumhead
  * Signs of deterioration (e.g., leaks)
         ACCESSING
        CONTAINERS
                                             NOTES
6/93
Containerized Material Sampling

-------
     NOTES
                            GAINING ACCESS PRIOR TO
                              SAMPLING CONTAINERS
                            Special equipment may be needed
                            - Cherry picker
                            - Safety lines
                            - Bolt cutters
                            - Air monitoring devices
                          ACCESS MAY NOT BE THROUGH
                                NORMAL OPENINGS
                            Existing holes in containers
                            Plasma arc
                          PREPARATION NEEDED BEFORE
                                     SAMPLING
                           • Number containers
                           • Obtain information from labels
                           • Secure containers on flat surface before
                            attempting to gain access
Containerized Material Sampling
6/93

-------
                                            NOTES
  OPENING CONTAINERS
    MANUAL DRUM OPENING
 • Bung wrench
 • Drum deheader
 • Manual spiking
 • Bolt cutters
        DRUM SAMPLING
 Under OSHA 1910.120, manual drum
 opening cannot be used if contents are:
 • Unknown
 • Flammable
 • Reactive or explosive
 • Shock sensitive
6/93
Containerized Material Sampling

-------
      NOTES
                                        BUNG WRENCH
                                 Nonsparking alloy
                                 -  Bronze
                                 -  Beryllium
                                 -  Aluminum
                                 Safety techniques
                                       DRUM DEHEADER
                                 Not intrinsically safe
                                 Forged steel with an alloy steel blade
                                 Scissor-like cutting action
                                 Closed head drums only
                                 Industrial settings
                                       MANUAL SPIKING
                                • Hand pick, pickax, and hand spike
                                • Nonsparking material
                                • Sharpened point that can penetrate
                                 drum lid
Containerized Material Sampling
6/93

-------
                                                  NOTES
              SAFETY
    A remote opening device should be used
    on drums that are bulging or swelling
    DO NOT use a manual method!
     REMOTE DRUM OPENING
  •  Pneumatic bung remover
  •  Pneumatic drill
  •  Hydraulic drum piercer
  •  Backhoe spike
  •  Robot units
         PNEUMATIC BUNG
          REMOVER/DRILL
  •  Adequate distance
  •  Nonsparking equipment
  •  Do not use on sample containers
    or lab packs
  •  Decontaminate after each use
  •  Different types of fittings
6/93
Containerized Material Sampling

-------
      NOTES
                               HYDRAULIC DRUM PIERCER
                               Nonsparking tip

                               Side or top mount

                               Consider secondary containment with
                               side mount
                                        BACKHOE
                                  (with spike attachment)
                               Advantages

                               - Distance
                               - Minimal personnel contact

                               Disadvantages

                               - Cross contamination
                               - Access
                               - Toxic vapor cloud
                               GAINING ACCESS PRIOR TO
                                    SAMPLING DRUMS
                               Use caution when working below grade
                               or high above ground

                               Use drum grapplers to stage drums in
                               rows for easy access
Containerized Material Sampling
6/93

-------
                                                  NOTES
    GUIDELINES FOR STAGING
  	AREAS	
  • Allow 2 feet between rows
  • Place two drums per row
  • Establish separate areas for
    drum opening and sampling
  • Stage by compatibility groups
             BULKING
    Containers with small quantities
    of compatible materials are mixed
    together before sampling
    HAZARD CATEGORIZATION
             (HAZCAT)
  •  Screening tool
  •  Cost-effective
  •  User friendly
  •  Can be used to identify hazard class
    for shipping
6/93
Containerized Material Sampling

-------
      NOTES
                                  PRIOR TO SAMPLING
                               Inventory
                               Stage
                               Check container integrity (use secondary
                               containment if necessary)
                               Open using proper techniques
                               SAMPLE COLLECTION
                                     DRUM SAMPLING
                               Look for signs that drum is under
                               pressure or is shock sensitive
                               Monitor headspace gases
                               - Combustible gas indicators (CGIs)
                               - Radiation detection instruments
                               - Organic vapor analyzers (OVAs)
Containerized Material Sampling
10
                             6/93

-------
     DRUM SAMPLING
        EQUIPMENT
     GLASS THIEF SAMPLER
 • 6 mm to 16 mm in diameter

 • 48 inches long

 • Do not break and leave in drum
          COLIWASA
  (Composite Liquid WAste SAmpler)
 • 4 cm in diameter

 • 152 cm long
   Insert tube with neoprene stopper,
   Teflonฎ flange, or glass ball at
   end-sealing mechanism
                                            NOTES
6/93
                            11
Containerized Material Sampling

-------
      NOTES
                                         PUSH TUBES
                               • Use for sludge-like materials

                               • Remove plug easily with stainless steel
                                spoon
                                          SUMMARY
                               •  Use proper drum opening techniques
                                 and equipment

                               •  Use proper levels of protection

                               •  Use caution
                                       TANK SAMPLING
                                 Conduct air monitoring of headspace
                                 with CGI

                                 -  If LEL >25%, discontinue sampling

                                 Can use a bailer, glass thief, sludge
                                 judge, bacon bomb, COLIWASA, or
                                 subsurface grab sampler
Containerized Material Sampling
12
                               6/93

-------
                                             NOTES
      TANK SAMPLING
         EQUIPMENT
         SLUDGE JUDGE
  • 3/4-inch plastic pipe in 5-foot sections
   marked in 1-foot increments
  • Check valve on bottom
          BACON BOMB
    Cylindrical body made of brass,
    bronze, and stainless steel with
    an internal tapered plunger that
    acts as a valve to admit the sample
6/93
13
Containerized Material Sampling

-------
      NOTES
                                        PROBLEMS
                                           SAFETY
                                Slip, trip, and fall
                                Buddy system
                                Safety lines
                                Shoring of excavation areas
                                           SAFETY
                               • Stacked containers
                               • Overhead hazards
                               • Product-escaping containers
                               • Chip, wipe, and sweep sampling
                                procedures may be used in these
                                situations
Containerized Material Sampling
14
                              6/93

-------
             LAB PACKS
   Do not sample individual containers

   Use remote crushing technique
            REMINDERS
   After sampling is complete, seal or close
   container to preserve integrity of the
   contents

   Follow proper sampling procedures and
   techniques to ensure quality results
                                                      NOTES
6/93
15
Containerized Material Sampling

-------
                    HAZARD CATEGORIZATION (HAZCAT)
Stockpiled drums at a hazardous waste site pose problems in cleanup and disposal.   Laboratory
analysis of each individual drum can be costly and time consuming.  Combining wastes from drums,
tanks, ponds, and lab packs is more economical and efficient.  However, wastes must first be
sampled and tested for compatibility.  Compatibility testing is a set of simple chemical tests such as
pH, solubility, and flammability.  Test results from  field categorization can also be used to help
satisfy  RCRA hazardous waste characteristic definitions and will provide some data for  use in
defining DOT hazard classes for shipping.  Hazard field categorization is not as extensive as
laboratory analysis and not as costly; it is used only as a screening mechanism. There are limitations
to each one of the different screening tests.  Field HAZCAT procedures should not be substituted
for  standard laboratory analysis (see the Compatibility Testing flow diagrams of the HAZCAT
procedures  on the following pages).  When using the  diagrams, follow the  steps sequentially.
EPA-ERT has standard operating  procedures for using the HAZCAT  procedures during  field
investigations.
6/93                                       17             Containerized Material Sampling

-------
      Flow Diagram  1:  CMA  COMPATIBILITY TESTING  PROTOCOL
                                          Test for Radioactivity
                  Isolate Gas Cylinders
            Isolate Suspected Explosives
                          Liquids
                        Open Drum
                    Test for Radioactivity
                       Confirm Liquid
                      Test for Peroxides
                        and Oxidizers
                              No
                       Test for Water
                         Reactivity
                              No
                       Test for Water
                         Solubility
                             ,,Yes
                       Test for Water
                          Content
                        See
                    Water Soluble
                       Liquids
                                                                     Yes
                                    Isolate
   Determine Contents
     of Containers
 Isolate Oddball Drums
• Isolate Lab Packs
                               Solids
                            Open Drum
                                         Yes
                                                Isolate
                  Yes
                         Test for Radioactivity
                                         To Solids   To Liquids
                                         No
        Regroup
                                         Yes
        Isolate
        Isolate
                   No
                  Yes
   Confirm Solid
                                                                          Yes
Remove Free Liquid
Test for EP Toxiaty
    and PCBs
                                        NoPCB
                                         No
                        Bulk for  \ / Bulk for
                        Disposal I V Disposal
     See
Water Insoluble
   Liquids
Source: Drum Handling Practices at Hazardous Waste Sites. (EPA/600/2-86/013).
Containerized Material Sampling
       18
                           6/93

-------
      Flow Diagram  2:  CMA COMPATIBILITY TESTING PROTOCOL
                        Water Insoluble  Liquids  Testing
                                      Test for
                                   Organic Halogen
                                                          Test for PCB
                                                          on Composite
Test for PCB
on Composite
          Low
         Halogen
         No PCB
        Composite
                                                    Halogen
                                                    No PCB
                                                   Composite
                                                          High
                                                        Halogen
                                                        Low PCB
                                                        Composite
                   Mixed
                  Halogen
                 Middle PCB
                 Composite
  Mixed
 Halogen
High PCB
Composite
  Low
 Halogen
 No PCB
Composite
Source:  Drum Handling Practices at Hazardous Waste Sites. (EPA/600/2-86/013).
6/93
                                         19
                                         Containerized Material Sampling

-------
     Flow  Diagram 3:  CMA COMPATIBILITY TESTING PROTOCOL
                              Water Soluble  Scan
      No
    Isolate
            Strong
            Acids
Weak
Acids
            pH<2
pH2-7
                                        PH
<7  >7
                                   Isolate
                                                Yes
                    Neutralize (optional)
Weak
Bases
Strong
Bases
                  PH7-12    pH>12
                                    Cyanide. Sulfide
                                                           No
                      	Neutrahzejogtional)
                                                No
                                     Compatibility
                                                    No
                                           Yes
                                                    Isolate
                                                    No
                                                    Isolate
Source:  Drum Handling Practices at Hazardous Waste Sites. (EPA/600/2-86/013).
Containerized Material Sampling
                   20
                                           6/93

-------
           SOIL SAMPLING
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES







At the end of this lesson, participants will be able to:




•    Describe the objectives of a soil sampling event




*    Describe the basic methods of soil sampling




*    List examples of various soil sampling equipment




•    Describe the use of the lysimeter




•    List several methods of data presentation

-------
                                                 NOTES
          SOIL SAMPLING
     WHY SAMPLE THE SOIL?

  • Chemical characterization
  • Migration pathways
  • Soil/geologic characteristics
 CHEMICAL CHARACTERIZATION

  • Contaminant identification
  • Spatial distribution
  • Levels of contamination
6/93
Soil Sampling

-------
      NOTES
                           i
                                MIGRATION PATHWAYS AND
                                 TRANSPORT MECHANISMS
                               • Man-made pathways
                               • Surface drainage
                               • Vadose zone transport
                               • Wind dispersion
                               • Human and animal activity

                                      SOIL/GEOLOGIC
                                     CHARACTERISTICS
                               • Soil classification
                               • Organic content
                               • Adsorptive characteristics
                               • Transport characteristics
                           €
                              RELATIONSHIP OF VADOSE AND
                                    SATURATED ZONES
                               Vadose zone
                               (unsaturated)
                              Saturated zone
 Soil moisture
Partial saturation
 Capillary fringe
 Groundwater
                                                     4- Water table
Soil Sampling
                      6/93

-------
                                             NOTES
       SURFACE SAMPLING
  • Depth

  • Tools
     SUBSURFACE SAMPLING

  • Power auger
  • Hollow-stem auger
  • Rotosonic drill
       SAMPLING DEVICES
  • Split spoon
  • Shelby tube
  • Core barrel
6/93
Soil Sampling

-------
      NOTES
                                  ALTERNATIVE SAMPLING
                                       TECHNIQUES
                                Backhoe/trenching
                                Geoprobeฎ
                                Cone penetrometer
                                        LYSIMETER
                               A device for sampling interstitial
                               moisture in the unsaturated zone
                                   DATA PRESENTATION
                                Geologic graphics
                                Data posting
                                Contour plotting
Soil Sampling
4
                             0793

-------
Sampling

-------
    SURFACE WATER  AND
     SEDIMENT  SAMPLING
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES
At the end of this lesson, participants will be able to:

•   Describe basic stream morphology as it affects the location
    of sampling points

•   Describe lake morphology as it affects the location of
    sampling points

•   Describe and select equipment for obtaining representative
    samples from surface water and sediment

•   Define the basic factors governing the fate of hazardous
    materials in the water column and sediment

-------
  SURFACE WATER AND
  SEDIMENT SAMPLING
NOTES
 6/93         1   Surface Water and Sediment Sampling

-------
   SURFACE WATER MORPHOLOGY
          Lakes and Streams
  Flow
NOTES
                                    i
  Surfact Water and Sediment Sampling
6/93

-------
          FLOW DETERMINATION
              Stream Channel
                                       0.6 Depth
                                       V mean
        Q =
                meter

2 Velocity x Area (Section)
                                  10
NOTES
  6/93
                Surface Water and Sediment Sampling

-------
         STREAM CHANNEL FLOW
                 	 Locus of V mean
                    (0.86 max) '

                 	Outline of 0.99V max

                 mmm Stream boundary

                 K.WM Turbulence
NOTES
  Surface Water and Sediment Sampling
6/93

-------
            IN-STREAM FLOW
     Channel Flow Characteristics
     Flow
  Right Bend
       Turbulent flow
       Stream water
       Sediment
       Underlying strata
       Water sample site
NOTES
  6/93
Surface Water and Sediment Sampling

-------
    GRAB VS. COMPOSITE SAMPLING
                   i
   Flow
                  Lett
                 Channel Midstream
 Right
Channel
       Individual Grabs
                                Composited Grabs
NOTES
   Surface Water and Sediment Sampling
               6/93

-------
         LAKE STRATIFICATION
   Depth
   Depth
       Temperature(C)/u.O.
        Winter
             D.O:
       Temperature (C)/D.O.
NOTES
  6/93
Surface Water and Sediment Sampling

-------
        RANDOM SAMPLING
           Standing Water
         Square
          4-4
NOTES
  Surface Water and Sediment Sampling
6/93

-------
    SURFACE WATER
  SAMPLING EQUIPMENT
NOTES
 Surface Water and Sediment Sampling   9          6/93

-------
  WATER QUALITY PARAMETERS
            Surface Water
  •  Temperature
  •  pH
  •  Dissolved oxygen
  •  Oxidation/reduction potential
  •  Conductivity
      _  	            .______ 	    -  	 _ 	
NOTES
     Water and Sediment Sampling    IQ                6/93

-------
  STREAM CHANNEL MIGRATION
                        Alluvium
                            Bedrock
NOTES
 6/93
                  11
Surface Water and Sediment Sampling

-------
       STREAM MORPHOLOGY
        Riffle-Pool  Relationship
                     i
  Riffle
  Flow
       Riffle

       Deposited Material

       Obstruction
                Riffle
                        Pool
                Dam
NOTES
  Surface Water and Sediment Sampling
12
                 6/93

-------
  LAKE SEDIMENT DISTRIBUTION
                               Inlet
                               Inlet
NOTES
 6/93
13
Surface Water and Sediment Sampling

-------
  SEDIMENT SAMPLING
       EQUIPMENT
NOTES
 Surface Water and Sediment Sampling  14         6/93

-------
    CONTAMINANT TRANSPORT
                      Contaminant,   -A Row
    Cone.
                 Time
NOTES
 6/93
15   Surface Water and Sediment Sampling

-------
   WHAT AFFECTS DISPERSION?
    Characteristics of the Setting
    Physical stratification
    Currents
    Ambient temperature
NOTES
  Surface Water and Sediment Sampling    16

-------
   WHAT AFFECTS DISPERSION?
       Contaminant Attributes
    Solubility
    Specific gravity
    Viscosity
NOTES
  6/93                17   Surface Water and Sediment Sampling

-------
    SAMPLING SAFETY
NOTES
                             €
 Surface Water and Sediment Sampling   18

-------
    SURFACE WATER/SEDIMENT
              SAMPLING
    Stainless
    Steel Bucket
          Ponar
          Dredge
„ ....

 Pump
      Sewage Beta
          SamP|er
NOTES
  6/93
19
   Surface Water and Sediment Sampling

-------
                SURFACE WATER AND  SEDIMENT SAMPLING
INTRODUCTION

The usefulness of sampling in surface waters for evidence of a hazardous material release has been
well documented. Surface waters exist in low-lying areas and function as biological "sinks," which
often may show the first signs of a chemical release.  Initial studies included investigations of the
influence of point-source pollution from industrial and municipal facilities on waterways.  Many of
these early studies aided in developing the methodology used in hazardous waste site situations.

A surface water sampling study may  require establishing several sampling locations to characterize
a particular contaminant or background  concentrations.   Such site-specific  considerations  often
include determining  physical characteristics of the particular body of water in order to dictate
sampling strategies and proper sampling devices.
SITE SELECTION

Aqueous environments can be divided into two broad categories:  freshwater and saltwater.  Within
the freshwater category, situations exist where the waster is free flowing (i.e., rivers, streams, and
creeks) or is relatively stationary (i.e., lakes,  ponds, and lagoons).  There are, however, situations
where a transition exists between the various freshwater environments (e.g., impoundments, flowage)
or between  freshwater and saltwater (estuaries).   The various characteristics of each of  these
situations will influence the approach that will be necessary to obtain samples representative of the
water body or portion of the water body so that contaminant migration can be determined.

The size  of the body of water will  determine the site selection process,  both  in determining modes
of personnel transport and types of sampling  devices.  Large streams and lakes accessible by boat
have the  obvious advantage of maneuverability and aid in performing activities at multiple sampling
points. Smaller bodies of water may require wading, which requires personnel to carry all sampling
equipment to and from access locations.  Specific considerations exist when sampling from artificial
structures (e.g., bridges, dams, and weirs). The problem of access combined witn the  number of
sample locations outlined in the study objectives will undoubtedly affect the time and personnel
assigned  to this task.

Samples  obtained from all aqueous  environments can be roughly divided  into three categories:
water,  sediment, and biological.  The latter category  requires somewhat separate approaches and
methods  particular to each organism.  Biological samples are pertinent and necessary in numerous
hazardous waste site settings.  They can yield significant information on contaminant transport and
fate.  However, this  discussion will emphasize water and  sediment sampling.   Sediment can be
defined as solid material (mineral and organic) situated beneath an aqueous layer.  Water contains
organic matter, minerals, nutrients, and ions in varying amounts that are  in constant physical contact
with the  underlying  sediment.   This water/sediment  interface  is an important location of  many
complex  chemical interactions.
6/93                                        21          Surface Water and Sediment Sampling

-------
Rivers,  Streams, and Creeks

The terms "creek" or "stream" generally refer to the relative size of the body of water.  A river is
larger than  a stream,  which is larger than a creek, and so on.   Free-flowing bodies of water,
regardless of size, have several common characteristics.  In addition to the obvious function as water
transport in the water cycle, streams serve to transport eroded mineral (e.g., sand, gravel, and rock)
and have a complex biological function whereby organic matter (e.g., leaves, woody material, and
soil)  entering the system is  used by  various  organisms, transported,  and changed.   Diurnal
fluctuations  in values such as dissolved  oxygen, pH, conductivity, and various concentrations of
many nutrients can vary widely depending on the time of day.  The combined effect of physical and
biological activity in moving water can result in longitudinal fluctuations of numerous water quality
values.   Dissolved oxygen levels can vary widely depending on whether the samples were taken
upstream or downstream of a dam.  These variations dictate that the water quality parameters be
determined and recorded while samples are being collected.

All streams consist of alternating series of riffles (i.e., fast water velocity,  shallow depth) and pools
(i.e.,  slow water velocity, more depth)  and  will tend to form bends or meander, which is more
pronounced in low gradient areas.  The water moving in a given stream, or "in-stream flow"
measurements like velocity, can vary widely in either cross section (lateral flow), along a water
column (vertical flow), or even horizontally.  In ordinary streams, water flow is best described as
turbulent or nonuniform in nature.  Friction from the underlying substrate and the surface air causes
the maximum velocity  within a stream cross section  to usually be found in mid-channel just below
the surface.  The average or mean velocity usually occurs at six-tenths to eight-tenths of the total
depth below the  surface.  Average  stream  flow and total  discharge can only be determined by
measuring several intervals along  the stream cross  section  at measured depths  at each particular
interval.

Most hazardous waste investigations in running waters involve measuring contaminant concentrations
originating from a source with a small volume release relative to the receiving waters.  The sample
station chosen to detect the contaminant may  or  may not be located  downstream  to a  point of
complete mixing.  A tributary or point source will tend to remain near the bank for a considerable
amount of time before  adequate horizontal and vertical mixing has taken place.  One solution could
be to  select multiple sampling sites across the cross section of the stream.  Another possible solution
could be to use fluorescent tracer dye data to demonstrate complete mixing. Selecting sample points
just downstream of major features, such as riffles  or dams, may prevent  sampling of inadequately
mixed surface water.  Other suggestions include using multiple sampling  points along the stream
length (2-3 stations  downstream)  and "bracketing"  additional tributaries or feature changes with
additional sampling points.

The general rule  for the correct number of samples  necessary to characterize a stream varies with
stream size.   For small streams (<30 feet),  a single grab  sample taken at mid-channel below the
surface will be adequate to represent the cross section.  With larger streams, multiple samples at
various measured depths may be necessary to adequately characterize the cross section.  Sediment
samples may be comprised of several grab samples in that cross section, but the various grab samples
will be homogenized prior to placing the aliquot  in its respective container.  Samples,  however,
should be of similar composition or particle size within that  composite.  Sediment samples obtained
at multiple sites along the stream length should also consist of a comparable substrate.  In streams,
it is difficult, if not impossible, to obtain sediment samples of identical consistency because of the


Surface Water and Sediment Sampling          22                                         6/93

-------
in-stream flow variability and the heterogeneous nature of the parent material.  It is possible to find
similar features that decrease water velocity (<  1  ft./sec), which may promote deposition of fine
material.  These  microhabitats include areas immediately downstream of large  obstructions,  the
upstream end of riffles, the middle of a slow pool,  the insides of bends, and just upstream of dams
or log jams.
Lakes, Impoundments,  Ponds, and  Lagoons

Standing water has a tendency to stratify during certain times of the year.  The density difference
imposed by the energy provided by sunlight creates two distinct layers of water. This stratification
is more pronounced during the summer months where little mixing occurs between the upper and
lower  layers.   Fall  "turnover"  occurs when  the upper  layer is cooled to the point where the
temperature is  vertically uniform. Complete mixing occurs rather abruptly where water and the
upper layers of sediment intermix.  Temperature stratification can also  occur in large rivers.  The
exact location of the strata may be found by using a temperature probe to record the temperature at
various depths to obtain a temperature profile.  Samples may have to be obtained  from various depths
using a discrete "at depth" sampling device.

Lake morphology may have to be characterized to assess sampling needs.  Sediment in ponds and.
lagoons is usually uniformly distributed with similar consistency  so that a single bottom sample in
the deepest area may be considered representative. Impoundments are usually dammed  streams that
are deepest near the dam.  The  finest sediments are usually found in this deep area,  and coarser
deposits are found near the headwaters  of the reservoir.  For large lakes, a transect or grid system
may be developed to organize sample location and various sampling activities. Lakes with irregular
shapes may require that certain bays or coves be considered separately.
Estuarine Waters

Estuaries are areas where freshwater systems meet the saline waters of the ocean.  Tidal action and
differences  in density of the fresh and  salt water  are  characterized by  variable mixing.   A
freshwater/saltwater wedge can form which migrates according to the tidal action, or an increase in
salinity  can occur with no halocline present.  These  phenomena can be investigated using boat-
mounted  depth  soundings  in  combination  with  data  from a  salinometer and a  dissolved
oxygen/temperature meter that generates vertical profiles.  Samples may need to be obtained from
discrete depths and sediment sampling points may need to be determined in reference to the particular
mixing zone.

Investigations in estuary environments  will likely involve  a two-stage process  during wet and dry
times of the year.  As  during  investigations  in  large bodies of water  with complex physical
characteristics, objectives of studies  in estuaries must remain flexible to accommodate  changes  in
sample location and time.
6/93                                         23         Surface Water and Sediment Sampling

-------
WATER AND SEDIMENT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT

Specific analytical categories have specific sample container requirements which can limit the type
of sampling device used in collection.  Volatile organic analysis (VOA) samples  should be collected
in a pair of 40 mL vials which must be immersed in the water sample by slowly tilting and gently
allowing them to fill with as little agitation as possible.  Absolutely no air bubbles should remain in
either of the  filled VOA containers.  Prepreserved sample containers may  require the use of a
sampling  device  other than  the  container.   In locations  that  are inaccessible,  a  properly
decontaminated stainless steel or  Teflonฎ dip-bucket with dedicated rope should be used.   Any
sample device that uses positive or negative pressure is  not recommended.

Sampling for oil and grease involves partially filling  the sample bottle without having to transfer
water from a sampling device or container that  could adsorb the contaminant and thus reduce the
accuracy of analysis.

Certain in-situ water quality parameters  can  be  measured directly, but most  analyses  will involve
collecting the sample from the selected area and delivering it to an analytical laboratory. Collecting
water for hazardous waste investigations  involves obtaining a  sample representative of the sample
location. The accuracy of the sample collection is ensured by minimizing any physical and chemical
influence prior to analysis.  The scale or size of the body of water will deternine the extent of
sample site selection  and appropriate sampling devices.

Small streams and shallow ponds or lagoons may  require a single grab sample obtained by immersing
the sample bottle directly into the middle of the water.   By facing upstream  in  running water, the
samples can be obtained without disturbing the bottom sediment.  Caution should be exercised when
entering unknown bottom substrate in severely impacted areas because solids may not support the
weight of an  individual.  Another method is to use a hand-held or pole-mounted scoop which can
allow a sampler to sample from the bank  if waters are not wadable or footing is unreliable.  A metal
rod can also help when searching the bottom for fine-grained material.  Sediment collection on small
streams and ponds usually employs a sample device.   Hand scoops of a nonreactive  material are
sometimes adequate, although more standardized methods exist using commercially available gravity
corers, augers, and dredges.  The top layer of sediment should be included in a  bottom sample and
many sampling devices or techniques can disturb this  portion,  thus reducing the  accuracy of the
analysis.  The Peterson dredge is a heavy-duty design suited for sand/gravel  substrate. The Ponar
dredge is similar in design, but is tailored to  travel through the water column with less disturbance
to the underlying material. The Ekman dredge is a spring-loaded device best suited for soft substrate
and is designed to travel through the water and reduce the  shock  wave which  occurs  prior to
instrument impact.  Depending on the size of the dredge being used, some may require a  boat-
mounted mechanical  winch.  Gravity corers also reduce the shock wave and  yield a sample which
may  be sampled for  a  vertical profile.  Very soft substrate can be collected  using hand-held push
tubes.  In some cases,  scuba diving may be used to ensure that site selection  and sample collection
are properly completed.

Larger bodies of water will require special water sampling equipment capable of  sampling at discrete
depths.  Submersible pumps and peristaltic pumps can be effective  in certain  cases.  Also,  these
pumps are advantageous because they may be manufactured from a variety of nonreactive materials.
Other discrete depth  sampling devices will collect a sample volume at various depths.  They range
from  relatively  simple pond sampler devices to  more complicated devices  such as the Kemmerer,


Surface Water and Sediment Sampling          24                                        6/93

-------
Bacon Bomb, and LaMotte  samplers.  These devices use a mechanical messenger that trips the
sampler to close, allowing the sample to be retrieved and transferred to its proper container.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SOURCES

Crickmay, C.H.  1974. The Work of the River.  American Elsevier Publishing Co., New York.

Gilbert, R.O.  1987.  Statistical Methods for Environmental Pollution Monitoring.  Van Nostrand
Reinhold Co., New York.

Lind, O.T.  1979.  Handbook of Common Methods in Limnology.   Second Edition.  The C.V.
Mosby Co., St. Louis, Missouri.

U.S. EPA.  1969. A Practical Guide to Water Quality Studies of Streams.  PB-196367.  National
Technical Information Service, Springfield, Virginia.

U.S.  EPA.    1973.   Handbook for Monitoring Industrial  Wastewater.   PB-259146.   U.S.
Environmental  Protection Agency Technology Transfer, National Technical Information Service,
Springfield, Virginia.

U.S.  EPA.  1991.  Compendium of ERT Surface  Water and Sediment  Sampling Procedures.
EPA/540/P91/005.  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC.  January 1991.

U.S.  EPA.   1991.    Standard  Operating  Procedures and  Quality  Assurance  Manual.   U.S.
Environmental  Protection Agency, Environmental Services Division, Athens, Georgia.
6/93                                      25         Surface Water and Sediment Sampling

-------
GROUNDWATER  SAMPLING
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES
At the end of this lesson, participants will be able to:

•   Explain the difference between a confined and an unconfmed
    aquifer

•   Describe a properly installed monitoring well

•   List the proper order of groundwater sample collection

•   Describe the various groundwater sampling equipment and
    sample collection procedures

-------
                                              NOTES
  GROUNDWATER MONITORING
     BASIC PROPERTIES OF
           AQUIFERS
   Porosity

   Permeability
            AQUIFER
  A permeable geologic unit with the

  ability to" store, transmit, and yield

  water in usable quantities
6/93
Groundwater Sampling

-------
     NOTES
                                 UNCONFINED AQUIFER
                             • The water is in direct contact with the
                              atmosphere
                             • There is no upper confining layer
                                  CONFINED AQUIFER
                              A permeable zone between two
                              geologic formations of relatively
                              low permeability
                                  CASING AND SCREEN
                             	MATERIALS

                             • PTFE (Teflonฎ)
                             • Stainless steel
                             • Rigid, threaded PVC
Groundwater Sampling
6/93

-------
      MONITORING WELL
       CONSTRUCTION
       Grout
      Bentonite
      Sand pack
Well cap

Riser pipe
                 Screen
  A WELL MUST BE PROPERLY:

• Designed
• Located
• Constructed
• Secured from tampering
   GROUNDWATER SAMPLING
                                           NOTES
6/93
                           Groundwater Sampling

-------
    NOTES
    €
                                FIELD MEASUREMENTS


                            • Water level

                            • Electrical conductivity

                            • pH

                            • Temperature
                            WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENT
                                     EQUIPMENT
                                    WELL PURGING
                              A Compendium of Superfund Field
                              Operations Methods, 1987

                            •  Common procedure: three to five
                               bore volumes

                            •  Reliable method: stability of water
                               measurements over three well volumes
Jroundwater Sampling
6/93

-------
                                                   NOTES
          WELL VOLUME
Well column
  (in feet)
Well radius
(in inches)

Well volume
(in gallons)
  0.163
(conversion)
       VERIFY PURGING BY
 • Temperature
 • pH
 • Conductivity
       COLLECTION ORDER
  1. Volatile organics
  2. Extractable organics
     - BNAs
     - Pesticides/PCBs
  3. Total metals
  4. Dissolved metals (if applicable)
  5. Cyanide
6/93
                                        Groundwater Sampling

-------
     NOTES
                              GROUNDWATER SAMPLING
                                      EQUIPMENT
                                      EQUIPMENT
                             • Fultz pump

                             • Bladder pump

                             • Waterra inertial pump

                             • Bailers
                                    FIELD FILTERING
                             • Used for dissolved inorganics

                             • Not used for
                               - TOX (total organic halogens)
                               - TOG (total organic carbon)
                               - Organic analysis
Groundwater Sampling
6/93

-------
                                           NOTES
    ALTERNATIVE SAMPLING
         TECHNIQUES

  Hydropunchฎ
  Geoprobeฎ
  Cone penetrometer
6/93
Groundwater Sampling

-------
        DOCUMENTATION
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES







At the end of this lesson, participants will be able to:




•   Describe the best practices for field logbook use




•   Describe the correct methods for field sample identification




•   Describe the proper methods for photo documentation




•   Define the proper circumstances of sample custody

-------
     DOCUMENTATION
    SAMPLE DOCUMENTATION
  Field Logbooks - provide daily records
  of significant events, observations, and
  measurements during field investigations
     FIELD DOCUMENTATION

  Best Practices:

  • Use a bound notebook

  • Record all original data in nonerasable
   waterproof ink

  • Correct errors by crossing a single line
   through the error and initialing and
   dating the correction
                                                 NOTES
6/93
Documentation

-------
      NOTES
                                   FIELD DOCUMENTATION
                                Best Practices:
                               • Field records should be direct and
                                 succinct
                               • Documentor should sign and date each
                                 page
                                 FIELD LOGBOOK ENTRIES
                               • Date and time of entry
                               • Purpose of sampling
                               • Name and address of field contacts
                                (federal, state, and local representatives)
                                  FIELD LOGBOOK ENTRIES
                                 Description of sample
                                 Description of sampling point
                                 Date and time of sample collection
Documentation
6/93

-------
                                                   NOTES
    FIELD LOGBOOK ENTRIES

  • Sample identification number
  • Field observations
  • Field measurements
   (e.g., pH, flammability)
     SAMPLE IDENTIFICATION
  All sample containers should be labeled
  with eight categories of identifying
  information
  1.  Project code
  2.  CLP case and sample number
     SAMPLE IDENTIFICATION

  3.  Station location and number
  4.  Date and time of sample collection
  5.  Preservative
6/93
Documentation

-------
     NOTES
                                SAMPLE IDENTIFICATION

                             6.  Requested analysis
                             7.  Signature(s)
                             8.  Remarks
                               SAMPLE DOCUMENTATION

                              Sample tags and labels
                              Site maps
                              Photographs
                              Chain of custody
                              Field documentation
                              SAMPLE CHAIN OF CUSTODY
                             A reconstruction of who had access
                             to the sample from the time it was
                             collected until produced in court
Documentation
6/93

-------
                                                  NOTES
        SAMPLE CUSTODY
  A sample is under custody if:
  •  It is in your possession
  •  It is in your view after being in your
    possession
  •  It was in your possession and then you
    locked it up to prevent tampering
  •  It is held in a designated secure area
             VIDEO
6/93
Documentation

-------
          DOCUMENTATION
              taken from:
                                  EPA/540/P-87/001
                         (OSWER Directive 9355.0-14)
                                  December 1987
 A COMPENDIUM OF SUPERFUND
  FIELD OPERATIONS METHODS
             (Section 4)
OFFICE OF EMERGENCY AND REMEDIAL RESPONSE
  OFFICE OF WASTE PROGRAMS ENFORCEMENT
  U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
          WASHINGTON, DC 20460
                                      Documentation

-------
fr
                                     SECTION 4

          SAMPLE CONTROL, INCLUDING  CHAIN OF CUSTODY


4.1  SCOPE AND PURPOSE


   This section describes procedures for sample identification and chain of custody.  The  purpose of
these procedures is to maintain the quality of samples during collection, transportation, and  storage for
analysis.  Sample control and chain-of-custody procedures specific to the Contract Laboratory Program
(CLP) are presented in the User's Guide to the Contract Laboratory Program.


4.2  DEFINITIONS


Sample
       Physical evidence collected for environmental measuring and monitoring. Evidence includes
       remote-sensing imagery and photographs.

Site Manager (SM)
       The individual responsible for the successful completion of a work assignment within budget
       and schedule.  The person is also referred to as the Site Project Manager or the  Project  -
       Manager and is typically a contractor's employee (see Subsection 1.1).


4.3  APPLICABILITY


   When environmental measuring or monitoring data are collected  for the  Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA), workers should refer to the procedures in this section.


4.4  RESPONSIBILITIES


   The SM or designee is responsible for monitoring compliance with these procedures.  In general, it is
desirable to appoint one person to be responsible for implementing sample control procedures (i.e., field
operations leader).  However, each sampler is responsible for the activities described in Subsections 4.5
and 4.6.


4.5  RECORDS


   The following records are kept:


    •   Sample identification tags (varies with the EPA region; see Subsection 4.7 and Exhibit 5-7)

    •   Sample traffic reports (e.g., Special Analytical Services (SAS); see Exhibits 5-2, 5-3, and 5-9)

    •   Chain-of-custody (COC) forms and records (see Exhibits 5-4, 5-5, and 5-6)

    •   Receipt-for-samples forms (varies among EPA regions; see Subsection 4.7 and Exhibit 4-3)
         6/93                                         9                               Documentation

-------
                                                                                                   4
    •  Field Investigation Team (FIT) receipt (for sample forms and field notebooks not serially numbered
       by the U.S. EPA)

    •  Field notebooks

    •  Airbills or bills of lading

    •  Dioxin analysis forms (as applicable)

    •  Photographic logs
    Subsection 4.6 describes procedures for these records; Subsection 5.1.6 shows completed exhibits of
the first three items.
4.6   PROCEDURES


    Sample identification documents must be prepared to maintain sample identification and chain of cus-
tody.  The following are sample identification documents:
•  Sample identification tags

•  Sample traffic reports

•  Chain-of-custody records

•  Receipt-for-samples forms

•  Custody seals

•  Field notebooks
    These documents are usually numbered (serialized)  by EPA.  Some varieties of custody seals, field
notebooks, or photographic logs may not be serialized.

    The following additional forms are used for samples shipped to CLP laboratories:
    •   Organic traffic reports

    •   Inorganic traffic reports

    •   High-hazard traffic reports

    •   SAS request forms

    •   Dioxin shipment records (as applicable)                                                          ^^


    Completed examples of these forms are in Subsection 5.1.6 of this compendium.



   Documentation                                10                                         6/93

-------
    The organization's document control officer (designated on exhibits in this subsection as the Regional
 Document Control Officer or RDCO) or another designated person maintains a supply of the documents
 listed above, including field note books. The document control officer is responsible for the inventory of
 serialized documents and the assignment of these documents to specific projects.  Unused field docu-
 ments are usually returned to the document control  officer at the end of the field sampling event.  The
 document control officer notes the return of these documents in the serialized document logbook.  In some
 EPA regions, unused field documents are retained by the sampler to whom they were originally assigned
 for use on future projects. The sampler maintains a personal logbook in which is recorded the final disposi-
 tion of all relevant field information.  Unused, returned documents may be checked out to another project
 by the RDCO, as needed.  A cross reference of serialized field documents is usually maintained for each
 project in the project files. A sample cross-reference matrix is shown In Exhibit 4-1.

    The  document control  officer orders sample identification tags, receipt-for samples forms,  custody
 seals, and chain-of-custody records from the EPA regional  offices. Traffic reports and SAS request forms
 are obtained through the Sample Management Office (SMO) representative.

    Exhibit 4-2 shows how the sample control documents can be integrated into the document control pro-
 cedures used in an EPA project. The procedures for using  each document are discussed below.  Subsec-
 tion 4.7  discusses regional variations; however, because procedures change and vary  from region to
 region, the EPA Regional Sample Coordinating Center (RSCC) should be contacted during the planning of
 field activities to obtain the most current procedures.  Appendix A  of the User's Guide to the  CLP contains a
 directory of RSCC contacts and telephone numbers.


 4.6.1  Sample Identification Tags


    Sample identification tags (see Exhibit 5-7) are distributed as needed to field workers by the SM (or
 designated  representative). Procedures vary among EPA regions. Generally, the EPA serial numbers are
 recorded in the project files, the field notebook, and the document control officer's serialized document
 logbook. Individuals are accountable for each tag assigned to  them.  A tag is considered to be in an
 individual's possession until it has been filled out, attached to a sample, and transferred to another in-
 dividual  along with the corresponding chain-of custody record.   Sample identification tags are not to be
 discarded.  If tags are lost, voided, or damaged, the facts are noted in the appropriate field notebook, and
 the SM is notified.

    Upon the completion of the field activities,  unused sample Identification tags are returned to the docu-
 ment control officer, who checks them against the list of assigned serial numbers.  Tags attached to those
 samples that are split with the owner, operator, agent-in-charge,  or a government agency are accounted
 for by recording the serialized tag numbers on  the receipt-for-samples form (Exhibit 4-3). Alternatively, the
 split samples are not tagged but are accounted for on a chain-of-custody form.

    Samples are transferred from the sample location to a laboratory or another location for analysis.
 Before transfer,  however, a sample is often separated into  fractions, depending on the analysis to be per-
 formed.  Each portion is preserved in accordance with prescribed procedures (see User's Guide to the CLP
 and Section 6 of this compendium)  and is identified with a separate sample identification tag, which should
 indicate  in the "Remarks" section that the sample is a split sample.
6/93
                                              11                                Documentation

-------
      Q ฃ
      ll
     la

    fl!
      ฎ d
      "o. 3

      n -a
      io ^
                                Exhibit 4-1

            CROSS REFERENCE MATRIX FOR SERIALIZED DOCUMENTS
Documentation
                                    12
6/93

-------
                                  Exhibit 4-2
                       DOCUMENT CONTROL PROCEDURES























1 PROJECT ACTIVITIES LOT.nOOK























I tD*ty Joumtl ot Actrvilwt)























-























1 PROJECT NOTEBOOK























i
.!
•'I
i
i





















\









1
I
r
z








S
j
J
'
c




t,
1





1
S
a








1 !
' \
\ <
i !
! J



I
f
.
n
f

















S
c
1


?
k.




j



*
a








1

5























V)



Uf
.J
u.
h
CLOSED PR
roH


















































•


jt

1
•c
i


















































—










1 'ซ<ป<)>•
1




,
j

I
5
j
•
11











K f
ill
"
ACTIVE
PROJECT
FII r

S*1ซ Property
Owner

f







	








1
ป
i f
• E •
ijjji
nil'

/
i, t
Simple Manป9emenl
Ofl*ce
I -t-
H
5
T 62


1 	
e *
I

Tป
1_ - 3
' 	 CT>
c t
L fil



M
FIELD
SAMPttJOl
MATEfllA




t.
r
I
j
t : i J il
ll
5 |
52



. I
_, 0


.' 1
j 1 •
	 e
h








— 1
.1



































^


I






1













<
1
'






















\
t
i1
•>
1



























HE PORT?




j



J









T>
7

u
3




















*
|

o


















































PROJECT INVENTOnv NOTEBOOK



0!
on.
1


















I]
M
!l
h
1
0 j
I
ll



u!



















jwoooo*^ wJ ซ*fi*luปd document! )
ซ
f
j
ฃ
ฃ
c!

0!
i


















CLASSIFIED DOCUMENTS

by C*ntf**d Mปil





















|
c
i
I
•3
1
I
ฃ
1 r
! i
1=1
J i6

uttf | Lป.(*4>J pjฃ
•Y i *M>irป* | *
-------
   The following information is recorded on the tag:



    •   CLP Case / SAS Number(s):  The unique number(s) assigned by SMO to identify the sampling
       event (entered under "Remarks" heading)

    •   CLP Sample Number:  The unique sample identification number (from the TR, DSR, or PL) used
       to document that sample (entered under "Remarks" heading)

    •   Project Code:  An assigned contractor project number

    •   Station Number:  A unique identifier assigned to a sampling point by the sampling team leader
       and listed in the sampling plan

    •   Date: A six-digit number indicating the year, month, and day of collection

    •   Time:  A four-digit number indicating the local standard time of collection using the 24-hour clock
       notation (for example, 1345 for 1:45 p.m.)

    •   Station Location:  The sampling station description as specified in the sampling plan

    •   Samplers:  Each sampler's name and signature

    •   Preservative:  Whether a preservative is used and the type of preservative

    •   Analysis:  The type of analysis requested

    •   Tag Number:  A unique serial number, stamped on each tag

    •   Batch Number: The sample container cleaning batch number, recorded in the "Remarks" section

    •   Remarks:  The sampler's record of pertinent information, such as  batch number, split samples,
       and special procedures

    •   Laboratory Sample  Number:  Reserved for laboratory use
    The tag used for water, soil, sediment, and biotic samples contains an appropriate place for identifying
the sample as a grab or a composite, the type of sample collected, and the preservative used, if any. The
tag used for air samples requires the sampler to designate the sequence number and identify the sample
type.  Sample identification tags are attached to, or folded around each sample, and are taped in place.

    After collection, separation, identification and preservation, a traffic report is completed and the sample
is handled using chaln-of-custody procedures discussed in the following sections. If the sample is to be
split, aliquots are placed into similar sample containers.  Depending on the EPA region, sample identifica-
tion tags are completed and attached to each split and marked with the tag numbers of the other portions
and with the word "split." Blank or duplicate samples are labeled In the same manner as "normal" samples.
Information on blanks or duplicate samples is recorded in the field notebook.  Some EPA  regions require
that laboratories be informed of the number of blanks and duplicates that are shipped, but  not the identity
of the quality assurance samples.

    The printed and numbered adhesive sample labels affixed to the traffic reports are secured to sample
containers by the sampler.  Forms are filled out with waterproof Ink, if weather permits. If a pen will not
function because of Inclement conditions, an indelible pencil may be used. If a pencil is used, a note ex-
   Dccumentation                               14

-------
ft
            Exhibit 4-3
TYPICAL RECEIPT-FOR-SAMPLES FORM
c o ซ-
rvices Divilio
icy Region 1
ington 9810
• 0 ฃ

"3 5

ฃ.2.2
efl
ill
J-*

•
c ฃ
I *
ฃ ง
M ฃ!
3


CO
UJ
a.
5
CO
cc
o
LL
.
jฃ
UJ
O
UJ
cc












>.
c
S.
ซt
C
.—

|
a.
Si
S So
ซ I-
||ง
D ui CC





















>
!
u.
^
V
E
Z
















ซj
<
Z
^
UJ

O
oc
a.
0
0
UJ
0
cc
o.





















c
5
O

>•
•^
U
u.



















•J.
S

I
5
UJ
-1
a.
t/>


ซ
c
a
^^
2
a
ซ
w
<
•**•











T3
V
41
O
V*
01
a

-------
plaining the conditions must be included in the field notebook.  When necessary, the label  is protected
from water and solvents with clear tape.

    The original is sent to the SMO.  The first copy is retained for the project file.  The second and third
copies are sent with the shipment to the laboratory.  Complete instructions for the use of traffic reports are
given in the User's Guide to the CLP.


4.6.2  Sample Traffic Report (TR)


    The sample documentation system for the CLP sample preparation program is based on the use of the
sample traffic report (TR), a four-part carbonless form printed with a unique sample identification number.
One TR and  its printed identification number is assigned by the sampler to each sample collected.  The
three types of TRs currently in use include organic, inorganic dioxin, and high-concentration TRs.  (See
Subsection 5.1.6 for examples of completed TRs.)

    To provide a permanent record for each sample collected, the sampler completes the appropriate TR,
recording the case number, site name or code and location, analysis laboratory, sampling office, dates of
sample collection and shipment, and sample concentration and matrix.  Numbers of sample containers
and  volumes are entered  by the sampler,  beside the  analytical  parameter(s) requested for particular
sample portions.


4.6.3  Chain-of-Custody Forms and Records


    Because samples collected during an investigation could be used as evidence in litigation, possession
of the samples must be traceable from the time each is collected until it is introduced as evidence in  legal
proceedings. To document sample possession, chain-of-custody procedures are followed.


4.6.3.1  Definition of  Custody

    A sample is under custody if one or more of the following criteria are met:
    •  The sample is in the sampler's possession.

    •  It is in the sampler's view after being in possession.

    •  It was in the sampler's possession and then was locked up to prevent tampering.

    •  It is in a designated secure area.


 4.6.3.2    Field Custody Procedures

    Only enough of the sample should be collected to provide a good representation of the medium being
 sampled.  To the extent  possible, the quantity and types of samples and the sample locations are deter-
 mined before the actual fieldwork. As few people as possible should handle the samples.

    Field samplers are personally responsible for the care and custody of the samples collected by their
 teams until the samples are transferred or dispatched properly. A person is usually designated to receive
      Documentation                               16                                          6/93

-------
 the samples from the field samplers after decontamination; this person maintains custody until the samples
 are dispatched.

    The SM determines whether proper custody procedures were followed during the fieldwork and
 decides if additional samples are required.


 4.6.3.3    Transfer of Custody and Shipment

    Samples are accompanied by a chain-of-custody (COC) form or record (Exhibits 5-4 and 5-5). When
 transferring samples, the individuals relinquishing and receiving them should sign, date and note the time
 on the form. This form documents sample custody transfer from the sampler, often through another per-
 son, to the analyst, who Is in a mobile or contract laboratory.

    Samples are  packaged properly  for shipment and dispatched to the appropriate laboratory for
 analysis, with a  separate COC record accompanying each shipment. Shipping containers are padlocked
 or sealed with custody seals for shipment to the laboratory. The method of shipment, courier name(s), and
 other pertinent information such as the laboratory name should be entered in the "Remarks" section of the
 COC record.

    When  samples are  split with  an owner, operator,  or government  agency, the event is noted in the
 "Remarks" section of the COC record. The note indicates with whom the samples are being split. The per-
 son relinquishing the samples, to the facility or agency requests the signature of the receiving party on a
 receipt-for-samples form (Exhibit 4-3)  (described  in the following  subsection), thereby acknowledging
 receipt of the samples.  If a representative is  unavailable or refuses to sign, this situation is noted in the
 "Remarks" section of the COC record.  When appropriate, for example, when an owner's representative is
 unavailable, the COC record and receipt-for-samples form should contain a statement that the samples
 were delivered to the designated location at  the designated time.  A witness to the attempted delivery
 should be obtained. The samples shall be secured if no one is present to receive them.

    All shipments are accompanied by a COC record identifying their contents. The original form accom-
 panies the shipment; the copies are retained by the sampler and returned to the sampling coordinator.

     If nonhazardous samples are sent by mail, the package is registered, and a return receipt is requested.
 Note: Hazardous materials shall not be sent by mail.  If samples are sent by common carrier, a bill of
 lading is used.  Air freight  shipments are sent prepaid. Freight bills, postal service  receipts, and bills of
 lading should be retained as part of the permanent documentation for the COC records.

 4.6.3.4     Laboratory Custody Procedures

     Laboratory  personnel are responsible for the care and custody of samples from the time they are
 received until the samples  are exhausted or returned to the laboratory sample custodian for ultimate dis-
 posal.  Laboratory-specific variations exist; however, a generally accepted laboratory chain-of-custody pro-
 cedure  is presented below. Any  laboratory used for the analysis of samples taken in the course of EPA
 remedial response must have an adequate chain-of-custody procedure. This procedure is required as an
 exhibit in the Quality Assurance Project Plan (QAPjP) if the laboratory is not in the CLP.

     A designated custodian of laboratory samples  accepts custody of the shipped  samples and verifies
 that the information on the sample identification tags matches that on the COC records. Pertinent informa-
 tion on  shipment, pickup, courier, and condition of samples is entered  in the "Remarks" section. The cus-
 todian then enters the sample identification tag data into a bound logbook, which is arranged  by project
 code and station number.
6/95                                          17                                Documentation

-------
   The laboratory custodian uses the sample identification tag number or assigns a unique laboratory      •
number to each sample; the custodian transfers the samples to the proper analyst or stores them in the ap-      ^
propriate secure area.  A limited number of named individuals are allowed access to the sample storage
area. The appropriate analysts are responsible for the samples until they are returned to the custodian.

   When sample  analyses and necessary quality assurance (QA) checks have been completed, the un-
used portion of the  sample and the sample containers must be  disposed of properly (see Subsection
5.2.6.4).  All identifying tags, data sheets, and laboratory records, are retained as part of the permanent
documentation.


4.6.4  Receipt-for-Samples  Form


    Section 3007(a)(2) of the RCRA states "If the officer, employee, or representative obtains any samples,
prior to leaving the premises he shall give to the owner, operator, or agent-in-charge, a receipt describing
the samples obtained and, if requested, a portion of each such sample equal in volume or weight to the
portion retained."   Section  104 of the Comprehensive Environmental  Response, Compensation,  and
Liability Act (CERCLA), as amended by the Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act (SARA), con-
tains identical requirements.

    Completing a  receipt-for-samples form complies with these requirements; such forms should be used   t
whenever splits are offered or provided to the site owner, operator,  or agent-in-charge. The  particular form
used may vary between EPA regions; an example Is shown in Exhibit 4-3.  This form is completed and a
copy given to the owner,  operator, or agent-in-charge even if the  offer for split samples is declined.  The
original is given to the SM and Is  retained in the project files.  In addition, the contractor must provide     m
analytical results from the samples collected to the owner, operator,  or agent in charge, as mandated in     V
SARA.


4.6.5   Custody Seals


    When samples are shipped to the laboratory, they must be placed  in padlocked containers or con-
tainers sealed with custody seals; a completed example is shown  in Exhibit 5-6.  Some custody seals are
serially numbered.  These numbers must appear in the cross-reference matrix (Exhibit 4-1) of the field
document and on the COC report.  Other types of custody seals include unnumbered seals and  evidence
tape.

    When samples are shipped, two or more seals are to be placed on each shipping container (such as a
cooler), with at least one at the front and one at the back, located in a manner that would indicate if the
container were opened in transit. Wide, clear tape should be placed over the seals to ensure that seals are
not accidentally broken during shipment.  Nylon packing tape may be used providing that it does not com-
pletely cover the custody seal. Completely covering the seal with this type of tape may allow the label to
be peeled off.  Alternatively, evidence tape may be substituted for custody seals.

    If  samples are subject to interim storage before shipment, custody seals or evidence tape may be
placed over the lid of the jar or across the opening of the storage box. Custody during shipping would be
the same as described above. Evidence tape may also be used to seal the plastic bags or metal  cans that
are used to contain  samples in the cooler or shipping container.  Sealing individual sample containers as-
sures that sample integrity will not be compromised if the outer container seals are accidentally broken.
     Documentation                                18

-------
4.6.6  Field Notebooks

    A bound field notebook must be maintained by the sampling team leader to provide daily records of
significant events, observations, and measurements during field investigations. All entries are to be signed
and dated. All members of the field Investigation team are to use this notebook, which is to be kept as a
permanent record.  Observations or measurements that are taken in an area where contamination of the
field notebooks may occur may be recorded in a separate bound and numbered logbook before being
transferred to the project notebook. The original records are retained, and the delayed entry is noted as
such.

    'Field notebooks are intended to  provide sufficient data and observations  to enable participants to
reconstruct events that occurred during projects and tOTefresh the memory of the field personnel if called
upon to give testimony during legal proceedings. In a legal proceeding, notes, if referred to, are subject to
cross-examination and are admissible as evidence. The field notebook entries should be factual, detailed,
and objective.


4.6.7  Corrections to Documentation


    Unless restricted by weather conditions, all original data recorded in field notebooks and on  sample
identification tags, chain-of-custody records, and receipt-for-samples forms are written in waterproof ink.
These accountable serialized documents are not to be destroyed or thrown away, even if they are illegible
or contain inaccuracies that require a replacement document.

    If an error is made on an accountable document assigned to one person, that individual may make cor-
rections simply by crossing out the error and entering the correct Information. The erroneous information
should not be obliterated. Any error discovered on an accountable document should be corrected by the
person who made the entry. All corrections must be Initialed and dated.

    For all photographs taken, a photographic  log is kept; the log records date, time, subject, frame and
roll number, and photographer.  For "instant  photos," the date, time, subject,  and photographer are
recorded directly on the developed picture. The serial number of the camera and lens are recorded in the
project  notebook.  The photographer should  review the photographs or slides when they return  from
developing and compare them to the log, to assure that  the log and photographs match.  It can  be par-
ticularly useful to photograph the labeled sample jars before packing them into shipping containers. A
clear photograph of the sample jar, showing the label, any evidence tape sealing the jar, and the color and
amount of sample, can be most useful in reconciling any later discrepancies.


4.7  REGION-SPECIFIC VARIANCES


    Region-specific variances are common; the SM should contact the EPA RPM or the RSCC before any
sampling campaign to ascertain the latest procedures. Future changes in variances will be incorporated in
subsequent revisions to this compendium.


4.7.1   Region I


    Region I uses a standard contractor serialized chain-of-custody form and an unnumbered chain-of-cus-
tody seal, which are placed on the outside of the shipping cooler.  Numbered sample bottle labels are used
for REM site work and numbered tags for FIT site work.
6/93
                                              19                               Documentation

-------
4.7.2  Region II                                                                                   f


    Region II uses an unnumbered chain-of-custody form and numbered sample bottle labels for all site
work.  Custody seals are placed on the outside of the shipping cooler.


4.7.3  Region III


    Region III uses a serialized chain-of-custody form and  numbered sampling tags.  Chain-of-custody
seals used by Region ill are unnumbered and placed on the outside of the shipping cooler.


4.7.4  Region IV


    Region IV has a detailed procedural discussion in the Engineering Support Branch Standards Operating
Procedures and Quality Assurance Manual, U.S. EPA, Region IV,  Environmental Services Division, 1 April
1986.


4.7.5  Region V


    Region V uses a serialized chain-of-custody seal.  Region V seals are color coded; orange is used for
REM and FIT work. Seals are placed on the outside of the shipping cooler only if the samples are sent the
same day as collected; otherwise, seals are placed across sample jar lids.  FIT does not note whether or       ^
not samples  were split on the chain-of-custody record.  FIT includes the corresponding Traffic Report num-       Vj
ber under the remarks section of the tag. The bottle lot numbers or "batch numbers" are not  recorded
here, but on the "Chain-of Custody form."


4.7.6 Region VI


    Region VI does not use a serialized number control system on custody seals.


4.7.7 Region VII


    Region VII personnel provide onsite sample control.  Samples are logged into a computer by regional
personnel. Although contractor personnel do not  seal and log  samples, chain of custody is followed as
described above.


4.7.8  Region VIII


    Region VIII does not use a serialized number control system on custody seals.


4.7.9  Region  IX


    Region IX does not use a serialized number control system on chain-of-custody seals.                      ^0
    Documentation                               20

-------
     4.7.10 Region X


        Region X does not use a serially numbered custody seal. Seals are signed, and the sample ID number
     is written on the seal.


     4.8  INFORMATION SOURCES


        SuperfundAmendments and Reauthorization Act (SARA). Section 104(m), "Information Gathering Access
     Authorities."


        U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. NEIC Policies and Procedures. EPA-330/9-78-001-R. May 1978.
     (Revised February 1983.)


        U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. REM IV Zone Management Plan. Contract No. 68-01-7251
     CH2M HILL and U.S. EPA.


        U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. User's Guide to the Contract Laboratory Prop-am. Office of Emer-
     gency and Remedial Response. December 1986.


        U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Zone IIREMIFIT Quality Assurance Manual. Contract No. 68-
     01 -6692, CH2M HILL and Hazardous Site Control Division.
6/93                                        .,
                                            21                               Documentation

-------
UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
OFFICE OF ENFORCEMENT
EPA-330/9-78-001-R
NEIC POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
May  1978
[Revised  August 1991]
NATIONAL ENFORCEMENT INVESTIGATIONS CENTER

Denver,  Colorado

-------
                        CONTENTS
    FOREWORD	i
    ORGANIZATION CHART	m

I.   SEVERAL POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

    CONFLICTS OF INTEREST, GIFTS AND GRATUITIES ..          1
    PUBLIC RELATIONS	
    ENTERING FACILITIES	2

      Authority	2
      Entry Procedures	4
      Denial of Entry Procedures	4

    INVESTIGATIONS OF ALLEGED CRIMINAL ACTIVITY	5
    COMMUNICATIONS EXTERNAL TO OFFICE OF ENFORCEMENT.5

      Requesting Information from Persons Subject to Regulation	6
      Disclosure of Official Information to the Public	6
      FOIA Response  Procedures	8

II.  PROJECT MANAGEMENT

    PROJECT REQUEST	9
    PROJECT TEAM FORMATION	11

      Civil Investigations	11
      Criminal Investigations	12

    BACKGROUND INFORMATION REVIEW	 12
    PROJECT PLAN  PREPARATION	13
    PROJECT PLAN  IMPLEMENTATION	15
    REPORT PREPARATION	 15
    ENFORCEMENT CASE SUPPORT	16

III. EVIDENCE MANAGEMENT

    SAMPLE CONTROL	is

      Sample Identification	18
      Split  Samples	19
      Chain-of-Custody for Samples	19

        Sample Custody	22
        Transfer of Custody and Shipment	22
        Laboratory Custody	25

-------
                        CONTENTS (cont.)                             A


III. EVIDENCE MANAGEMENT (cont.)


    DOCUMENT CONTROL	25

      Project Logbooks	26
      Sample  Tags	26
      Chain-of-Custody Records	27
      Lidar Magnetic Tapes	27
      Laboratory Records	27
      Photographs	28
      Corrections to Documentation	28
      Consistency of Documentation	28
      Branch/Division Files	29
      Evidentiary Files	29
      Litigation Documents	30
      Confidential Business Information	30

    EVIDENCE AUDIT 	30
    QUALITY ASSURANCE	31
APPENDIX

    Witness Guidelines	32



FIGURES

1    Project Management Procedures	ID
2    Receipt for Samples	20
3    Completed Receipt for Samples	21
4    Chain-of-Custody Record	23
5    Completed Chain-of-Custody Record	24



TABLES

1    Authorities Granted Under Federal Environmental Laws and
        Regulations for Administrative/Civil Investigations	3
2    Transmittal of NEIC Documents & Correspondence	7

-------
                            FOREWORD

      The National Enforcement Investigations Center  (NEIC) is the
organizational element of the Office of Enforcement which provides a full
range of technical, investigative, and litigation support expertise for the
Agency's administrative, civil, and  criminal enforcement cases.  NEIC
focuses on  those  nationally and  regionally significant  enforcement
initiatives which require:

      •    Development  and/or  application  of new  methods  and
           procedures/approaches for  enforcement investigations, case
           development/management and resolution;

      •    Methods/procedures developed and used for a  specific project
           or case in one region which can he applied nationally or on a
           multi-regional  basis  for improving  the  EPA  enforcement
           program  and  addressing and achieving  risk  reduction
           objectives;

      •    Evaluation, review  and/or support  of proposed  pollution
           controls,  abatement  and  remedial  measures  applying
           innovative  engineering  and  scientific  technology  with
           subsequent widespread application;

      •    Investigation of special  environmental compliance  problems
           where an initial application and/or innovative interpretation of
           statutory and regulatory requirements is necessary,

      •    Defense of the methods and techniques used and/or positions
           taken by the government during legal  proceedings/settlement
           negotiations;

      •    State-of-the-art  litigation support,  information/records
           management and evidence audits for the Agency s priority
           cases.

      NEIC maintains  expert staff and sophisticated equipment capabili-
ties for conducting investigations throughout the United States.  NEIC has
the ability to:

      •    Plan and  manage  a  wide  range  of  environmental
           investigations

                Conduct comprehensive multi-media investigations

                Gather  and analyze information  on  facilities and
                businesses from a variety of EPA and other databases

                Perform industrial process evaluations

-------
                 Evaluate the adequacy and validity of data collection and     ^
                 analyses                                                 1

                 Review and develop analytical techniques, methodolo-
                 gies, and computer information systems

      •     Implement  enforcement strategies in coordination with the
            Office of Enforcement, other EPA  Headquarters and Regional
            Offices

                 Assist in the preparation of cases for litigation

                 Provide  specialized and expert  testimony on a  wide
                 variety of subjects

                 Provide assistance to EPA's  delegated state enforcement
                 programs including state criminal enforcement efforts

      •     Provide  training  to federal and  state employees regarding
            environmental investigations and enforcement J
                                   ^f
      The primary objective of NEIC is  to provide expertise and resources
for development and support of  Federal and State civil and criminal
enforcement cases.  To meet this objective,  NEIC has established the
following policies  and procedures.   These emphasize the need to
(a) thoroughly  understand  the  applicable  environmental  laws  and
regulations; (b) clearly identify project objectives; and (c) adequately plan
and implement all field,  laboratory, and other support activities.

      The goal of this manual is to  present procedures for collection and
development of admissible and defensible evidence in support of the Agency
enforcement programs.  In instances where  these  prescribed procedures
are inappropriate or inadequate, NEIC  personnel  may  use  alternate
procedures after securing the approval of their supervisor or consulting
with the Enforcement Specialist Office, as appropriate.

      This manual contains  policies and procedures developed solely to
provide internal guidance to  NEIC  employees and its  contractors.   The
policies  and procedures which  are  set forth do not  create  any rights,
substantive or procedural, enforceable at law by a party to litigation with
EPA or the United States.
      h'EIC makes available, through various forums, the expernse i:  has
      developed  by  conducting  enforcement  investigations, supporting
      litigation/settlement  negotiations,  etc
                                  11

-------
                                                 IXC,
                                                           COซO22S
       SPECIAL ASSISTANT
             W  Murray Jf
                    DIRECTOR
                 FranK M Covington
                                        DEPUTY DIRECTOR
                                            Carroll G  Wills
              ASSISTANT DIRECTOR
            PLANNING ซ MANAGEMENT
    INFORMATION
MANAGEMENT BRANCH
        H
EVIDENCE AUDir/QUALITY
   ASSURANCE UNIT
     Paul* J Smith
 NFORMATXX SERVICES
       SEcnoN
    O*rttrซ M Swfen
ADMINISTRATrVE SERVICES
       BRANCH
          B
   HUMAN RESOURCES
        SECTION
             P*rr
    SUPPORT SERVICES
        SECTION
    Jan* E Chadboorr*
 DATA SYSTEMS SECTION
          C Allison
                                               ASS.STANT
                                              LABORATORY SESviCHS
                                                  Ciary D founy
CHEMISTRY BRANCH
    Joซ H
 PtSTlCiOES i TCXiC
SUBSTANCES BRANCH
     ANALYTICAL
INVESTIGATJONS SECTION
    K Ene Nomrซ9ftปm
       APPUED
   INSTRUMENTATKX
       SECTION
  COMPLIANCE SECTION
  ANALYTICAL SECTION'
        Vacan;
                                  DATA ANALYSIS SEC~'ON
                                            C Ross
PROGRAM i
TECHNOLOGY
ADVISORY STAFP
Thomss O DซH





ASSIST ANT C
OPERAT
Rooปl D

(IRECTOR
IONS
H*rp





OUAIL STREET
PACIUTY


               ClVtt. B^PORCEMENT
                SUPPORT BRANCH
               CRIMINAL ENFORCEMENT
                  SUPPORT BRANCH
                           So*
         TECHNICAL i TRAINING
           SUPPORT BRANCH
             Donaid C
                                                 111

-------
ft
                       I.  GENERAL POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
          CONFLICTS OF INTEREST. GIFTS AND GRATUITIES

                Each NEIC  employee is expected to promote public confidence in the
          integrity, reliability  and dependability of the  Environmental Protection
          Agency.  Employees  are required to  perform their duties in a dignified,
          tactful, courteous and diplomatic manner, as the situation dictates. At all
          times they must  comply with the regulations governing EPA employee
          conduct (40 CFR  Part 3).  Employees should consult their supervisors
          and/or the Enforcement Specialist Office for guidance on ethics issues.  For
          general information regarding ethics refer to:

              Ethics in  a Nutshell ... Ethical Conduct for EPA Emrtloveeg ... in Bripf.
                U.S. EPA, Office of the Inspector General (March 1988)
                       Emloyee Resonsibilities and Conduct.
               U.S. EPA, Office of General Counsel (Feb. 1984).
              EPA's Guidance on Ethics and Conflicts of Interest
               (Feb. 1984)


               Employees shall avoid actual and  apparent conflicts  of interest
          through outside employment and other private interests or activities.  A
ป          conflict of interest may exist whenever an EPA employee has a direct or
          indirect personal interest in a matter which is related to his official duties
          and responsibilities.  Each NEIC employee must avoid even the appearance
          of a conflict of interest because  the appearance of a conflict damages the
          integrity of the Agency and its  employees in the eyes of the public.  All
          employees must,  therefore, avoid  situations which are, or give  the
          appearance of,  conflicts of interest when dealing with others in or outside
          the Government.  Any information acquired during an employee's duties is
          for official use only.

               An employee is forbidden to  solicit or accept any  gift, gratuity,
          entertainment, favor, loan  or any other item of monetary value from any
          person, corporation or group which has interests that may be substantially
          affected by such employee's official actions, or which  conducts operations
          regulated by EPA.  Further guidance on EPA's policy for accepting gifts,
          gratuities or entertainment may be found at 40 CFR 3.400.

          PUBLIC RELATIONS

               Good working relations should be established when dealing with the
          public, including personnel at facilities being investigated.  This can best be
          accomplished by using diplomacy, tact  and persuasion. Employees  should
          not speak of any person, other regulatory agency, or facility in a derogatory

-------
manner and should avoid providing a professional opinion on  specific
products or projects.                                                       A

      Good  public relations and common sense dictate that employees
dress appropriately for the activity in which  they are engaged,  this
includes wearing  the  proper  protective  clothing  and  using  safety
equipment, as appropriate.

ENTERING FACILITIES

Authority

      Federal environmental statutes grant EPA enforcement personnel
authority to  enter and inspect facilities [Table 1].  Each authonty is similar
to that stated below from Section 308 of the Clean Water Act:

    "(a)(B)  the Administrator or his authorized representative ... upon
            presentation of his credentials

        (i)   shall have a right of entry to, upon, or through any premises in
            which an effluent source is located  or in which  any records
            required to be maintained ... are located, and
        (ii)  may at reasonable times have access to and copy any records,
            inspect any monitoring equipment or method...  and sample
            any effluents which  the owner or operator of such source is      ^
            required to sample."                                             M

      For investigations conducted pursuant to the Safe Drinking Water
Act (SDWA), Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA), or Federal Insecticide,
Fungicide and Rodenticide  Act (FIFRA), the investigator must provide a
responsible official of the facility with a written notice  of inspection.  In
addition, during TSCA  inspections, TSCA Confidentiality Notice forms
should be offered.  At the completion of the TSCA inspection, a Declaration
of Confidential  Business  Information and Receipt  for  Samples  and
Documents forms are completed,  as appropriate.

      Many  NEIC inspections are conducted after obtaining consent from
the person(s) in charge of a site.  Consent means the intentional foregoing
of right to  privacy which is not the result of either fear, ignorance or
trickery. When obtaining  consent,  do  not suggest that civil or  criminal
consequence* will result from denial of entry.  Consent to photograph onsite
activities during any consensual administrative/civil investigation should
be obtained before  any photographs are taken.  In administrative/civil
matters, if the element of surprise is critical to the inspection, the site is
unoccupied,  or prior behavior indicates that entry may be denied, an
administrative search warrant may be  needed.  If so, employees should
consult the Enforcement Specialist Office  before the inspection is attempted.

-------














to
2
2
<
c
=
<
to co
WNMCNIAl I/
INVESIIGAIK
- 5ฃ
ซ 2o
i w
Hปป •? >
tato ป—
LJ *
^** CO

^ 5
™ ~
z> <
c c
-ฃ
|
o
en
UJ
1
C
<














5
K
O
*~


2
T?
$
I
5



•
7fป
n
2
ฃ

• SltCKjes
0.




,
•c
o
G.
t/5




_
5



.=











f^.


^ ^ป
.
11
•n 3
— <
~
c" ^ c' i
-- . x —
^ "- 2 ฃ

**v ^ - •
• 5^-5
i sHiss
r>
n
7, r.
un ^y ^
5 z Z
1 s:

.
ง> S -0 . O
"Sง*ฃ5"n
_ .' • pj 2 ic m ic o
lillllll

to
. |i
V c in ^_
t ?งE




8
<
c

o



o 'ฃ
T. RIซ
CD — CW
J E?r
B งBs
s
o ^
~ -r
V "*
ง 5




^
•5.
a
•c '*
il

C 

J^~
—
rv!
—
c
ป c "*•
15 '
9 a -
2 E -
™C ^~

O Jr






fx.
<
g


ป
"" ^
V Z
|c



r*.
ง
^ e\j
gc
oS


o
S
o

^
• —
o
^
eigancy )
E
•jj





n
fM
<
O



c
I
r^




8
i







o
<
(^
c
o




^
S
<
B:


CM
ft
O

c
.2
S
0
ฃ
a
a
1
E
UJ



1C

tf)
<
ฃ

CNf ^
* I
r~
H ซ
iง'


ซ
*
i
i

(V
I
is


t\i

o
—1 (V
U "
— O
UJ ^
U LU



O
CM
O
<ง
oS


n
o





in
^

IX
'*.

^


.
ซ
' I
ซ
^v
5
**
S
i
w
^
5
o
(B
fv.'
0
id*
1
K-
o
vri

.
Ol
~
Ol
1C
S

V
1C
0"
ซs
vc
ง2

s"*-
ป ^
ง
?-S
E?<
^ Vi
V
*ft
•>. 6
o ซ•!
B
• ซ

-------
      While consent may not be necessary for entering a public area or for      A
acting under emergency conditions, no  forcible  nonemergency entry is      m
permitted into a private area without a search warrant.  When consent is
withdrawn after the inspection has begun, the  team shall leave the area
and follow the procedures for denial of entry as detailed below.


Entry Procedures

      To comply with statutory  requirements during civil/administrative
investigations, a facility should be entered in the following manner:

      •     The plant premises should be entered through the  main gate
            or through the entrance designated by the facility personnel.

      •     The inspectors  should introduce themselves in a dignified,
            courteous manner to  a  responsible plant official,  clearly
            identify the organization they represent, and briefly describe
            the purpose of the inspection.  Identification credentials will
            always be presented before an inspection is commenced. A
            responsible plant official may be the owner, operator, officer or   r
            agent-in-charge  of the facility, including a person responsible
            for the plant's environmental affairs.

      •     If there is only a guard present at the entrance, the employee
            should present credentials  and ask the guard to call his
            supervisor or the responsible  official.

      •     If the  company provides a  blank sign-in sheet, log or visitors'
            register, it is acceptable to  sign it. However, NEIC employees
            must not sign a release of liability  (waiver) or any statement
            which would place limits on  EPA's  use of the information for
            enforcement purposes.

      •     When  problems  or questions  arise, the NEIC employee should
            call his supervisor or the Enforcement Specialist Office.


Penial Of Entry Procedures

      If entry is denied,  the employee should not contest the issue with the
facility representative, but immediately  do the following:

      •     Cite  the appropriate EPA  administered legislation  and
            inspection authority, ask if he/she  heard and understood the
            reason for your presence, and record the  answer and any
            reasons given for denial of entry.

-------
      •     Record the name, title and telephone number of the individual
            denying entry as well as the date and time.

      •     Leave the premises.

      •     If  consent  is withdrawn after the  inspection is already
            underway, retain all notes, records and samples and remove
            all equipment taken into the facility.

      After leaving the facility,  the  inspector should, at the earliest
opportunity, document the events related to the denial of entry and  inform
the  appropriate NEIC  supervisory  personnel  and  the  Enforcement
Specialist Office.

INVESTIGATIONS OF  ALLEGED CRIMINAL ATTTyyTV

      Participants in criminal investigations may be subject to additional
requirements governing  such investigations.   Because of the  severe
penalties that may be imposed on the individuals convicted of violating the
criminal provisions of the environmental laws or other  statutes, there is
closer scrutiny  of constitutional safeguards to  protect the individual's
rights.  Special Agents of the EPA, Criminal Investigations Division, will
provide instructions regarding these safeguards to the project team on all
investigations in which they are involved.  From  the beginning of such an
investigation until it is completed, the rights of all individuals must be fully
protected.

      If, during the  course of a civil/administrative inspection, aspects of
criminal activity become  apparent, the inspector should obtain all the
evidence documenting the possible violation. The Criminal Investigations
Division, or the appropriate Special Agent-in-Charge must then be apprised
immediately.  If a criminal  investigation is opened,  any files will be
maintained separately from the current (or planned) civil investigation.
Where  applicable,  the  Agency's policy on parallel  criminal  and civil
enforcement proceedings shall be followed.

COMMUNICATIONS EXTERNAL TO THE  OFFICE OF ENFORCEMENT

      In the course  of business, NEIC  employees  communicate with
persons outside the Agency's Office of Enforcement. Untimely releases of
information  and expressions  of opinions  can  greatly hinder NEIC's
investigative activities.  Judgment is required, and  supervisors should be
consulted  and  kept  informed  of  all  such  communications.    For
communications  regarding   matters  in  litigation and  criminal
investigations the Enforcement Specialist Office must be consulted.

      NEIC has established internal distribution  and riling procedures for
all correspondence.  Employees producing correspondence should do so

-------
through  their secretaries or check with their  secretaries regarding the
internal distribution of correspondence.

      Table 2 contains requirements for tranamittal of specific documents      *
and correspondence, external to the Office of Enforcement.

Requesting Information from Persons Subject to Regulation

      NEIC employees may  request information from  a facility before,
during or after an  on-site  investigation.   The environmental  statutes
require those regulated to keep various records and to make them available
to EPA upon request.  Several statutes also  protect the  trade secrets and
confidential  information of the regulated community.

      Any confidential information received in the mail  or hand-delivered
shall  be marked  Confidential and handled  as Confidential Business
Information.  'In compliance with EPA regulations, any written request for
company information, pursuant to statutory authority, must contain a
statement notifying  the facility that it  may designate all or part of the
information  requested by the Agency as confidential  in accordance  with 40
CFR Part 2.

      NEIC personnel should not accept confidential information unless it   r
is needed.  When  confidential information is entered into an inspector's
logbook the  entire  logbook must be treated as confidential,  The Evidence
Audit Unit (EAU)  will provide the inspectors with adhesive  labels and/or
stamps to mark information  submittals or logbook  notes of observations
which are claimed to be confidential. Where documents are provided by the
company, the company officials should be requested to mark the document
to identify the material which they claim is confidential.  Confidentiality
claims,  which  cover portions of otherwise nonconfidential documents,
should be clearly identified by company officials.  Logbooks must be marked
as confidential by the inspector; in no  case shall  company officials be
permitted to copy or review logbooks. See Chapter  III of this  manual for
additional   information  on  the  treatment  of confidential business
information.

      By statute, certain information, including effluent, emission, health
and safety data is not entitled to confidential treatment.

Disclosure of Official Information to the Public

      EPA policy is to make information about EPA and its work available,
freely and  equally,  to all individuals,  groups  and organizations.  This
policy, however, does not extend  to  confidential business information or
investigatory information relating to the suspected violation of federal laws.

-------



z
LU

UJ
O
OFFICE OF ENFOR'
UJ
o
t—
_j

LU
t—
X
LU
LU
O
CNJ UJ
o O
re o
•- o.
co
UJ
C
0
o
Q

<
CO

Z
LU
3

f^
0
UJ
Z
TRANSMITTAL OF 1







^
T~
CP
•a.
1







ฃ"ง
toe













Subject Matter
Transmitted

1

O
s
o
'9>
* M
O
Division Director and
and/or other request



o
w
S
re
32
if
5.g
I*
CO
D
o
T3
CD
^-
0





O
esponse lo Request lor NEI
ssislance
ec <
1 1 | 1
5 T3 3 C ?
o ฃ o fe w Q 72
0 re <-> SjB 0 |
1 IS 2 ซ*| ง ง
O Co -D O CO T? x p Q
& '>O>™^ฃcn&^ i
5 w -Q -Q* cytn-'™S1e5(nre
"•o * SJ.ฃ co ซuฃซ C0 c
?g ^ ^ฃ S! -|^.5 ?ซ f X
ซaD. Q-reซ5Ewซrea,w .5
ft 1 fl 1? ?lt || 1 1
CP'-X' Xo.cp^__;rQ3aJ>-re w •-
2-^w>;:a>re -c c
S| | |ฃ of |g| 5^ o | o o |
cฐ "i. tLo cฐ Eฃre c ฐ Tn ฃ To TS j/, g
Ot^ i-0 Ote^cOXฎ ft-03ฎ ^efc?
11 I if If mill ft! Ii
s
1 1
fl
^ w. Co ^
o o z c
^ o E ||
•ff ., jป _^ ••> CB C
OQ) tt>Q)wO f- P
3 ^ w .0 ,u .y " .go
C S: O 22 Si S C O)*r
re 5 - o O O ซ J*
v)ซ^rปซMซ>*ป(/j) ^•tQ
•R .52 o •ฃ jฃ J2 "B ป-^
5rea>T5re ซ^7= -5 ^
5 o ซป o o o 5 ง H^
o o. C- S. 8. S. 5E tT^
oco|^coco wuฎ ^^
•t-E_-c-gcc c^5 ? ฃ
u CP CP g- ^ CD cu a>Om Jo ^
i. cinP~c c c .. ^S i; ซ
^* Cr-SO^ ^ C ^*5>  o^;^ -So-
S.งo|feHB S 5Vg | 1
ฎOOw^OO OWJs g .
O-E^fe'c-E-E cQS> ie
o ^coS-111 "J m o f ^ w 5 2 |
e ป"•ง) 1 re ป" ซ" ป" 1 c ซ 5 "i ฃ a
-fe JrCD.tCDjC j= ฃ .S:j3^33.t ซ^"re
O OCOZO O O QO.Z1
i
c B
U5 CV •& ฐ-
~ 05 n in
S 2 C EC
S: E ซ o j| *

J^ 5 •ฃ a
i - E g 5l
1 1 U *ป 1 f 1 I!
ซ I ! 1! !! I I i ft
i i 1 11. IB ง ? 1 l|
1 i o | f|g ii 1 ; ง ^ g|
1 | a ? '-1^ ^ฃ 8 | 5 1 ^
15 Ii S ฃ cgS1 I'D T3 | 1 0
S g^3 ~ OCซ0ฃปCC S
-------
      Any NEIC employee who receives a request, written or verbal, for the      A
inspection  or  disclosure of NEIC investigatory records or confidential      1
information, including those made under judicial  discovery procedures,
the Privacy Act or the Freedom of Information Act, shall immediately
advise the Chief, Enforcement Specialist Office.

FOIA Response Procedures

      The NEIC Director is delegated the authority  to respond to Freedom
of Information Act (FOIA) requests directed to NEIC.  This delegation
authorizes  the Director to make the initial determination concerning the
release  of NEIC  records.   The  FOIA procedures  and requirements
contained in 40 CFR Part 2 Subpart A,  EPA Order  1550.1C and the FOIA
manual  apply to such determinations.

      Any  NEIC employee, including  NEIC  contractors, who receive a
written  request to disclose records, must immediately forward the request,
together with its envelope, to the Enforcement Specialist Office (ESO) which
will initiate efforts to identify and locate responsive records.  Responsive
records  will not necessarily be released. There  are numerous exemptions
which permit or even require NEIC to deny the request in whole or in part.   -
No acknowledgement of the  request is necessary.

      The ESO will date-stamp and log in the request; coordinate collection
of relevant documents; coordinate with appropriate Regional,  Headquarters
and Department of Justice (DOJ) attorneys; and prepare the response to the
FOIA request.

      Denials  shall  include the basis for withholding the documents
requested and  a statement  that the requestor has the right to appeal the
denial.  Only the NEIC Director  has the authority to deny disclosure of
requested records, in whole  or part.
                                  8

-------
                           II.  PROJECT MANAGEMENT
W            This section discusses how NEIC activities should be planned and
        implemented so that work is conducted in a timely manner and meets case
        objectives.

              Projects undertaken  by NEIC span  a wide variety of  activities
        ranging from one employee performing technical or administrative tasks to
        numerous employees from  diverse  disciplines working as a team to
        accomplish a series of complex tasks.  NEIC projects can include  any or all
        of these phases:
              Project Request
              Project Team Formation
              Background Information Review
              Project Plan Preparation
              Project Plan Implementation
              Report Preparation
              Enforcement Case  Support

              This  section of the  manual  discusses each phase and outlines
        pertinent NEIC policies [See Figure 1].

              Not all of these phases are required for each NEIC project.  Moreover,
ป        these phases are not necessarily  discrete steps to be performed in order,
        before going on to the next phase.  A project team may repeat or return to
        any phase during the life of the project and may work on several phases
        simultaneously.

        PROJECT REQUEST

              Requests may be received from other  offices of EPA, other Federal
        agencies, State  agencies  and local governments.   Unless otherwise
        directed, all requests should be sent to the  Director  of NEIC.  Prior to
        preparing a  request, requesting  parties  are  encouraged  to make a
        preliminary inquiry  to  determine  if NEIC  can provide  the assistance
        required. Depending on  the type of assistance needed, NEIC may respond
        to verbal requests. Acceptance of a verbal request  is normally given on a
        tentative basis pending receipt of a written  request. Any request should
        detail the objectives, relate those objectives to the enforcement  actions
        anticipated, specify general time frames  for the work and identify the
        technical and/or legal contactts) of the requesting office. A written request
        facilitates understanding of the request by all involved parties.  However,
        routine  or recurring  requests may not require any written request and
        NEIC, at its option, may accept any project without a written request.

              Requests received by NEIC have  included  those  which require
        extensive field investigative work on environmental problems (e.g., multi*

-------
    CO
    u
    C
    •H

^  ซ



  •1
    Z
    5J


    •-s
    r*.
    w

    ซ
                    S?
 l^

 12
.U
.^1
Q o
   00
U g

ii








ง
if-
Is
fv
**

VI
I
t
.c.
^^^
c

in
c/t
eJb
ฃ -a
c. ^J
o S 2
- ? 'c S
|| | 5
•x-
ฃ.
ซ^
II
•- re
Z ซ*
L> '^
S ^
2 u
^ >
                                 y 3


                                 C ซ>

                                 •F c
                                           I is
                                           — o

                                           ฃ.!
                                                                    o
                                                                    c c
                                                                    - o
                        "2

                         re
                                               

                                             '•J C

                                             — O




                                             II
                                                  5>ซ|  '3   g I ซ
                                                    Mi

                                                   •So

                                                   •S."
                                                    c *
                                                                            O
                                                            c_ u t>
                         cs
                         c
                         n


                   s-s   i
                                •gs
                                       u
                                             <ซ     >-.
                                             O   	 -a

                                             3   ^2
                                             ^   ii v>
                                             S   e s
                                             u   o u
      :=     c.


      •S'-B   y
      — 5   Q^


      ^1   ^

      .5 E   CX
                                                   u  ซซ


                                                  c ? SJ
                                                  W C 3
•3$   o|
w-t—   (^ —

ฃ  S  -^ S).S
>N 4^   ^ *ni —-
                                                                                u c
                                 V>   (j

                                 >   3




                                I   !
                                 o   S
                                 —   re
u   C.

&.   es
                                                               -B
                                                                        U


                                                                        ea

                                                                        3
                                                      5

                                                     ~ ซ—
                                                          5
                                                          
-------
 media  investigations), as well as others which require only a  limited
 technical or legal review of a remedial or abatement proposal, or analytical
 support for Regional  enforcement cases.  Other requests have involved
 development of enforcement cages,  performance  audits,  compliance
 evaluation  inspections,  pesticide  investigations,   ground   water
 investigations and pollution control technology assessments.

      NEIC  usually will notify the requesting party in writing when it
 accepts  the project.  When possible, the notification also will include a
 tentative schedule.   Specific NEIC employees should  be named as the
 contacts  for coordination with the requesting  party.   In  addition, the
 acceptance notice should identify any further information needed by NEIC.


 PROJECT TEAM FORMATION

 Civil Investigations

      Once  a project  is accepted,  a project team is organized.   It  will
 include representatives from those NEIC organizational units participating
 in the project.  As appropriate, representatives from outside NEIC (e. g.,
 the U.S. Department of Justice) may also participate in team activities and
 discussions.

      The initial functions of the project team are to determine:

      •     The applicable statutory/regulatory provisions

      •     The evidence which  must be  obtained  to  address  project
            objectives

      •     The resources and scheduling necessary to achieve objectives

      •     The technical expertise necessary to evaluate the target or
            source.

      The team has the  responsibility to identify and minimize potential
problems. Team members must be knowledgeable about their respective
units' activities in the particular project, and are responsible for describing
or defending that activity in  subsequent  negotiations  and/or legal
proceedings.

      NEIC names a  specific  individual  from the project  team  as  the
coordinator.  This person generally serves as a central point of contact with
the  requesting party  and is  responsible  for communicating  and
coordinating project  requirements and information with  all involved
parties.   In addition, this person must assure that a requestor's needs are
met, including preparation of the necessary documents and reports.
                                 11

-------
      The makeup and coordination of the project team is dictated by the
type of investigation conducted.  Sometimes a  "team" may consist of only
one person.

Criminal Investigations

      In criminal  investigations,  the  NEIC  project  coordinator  is
responsible for sampling, analysis and other technical activities and works
with  the EPA  Special  Agent, FBI  agent and/or the appropnate U.S.
Attorneys' Office.

BACKGROUND  INFORMATION •REVIEW

      The purpose of a background information  review is to gather
information  pertinent to the project.  This review usually begins before a
project plan is written and continues throughout the course of a project.
The information  obtained is used  to prepare the project plan,  conduct the
field investigation, and write the report.

      The scope  and duration of the background review are related to the
project  objectives  and  vary with  project  complexity.   Background
information  is available through the  in-house and affiliated libraries and
the NEIC computerized data retrieval systems.  Meetings may be held with
EPA Headquarters, Regional  offices  and/or State and local agencies and
other  Federal agencies to discuss  the project, and to review and  obtain
copies of relevant  files.  Where necessary, a site reconnaissance  and/or
preliminary  site  visit provides verification and/or updating of background
information.  Examples  of information  obtained and/or  reviewed may
include:

      •     Applicable (current and previous) State and Federal laws and
           regulations

      •     Current and previous facility permits and permit applications

      •     Previous inspection reports

      •     Case  files  from  previous  and  pending   enforcement
           actions/litigation

      •     Correspondence between regulatory agencies and the facility

      •     Administrative Orders,  settlement agreements,  compliance
           schedules

      •     Headquarters/Regional legal strategy and/or policy related to
           the NEIC investigation
                                 12

-------
      •     Specific descriptions of facility processes and pollution control
            systems

      *     Self-monitoring data

      •     Alternative control and treatment technology applicable to the
            facilities) being investigated

      •     Available and  state-of-the-art  sampling and  analytical
            methods

      •     Information received through interviews of informants

      In all  investigations requiring field  activities, knowledge  of the
potential  and existing safety hazards associated  with the facilities or
targets, and local emergency services, is essential.

PROJECT PLAN PREPARATION

      The format of a project plan will depend on the scope of the project.
Some  projects  require a detailed  plan,  describing the  objectives,
enforcement history,  facility operation,  investigative  methods,  safety
protocols, etc.  In others, a memorandum defining the objectives, tasks and
schedules may suffice.  A general outline of NEIC project activities may be
included in  the  written response to a requesting party.  After sufficient
background information has been obtained and evaluated, a detailed project
plan can be  prepared.  In many  cases the  plan is not completed until
planning  meetings have  been held,  files  have been reviewed,  and  a
preliminary site visit has been made. Projects requiring only analytical
services may not require a project plan. In  some cases, the NEIC project
acceptance letter is a sufficient project plan, as long as  safety issues are
addressed, as necessary, in the letter or in a separate safety plan.

      The project coordinator, in conjunction with  other team members,
prepares the project plan detailing the scope, logistics, and objectives.  In
addition, other items usually addressed in a project plan include:

      •     Background  information.    For example,   background
            information for a hazardous waste treatment,  storage and
            disposal  facility investigation  or an industrial   facility
            evaluation, may  include a summary of processes, sources of
            pollution - their  control or treatment,  applicable regulations
            and permit requirements.  In those investigations where there
            is, or a potential  exists for groundwater pollution, information
            on  the geologic  and  hydrogeologic conditions, and on-site
            hazardous waste disposal operations, are necessary  for plan
            development.
                                  13

-------
      •     Investigative  methods.  For example, this should include  a
            description of sampling locations and procedures, analytical       4
            requirements, the on-site  records review and collection of       V
            operating process data and information.

      •     Quality assurance/quality control procedures

      •     Document control  and chain-of-custody procedures

      •     Safety requirements and safety plan for on-site activities

      •     Schedules for investigative activities.  This  should include
            schedules for field work, analyses, reports, etc.

      Prior to commencing a field investigation, a briefing  session with all
project team members should  be held.  At that time, those aspects of the
investigation  such as communication with facility personnel, sampling
and  monitoring  requirements, test  procedures  and analyses, special
technical needs, legal aspects and safety requirements can be discussed.

      The project coordinator, as the identified contact person representing
the project team, should communicate  closely with the requestor during the    ~
planning phase  to ensure the identified objectives are addressed.  The
completed project plan represents an agreement between the requestor and
NEIC.

      Project  plans  (draft  or  final)   for   activities   related  to
administrative/civil enforcement cases will usually be transmitted by an
Assistant Director or the Deputy Director [Table 2}. The project coordinator
numbers draft copies  in  red  ink  and maintains  a record  showing who
received draft copies  and when such copies were  returned.  The project
coordinator  should  have all  draft  copies  returned.   Changes  and
modifications desired by  the  requestor should  be communicated to the
project coordinator who will assure that all affected parties are apprised of
the requested changes and provided an opportunity to respond.  Once all
concerned parties agree  to the  project plan, it serves  as a reference
document for the project.  The plan is subject to change as circumstances
warrant and should contain a statement to that effect.  Any change(s)
should be documented and appropriate parties notified.

      Because of the  greater  sensitivity  associated  with  criminal
investigations, the distribution and review of planning documents will be
limited. Transmittal external to the Office of Enforcement of any technical
document prepared by NEIC for a criminal investigation  must be by the
Chief, Enforcement Specialist Office.
                                  14

-------
 PROJECT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

ป      Project activities include legal and technical information searches,
 facility inspections, process and pollution control technology evaluations,
 sampling, monitoring, laboratory analyses, laboratory evaluations  and
 analytical data reviews.   To the extent possible, these activities are
 conducted following established NEIC techniques and  standard operating
 procedures,  EPA  policy  and  program  guidance  and  promulgated
 regulations. When new methods  or modifications to existing procedures
 are appropriate, these changes will be documented.

      Each team member must assure that all work is conducted safely
 and that required safety equipment is used.  All participants must adhere
 to the applicable safety requirements.

      Because the information generated during an investigation can be
 subjected  to close scrutiny during subsequent negotiations and/or litigation,
 procedures ensuring the integrity and security  of all  evidence must be
 followed throughout any project. See Part III, Evidence Management.

 REPORT PREPARATION

      NEIC prepares  various reports in carrying  out its enforcement
 program responsibilities. These reports include field trip reports, status or
 progress reports, technical memoranda  and enforcement investigation
• reports all of which detail  the who, what, where, when, and how of the
 enforcement  activity.   NEIC reports  can be  used   by Regional  and
 Headquarters offices,  other law  enforcement organizations,  the  U.S.
 Department of Justice and U.S. Attorneys to support enforcement actions.
 Other reports prepared by NEIC include internal procedures and operating
 manuals,  technical reports  and papers (e.g.,  a report on an  NEIC-
 developed laboratory procedure or field investigation technique).  Report
 format, including the color of the  cover, should be in accordance with the
 NEIC Report  Services Operating Procedures  Manual.

      Enforcement reports are prepared by  the appropriate individual or
project team members.  All participants in the report preparation process
must assure that  their individual contributions to the report and other
 documents are accurate, fully supportable and commensurate with Agency
and NEIC policies. Although the overall responsibility for preparation  and
 content of the reports (including all supporting documents) rests with the
project coordinator, all team members must accept responsibility  for the
quality, accuracy and admissibility of the information in the finy] report.
      Reports are reviewed internally prior to distribution in either draft or
final form outside of NEIC.  The NEIC reviewers can include the team
members and others directly involved in the project and report preparation
process,  as  well  as appropriate Assistant Directors  and their Branch
Chiefs, the Deputy Director and the Chief, Enforcement Specialist Office.
                                 15

-------
External review drafts should be transmitted according to Table 2.  All
external review drafts will  be numbered in red ink and stamped on the      A
cover page with the following statement: DRAFT REPORT - FOR AGENCY      1
REVIEW ONLY, DO NOT DUPLICATE. All other pages of the draft will      ^
also be marked DRAFT.

      Reports  prepared for  criminal investigations will receive  limited
distribution.  Any draft or final  report prepared by NEIC for a criminal
investigation whach must be sent  external to the Office of Enforcement will
be transmitted by the Chief, Enforcement Specialist Office.

      Copies  of NEIC civil enforcement reports are maintained by the
library.  NEIC reports may receive public distribution through the National
Technical Information Service (NTIS).  Their availability to the public is
announced  through the  NTIS  publication  "Government  Reports
Announcement" and  a fee is  set  by the NTIS for their reproduction and
distribution in either paper or microfiche form.

      External  distribution of enforcement reports  not available through
NTIS must be  authorized through the Chief, Enforcement Specialist Office
who  will consult with the project coordinator  and  the appropriate EPA
Office of Regional Counsel.                                              .

      Distribution is also restricted for reports that contain confidential
business information.   Under  several environmental  laws,  including
TSCA, businesses  may claim certain  information given to EPA to be
confidential business information.  When  a report contains confidential
business information,  the  title  page  and every page  containing that
information is  marked CONFIDENTIAL.

      All reports containing confidential information will be kept in secure
areas until  restrictions are removed. Questions concerning the availability
of reports should be directed to the Enforcement Specialist Office.

ENFORCEMENT CASE SUPPORT

      Completion and transmittal of a  report does  not signify the end of
NEIC involvement in an investigation. When the initial assistance activity
leads to an enforcement action, NEIC staff are available to:

      •    Participate in the preparation of the enforcement case and in
           subsequent legal proceedings

      •    Assist in negotiations

      •    Provide further technical consultation and assistance (e.g.,
           additional field  work  as necessary)
                                 16

-------
      As necessary,  NT 1C personnel  are  available to  serve as witnesses
(fact  and  expert)  and  to  provide technical and legal assistance  to
government attorneys before and during depositions, pretrial hearings and
trials.

      The project coordinator is responsible for tracking any enforcement
action planned or being taken by the requesting party.  In conjunction with
the Enforcement Specialist  Office,  this individual is also  responsible for
identifying and offering any other support NEIC can provide.
                                  17

-------
                   III. EVIDENCE MANAGEMENT
SAMPLE CONTROL
      A sample is  one type of physical evidence collected  during  an
investigation.  An essential part of all NEIC enforcement investigations is
accounting for the  evidence  gathered.  To ensure the integrity of the
evidence,  the  following  sample  identification  and  chain-of-custody
procedures have been established.  The use of alternative procedures  must
be documented.

Sample Identification

      When in-situ measurements are made,  the data are recorded directly
into  logbooks or are electronically recorded, with identifying information
(project code, station number, station location, date, time and  samplers),
field observations  and remarks.  Examples of in-situ measurements
include pH, temperature, conductivity, flow measurement, continuous  air
monitoring and stack gas analysis.

      Samples, other than in-situ  measurements, are identified  by a
sample tag or other  appropriate identification. These samples are removed
and transported from the sampling location to a laboratory or other location
for analysis.  Whenever a sample is separated into portions to be provided to
another party each portion is identified by a sample tag marked "split."  In
a similar fashion,  tags will be marked for "Blank" or "Replicate" samples.
The information recorded on the sample tag includes:

   •  Project Code       (A three-alpha-numeric digit assigned by NEIC)

   •  Project  Name

   •  Station Location   (Description)

   •  Station No.        (Usually a two digit code)

   •  Date

   •  Time

   •  Samplers' signatures

   •  Remarks         (The samplers record pertinent information
                      including preservatives used)

      After collection,  the  samples are maintained in accordance with the
chain-of-custody procedures discussed below.
                                 IS

-------
ft
      Blank, uniquely numbered sample  tags,  logbooks and other
accountable documents are provided by the Evidence Audit Unit.
              NEIC policy is that sample splits will be offered to facility officials
        whenever samples  are  collected dunng a  civil  investigation.   Section
        3007(a)(2) of the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) states
        ". . .If the officer, employee or representative obtains any samples, prior to
        leaving the premises, he  shall give to the  owner,  operator or agent-in-
        charge a receipt describing the samples obtained and if requested a portion
        of each such sample equal in  volume or weight to the portion retained."
        Section 104 of CERCLA  contains similar requirements. Samples may also
        be split with other Government agencies.  Whether split samples should be
        collected  or given to facility personnel in  a criminal investigation is a
        decision to be made  by the EPA Special Agent assigned to the case and the
        prosecuting attorney (e.g. Assistant U.S. Attorney).

              When samples  are split, a  separate Receipt for  Samples form
        [Figures 2 and 3] is prepared for those samples and marked to indicate with
        whom the samples  are  being split.   The person relinquishing the split
        samples to the facility or agency should request the  signature of the party or
        his  representative acknowledging  receipt   of  the  samples.   If a
ป        representative is unavailable or refuses to sign,  this is noted  in  the
        "Received by" space.  When splits are offered  but  refused,  such refusal
        should be documented on the Receipt for Samples form or in the logbook or
        elsewhere.

        Chain-of-Custodv for Samples

             Due  to  the  evidentiary nature of samples collected  during
        enforcement investigations, possession must be traceable from the time the
        samples are collected until they or  the data  derived from the samples  are
        introduced as evidence in legal proceedings.  To maintain and document
        sample possession, chain-of-custody procedures are followed.
             All samples collected as evidence are to be maintained under secure
        conditions and documented  chain-of-custody procedures.  In general, as
        few people as possible should be a part of the  chain-of-custody. A sample is
        under custody if:

              •     It is in your possession.
              •     It is in your view, after being in your possession.
              •     You secured the  sample  in an appropriate container and made
                   arrangements to  transport it to the laboratory.
                                         19

-------
1
2  J
Z _
O c
G I
t*. w
X 5
                                                      • in
                                                      i ro
          FIGURE 2 - RECEIPT FOR SAMPLES
                    Best available copy.

-------
ft
                                                     ILO
                                                     iO
                                                     *3-
                                                     CM
                                                             ; -•  i  K,
                                                             -r ,-  ^  ฃ  Z
             2 5
                   (_
                   V
X
ซ
ซ!
                 fl*
                       J

                        V
                      il?)
                  = g-
                 •G i^ v
                  ^ cr 3
                  s^3,
                              T I
                              i
                                crv
                   ^_
                   c
                                  •2.
                                  fi



                                Q ro" 03
                                *"" fl *i
                                .^ Z Z
                X
                io
                    ;ko  *
                     -  J  i
                 =  m
                 O o o
                  FIGURE 3 - COMPLETED RECEIPT FOR SAMPLES
                                  Best available copy.

-------
  •     You transferred the sample to authorized personnel.
  •     It is held in a secure area.

  Transfer of Custody and Shipment

  •     Samples are  accompanied  by  a Chain-of-Custody Record
       [Figure 4].  When transferring the possession of samples, the
       individuals relinquishing and receiving will sign, date and
       note the  time  on the Record. This Record documents sample
       custody transfer.   Figure 5  illustrates a completed Chain-of-
       Custody Record.

  •     Samples  will  be  packaged properly*  for  shipment and
       dispatched to  the appropriate laboratory for analysis,  with a
       separate   Chain-of-Custody Record  accompanying   each
       shipment.  Shipping containers will be padlocked or otherwise
       sealed for shipment  to the laboratory.

  •     All  shipments  should be accompanied by the completed  Chain-
       of-Custody Record.  The original record will accompany the
       shipment,  and  a  copy  will be  retained by the  Project
       Coordinator.

  •     Freight bills, post office receipts and Bills of Lading must be
       retained  as  part  of  the  permanent documentation." If
       samples can be sent by mail (not those samples suspected of
       containing hazardous  materials), the  package  should  be
       registered with return receipt requested.

  Laboratory Custody

  •     Laboratories at NEIC  are locked at all times. Access is limited
       to authorized personnel and accompanied visitors.

  •     Laboratory personnel accept custody of the snipped samples
       and verify that the information on the sample tags matches
       that on the Chain-of-Custody Record. Pertinent information as
       to shipment, pickup, courier, etc. is entered in the "Remarks"
       section.  The laboratory recipient of the samples assures that
       all  samples are transferred  to the proper analyst or stored in
       the appropriate secure area.
See NEIC Standard Operating Procedures for Packaging, Marketing, Labeling and
Shipping of Samples (DOT requirements).
Copies of the bills and receipts may be provided to the NEIC Office of Planning and
Management to assure proper payment.  Onginais of these documents are retained tor the
project file.
                             22

-------
r r
Z
o
,.  x *
=  R!
                 !  i
                                         I   I
                                             • t
                                                      i o:
                                                 .1-1
      FIGURE 4 . CHAIN-OF-CUSTODY RECORD


                   Best available copy.

-------
i s 8*
*   LJ -
  O
  O
ซ Q^ป
2 tfj
         • ปปD
         ••••co
             C -
               ^  ?>
             •2 -r -z
            s s
                s
             rsj rf)
               2 2
             rr rJ 
-------
ft
The laboratory will use the sample tag number, sample station
number or assign a unique laboratory number to identify each
sample.

Laboratory personnel are responsible for the care and custody
of samples from the tame they are received until the sample is
exhausted or while it is in storage.

Each  Laboratory Services  Branch  will follow  a  system for
tracking samples through the  laboratory and identifying the
documents generated  during the analysis of those  samples.
Each  employee  must  understand  the  Standard Operating
Procedures applicable to his/her respective Branch.

After sample analyses and necessary quality assurance checks
have been completed, the remaining portion of the sample, will
be kept secured as evidence until disposal is authorized  as
described below.   All identifying  tags, data sheets and
laboratory records must be retained as part of the permanent
documentation unless they are contaminated.  If records are
contaminated they can be enclosed in plastic and copied before
being disposed of as hazardous  waste.

The Assistant Director, Laboratory Services,  in coordination
with the Chief, Enforcement Specialist Office, and the project
coordinator will authorize disposal of samples and remaining
sample portions for all administrative/civil investigations. For
criminal investigations,  the Assistant Director, Laboratory
Services,  will  contact  the EPA  Criminal  Investigations
Division or other  appropriate offices (e.g.  FBI,  DOJ)  to
coordinate  the disposal  of samples collected in  support of
criminal investigations.
         DOCUMENT CONTROL

               The goals of document control are: (1) to assure that all documents
         generated or obtained by NEIC personnel will be accounted for  when the
         project is completed and (2) to prevent premature or inadvertent disclosure
         of information.  This program includes a  serialized  document system, a
         document inventory procedure and an evidentiary filing system, operated
         and controlled by the Evidence Audit Unit  (EAU).  The Document Control
         Officer (DCO) maintains separate locked  files  for confidential business
         information.   The protocol for the transmittal of documents generated
         during an enforcement investigation is, in large part, implemented and
         monitored by the Enforcement Specialist  Office [See Table 2].
                                          25

-------
      To provide document accountability for technical investigations, each
of the document categories discussed below features a unique serialized
number auigned by EAU for each item within the category.  Accountable
documents used or generated  by NEIC employees include logbooks, sample
tags,  graphs,  Chain-of-Custody forms, Receipt for  Samples  forms, and
bench sheets.  The project coordinator disposes of any unused serialized
documents or  may  return  them to EAU.  Unless prohibited by weather,
waterproof ink should be  used to record all data.  When weather conditions
prohibit use of waterproof ink,  entries should be made using a non smear
lead pencil (e.g. 2H or 3H).

Project Logbooks

      The project coordinator is responsible for  the transfer  of logbooks to
field team members.  Each person signs  their logbook upon receipt and
records all information pertinent to the project in that logbook.  A separate
logbook is used for each project.

      Logbook entries should be dated, legible and  contain an accurate,
factual and complete account of the investigation.  Because the logbook is
the basis for  the later  written reports, it must contain only facts and
observations.  Language  should  be objective, factual and free  of the
inspector's personal  feelings,  characterizations, speculation, or  other
terminology which  is inappropriate.  Entries made  by individuals other
than  the  person to whom  the  logbook was assigned must  be  dated and
signed by the individual making the entry.

      All project logbooks are the property of NEIC and are to be returned
by the project coordinator to  the Evidence Audit Unit when a project has
been  concluded.  Representatives of facilities being inspected shall not be
permitted to copy or review  logbook notes.*

Sample Taps

      Serialized  sample tags are used to identify samples.  After the tag
has been completed, it  is attached to a sample.   Transfer to  another
individual is by use of a Receipt for Samples form [Figures 2  & 3]. Sample
tags contaminated  with  a hazardous substance will not  be saved.  The
serial number of the  contaminated tag must be noted in  the  appropriate
logbook  and  the  project  coordinator  notified.   All information  from
contaminated tags is recorded and  the tags are photocopied, if possible, and
disposed  of.   At  the completion of the  field activities, all unused tags
(including those  damaged or  voided) must be returned to  the project
coordinator for disposal or returned to EAU.
   As appropriate, the inspector may copy document and lor photograph logs for facility
   representatives.
                                  26

-------
 Chain-Qf-Cmtodv Records

       Serialized Chain-of-Custody Records are distributed in a manner
 similar to that used for sample tags.  When samples are transferred  to
 laboratory personnel, the recipient, after signing, files it in a secure place.
 When dispatching  samples via  common earner the original accompanies
 the shipment and is signed  by the receiving  laboratory  personnel.
 Employees of common earners do not sign the Chain-of-Custody form.

       When  samples  are  split  with the  source  or another Government
 agency, this is documented on a Receipt for Samples form. The tag senal
 numbers from all splits are recorded on the form and a copy of the form is
 provided for the source or agency. The white originals are returned to the
 project coordinator.

 Lidar  Magnetic Tapes

       Lidar data are recorded on the on-board computer.  This computer is
 used to analyze data and print results in report format.  After analysis the
 data are archived to a magnetic tape and maintained as an evidence record.

 Laboratory Records

      The instrument logbooks, bench sheets and  the analyst's personal
 notebook(s) must contain information sufficient  to recall  and describe each
 step of the analysis performed.  Sufficient detail also is necessary to enable
 others to reconstruct the procedures followed should the original analyst be
 unavailable for testimony.  Any irregularities observed during the testing
 process need to be noted. If,  in the technical judgment of the analyst, it  is
 necessary to modify a particular method  to  perform  an  analysis,  the
 modification must be justified and properly documented.

      The numbered laboratory notebook assigned to an individual can be
 used  for more than  one  project; however, only  one  project  should  be
 discussed on each page. That page must be labeled with the project code,
 dated and signed by the individual.

      Where applicable, a numbered instrument logbook is used to record
 information relating  to calibration and  maintenance  of a  particular
 laboratory instrument.

      In  addition to  information documenting the analyses  performed,
field analysts should document in their project logbooks, in their laboratory
notebooks, or on bench sheets the date  and calibration results for mobile
laboratory equipment.  A record is also kept of any incidents; for example,
the disruption of electrical  service to the laboratory,  tampering with
Government vehicles or equipment, etc.  Appropriate notations regarding
                                 27

-------
visitors to the mobile laboratory, such as facility personnel, are entered in       A
the logbook.                                                                 m

Photographa

      When photographs or videotapes are  taken which show aspects of an
investigation, descriptions of those photographs or videotapes are entered in
a logbook. Identifying information (e.g.  photographer, date, time, site
location, etc.) is normally entered into the  logbook as photos (or groups of
photos) are taken.  The photographer is not required to record the aperture
settings and  shutter speeds for photographs taken  within the normal
automatic exposure range.  Special lenses,  films, filters or other image
enhancement techniques must be noted in the logbook, if they could distort
or misrepresent what is depicted in the photographs. Logbook notations
and other documentation used  to  account  for film  processing  must be
maintained.   Once  developed,  the slides  or  photographic prints are
identified  to correspond with the logbook descriptions.

Corrections to Pocumentation

      If an error is made  on  an accountable  document assigned to one   r
individual, that individual may make contemporaneous corrections simply
by drawing a line through the error, initialing it and entering the correct
information.  Any subsequent error discovered should be corrected by the
person who made the entry, the person who discovered the error, or
another person familiar with the work.  All subsequent corrections must be
initialed and dated.

      If a sample tag is separated from a sample and lost in shipment, or a
tag was never prepared for a sample, or a  properly tagged sample was not
transferred  with a  formal NEIC  Chain-of-Custody Record, a  written
statement should  be  prepared  detailing  how,  when, and to whom the
sample was collected, air-dispatched, or hand-transferred.  The statement
should include all pertinent information, such as entries in field logbooks
regarding the sample, whether the sample was in the sample coDectors
physical possession or in a locked compartment until hand-transferred to
the laboratory, etc.  Copies of the statement are distributed to the project
coordinator and the appropriate Branch project files.

Consistenc
      Each Branch or Division assembles its documents and cross-checks
information on corresponding sample tags, custody records, bench sheets,
analyst notebooks and other logbooks to ensure that data pertaining to each
particular sample is  complete  and consistent throughout the record.  The
file should be  arranged according to the  procedures described in this
manual under  "Evidentiary File."  The  project coordinator concurrently
performs a cross-check of field documents Gogbooks, custody records, etc.)
                                 28

-------
to ensure that the field information is complete.  The laboratory similarly
reviews their documentation for completeness.  The EAU will review files
after theปe have  been transferred to EAU.   Criminal case files are
inventoried and numbered at the time of file assembly by the EAU or the
respective NEIC Branches/Divisions involved in  the case.

Branch/Division Files

      After a Branch has completed its work for a particular investigation,
all  documents generated from that project  should be assembled  in the
Branch or Division file.  Individuals may retain clean (no handwritten
comments) copies  of documents for their personal files but only after
personally verifying that the original or similar copy is in the file.  Each
project coordinator is responsible for assuring the collection and assembly
of all documents relative to a project at the time the project objectives are
completed.  The technical investigation  portion of criminal case files  is
numbered, inventoried and  transferred to EAU for storage.  Any  record
leaving the file after it has been transferred to EAU must be signed out.

Evidentiary Files

      When NEIC has completed  the project  objectives, all inventoried
Branch and Division file documents are reviewed and submitted to EAU, as
specified above. The evidentiary file should be organized into the following
document classes in this sequence:

      •    Privileged  or Confidential Information
      •    Project Plan
      •    Project logbooks
      •    Sampling documentation
           -  Sample tags
           -  Chain-of-Custody Records
           -  Receipt for Samples forms
           Laboratory records (logbooks, bench sheets, etc.)
           Project Correspondence
           Documents obtained from facilities being investigated
           Background information
           Report notes, calculations, etc.
           Photos, maps and drawings
           Final  reports)
           Litigation/settlement documents
           Other documents,  as appropriate.

      Once deposited  in the  evidentiary file,  documents  may only be
checked out through the EAU document control  personnel.
                                 2S

-------
Litigation Document*                                                    ^

     Any litigation reports, letters, memoranda, draft court documents,
etc. from the Enforcement Specialist Office or other Government attorney
which discuss legal matters or strategies should be separately identified in
individual  Branch and Division files.  These documents should be marked
to identify the privileged nature of their contents. Internal distribution is
limited to the appropriate project participants and their supervisors.

Confidential Business Information

     Some information requested and obtained by NEIC may contain trade
secrets which companies may request be guarded as confidential business
information (CBI).  In general,  NEIC employees who have a need to know
may have  access to CBI. When CBI is  obtained, NEIC employees must
follow specific requirements to protect the information.  The regulations to
be complied with by every employee are at 40 CFR Part 2, Subpart B. Those
requirements vary with the particular law involved.  If in doubt regarding
the  requirements governing  the  handling  of documents  identified
as"confidential"   or  "trade secret," employees  should  consult  the
Enforcement Specialist Office.       -                                  .

     Of particular importance are the provisions of Section 14 of the Toxic
Substances Control Act (TSCA).  A company may make confidentiality
claims  for  any and all information provided to the Agency with  the
condition that specific criteria under TSCA are met.  Once confidentiality
under TSCA is claimed., stringent procedures are followed to maintain the
confidentiality of that information.  Refer to the TSCA Confidential
Business  Information  Security  Manual,  U.S.  EPA,  Office of  Toxic
Substances (Approved Nov. 1, 1985), for guidance.  Before obtaining access
to anv  CBI protected under TSCA. even- person must obtain TSCA CBI
clearance through the EAU.

     All analytical work  conducted on  confidential samples  will be
performed in a manner to preserve the confidentiality of the information
generated.  The resulting documentation will be isolated from  the Branch
or Division files when the records are called in by EAU.

EVIDENCE AUDIT

     The Evidence Audit Unit (EAU) provides a continuing evaluation of
enforcement investigation activities. This evaluation addresses sample
control, document control, chain-of-custody, file assembly and evidence
security.

     Some projects may be selected for an audit. The audit may include
an  evaluation of sampling, sample custody, data recording and  any
supporting documentation.

-------
ft
      For administrative/civil investigations and the technical portions of
criminal investigations, EAU requires  submission of all records for
inclusion in the evidentiary file at the completion of a project.  These files
are reviewed to assure that all documents generated or obtained during the
course of the investigation are present. Any discrepancies are brought to
the  attention of the project  coordinator and the Chief,  Enforcement
Specialist Office.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A Quality Assurance (QA) program is established at NEIC to assure
that data  produced are  of known and documented quality.  QA program
requirements cover all  measurement activities performed,  supported or
required by NEIC.  The  authority and responsibility for  directing QA
activities within NEIC are delegated to the QA Officer (QAO). QA direction
and guidance are.specified in the NEIC QA Program Plan.

      The   Quality  Assurance  Officer's  responsibilities   include
development, evaluation and documentation of QA policies and procedures
at NEIC.    The QAO  is assisted by QA division  representatives  in
implementing and  coordinating the QA program.  All employees involved
in sampling or measurement activities are responsible  for carrying out
quality assurance requirements in  accordance with the QA Program Plan
and any NEIC standard  operating procedure and for informing the QAO or
QA coordinators of the need for corrective actions.

      The QAO develops and conducts system audits to monitor the QA
program and the quality  of data produced.
                                        31

-------
     APPENDIX





WITNESS GUIDELINES

-------
ft
                       WITNESS GUIDELINES

      The  following suggestions  are  made for  prospective witnesses in
order to lessen the fears  and apprehensions which almost everyone  has
when first testifying before a board, commission, hearing officer or in
court. Even those who have testified previously encounter a  certain anxiety
when called for  a repeat  performance.   When  a  witness is  properly
prepared, both with regard to the subject matter of testimony and conduct
on the witness stand, there should be little fear about testifying.

      It is of utmost importance that the witness be thoroughly prepared on
the subject matter of the testimony.   Only the witness can recall what
occurred in the field and/or laboratory and why. Since many cases are tried
substantially after the field and laboratory activities have been conducted, it
is imperative that adequate documentation be originally prepared in order
that a witness' memory may be refreshed.  A thorough and detailed review
of all relevant documents is the  only way prospective witnesses  can be
adequately prepared.

      In order to  assist witnesses on how they should conduct themselves
the following suggestions are given.

      The witness will be  required to take an oath to tell the truth. The
important point is to remember that there are two ways to  tell the truth -
one is a halting, stumbling, hesitant manner, which makes the trier of fact
ป(the hearing officer, judge  or jury) doubt that the witness is telling all the
facts in a truthful way; and the other way is in a confident, straightforward
manner, which inspires faith in what is being said.  It is most important
that the witness testify credibly.  To assist a witness in testifying in such a
manner, a list of time-proven hints and aids are provided below.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR A WITNESS

      If you are to be a witness in a  case involving testimony concerning
the appearance of an object, place,  condition,  etc.,  try to refresh your
recollection by again inspecting the object, place, condition,  field notes and
records, etc., before the hearing or trial.  While making such inspection,
close your  eyes and try to  picture the item and recall, if you  can,  the
important points of your testimony.  Repeat this until you have thoroughly
familiariaad yourself with the features of your testimony that will be given,

      Before you testify, visit a court room trial or administrative hearing
and listen to other witnesses testifying.  This will make you familiar with
such surroundings and help you understand some of the things you will
come up against when you  testify.  You should consider being present at the
hearing of the matter in which you are to testify in sufficient time to hear
other witnesses testify before you take the witness chair.  This, however,
may not always be possible since, on occasion, witnesses are excluded from
the court room until they testify.
                                           22

-------
      A good witness listens to the question and then answers calmly and
directly in a sincere manner. The facts should be well known so they can be
communicated.  Testimony in this manner applies to cross-examination as
well as direct examination.

      Wear neat,  clean clothes when you  are  to  testify.   Dress
conservatively.  Do not chew gum while testifying or taking an oath.  Speak
clearly and do not mumble.

DIRECT EXAMINATION

      In  a discussion on administrative procedures, E. Barrett Prettyman,
Retired Chief Judge, U.S. Court of Appeals for the District of Columbia,
gave the  following advice:

      The best  form of oral testimony is a series  of short, accurate
      and complete statements of fact. Again, it is to be emphasized
      that the testimony will be read by the finder of the facts, and
      that he will draw  his findings from what he reads.  Confused,
      discursive,  incomplete statements of  fact  do not  yield
      satisfactory findings.

      Stand upright when taking the oath. Pay attention and say "I do"
clearly.  Bo not  slouch in the witness chair.

      Do not memorize what you are going to say as a witness.  If you have
prepared answers to possible questions, by all means do not memorize such
answers.  It is, however, very important that you familiarize yourself as
much as possible with the facts about which you will be called upon to
testify.

      During your direct examination,  you may elaborate and respond
more  fully than is advisable on cross-examination.  However, when you
elaborate, do not ramble and do not stray from the  main point raised by the
lawyer's question.  The taking of testimony is  a dialogue, not a monologue.
If your testimony concerns  a specialized technical area, the Court or
hearing officer will find it easier to understand if it is presented in the form
of short  answers to a  logical progression of questions.  In addition, by
letting the lawyer control the direction  of your testimony, you will avoid
malring remarks which are legally objectionable or tactically unwise.

      Be serious at all times.  Avoid laughing and talking about the case in
the halls, restrooms or any place in the building where the hearing or  trial
is being held.

      While testifying, look at the judge, hearing officer or jury most of the
time,  and speak frankly  and openly as you would to any friend or neighbor.
Do not cover your mouth with your hand.  Speak dearly and loudly enough
                                 33

-------
so that anyone in the hearing room or courtroom can hear you easily. At
all times make certain that the reporter taking the verbatim record of your
testimony is able to hear you and record what you actually say. The case
will  be decided entirely on the words that are finally reported as having
been the testimony given at the hearing or trial.  Always make sure that
you  give a complete statement in a complete sentence.  Half statements or
incomplete sentences may  convey your thought in  the context  of the
hearing, but may be unintelligible when read from  the cold record  many
months later.

CROSS-EXAMINATION

      Concerning cross-examination, Judge Prettyman gives  the following
advice  to prospective witnesses:

      Don't argue.   Don't  fence.   Don't  guess.   Don't  make
      wisecracks. Don't take sides.  Don't get irritated. Think first,
      then speak. If you do not know the answer but have an opinion
      or belief on the subject based on information, say exactly that
      and let  the hearing officer decide whether you shall or shall
      not give such information as  you have.  If a 'yes or no' answer
      to a question is demanded but you think that a qualification
      should be made to any such answer, give the 'yes or no' and at
      once request permission to explain your answer.  Don't worry
      about the effect an answer may have.  Don't worry about being
      bulldozed or embarrassed; counsel will protect you.   If you
      know  the answer to  a question, state it  as precisely and
      succinctly as you  can.  The best protection against extensive
      cross-examination is  to be  brief,  absolutely accurate, and
      entirely calm.

      Unless you are  testifying as  an expert, the hearing officer or  judge
will  permit only testimony, based upon direct knowledge, as to the facts.
You  usually will not be allowed to testify about what someone else has told
you  (hearsay), and will not be allowed  to provide  your  opinions or
conclusions.

     Always be polite, even to the attorney for the opposing party.

     Do not be a smart aleck or cocky witness.  This will  cost you your
credibility and the respect of the trier of the facts in the case.

     Do not exaggerate  or embroider your testimony.

     Stop instantly when the judge or hearing officer interrupts, or when
the other attorney objects to what you say.  Do not try to  "sneak" your
answer into the record.
                                 34

-------
      Do not nod your head for a "yes" or "no" answer.  Speak out clearly.      A
The reporter must hear an answer to record it.                                m

      If the question is about distances or time and your answer is only an
estimate, be certain that you say it is only an estimate.

      Listen carefully to the question asked of you.  No matter how nice the
other attorney may seem on cross-examination, he may be  trying to  hurt
you as a witness. Understand the question.  Have it repeated if necessary;
then give a thoughtful, considered answer.  Do not give a snap answer
without thinking.  You cannot be rushed into answering, although,  of
course, it would look bad to take so much time on each question that the
judge, hearing officer or jury would  think  that you are making up the
answers.

      Answer the question that is asked, not the question that you think the
examiner (particularly the cross-examiner) intended to ask. The printed
record shows only the question asked, not what  was  in the  examiners
mind and a-nonresponsive  answer may be very detrimental to your sides
case.  This situation  exists when the witness thinks "I know  what he is
after but he hasn't asked for it" Answer only what is asked.                r
      Explain your answers if necessary. This is better thgn a simple "yes"
or "no."  Give  an answer in your own words.  If a question cannot be
answered truthfully with a "yes" or "no," you have a right to explain the
answer.

      Answer directly and simply the question asked you and then stop.
Never volunteer information.
      If by chance your answer was wrong, correct it immediately; if your
answer was not clear, clarify it immediately.

      You are sworn to tell the truth.  Tell it. Every material truth should
be readily admitted, even if not to the advantage of the party for whom you
are testifying. Do not stop to figure out whether your answer will help or
hurt your side. Just answer the question to the best of your ability.

      Give positive, definite answers when at all possible.  Avoid  saying "I
think," "I believe, " "in my opinion."  If you do not know,  say so. Do  not
make up an answer.  You can be positive about the important things which
you naturally would remember.  If asked about little details which a person
naturally would not remember, it is best to say that you do not remember.

      Do not act nervous.  Avoid mannerisms which will  make it appear
that you  are scared, or not tilling the truth; or all that you know.

      Above all, it is most important that you do not  lose your temper.
Testifying at length is tiring.  It causes fatigue.  You will recognize fatigue
                                  35

-------
 by certain symptoms:  (a) tiredness, (b; crossness,  (c) nervousneis,  (d)
 anger, (e) careless answers, (f) willingness to say anything or answer any
 questions in order to leave the witness stand.   When you feel thซซe
 symptoms, recognize them and strive to overcome fatigue.  Remember that
 some attorneys on cross-examination are trying to wear you out so you will
 lose your temper and say things that are not correct, or that will hurt you or
 your testimony. Do not let this happen.

      If you do not want to  answer a question, do not ask  the judge or
 hearing officer  member whether you  must answer it.  If it  is an improper
 question, your attorney will object for you.  Do not ask the presiding officer,
 judge or board member for advice.

      Do not look at your attorney or at the judge or hearing officer for help
 in answering a question. You are on your own.  If the  question is  an
 improper one, your attorney will object. If the judge or hearing officer then
 says to answer it,  do so.

      Do not hedge or argue with the opposing attorney.

      There are several questions which are known as "trick" questions.
 That is, if you answer them the way the opposing attorney hopes you will,
 he can make your answer sound bad.  Here are two of them:

      "Have you talked to anybody about this matter?"  If you say "no," the
 hearing officer or judge, or  a seasoned jury, will know that is not true
 because good lawyers always talk to the witnesses before they testify.  If you
 say "yes," the lawyer may try  to imply that you were told what to say. The
 best thing to say is that you have talked to the attorney and that you were
just asked what the facts were and to testify truthfully.

      "Are you  getting paid to testify in this matter?"  The lawyer asking
 this hopes your answer will be "yes," thereby implying that you are being
 paid to  say what your side  wants you to say.  Your  answer should  be
 something like  "No, I am not getting paid to testify; I  am on salary and
 there is no other compensation for my time beyond the reimbursement  for
 my travel"
                                 36

-------
      SAMPLE PACKAGING
           AND SHIPPING
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES
At the end of this lesson, participants will be able to:

•   Identify the appropriate U.S. Department of Transportation
    (DOT) regulations covering the packaging and shipping of
    samples for laboratory analysis

•   Identify the appropriate table to determine  the class and
    packing group of a particular sample

•   Describe  the  shipping  requirements for a sample labeled
    "Environmentally hazardous substances, solid, n.o.s."

•   List the hierarchy of subsidiary risk

•   Review the necessary documentation for sample transport

-------
                                             NOTES
   SAMPLE PACKAGING
       AND SHIPPING
       RULES GOVERNING
 TRANSPORTATION OF SAMPLES
           49 CFR 171-179

  • New regulations published:
   December 21,1990

  • Effective date:
   October 1, 1991
          NEW RULING
  • Adopts UN labels and placards

  • Adopts UN identification numbers for
   hazardous materials

  • Provides packing standards based on
   performance criteria

  • Makes US standards compatible with
   international standards
6/93
Sample Packaging and Shipping

-------
     NOTES
                                  PACKAGING CLASSES
                             •  Packing Group I - great danger

                             •  Packing Group II - medium danger

                             •  Packing Group III - minor danger


                            Note: Most samples are in Packing Group
                                COMPLIANCE DEADLINES
                            (Performance-Oriented Packaging)
                               October 1, 1991

                               - Effective date of HM-181 (revised
                                 September 18,1991)

                               - Hazard communication requirement
                                 for new explosives (mandatory)
                                COMPLIANCE DEADLINES
                            (Performance-Oriented Packaging)
                               October 1, 1992 - Hazard communication
                               requirement for materials poisonous by
                               inhalation and for infectious substances
                               (mandatory)

                               October 1, 1993 - Hazard communication
                               requirement for all hazardous materials
Sample Packaging and Shipping
6/93

-------
    COMPLIANCE DEADLINES
   October 1, 1994

   -  Old DOT-specific packagings are
      eliminated under final rule

   -  New packages must be manufactured
      in accordance with Parts 173 and 178

   -  New placard system required
    COMPLIANCE DEADLINES
   October 1, 1996 - Marks end of
   transition period
  TRAINING FOR SAFE TRANSPORTATION
      OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
          49 CFR Part 172.700

  • Final rule

   -  Published May 15,1992

   -  57 FR 95 20944

  • Effective date: July 1,1992
                                                  NOTES
6/93
Sample Packaging and Shipping

-------
    NOTES
                                   SCOPE OF TRAINING
                                      REQUIREMENTS
                               Persons involved in transportation of
                               hazardous materials

                               Categories
                               - General awareness/familiarization
                                  training
                               - Function-specific training
                               - Safety training
                               - Driver training
                                   SCOPE OF TRAINING
                                      REQUIREMENTS
                              •  Initial training before October 1,1993
                                (if hired before July 2,1993)

                              •  Train within 90 days of employment

                              •  Refresher training once every  2 years

                              •  DOT, private agency, or employer can
                                provide training (must have Section
                                172.704 criteria)
                                 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
                              A substance or material in a quantity or

                              form capable of posing an unreasonable

                              risk to health, safety, and property when

                              transported in commerce
Sample Packaging and Shipping
6/93

-------
                                              /VOTES
   SAMPLES NOT REGULATED
             BY DOT
  Unpreserved environmental samples

  Preserved environmental samples
 SAMPLES NOT REGULATED BY DOT
  (Preserved Environmental Samples)
   Substance in
   Water Solution

     HCI
     HgCI2
     HN03
     H2S04
     NaOH
     H3P04
  Concentration

<0.04% by weight
     0.004%
     0.35%
     0.35%
     0.08%
    2
-------
    NOTES
                            MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR
                              NONREGULATED SAMPLES
                                  40CFR261.4d2HAandB

                             Date of shipment

                             Description of sample

                             Sample packaged to contain leaks or
                             spills
                             PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS
                              FOR LIMITED QUANTITIES
                                     49 CFR 173.155

                             Inner packagings

                             -  Not over 4.0 L (1 gallon) for liquids
                             -  Not over 5.0 kg (11 Ibs) for solids

                             Outer packagings

                             -  Not to exceed 30 kg (66 Ibs)
                           PACKAGING LABORATORY SAMPLES
                                        49 CFR
                            Determine proper shipping
                            name, hazard class, and
                            ID number

                            Determine packaging
                            requirements and Ltd Qty
                            exceptions

                            Mark package
   172.101
   (table)
 173.24 or
173.150-156
   172.301
Sample Packaging and Shipping
        6/93

-------
                                               NOTES
 PACKAGING LABORATORY SAMPLES
             49CFR

Label package and
additional labeling
requirements

Prepare shipping papers

Placard (if necessary)
172.101 (4)
172.402-448
172.200-204
 172.500
 UNIDENTIFIED SAMPLES FROM
   CERCLA/RCRA/DOD SITES
    Hazardous Materials Table 172.101

 •  Environmentally hazardous substances,
   liquid or solid, n.o.s.

 •  Hazard Class 9

 •  Packing Group III
 UNIDENTIFIED SAMPLES FROM
   CERCLA/RCRA/DOD SITES
    Hazardous Materials Table 172.101

 •  UN 3082 for liquids

 •  UN 3077 for solids

 •  LtdQty
6/93
                   Sample Packaging and Shipping

-------
     NOTES
                                  PACKAGING LTD QTY
                            Environmentally Hazardous Substances
                                     40CFR173.155(b)

                               Inner packagings - VOA vials or glass jars

                               Strong outer packagings

                               Sufficient adsorptive and cushioning
                               material to prevent breakage and leakage
                                    HAZARD PRIORITY
                                  FOR SUBSIDIARY RISK
                                       49CFR173.2a

                             1. Radioactive materials

                             2. Poisonous gases

                             3. Flammable gases

                             4. Nonflammable gases
                                    HAZARD PRIORITY
                                  FOR SUBSIDIARY RISK
                                        49CFR173.2a

                             5. Poisonous liquids or
                               poisonous-by-inhalation

                             e. Pyrophoric material

                             7. Self-reactive material
    t
Sample Packaging and Shipping
6/93

-------
                                                  NOTES
        HAZARD PRIORITY
      FOR SUBSIDIARY RISK
            49CFR173.2a

 s. Flammable liquids, corrosive materials,
   flammable solids, spontaneously
   combustible materials, dangerous when
   wet materials, oxidizers, or poisonous
   liquids or solids
        HAZARD PRIORITY
      FOR SUBSIDIARY RISK
            49CFR173.2a

  9. Combustible liquids

 10. Miscellaneous hazardous materials
        SHIPPING PAPERS
            49 CFR 172.200

   Required for shipment if sample is a
   hazardous material

   Must include
   - Contents
   - Emergency response
     telephone number
6/93
Sample Packaging and Shipping

-------
     NOTES
                                     SHIPPING PAPERS
                               Description of Hazardous Materials
                              • Proper shipping name (Table 172.101)
                              • Hazard class or division
                              • Identification number
                              • Packing group
                              • Total quantity (e.g., 40 mL)
                                     SHIPPING PAPERS
                              Additional Description Requirements
                                     49 CFRSubpartd 72.200
                              • Exemptions
                              • Ltd Qty
                              • Hazardous substances
                              • Radioactive material
                                     SHIPPING PAPERS
                               Additional Description Requirements
                                     49 CFRSubpartd 72.200
                                Empty packaging - residue
                                Transportation method - air, rail, road,
                                or water
                                Dangerous when wet material
Sample Packaging and Shipping
10
6/93

-------
                                              NOTES
       SHIPPING PAPERS
 Additional Description Requirements
       49 CFRSubpartd 72.200
 • n.o.s.

 • Poisonous materials

 • Elevated temperature materials
     EPA PACKAGING
   RECOMMENDATIONS
        EPA PACKAGING
      Low-Concentration Sample

 The contaminant of highest concentration
 is present at <10 ppm

 Example: background environmental
        samples
 Source: A Compendium of Superfund Field Operations
      Methods, section 6, page 6-1.
6/93
                              11
Sample Packaging and Shipping

-------
     NOTES
                                        EPA PACKAGING
                                     Medium-Concentration Sample

                               The contaminant of highest concentration
                               is present at >10 ppm and <15%
                               (150,000 ppm)

                               Example: onsite weathered materials
                               Source: A Compendium of Superfund Field Operations
                                     Methods, section 6, page 6-1.
                                        EPA PACKAGING
                                      High-Concentration Sample

                                 At least one contaminant is present at a
                                 level >15%

                                 Example:  samples from tanks and
                                          drums
                                 Source:  A Compendium of Superfund Field Operations
                                       Methods, section 6, page 6-1.
                                  ENVIRONMENTAL SAMPLES
                                •  Label and seal sample jar

                                •  Place sample jar in plastic bag

                                •  Place jars in cooler with vermiculite
                                  and ice

                                •  Place shipping papers and chain of
                                  custody in cooler
Sample Packaging and Shipping
12
6/93

-------
                                                  NOTES
   ENVIRONMENTAL SAMPLES
   Tape cooler shut
   Affix custody seals on cooler
   Ship by fastest available method
     HAZARDOUS SAMPLES
 • Label and seal sample jar
 • Place sample jar in plastic bag
 • Place jar in paint can with vermiculite
 • Place paint cans in cooler with vermiculite
   and ice
     HAZARDOUS SAMPLES
   Place shipping papers and chain of
   custody in cooler
   Tape cooler shut
   Affix custody seals on cooler
   Include shipper's certification
   Ship by fastest available method
6/93
13
Sample Packaging and Shipping

-------
     NOTES
                                  EPA RECOMMENDATIONS
                                 DOT regulations are legally binding

                                 EPA is reconsidering their
                                 recommendations in response to
                                 new DOT regulations
                                              IATA
                                 International Air Transport Association
                                 (IATA) regulations on specific samples
                                 may be more stringent than EPA or DOT
                                 regulations
                                   POTENTIAL PROBLEMS WITH
                                SAMPLE SHIPMENT AND ANALYSIS
                                 Incorrect or incomplete paperwork

                                 Laboratory receipt of incorrect samples

                                 Insufficient volume for analysis requested
                                Source: User's Guide to the Contract Laboratory
                                     Program, December 1986.
Sample Packaging and Shipping
14
6/93

-------
                                                    NOTES
    POTENTIAL PROBLEMS WITH
 SAMPLE SHIPMENT AND ANALYSIS
 • Broken or leaking samples

 • Matrices other than water or soil

 • Nonhomogeneous, multiphase water or
  soil samples
 Source: User's Guide to the Contract Laboratory
      Program, December 1986.
6/93
                                  15
Sample Packaging and Shipping

-------
                     SAMPLE PACKAGING AND SHIPPING
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION  REGULATIONS

On December 21,  1990,  the  U.S.  Department  of  Transportation (DOT) published  their new
transportation regulations in the Federal Register.  These regulations modified the U.S. regulations
to agree more completely with  the U.N. transportation regulations.  In terms of shipping samples
for laboratory analysis, the regulation changes have caused some changes in the way samples may
be packaged, labeled, and shipped.  Figures la and  Ib are a decision tree for use when shipping
potentially hazardous  samples.   This chart  is  primarily  for use  when the sample is from  an
uncontrolled hazardous waste site, as opposed to an operating industrial facility sampled under the
Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA).  At a RCRA facility,  the components of the
sample should be known with some  confidence and packaged according to the  substance.   At  an
uncontrolled site, however,  little, if anything, may be known about the soil  or drum sample.

If a sample is an offsite environmental sample, a background sample, or a sample from a domestic
water well at which no contamination is known, the sample would not fall under DOT regulations
and should be packaged according to the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency  (EPA) Contract
Laboratory Program (CLP) protocols. This involves placing the sample in a plastic bag and putting
the bag in a metal or plastic  cooler with bagged ice for coolant if necessary.  The cooler should then
be filled with enough absorbent material (e.g., vermiculite) around the sample container to absorb
any spillage  and prevent breakage.  DOT has determined  that the levels of preservatives such as
nitric acid in the samples do not cause them to fall under DOT regulations as a hazardous substance.
The package is then labeled  and shipped by overnight  carrier.  Generally, the shipment is identified
as an "Environmental Laboratory Sample."

If the sample is an onsite soil suspected of being contaminated with a known substance or of being
hazardous by characteristic, it  should be subjected to the same onsite characterization as a drum
sample. However, if nothing is known about the sample (and it is not hazardous by characteristic),
then it may be shipped as "Environmentally hazardous substances, liquid, n.o.s. or Environmentally
hazardous substances, solid, n.o.s.."  Table 1 from 40 CFR 172.102 shows this to be a Class 9,
Packing Group  III, substance.  The Class 9 label (Figure 2) is affixed to the package.  The UN
designation number is UN 3082 for a liquid and UN 3077 for a solid.  Class 9 shipments fall under
the limited quantity exception for placarding.  A limited quantity  is defined as inner packages not
to exceed 4 L for liquids and 5  kg for solids, and strong outer packaging not to exceed 30 kg gross
weight.  A metal- or plastic-covered cooler will meet  this specification. A shipper's declaration of
dangerous goods (Figure 3) must be included  in addition to the standard chain  of custody and
laboratory request forms.
6/93                                       17               Sample Packaging and Shipping

-------
                                   o

                                                              00  CD
                                                              13  O
                       0  N JD
                       i-  03 =5
                                          03 "P  _l

                                         •gฐฐ
                  FIGURE la.  PACKAGING DECISION TREE
Samp/e Packaging and Shipping
18
6/P5

-------
ft
                       en  nJ
                       5  w
                       o -ฃ>

                       S.  ซ
                         FIGURE IB.  PACKAGING DECISION TREE
       6/93
19
Sample Packaging and Shipping

-------
52518 Federal Rcgislut / Vol. 55, No. 240 / Friday. December 21. 1990 / Rules and Regulations

1 !* f
i h i
1 111 *
I 3fr ง
* a
4 ini i
i H i
i ฃ
ซ
ii .
IS
3s.
H 2
i1! s
111 5
l
i
i
j
O
	
i
8
Fort*Jdซn 	
o n
3 3
852 3 32232 S 3 3 ? S

• ei ! o CT i ! o 1 |
... ? •ซ <ป * •ซ : i* S * 1 _i -
o o jT o o : 'o ฃ & it <
OOON QOQop ; *n -S S o o •
rt *$ 2 IN •A*-i7l*-& j — Z Z u. *ฃ c
r>ซ
O O o OOOO
Ul O O <<< •mom • • O lii •<
" I • !
? 1 1 28 S
^-s HfSg 1 Jjl-^ Si 1 1 -^ ฃ
ซ- irt vi A •• *x S cv — : : u. Z Z u.  o - ~ r
8888 -. -.""'"'. 8 8~88f
1 "I5 "H2 g "II'
d
m .
r-* r>
< 2
I
=
I
"
l •
ji
l
1 : ; , i i i i M i i i
III ! 1 i i i i 1 r
=' I j 1 i 1 1 ! Hi
~: i IMS 1 \j !.
m k- ; ! ; ! i • : •" : i
=••• ! js M j i Jฐ j:
uuivQu'uiMxQ i >". i! ! l
|| i|ง|| M|| | | -Uzj|
882^u8822Sฃ ; 1 j u. o o o z ฃ i
======-== ==-=
^:ซ>4 >^ i o : i :;: Q ซN r*. ป o
O'O -ป:*:: :: to ซh-w>fwk
ซ : S Z : " : i ป o O ^ p '
tv • *• n'r>*j ซ-nnNot
ง ;ง ง jง j j 1 งiBง
; • |2 | | 3 **'ซ•ซ•
; i ' i
DYซS. bouKl. n o • <*• dyซ nltmwdiiiet. kquซd. not cofroxJvt ..
Oyrt hquซJ. ft o i (X Or* mltnrwdiiles. IrtiuMj. no i potsonous .
Oyซr *oM. n o s of Oft ml*rmซd**tcs. sofad. n o s oofrosn*. .
Oytl. x>M. A o.i or oVซ ntnnwOKltl. >oM. n.o l ponontxn .
Ormmtt. IM Eiptowr blutng. iปpซ A 	
EOTA. jซtf Etftytonซdi4m*nซlelr*acซlc ICN] 	 - 	
fwcrayw (* r* N
8"* *• S S S C
o n ซ rซ ปN
5 ง | | 51 ง
i i ii
J ML
-it ' * : |_
. J rป o rป • ' •
= i i : i s : i
:J ? I - J
^2 2 s -: 1 s S
!-• i -• i I J 3
r* •ป P< iป rsi r*
ซป ^ ^ •ซ•ซ•ซ
CM  <ป
P o ™ a K a
J UJ Ul UJ uj UJ lit UUJUJ i UJ UJ UJ
J -1 -t -t ••ป .J .J ^ U -t \ -t -i ~*
ฃ ==:=== = =
s* I tn — .- : — o
r> : pป *o 10 : o> t*.
; 12 s 2 s;
ง i 5 S ง1
ป j- - r jฃ"ฐ
u.
U-EpoซปO-*ltioซyp'opanป 	 	 	 	 	
fKtung eod. fend, n o.ป, Me HydroBuwle acid, adulton 	
Elf>anซ. compปa>*d 	 	 	 — 	 - 	
Einant-pTOptn* maure. talngwalM) tqud  ^ n — . r> n
fffiw. ปซ Oxltiyl tlhซ< 	 - 	
Elhyl (CttaK 	
Elhytjcelyl*nซ. iปihA*led . . - 	
Eltijt icrylal*. mhilxltd 	
Eihr< akohol. let Eihanol 	 	 - 	
[ thfl tk*hrO*. *ff AnllkMhylJl 	
Ethytantnt 	 „ 	 ..- 	 ~ 	 — 	 — 	
EthyUrrwie. aqutous lolutKXi with not lea then SO per cent
out not mofe tnen 70 per cent ethytomne
Elhyt amyt kclont 	 ~ 	 - 	 - 	
o
                                                                       41
          TABLE 1.  HAZARDOUS MATERIALS TABLE, 40 CFR 172.102
Sample Packaging and Shipping
20
6/93

-------
                         FIGURE 2.  CLASS 9 LABEL
6/93
21
Sample Packaging and Shipping

-------
\ SHIPPER'S DECLARATION FOR DANGEROUS GOODS (Provide >t leait two copies to the ซlrllne.)
*
i
j
Shipper
Consignee
Two completed and signed copies ol this Declaration m
be handed to the operator
TRANSPORT DETAILS
THIS shipment is wuhin ihi Airpon of Departure
timiiinons prescribed tor.
PASSENGER CARGO
AND CARGO AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT ONLY
Airport ol Destination:
NATURE AND QUANTITY OF DANGEROUS GOODS
Air Waybill No
Page of Pages
Shipper's Reference Number
(optiorttt)

<ซ' WARNING
•ซ••ซ• Failure to comply in all respects with the applicable
Dangerous Goods Regulations may be In breach of
the applicable law, subject to legal penalties. This
Declaration must not, In any circumstances, be
completed and/or signed by a consolidalor, a
forwarder or an IATA cargo agent.
Shipment type: fiMปป wM&fcjtutj
J NON-RAOIOACTIVEI RADIOACTIVE 1
(See Sub-Section 8.1 o! IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations)
Dangerous Goods Identification
Suitl- OiHnUtMiHtrcitlptMiiJ I'J1* Authortalfwi
Pnptr Shipping Nimi Cliu or Dlrldon ™ *' tflir?
Rltk
t

Afidiiional Handling Information
11 • ' ' ' 	 ..,,.,.,. 	 	


Name/Title ol Signatory
1 hereby declare that the contents of this consignment are fully and
accurately described above by proper shipping name and are classified, p|ace an(J Qa|e
packed, marked and labelled, and are in all respects in the proper
condition for transport by air according to the applicable International and signature
National Government Regulations. ,„. wimv ,&„)

^
*
*

                                                                      <
        FIGURE 3.  SHIPPER'S DECLARATION OF DANGEROUS GOODS
Sample Packaging and Shipping
22
6/93

-------
I
Samples from drums, tanks,  lagoons, sludge pits, or settling ponds will be the most likely to yield
high concentration or high hazard samples.  The first step is to identify the  sample by substance
(e.g., benzene).  If identification is possible, the sample  should  be packaged  by the substance
according to the hazardous materials table in 40 CFR 172.102. If the substance cannot be identified,
then the sample  should  be classified  by characteristic, such as flammable  or  corrosive.  Field
characterization tests can be performed for most characteristics,  including radioactivity, the highest
hazard class.  If the substance is hazardous by characteristic, it should be packaged  accordingly. If
it is a mixture, the hierarchy of hazards and exceptions in  40 CFR 173.2a should be referred to.
If the sample cannot be identified by substance and if it is not hazardous by characteristic, then it
should be classified as "Environmentally hazardous  substances, liquid, n.o.s." or " Environmentally
hazardous substances, solid,  n.o.s."  and  packaged as above.
          6/93                                         23               Sample Packaging and Shipping

-------
            PACKAGING, LABELING, AND SHIPPING

                          taken from:
                                                EPA/540/P-87/001
                                         (OSWER Directive 9355.0-14)
                                                  December 1987
            A COMPENDIUM OF SUPERFUND
             FIELD OPERATIONS METHODS
                         (Section 6)
           OFFICE OF EMERGENCY AND REMEDIAL RESPONSE
             OFFICE OF WASTE PROGRAMS ENFORCEMENT
             U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                     WASHINGTON, DC 20460
6/93                          25          Sample Packaging and Shipping

-------
6.2  PACKAGING, LABELING AND SHIPPING


6.2.1  Scope and Purpose


   This subsection describes the packaging, labeling and shipping used for environmental and hazardous
samples collected at a waste site.


6.2.2  Definitions


   Low-Concentration Sample
          The contaminant of highest concentration Is present at less than 10 parts per million (ppm).
          Examples include background environmental samples.

   Medium-Concentration Sample
          The contaminant of highest concentration is present at a level greater than 10 ppm and less
          than 15 percent (150,000 ppm). Examples include material onsite that is obviously weathered.

   High-Concentration Sample
          At least one contaminant is present at a level greater than 15 percent.  Samples from drums
          and tanks are assumed to be high concentration unless information indicates otherwise.

   Routine Analytical Services (RAS)
          Analysis of a soil or water sample on a 30- to 45-day turnaround time for a list of 126 organics,
          23 metals, and  cyanide.

   Site Manager (SM)
          The Individual responsible for the successful completion of a work assignment within budget
          and  schedule.  The person Is also referred to as the Site Project Manager or  the Project
          Manager and Is typically a contractor's employee (see Subsection 1.1).
6/93                                       27               Sample Packaging and Shipping

-------
  6.2.3  Applicability


     The procedures described In this subsection apply to samples collected at a waste site. They must be
  followed whether shipping to a CLP laboratory or a noncontract laboratory.

     The shipment of hazardous materials is governed by the Transportation Safety Act of 1974. Following
  Is a list of references that detail the regulations:
      •   Title 49 CFR
                -   Parts 100-177 - Shipper Requirements and Hazardous Material Table
                -   Parts 178-199 - Packaging Specifications
                -   Section 262.20 - Hazardous Waste Manifest

      •   International Civil Aviation Regulations (ICAO)
                -   Technical Instructions for the Safe Transport of Dangerous Goods by Air  (lists man-
                    datory international and optional domestic regulations)

      •   International Air Transport Association (I AT A)
                -   Dangerous Goods Regulations  (This tariff Incorporates 49 CFR, ICAO, and additional
                    IATA regulations.  Most international and domestic airlines belong to IATA and require
                    conformance to all applicable regulations.)

      •   Tariff BOE-6000-D (reprint of 49 CFR with updates)


  6.2.4  Responsibilities                                                                    ^^


      Detailed responsibilities are described In the procedures subsection.  General responsibilities are as-
  signed as follows:
      •  She Managers will state, to the best of their knowledge, whether samples planned for collection are
         environmental or hazardous samples.

      •  Equipment manager will procure shipping supplies (metal cans, shipping labels, vermiculite, etc.)
         using RSCC whenever needed.

      •  Sampling personnel will properly label and package the samples.


  6.2.5 Records


      The user should refer to Section 4 for discussion of the records associated with sample collection and
  chain-of-custody forms.

      The following records are associated with the labeling and shipping process:
      •   Sample tag or label

      •   Traffic report label



Sample Packaging and Shipping               28                                          6/93

-------
    •  Custody seal

    •  Chain-of-custody (COG) form

    •  Bill of lading (airbill or similar document)

    Examples of the first four documents are given in Subsections 4.6 and 5.1.6; an example of an airbill is
given in Subsection 6.2.


6.2.6  Procedures


    The procedures described in this subsection are carried out after the sample preservation described in
Subsection 6.1.6.2. They are generic  In nature; an approach to regional differences Is presented In Sub-
section 6.2.7.


6.2.6.1    Environmental Samples

    Low-concentration samples are defined as environmental samples and should be packaged for ship-
ment as follows:
       1.  A sample tag Is attached to the sample bottle. Examples of property completed sample
       tags are given in Exhibit 5-7.

       2.  All bottles, except the volatile organic analysis (VOA) vials, are taped closed with electrical
       tape (or other tape as appropriate). Evidence tape may be used for additional sample security.

       3.  Each sample bottle is placed In a separate plastic bag, which is then sealed.  As much air
       as possible is squeezed from the bag before sealing.  Bags may be sealed with evidence tape
       for additional security.

       4.  A picnic cooler (such as a Coleman or other sturdy cooler) is typically used as a shipping
       container.  In preparation for shipping samples, the drain plug is taped shut from the inside
       and  outside, and a large plastic bag is used as a liner for the cooler.  Approximately 1 inch of
       packing material, such as asbestos-free vermiculite, perilte, or styrofoam  beads, is placed in
       the bottom  of the  liner.  Other commercially available shipping containers may be  used.
       However, the use of such containers (cardboard or fiber boxes complete with separators and
       preservatives) should be specified In the sampling plan and approved by the EPA RSCC if CLP
       is used.

       5.  The bottles are placed in the lined picnic cooler. Cardboard separators may be placed be-
       tween the bottles at the discretion of the shipper.

       6.  Water samples for low or medium-level organics analysis and low-level inorganics analysis
       must be shipped cooled to  4ฐC with  ice.  No Ice is to be used in shipping inorganic low-level
       soil samples or medium / high-level water samples, or organic high-level water or soil samples,
       or dioxin samples.  Ice Is not required in shipping soil samples, but may be utilized at the op-
       tion of the sampler.  All cyanide samples, however, must be shipped cooled to 4ฐC.
                                                29               Sample Packaging and Shipping

-------
       7.  The lined cooler is filled with packing material (such as asbestos-free vermiculite, perlite, or         A
       styrofoam beads), and the large Inner (garbage bag) liner is taped shut. Sufficient packing         m
       material should be used to prevent sample containers from making contact during shipment.         ^
       Again, evidence tape may be used.

       8.  The paperwork going to the laboratory is placed inside a plastic bag. The bag is sealed and
       taped to the inside of the cooler lid.  A copy of the COC form should be included in the paper-
       work sent to the laboratory.  Exhibit 5-4 gives an example of a properly completed COC form.
       The last block on the COC form should indicate the overnight carrier and airbill number. The
       airbill  must be filled out before the  samples are handed over to the  carrier.   The laboratory
       should be notified if another sample  is being sent to another laboratory for dioxin analysis, or if
       the shipper suspects that the  sample contains any other substance for which the laboratory
       personnel should take safety precautions.

       9.  The cooler is closed and padlocked or taped shut with strapping tape (filament-type).

       10. At least two signed custody seals are placed on the cooler, one on the front and  one on
       the back.  Additional seals  may be used if the sampler or shipper thinks more  seals are neces-
       sary.  Exhibit 5-6 gives an example of the two types of custody seals available.

       11. The cooler is handed over to the overnight carrier, typically Federal Express. A standard
       airbill  is necessary for shipping environmental samples.  Exhibit 6-4 shows an example of the
       standard Federal Express airbill.


6.2.6.2    Hazardous Samples

    Medium- and high-concentration samples are defined as hazardous and must be packaged as follows:
       1.  A sample tag is attached to the sample bottle. Examples of properly completed sample
       tags are shown in Exhibit 5-7.

       2.  All bottles, except the VOA vials, are taped closed with electrical tape (or other tape as ap-
       propriate).  Evidence tape may be used for additional security.

       3.  Each sample bottle is placed in a plastic bag, and the bag is sealed.  For medium-con-
       centration water samples, each VOA vial is wrapped in a paper towel, and the two vials are
       placed in one bag.  As  much air as possible is squeezed  from  the bags before sealing.
       Evidence tape may be used to seal the bags for additional security.

       4. Each  bottle is placed in a separate paint can, the paint can is filled with vermiculite, and the
       lid is fixed to the can. The lid must be sealed with metal clips or with filament or evidence tape;
       if clips are used, the manufacturer typically recommends six clips.

       5. Arrows are placed on the can to indicate which  end is up.

       6.  The outside of each can must contain the proper DOT shipping name and identification
       number for the sample. The information may be placed on stickers or printed legibly. A liquid
       sample of an uncertain nature is shipped as a flammable liquid with the shipping name "FLAM-
        MABLE LIQUID, N.O.S." and the identification number "UN1993." A solid sample of uncertain
        nature is shipped as a flammable solid with the shipping name "FLAMMABLE SOLID, N.O.S."
    Sample Packaging and Shipping               30                                          6/93

-------
                                Exhibit 6-4
                    STANDARD FEDERAL EXPRESS AIRBILL
                                 Ad03 NI9IW
                                             I ~
                                             \

                                           85
                                           IS

               3
               <
       !8, WS1
 Pli   Hlita
 fe   8l3{(Bi
 !{}] i|! | [j   i j jjj
 "!?!ซ•  il J i liift
 i|i|    !   ปIi
 :?J'I!!!  t!?l  tCป!i
                                                  ili

                                              ii
                                              H
                                              iii
                                              D
TBD
dt
iff
"
=M
5J!|

nli   |1
6 O'D n n a
                                                           f! !l
                                                           '{ Ml
                                                          >- Ii I'1


                                                        ,1  A
                                                        v>  Kll*il

                                 HO INIUd 3SV31d
                             S3IJ03 S OWH SS3Ud
                                         -T-4T^3
6/93
                                    31
Sample Packaging and Shipping

-------
       and the identification number "UN1325." If the nature of the sample Is known, 49 CFR-171 -177
       is consulted to determine the proper labeling and packaging requirements.

       7.  The cans are placed upright in a cooler that has had Its drain plug taped shut Inside and
       out, and the cooler has been lined with a garbage bag.  Vermiculite Is placed on the bottom.
       Two sizes of paint cans are  used: half-gallon and gallon. The half-gallon paint cans can be
       stored on top of each other; however, the gallon cans are too high to stack. The cooler is filled
       with vermiculite, and the liner is taped shut.

       8.  The paperwork going  to the laboratory  is placed  Inside  a plastic bag and taped to the in-
       side of the cooler lid.  A  copy of the COG form, an example of which is  shown in Exhibit 5-4,
       should be Included in the paperwork sent to the laboratory.  The sampler keeps  one  copy of
       the COC form.  The laboratory should be notified if a parallel sample is being sent to  another
       laboratory for dioxin analysis, or If the sample Is suspected of containing any substance for
       which laboratory personnel should take safety precautions.

       9.  The cooler is closed and sealed with strapping tape.  At least two custody seals are placed
       on the outside of the cooler  (one on the front and one on the back). More custody seals may
       be used at the discretion  of the sampler.

       10. The following markings are placed on the top of the cooler:

    •  Proper shipping name (49 CFR 172.301)

    •  DOT identification number (49 CFR 172.301)

    •  Shipper's or consignee's name and address (49 CFR-172.306)

    •  'This End Up" legibly written if shipment contains liquid hazardous materials (49 CFR 172.312)
       Other commercially available shipping containers may be used. The SM should ascertain that
       the containers are appropriate to the type of sample being shipped.  The SM should clearly
       specify the type of shipping container to be used In the QAPJP.

       11. The following labels are required on top of the cooler (49 CFR 172.406e):
               Appropriate hazard class label (placed next to the proper shipping name)

               "Cargo Aircraft Only" (If applicable as Identified in 49 CFR 172.101)
        12. An arrow symbol(s) indicating 'This Way Up" should be placed on the cooler in addition to
        the markings and labels described above.

        13.  Restricted-article airbills are used for  shipment.  Exhibit 6-5 shows an  example of a
        restricted article Federal Express airbill. The "Shipper Certification for Restricted Articles" sec-
        tion Is filled out as follows for a flammable solid or a flammable liquid:
Sample Packaging and Shipping                32                                          6/93

-------
           •   Number of packages or number of coolers

           •   Proper shipping name: If unknown, use

              -  Rammable solid, N.O.S., or
              -  Rammable liquid, N.O.S.

       Classification; If unknown, use

              -  Rammable solid or
              -  Rammable liquid

       Identification number; If unknown, use

              -  UN1325 (for flammable solids) or
              -  UN 1993 (for flammable liquids)

       Net quantity per package or amount of substance in each cooler

       Radioactive materials section (Leave blank.)

       Passenger or cargo aircraft (Cross off the nonappllcable. Up to 25 pounds of flammable solid per
       cooler can be shipped on a passenger or cargo aircraft.  Up to 1 quart of flammable liquid per
       cooler can be shipped on a passenger aircraft, and up to 10 gallons of flammable liquid per cooler
       can be shipped on a cargo aircraft.)

       Name and title of shipper (printed)

       An emergency telephone number at which the shipper can be reached within the following 24 to 48
       hours

       Shipper's signature
    Note: The penalties for improper shipment of hazardous materials are severe; a fine of $25,000 and 5
years imprisonment can be Imposed for each violation.  The SM or deslgnee Is urged to take adequate
precautions.


6.2.7  Regional Variances


    There are no known regional variances for the shipment of hazardous samples.  However,  regional
variances for the shipment of environmental samples (low concentration) are common.  Information in a
compendium on such variances can become dated rapidly. Thus, users are urged to contact the EPA RPM
or the RSCC for the latest regional variances.

       1.  Region I includes the five-digit laboratory number of each sample In the "Remarks" section
       of the chain-of-custody form to act as a cross check on sample identification.

       2.  Separators must be placed  between the bottles of samples shipped from a Region IV site.
       BSD also tapes the VOA vials and uses blue ice.
     6/93                                         33               Sample Packaging and Shipping

-------
       3.  Region V tapes the VGA vials and does not line the cooler with a plastic bag.  Region V FIT
       Indicates the OTR / ITR number, bottle lot numbers, sample concentrations, and matrix in the
       right-hand portion of the "Remarks" section of the chain-of-custody form.  The custody seal
       numbers, airbill number, and "samples shipped via Federal Express" are included in the lower
       right-hand section.

       4.  Region VI does not tape sample bottles, put sample bottles in plastic bags, or line coolers
       with plastic. Glass bottles are wrapped with "bubble wrap" Instead of cardboard separators. In
       addition, the traffic report stickers are placed at the liquid level on the sample bottles to allow
       the laboratories to check for leakage.

       5.  Region VIII does not put the sample in a plastic bag.

    Because information on variances can become dated rapidly, the user should contact the EPA RPM or
RSCC for current regional practices and requirements.  Future changes and additional regional variances
will be Incorporated In Revision 01 of this document.


6.2.8  Information Sources


    CH2MHILL  REMIFIT Documentation Protocol for Region V.  May 1984.

    Code of Federal Regulations, Title 49, Parts 171 to 177, Transportation.

    U.S. Environmental Protection  Agency. Engineering Support Branch Standard Operating Procedures and
Quality Assurance Manual. Region IV, Environmental Services Division.  1 April 1986.

    U.S. Environmental Protection  Agency. The User's Uuide to the Contract Laboratory Program.  Office of
Emergency and Remedial Response.  December 1986.
    Sample Packaging and Shipping               34

-------
           FIELD  EXERCISE
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES
At the end of this lesson, participants will be able to:

•    Sample groundwater, soil, sediment, surface water,  and
     containerized waste using the proper tools and techniques

•    List the appropriate sampling equipment according to media
     and the advantages and disadvantages of each

•    Properly label all types of sample containers

•    Properly complete the necessary shipping documentation

•    Correctly complete  the chain of custody for each collected
     sample

-------
ft
FIELD EXERCISE DESCRIPTION
         STATION ONE:  SOIL SAMPLING

         The following equipment is available:

                     Bucket augers
                     Hand trowels
                     Soil trier
                            Push tube sampler
                            Stainless steel pans
                            Split spoon sampler
         Each team will collect one composite sample for semivolatile analysis and one grab sample for
         volatile analysis.
         STATION TWO:  FIELD DECONTAMINATION

         The following equipment will be available:
                      Isopropyl alcohol
                      Buckets
                      Spray and squirt bottles
                      Catch basins
                           Brushes
                           Detergent and water
                           Aluminum foil
         Each team will field decontaminate at least two different pieces of sampling equipment from the soil
         and/or groundwater station. Each team will collect a field blank for volatiles.
         STATION THREE:  SOIL GAS SAMPLING

         The following equipment will be demonstrated:

                      Soil gas probe and slam bar
                      Gillian pump and desiccator
                            HW 101 Hnu photoionization detector
         STATION FOUR:  SURFACE WATER AND SEDIMENT SAMPLING

         The following equipment is available:
                      LaMotte sampler
                      Bacon bomb
                      Kemmerer sampler
                      Gravity corer
                      Ekman dredge
                            Ponar dredge
                            Peristaltic pump
                            Hand auger
                            Alpha sampler
                            Beta sampler
         Each team will collect a grab sample of surface water for cyanide analysis and a sediment sample
         for metals analysis.
         6/93
                                               Field Exercise

-------
STATION FIVE:  GROUIMDWATER SAMPLING                                         4

The following equipment is available:

            Water level indicator                     Bailers (PVC, PTFE, stainless steel)
            Bladder pump                           Peristaltic pump
            pH meter                              Waterra pump

Each team will collect two 40 mL vials for volatile analysis from each well and take water level and
pH measurements from the  appropriate well.


STATION SIX:  CONTAINERIZED WASTE SAMPLING-55-GALLON DRUMS

The following equipment is available:

             COLIWASA                           Drum thief
             Bacon bomb                            Bung wrenches
             Grain thief                             Mucksucker

Each team will collect  a representative sample from a drum for pesticide/PCB analysis.
Field Exercise                             2                                     6/93

-------
O I
  o
  ID
  O
CL




1
                  O
                  cc
                  O
                  O
                  ui
                  CC
                  o
                  u.
                  O
                  o
  cc
  UJ
  Q
  
H
u
CO
Q
Relinquished by: (Signature)
Received by: (Signature)
o
P
V
ซ
D
Sfgnature)
>
J3
•o
0
ฃ
'3
cr
^c
"5
CC
Received by: (Signature)
0)
P
u
S
O
Relinquished by. (Signature)
Received by:. (Signature)
ซ
P
4)
n
O
Relinquished by. (Signature)
u
P
0)
re
O
Shipped/Delivered:
Received by: (Signature)
1
P
V
a
Q
Relinquished by. (Signature)
1
1
i
tn
Jฃ

P
2

-------
Job #
                          INDIVIDUAL DRUM LOG SHEET
            Date
                            Page
                      of
Client
Drum #
                               Sample #_
Drum Size:     D  85 Gallon
              D  15 Gallon

Type of Drum:  D  Fiber     D Poly
                D 55 Gallon
                D 5 Gallon

                 D  Steel
              D  42 Gallon
              D  Other
                  D 30 Gallon
         Open
         Top
n
                                                              Head
D  Other
Description of Sample:

LAYER 1 (TOP)

Color	 Amount (In)	
D  Liquid              D Solid              D  Sludge
                               HNU Reading.
LAYER 2 (MIDDLE)

Color	
D  Liquid
  D Solid
         Amount (ln)_
D  Sludge
LAYER 3 (BOTTOM)

Color	
Q  Liquid
  D Solid
         Amount (in)_
D  Sludge
Amount In Drum:   D  Empty (< 1" residuals)       D 1/4
                                      D  1/2
                             D  3/4
                        D Full
Description of Drum (Drum Label, Markings and Conditions):    Overpack Needed?    D Yes    D  No
Compatibility Group:
Time
Sampled by_
       Composite Number_

               Witness
Rซv. S/15/87
                                                                                Aปป-04-CHM-0ป9

-------
PROBLEM SESSION:   SAMPLE PLAN
      DEVELOPMENT EXERCISE
   PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES


   At the end of this lesson, participants will be able to:

   •   List the elements of a phased sampling plan

   •   Perform the initial elements of a sampling event from
       background data analysis through field data point selection,
       collection,  and analysis

-------
                 SAMPLING FOR HAZARDOUS  MATERIALS

                      Sample Plan Development  Exercise
           American Creosote Works, Inc., Winnfield, Louisiana
PROJECT OBJECTIVE

Your environmental consulting firm,	, has been contracted by the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)  to develop a sampling plan for the American Creosote
Works, Inc., (ACWI) facility.  The site may be evaluated using background data, field screening
techniques, and some limited sampling of water and  sediment.  Finally, your firm is to outline in a
class presentation its recommendations of further sampling points, including monitoring wells.
PROJECT SCOPE
Phase I:  Background Data Search

You will do a thorough background search of the information available.  This information will assist
you in establishing the objectives for the remaining phases of the project.  This information will be
provided to you and the cost of obtaining the information will be subtracted from your total budget
for Phases I and II. This phase will include a site walkover.
Phase II:  Selection and Implementation of Field Screening Techniques

Choose the field screening technique, level of analytical support, and location of sampling points.
Once you have decided where to sample, visit the instructors at the "data table" and purchase your
field data.  Your budget for Phases I and II is $27,000. You may not exceed your budget. Phase II
should be broken down into discrete sampling events as if the sampling were proceeding on a day-by-
day basis.  In other words, get a few boring logs and some soil gas data, review them, and then
decide where to sample next.
Phase III:  Development of a Sampling and Analysis Plan

Evaluate your preliminary data from Phases I and II and develop a sampling and analysis plan for
the next step in the investigation of the ACWI site.  Select the sample locations, media, analytical
support level, procedures, etc.
Phase IV : Results and Conclusions

Present your sampling and analysis plan (as well as any conclusions and recommendations) to the
class. Choose a spokesperson to present your firm's efforts. By preparing this presentation, you

6/93                                      i                            Problem Session

-------
will  have to organize  your findings, develop a reasonable conceptual  model, and make your    •
recommendations understandable to someone outside your group.  Though a rough budget should    ^
be presented, this is not an exercise in finding the low bidder. The presentation should concentrate
on the proposed sampling locations; the screening phase should be only briefly summarized.
 Problem Session

-------
ft
                             BUDGET WORKSHEET


Phase I:  Background Data Search  (Total Cost - $1500.00)

Phase II:  Selection and Implementation of Field Screening Techniques


Your estimate indicates the approximate costs for the completion of Phase II.


       Mobilization fee                   $3000.00            $3000.00

       Ambient air monitoring
       for entire site (OVA-128,
       GC mode, tentative
       identification)                     $1100.00           	
                Shallow soil boring,
                stratigraphic identification          $500.00 ea.
                Soil gas survey in
                4 x 0.25-acre sets                 $1000.00/acre
                Water analysis of drive points
                (volatiles and base/neutral and acid
                extractables [BNAs] only)          $500.00/point
                Surface water and sediment
                analysis (volatile organic analysis
                [VGA] and BNAs only)            $500.00/sample
         This price schedule does not take into account any surcharge for higher levels of protection than
         Level D.  IMPORTANT:   you must do an air  monitoring survey before any other  work is
         performed on the site.  This will allow you to make a determination of the level of protection
         appropriate for the site.  However, no surcharge for higher levels of protection will be added at this
         time.
         TOTAL BUDGET  FOR PHASES I AND II  = $27,000.00
         6/93                                      3                            Problem Session

-------
                            BUDGET WORKSHEET


Phase III:  Development of a Sampling and Analysis Plan

Phase IV:  Results and Conclusions
Your recommendations may include the following analytical support. The prices provided must be
used to approximate the cost of your recommendations.  Calculate the amount spent on each phase,
particularly the cost of your Phase III sampling effort.
      Data interpretation,
      report preparation           $ 5500.00           $ 5500.00
      VOAs                     $ 400.00


      BNAs                     $ 750.00


      Pesticides/PCBs            $ 440.00
4
       Total inorganics            $  625.00
       Benzene, toluene, ethyl-
       benzene, and xylenes
       (BTEX)                   $  100.00
       Exploratory borings


       Monitoring wells


       Heavy equipment


       Geophysical surveys
€
Problem Session                            4                                      6/93

-------
Drilling and sampling will be $50.00 per foot (the same as Phase II). To construct a monitoring well
in the boring, add $500.00 for materials and installation. Again, no surcharge will be assessed for
increased levels of protection (above  Level D).  However,  you must determine what level of
protection is appropriate. Be sure to include the appropriate number of quality assurance and quality
control samples and their cost.  Figure an additional 10% surcharge to complete the chain-of-custody
paperwork and properly package the samples for shipment.
TOTAL BUDGET FOR PHASES I AND II

TOTAL BUDGET FOR PHASE III

TOTAL PROJECT BUDGET
6/93                                      5                            Problem Session

-------
                        PHASE I:  BACKGROUND  DATA
Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality Files

The  Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality (LDEQ) had  reports of potential  waste
management problems at the ACWI site in Winnfield.  LDEQ issued a Compliance Order 2 years
previous. Last year, LDEQ found the site abandoned  and the case was referred to EPA.  EPA is
the now the lead agency on the environmental assessment and, as such, all pertinent file information
has been transferred to EPA.
U.S. Army Corps of Engineers' Files

The U.S. Army Corps of Engineers' files show no record of an application by American Creosote
Works, Inc., to fill, build upon, or otherwise alter a wetland.  No further information is available
regarding ACWI.
Louisiana Geological Survey

Winnfield,  Louisiana,  is within the Mississippi embayment section of the Gulf Coastal  Plain.
Deposits in this region consist mainly of braided stream channel deposits (sand, silts, and clays with
associated interspersed gravel).

The ACWI facility is located on the Cockfield Formation.  This formation was deposited during the
Tertiary Period (65 to 10 million years before present).  It consists primarily of interbedded clays,
silts, and sands with significant lignite (a brownish-black coal that is intermediate in coalification
between peat and a subbituminous coal) deposits.
Soil Conservation Survey Data

The Soil Conservation Service (SCS) survey for the area is incomplete at this time. Preliminary data
indicate that the soil type is composed of fine-grained, organic-rich material characteristic of flood
plain or marsh deposits.
Information from the Chamber of Commerce

The ACWI site has been operating under various names and owners in this location for about ninety
years.  It has been the site of wood-preserving operations since approximately  1910, when it was
bought by the Louisiana Creosoting Company. The major product lines in recent years have been
telephone poles and railroad ties.
Problem Session                            6                                       6/93

-------
ft
Interview with the Site Owner

The site owner's representative refused to divulge any information when he found out your company
was working on a site characterization of ACWI.  He suggested you speak with the facility's legal
representative.
         State of Louisiana Water Supply Board Files

         The State of Louisiana Water Supply Board files indicate that there are no known water supply wells
         in the vicinity of the ACWI site.  The wells for the city of Winnfield are located over a mile from
         the site and are screened in the Sparta formation at a depth of about 600 feet below ground surface.
         Information from the Tax Assessor's Office

         The American Tie & Telephone Company is located in the town of Winnfield, Louisiana, on a small
         access road.  It is near several major truck routes and railroad lines. All taxes are currently paid.

         The property consists of two large and three small buildings, as well as a number of vertical storage
         tanks and pressure vessels.
         Climatological Data

         The climate in Winnfield, Louisiana, is subtropical.  The average temperature (1951-1980) ranges
         from 47'  in January to 81' in July and August.  The average net annual rainfall is 50 inches.  The
         heaviest rainfall is in April and May and the lightest  is in October.  Tropical storms and hurricanes
         occasionally pass through the area.  Flood-producing  rains may occur during any month of the year.

                 Historical precipitation data:

                 2 yr 30 min          1.7 in.
                 10 yr 30 min         2.4 in.
                 100 yr 30 min        3.5 in.
                 2 yr 1 hr             2.2 in.
                 10 yr 1 hr           3 in.
                 100 yr 1  hr          4 in  .
                 2 yr 6 hr             3.5 in.
                 10 yr 6 hr           5.5 in.
                 100 yr 6 hr          8 in.
                 2 yr 24 hr           4.5 in.
                 10 yr 24 hr          8.5 in.
                 100yr24hr         11 in.

         Mean annual lake evaporation is 48 inches.
         6/93                                         7                             Problem Session

-------
Interview with Local Residents

The local  fire department was contacted to determine whether any fire-related problems had been
attributed to the facility. Fire department records did not indicate that any fires had occurred at the
facility. Mr. Mercer, the  fire chief,  did recall that the fire department had been asked to provide
help  at the publicly  owned  treatment  works (POTW)  to  remove  siltation within one  of the
construction areas.  Sediments from Creosote Branch had backwashed into one of the concrete basins
under construction  and needed to be removed.  During removal, members of the construction crew
experienced blistered skin and breathing difficulties.  Creosote was reportedly smelled. Mr. Mercer
did not know whether anyone had received medical attention for injuries specific to the removal
efforts.
Hydrologic Information

The groundwater table in the vicinity of the site  is shallow, as indicated by the numerous marshy
areas  surrounding the site.  At the site, groundwater was encountered within 10 feet of the ground
surface. Using a limited number of shallow wells  in the area, the near-surface aquifer flow direction
and velocity were estimated  using the triangulation method and Darcy's law.  The direction of
groundwater flow is generally to the north in the general area of the site.  Groundwater seepage
velocity is approximately 0.9 feet per day.

The local residents are all on city water,  which is obtained from four wells.  Each of the wells is
screened in  the Sparta Sand Formation. Water analysis shows no contaminants in the water supply
at this time.
4
 Problem Session                              8                                         6/93

-------
                U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
The ACWI site is located in Winn Parish, in the town of Winnfield, Louisiana, and is a pan of the
flood plain of the Mississippi River.  The region is heavily  forested, primarily  with tall standing
white pines and some cedar.  It is located within easy access to several truck routes and railroad
lines. The property is relatively flat, with a total relief of 19 feet. Drainage is to the north and east
into Creosote Branch and is enhanced by the presence of two major drainage ditches (Figure 1).
A third smaller drainage ditch is also present on the site.

Access to the site is limited, largely due to the surrounding wetlands and heavily  forested areas.  A
perimeter reconnaissance of the  site  was  performed  in August  1989.    At  the  time  of the
reconnaissance, several storage tanks were present at the facility.   There was a large (approximately
100 ft by 300 ft) tar stain on the ground surface in the eastern portion of the site.  In addition to the
stained area, three areas of disturbed soil were noted in the north, central, and southern portions of
the  site.  The investigators on the reconnaissance suspected that  these areas were covered tar  pits.
Five buildings were present on the site. One was used for offices/administrative purposes, one was
used as a laboratory, and the others were used for industrial processing.  Six large pressure vessels
were present in the processing buildings. There was some soil staining around the pressure vessels.

Ambient air monitoring of the site indicated elevated levels of volatile organic compounds, with the
highest levels being in the vicinity of the surface  tar pit.

A memorandum from a chemical engineer whose specialty is process design was found in some files
left onsite. It stated that compounds that might be expected  at a wood preservative plant include,
but   are  not  limited   to,   naphthalene,   2-methylnaphthalene,   l-methylnaphthalene,
2,6-dimethylnaphthalene,  pentachlorophenol, phenanthrene,  anthracene,  fluoranthene,  pyrene,
benz(a)anthracene, chrysene, benzo(b)fluoranthene, benzo(a)pyrene, indeno(l,2,3-cd)pyrene, as well
as several different volatile organic compounds. Other records found onsite gave some information
about the magnitude of the operation.   For a 7-month  period ending July 31, 1966, more  than
750,000  gallons  of petroleum  distillate, 40,000  gallons of  creosote,  and 54,000 pounds  of
pentachlorophenol were  used to treat approximately 7.5  million  board-feet of wood.  After 1981,
however, the site was purchased after the previous site owner declared bankruptcy.  The new owner
ran the operation on a much smaller scale from the operations of the 1960s.
6/93                                         9                             Problem Session

-------
                                                   Forested Area
                                                   Residence
                                                   Building/PV
                                                   Vertical Tank
                                                   Woodchip Pile
                         FIGURE \.  ACWI SITE MAP
Problem Session
10
6/93

-------
         APPENDIX A
       Removal Program
Representative Sampling Guidance

         Volume I: Soil

-------
                                                 OSWER Directive 9360.4-10
                                                          November 1991
                  REMOVAL PROGRAM

      REPRESENTATIVE SAMPLING GUIDANCE


                     VOLUME 1:  SOIL

                        Interim Final
                  Environmental Response Branch
                   Emergency Response Division

             Office of Emergency and Remedial Response
            Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response

                U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
                     Washington, DC 20460
                         Prepared by:

The U.S. EPA Committee on Representative Sampling for the Removal Program
                                          printed "fi recM. led paper

-------
                                             Notice

This document has been reviewed in accordance with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency policy and approved
for  publication.  Mention of trade names or commercial products does not constitute endorsement  or
recommendation for use.

The policies and procedures established in this document are intended solely for the guidance of government
personnel, for use in the Superfund Removal Program.  They are not intended, and cannot be relied upon, to
create any rights, substantive or procedural, enforceable by any party in litigation with the United States. The
Agency reserves the right to act at variance with these policies and procedures and to change them at any time
without public  notice.

For more information on Soil Sampling and Surface Geophysics procedures, refer to the Compendium ofERT
Soil Sampling and Surface Geophysics Procedures, OSWER  directive 9360.4-02, EPA/540/P-91/006.  Topics
covered in this  compendium include Sampling Equipment Decontamination, Soil Sampling, Soil Gas Sampling,
and General Surface Geophysics.  The compendium describes procedures  for collecting  representative soil
samples and provides a quick means of waste site evaluation. It also addresses the general procedures used to
acquire surface geophysical data.

Questions,  comments,  and recommendations are welcomed regarding the Removal Program Representative
Sampling Guidance, Volume 1 - Soil.  Send remarks to:

                                      Mr. William A. Coakley
                                 Removal Program QA Coordinator
                                          U.S. EPA - ERT
                                Raritan Depot - Building 18, MS-101
                                      2890 Woodbridge Avenue
                                       Edison, NJ  08837-3679

For additional  copies of the Removal Program Representative  Sampling Guidance, Volume 2 - Soil,  please
contact:

                                    Superfund Document Center
                                      U.S. EPA - Headquarters
                                         401 M Street, SW
                                              OS-240
                                       Washington, DC  20406

                                       E-mail:.  OERR/PUBS
€

-------
                                    Acknowledgments
This document was prepared by the U.S. EPA Committee on Representative Sampling for the Removal Program,
under the direction of Mr. William A. Coakley, the Removal Program QA Coordinator of the Environmental
Response Team, Emergency Response Division.  Additional support was provided by  the following EPA
Workgroup and under U.S. EPA contract # 68-WO-0036 and U.S. EPA contract # 68-03-3482.
                                      EPA Headquarters
Office of Emergency and Remedial Response



Office of Research and Development



Region 1

Region 4


Region 8


National Enforcement  Investigation Center
EPA Regional
                                       EPA Laboratories
EMSL, Las Vegas, NV
                                          Harry Allen
                                        Royal Nadeau
                                        George Prince

                                         John Warren
                                         Alex Sherrin

                                        William Bokey
                                           Jan Rogers

                                          Denise Link
                                       Peter Stevenson

                                        Chuck Ramsey
                                        Delbert Earth
                                          Ken Brown
                                        Evan Englund
                                      George Flatman
                                        Ann Pitchford
                                        Uew Williams
                                              111

-------
                                      Table of Contents

                                                                                             Ease

    Notice                                                                                      ii

    Acknowledgments                                                                            iii

    List of Tables                                                                               viii

    List of Figures                                                                               ix


1.0     INTRODUCTION

       1.1     Objective and Scope                                                               1
       1.2     Removal Program Sampling Objectives                                              1
       13     Representative Sampling                                                           1
       1.4     Example Site                                                                      2


2.0     SAMPLING DESIGN

       2.1     Introduction                                                                      3
       2.2     Historical Data Review                                                            3
       23     Site Reconnaissance                                                               3
       2.4     Migration Pathways and Receptors                                                  4
               2.4.1    Migration Pathways and Transport Mechanisms                               4
               2.4.2    Receptors                                                                 4
       2.5     Removal Program Sampling Objectives                                              4
       2.6     Data Quality Objectives                                                            5
       2.7     Field Analytical Screening and Geophysical Techniques                                5
       2.8     Parameters  for Analysis                                                            6
       2.9     Representative Sampling Approaches                                                6
               2.9.1    Judgmental Sampling                                                       6
               2.9.2    Random Sampling                                                         6
               2.93    Stratified Random Sampling                                                6
               2.9.4    Systematic Grid Sampling                                                   8
               2.9.5    Systematic Random Sampling                                               8
               2.9.6    Search Sampling                                                           8
               2.9.7    Transect Sampling                                                         9
       2.10    Sampling Locations                                                               11
       2.11    Example Site                                                                     11
               2.11.1   Background Information                                                   11
               2.11.2   Historical Data Review and Site Reconnaissance                              12
               2.113   Identification of Migration Pathways, Transport Mechanisms and Receptors     14
               2.11.4   Sampling Objectives                                                       14
               2.11.5   Selection of Sampling Approaches                                          14
               2.11.6   Field Analytical Screening, Geophysical Techniques, and Sampling Locations     IS
               2.11.7   Parameters for Analysis                                                   17

-------
                             Table of Contents (continued)
4
3.0     EQUIPMENT

       3.1    Introduction                                                                  21
       3.2    Field Analytical Screening Equipment                                             21
       33    Geophysical Equipment                                                         21
       3.4    Selecting Sampling Equipment                                                   21
       33    Example Site                                                                  24
              33.1    Selection of Sampling Equipment                                         24
              33.2    Selection of Field Analytical Screening Equipment                           24
              333    Selection of Geophysical Equipment                                       24


4.0     HELD SAMPLE COLLECTION AND PREPARATION

       4.1    Introduction                                                                  27
       4.2    Sample Collection                                                             27
              4.2.1    Sample Number                                                        27
              4.2.2    Sample Volume                                                        27
       4.3    Removing Extraneous Material                                                  27
       4.4    Sieving Samples                                                               28
       43    Homogenizing Samples                                                         28
       4.6    Splitting Samples                                                              28
       4.7    Compositing Samples                                                          29
       4.8    Final Preparation                                                              30
       4.9    Example Site                                                                 30


5.0     QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL EVALUATION

       5.1    Introduction                                                                  31
       5.2    QA/QC Objectives                                                            31
       53    Sources of Error                                                              31
              53.1    Sampling Design                                                       31
              53.2    Sampling Methodology                                                  32
              533    Sample Heterogeneity                                                  32
              53.4    Analytical Procedures                                                   32
       5.4    QA/QC Samples                                                              32
              5.4.1    Field Replicates                                                        33
              5.4.2    Collocated Samples                                                     33
              5.43    Background Samples                                                   33
              5.4.4    Rinsate Blanks                                                         33
              5.43    Performance Evaluation Samples                                         33
              5.4.6    Matrix Spike Samples                                                   33
              5.4.7   Field Blanks                                                           34
              5.4.8   Trip Blanks                                                           34
       5.5    Evaluation of Analytical Error                                                   34
       5.6    Correlation Between Field Screening Results and Confirmation Results                34
       5.7    Example Site                                                                  35
                                               VI

-------
                             Table of Contents (continued)

                                                                                       Page

6.0     DATA PRESENTATION AND ANALYSIS

       6.1     Introduction                                                                 37
       62     Data Posting                                                                37
       63     Geologic Graphics                                                            37
       6.4     Contour Mapping                                                            37
       65     Statistical Graphics                                                           37
       6.6     Geostatistics                                                                 39
       6.7     Recommended Data Interpretation Methods                                      39
       6.8     Utilization of Data                                                           39
       6.9     Example Site                                                                40


References                                                                                45
                                             vu

-------
                                List of Tables



Table                                                                              Ppfe



 1     Probability of Missing an Elliptical Hot Spot                                        10



 2     Representative Sampling Approach Comparison                                     12



 3     Portable Field Analytical Screening Equipment                                      22




 4     Geophysical Equipment                                                          23



 5     Soil Sampling Equipment                                                         25
€
                                        vui

-------
                               List of Figures






Figure                                                                              Paye




 1     Random Sampling                                                               7




 2     Stratified Random Sampling                                                       7




 3     Systematic Grid Sampling                                                         7




 4     Systematic Random Sampling                                                      8




 5     Search Sampling                                                                 9




 6     Transect Sampling                                                              11




 7     Site Sketch and Phase 1 Soil Sampling Locations, ABC Plating Site                     13




 8     Phase 2 Soil Sampling and XRF Screening Locations, ABC Plating Site                 16




 9     Phase 2 Sampling Grid Cell Diagram                                              17




10     GPR Survey Results, ABC Plating Site                                             18




11     EM-31 Survey Results, ABC Plating Site                                           19




12     Phase 2 Sampling Grid Cell Diagram (Grid Sizes >  100 x 100 ft.)                     28




13     Quartering to Homogenize and Split Samples                                       29




14     Sampling Error due to Sampling Design                                           32




L5     Computer-Generated Contour Map, ABC Plating Site (4000 mg/kg Hot Spot)           38




16     Computer-Generated Contour Map, ABC Plating Site (1400 mg/kg Hot Spot)           38




17     Histogram of Surface Chromium Concentrations, ABC Plating Site                     41




18     Phase 2 Surface Data Posting for Chromium, ABC Plating Site                        42




19     Phase 2 Subsurface  Data Posting for Chromium, ABC Plating Site                     43




20     Contour Map of Surface Chromium Data (ppm), ABC Plating Site                     44




21     Contour Map of Subsurface Chromium Data (ppm), ABC Plating Site                  44

-------
                                   1.0   INTRODUCTION
 1.1    OBJECTIVE AND SCOPE

 This is the first volume in  a series of guidance
 documents that assist Removal Program On-Scene
 Coordinators  (OSCs)  and  other  field staff  in
 obtaining representative samples  at removal sites.
 The objective  of  representative sampling  is  to
        that     ample  or a  rou   o   amles
accurately  characterizes  site  conditions.    This
document  specifically  addresses  representative
sampling  for  soil   The  following chapters  are
designed to assist field personnel in representative
sampling within the  objectives and scope  of the
Removal  Program.   This  includes:
available  information;  selecting an appropriate
sampling   approach;   selecting   and   utilizing
geophysical, field analytical screening, and sampling
equipment;  utilizing proper  sample preparation
techniques;   incorporating   suitable   types  and
numbers of QA/QC samples; and interpreting and
presenting the analytical and geophysical data.

As the Superfund  program  has developed,  the
Removal  Program  has  expanded  its emphasis
beyond  emergency response   and  short-term
cleanups.  Longer, more complex removal actions
must  meet  a variety  of  sampling objectives,
including identifying threat, delineating sources and
extent  of contamination,  and  confirming  the
achievement of clean-up standards. Many important
and potentially costly decisions  are  based on the
sampling data, making it very important that OSCs
and field personnel understand how accurately the
sampling data characterize the actual site conditions.
In  keeping  with  this strategy,  this document
emphasizes    field   analytical   screening   and
geophysical techniques as cost effective approaches
to  characterize the site  and to select sampling
locations.
1.2     REMOVAL PROGRAM
        SAMPLING OBJECTIVES

Although field conditions and removal activities can
vary greatly from site to site, the primary Removal
Program soil sampling objectives include obtaining
data to:

1.  Establish threat to public health or welfare or
    to the environment;
2.   Locate  and  identify  potential  sources  of
    contamination;

3.   Define the extent of contamination;

4.   Determine treatment and disposal options; and

5.   Document the attainment of clean-up goals.

These objectives are discussed in detail in section
15.



1.3     REPRESENTATIVE SAMPLING

Representative soil sampling ensures that a sample
or  group  of  samples   accurately reflects  the
concentration of the contaminant(s)  of concern at a
given  time  and location.  Analytical results from
representative samples  reflect  the variation  in
pollutant presence and concentration throughout a
site.

This document  concentrates on the variables that
are introduced  in the field ~ namely, those that
relate to the  site-specific conditions, the sampling
design approach, and the techniques for collection
and preparation of samples. The following variables
affect   the  representativeness of  samples  and
subsequent measurements:

•   Geological  variability  -  Regional  and local
    variability in the mineralogy of rocks and soils,
    the   buffering capacity  of  soils,  lithologic
    permeability, and in the sorptive capacity of the
    vadose zone.

•   Contaminant   concentration   variability   --
    Variations in the contaminant  concentrations
    throughout the site.

•   Collection  and  preparation  variability  --
    Deviations in analytical results  attributable  to
    bias  introduced  during  sample  collection,
    preparation, and transportation (for analysis).

•   Analytical variability -- Deviations in analytical
    results attributable to the manner in which the
    sample was stored, prepared, and analyzed by
    the  on-site  or off-site laboratory.  Although
    analytical  variability  cannot  be  corrected

-------
    through representative sampling, it can falsely
    lead 10 the conclusion  that error  is due to
    sample collection and handling procedures.
1.4     EXAMPLE SITE

An example site, presented at
the  end   of  each   chapter,
illustrates the development of a
representative  soil  sampling
plan   that   meets   Removal
Program objectives.

-------
                                 2.0   SAMPLING  DESIGN
 2.1    INTRODUCTION

The following procedures are recommended for
developing a sound sampling design.  Many steps
can be performed simultaneously, and the sequence
is not rigid.

•   Review existing historical site information;

•   Perform a site  reconnaissance;

•   Evaluate  potential migration  pathways and
    receptors;

•   Determine the  sampling objectives;

•   Establish the data quality objectives;

•   Utilize field screening techniques;

•   Select parameters for which to be analyzed;

•   Select an appropriate sampling approach; and

•   Determine the  locations to be sampled.

Real-time field analytical screening techniques can
be used throughout the removal action.  The results
can be used to modify the site sampling plan as the
extent of contamination becomes known.



2.2    HISTORICAL DATA REVIEW

Unless the site is considered a classic  emergency,
every effort  should be made to first  thoroughly
review relevant site information.  An historical data
review examines  past and present site operations
and  disposal practices, providing an overview  of
known and potential site contamination and other
site  hazards.   Sources  of  information include
federal, state and local officials and files  (e.g^ site
inspection reports and legal actions), deed or title
records, current  and former  facility  employees,
potentially responsible parties, local residents, and
facility records or files. For any previous sampling
efforts,  obtain  information   regarding  sample
locations (on maps, if possible), matrices, methods
of collection and analysis, and relevant contaminant
concentrations. Assess the reliability and usefulness
of existing analytical data. Even data which are not
substantiated by documentation or QA/QC controls
may still be useful.

Collect  information that  describes  any  specific
chemical  processes  used  on  site,  as  well  as
descriptions  of raw materials used, products and
wastes, and  waste storage and disposal  practices.
Whenever  possible, obtain  site  maps,  facility
blueprints,   and  historical  aerial  photographs,
detailing  past  and present storage, process, and
waste disposal locations.  The local Agricultural
Extension Agent, a Soil Conservation Service (SCS)
representative, has information on soil types and
drainage patterns. County property and tax records,
and  United  States  Geological  Survey  (USGS)
topographic maps are also useful sources of site and
regional information.


2.3    SITE RECONNAISSANCE

A site reconnaissance, conducted either prior to or
in conjunction with sampling, is invaluable to assess
site  conditions,  to evaluate areas  of  potential
contamination,   to  evaluate  potential  hazards
associated with sampling, and to develop a sampling
plan.  During the reconnaissance, fill data gaps left
from the historical review by:

•   Interviewing local residents, and present or past
    employees about site-related activities;

•   Researching  facility  files  or  records  (where
    records   are  made   accessible    by
    owner/operator);

•   Performing  a  site entry, utilizing appropriate
    personal   protective   equipment  and
    instrumentation. Observe and photo-document
    the site; note site access routes; map  process
    and  waste disposal  areas  such as  landfills,
    lagoons,  and  effluent  pipes;  inventory  site
    wastes; and map potential transport routes such
    as ponds, streams, and irrigation ditches. Note
    topographic  and   structural  features, dead
    animals   and  dead  or stressed vegetation,
    potential  safety hazards,  and  visible label
    information   from   drums, tanks,  or other
    containers found on the site.

-------
2.4    MIGRATION PATHWAYS AND
        RECEPTORS

The historical review and site visit are the initial
steps in defining the source areas of contamination
which could pose a threat to human health and the
environment.    This section  addresses how to
delineate the  spread of contamination away from
the source areas. Included are pollutant migration
pathways and the routes by which persons or the
environment  may  be exposed  to the   on-site
chemical wastes.

2.4.1   Migration Pathways and
        Transport Mechanisms

Migration  pathways   are  routes   by   which
contaminants  have  moved or may be  moved away
from a contamination source.  Pollutant migration
pathways may include man-made pathways, surface
drainage,   vadosc   zone  transport,   and  wind
dispersion.    Human  activity (such  as foot or
vehicular traffic) also transports contaminants away
from  a  source  area.    These  five  transport
mechanisms are described below.

•   Man-made  pathways — A  site located in an
    urban  setting  has  the following man-made
    pathways which can aid contaminant migration:
    storm and  sanitary sewers,  drainage culverts,
    sumps and  sedimentation basins, French drain
    systems, and underground utility lines.

•   Surface drainage  - Contaminants  can be
    adsorbed  onto    sediments,   suspended
    independently in the water column, or dissolved
    in surface water runoff and be rapidly carried
    into drainage ditches,  streams, rivers, ponds,
    lakes, and  wetlands.  Consider prior surface
    drainage routes;  historical aerial  photographs
    can be invaluable for delineation of past surface
    drainage   patterns.    An  historical  aerial
    photograph search can  be  requested through
    the   EPA   Regional   Remote  Sensing
    Coordinator.

•   Vadose zone transport - Vadose zone transport
    is the vertical or horizontal movement of water
    and  of soluble and insoluble contaminants
    within the unsaturated zone of the soil profile.
    Contaminants  from  a  surface source  or  a
    leaking underground storage tank can percolate
    through the vadose zone and be adsorbed onto
    subsurface soil or reach groundwater.
    Wind dispersion  - Contaminants  deposited
    over or adsorbed onto soil may migrate from a
    waste site as airborne participates.  Depending
    on the particle-size distribution and associated
    settling  rates,  these  particulates  may   be
    deposited  downwind or  remain  suspended,
    resulting in contamination  of  surface soils
    and/or exposure of nearby populations.

    Human  and animal  activity --  Foot  and
    vehicular traffic  of facility workers,  response
    personnel,   and   trespassers   can   move
    contaminants away from a  source.   Animal
    burrowing,  grazing, and  migration  can  also
    contribute to contaminant migration.
2.4.2  Receptors

Once the migration pathways have been determined,
identify all  receptors  (i.e.,  potentially  affected
human and environmental populations) along these
pathways.  Human receptors include  on-site and
nearby  residents  and  workers.     Note   the
attractiveness  and  accessibility of  site  wastes
(including contaminated soil) to children and other
nearby residents.  Environmental receptors include
Federal-  or  state-designated  endangered   or
threatened species,  habitats  for  these  species,
wetlands, and other Federal- and state-designated
wilderness, critical, and natural areas.
2.5     REMOVAL PROGRAM
        SAMPLING OBJECTIVES

Collect  samples  if any of the following Removal
Program sampling objectives in the scope of the
project are not fulfilled by existing data.

1.  Establishing  Threat  to  Public  Health  or
    Welfare  or  to  the  Environment  -  The
    Comprehensive   Environmental   Response,
    Compensation  and  Liability  Act  of  1980
    (CERCLA) and the National Contingency Plan
    (NCP) establish the funding mechanism  and
    authority which allow the OSC to activate a
    Federal  removal  action.   The  OSC must
    establish (often with sampling) that the  site
    poses a threat to public health or welfare or to
    the environment.

2.  Locating and Identifying Potential Sources of
    Contamination  -  Sample  to identify  the

-------
    locations and sources of contamination.  Use
    the results  to  formulate  removal priorities,
    containment and clean-up  strategies, and cost
    projections.

3.  Defining the Extent of Contamination - Where
    appropriate, sample to assess horizontal and
    vertical extent of contaminant concentrations.
    Use the results to determine the site boundaries
    (Le., extent  of contamination), define dean
    areas, estimate volume of contaminated soil,
    establish a dearly defined removal approach,
    and assess removal costs and timeframe.

4.  Determining Treatment and Disposal Options
    - Sample to characterize  soil for  in  situ  or
    other on-site treatment, or excavation and off-
    site treatment or disposal

5.  Documenting the Attainment of Clean- up Goals
    - During or following a site cleanup, sample to
    determine whether the removal goals or dean-
    up standards were  achieved, and to delineate
    areas requiring further treatment or excavation
    when appropriate.
2.6    DATA QUALITY OBJECTIVES

Data quality objectives (DQOs) state the level of
uncertainty that is acceptable from data collection
activities.   DQOs also define the data  quality
necessary to make a certain decision. Consider the
following when establishing DQOs for a particular
project:

•   Decision(s)  to be made  or question(s) to  be
    answered;

•   Why environmental data are needed and how
    the results will be used;

•   Time   and   resource  constraints  on  data
    collection;

•   Descriptions of the environmental data to  be
    collected;

•   Applicable model or data interpretation method
    used to arrive at a condusion;

•   Detection limits for anaiytes of concern; and

•   Sampling and analytical error.
In addition to these considerations,  the  quality
assurance components of precision, accuracy (bias),
completeness, representativeness, and comparability
should  also be  considered.   Quality assurance
components are defined as follows:

•   Precision - measurement of variability in the
    data collection process.

•   Accuracy (bias) - measurement of bias in the
    analytical process. The term "bias" throughout
    this document refers to the QA/QC accuracy
    component.

•   Completeness   -  percentage  of  sampling
    measurements which are judged to be valid.

•   Representativeness -- degree to which  sample
    data accurately  and  precisely  represent  the
    characteristics of the  site contaminant and
    their concentrations.

•   Comparability -- evaluation of the similarity of
    conditions  (e.g^  sample  depth,    sample
    homogeneity) under which separate sets of data
    are produced.

Quality  assurance/quality  control   (QA/QC)
objectives are discussed further in chapter 5.
2.7    FIELD ANALYTICAL
        SCREENING AND
        GEOPHYSICAL TECHNIQUES

There  are  two primary  types of analytical  data
which can be generated during a removal action:
laboratory  analytical  data  and  field  analytical
screening   data.     Field   analytical  screening
techniques  (e.&, using a  photoionization detector
(PID), portable X-ray fluorescence (XRF) unit, and
hazard categorization kits)  provide real-time or
direct  reading  capabilities.   These  screening
methods can narrow the possible groups or classes
of chemicals for laboratory analysis and are effective
and economical for gathering large amounts of site
data.   Once  an area  is  identified using  field
screening techniques, a subset of samples can be
sent for  laboratory  analysis  to  substantiate the
screening results. Under a limited sampling budget,
field   analytical   screening   (with  laboratory
confirmation) will generally result in more analytical
data from  a site than will  sampling for off-site
laboratory  analysis  alone.    To  minimize the

-------
potential for false  negatives (not detecting oo-cke
contamination),  use only  those  field analytical
screening methods which provide detection limits
below applicable action levels.  It should be noted,
that some field analytical screening methods which
do  not achieve detection limits below site action
levels can still detect grossly  contaminated areas,
and can be useful for some sampling events.

Geophysical techniques may also be utilized during
a removal action to help  depict locations of any
potential buried drums or tanks, buried waste, and
disturbed areas.  Geophysical techniques include
ground  penetrating radar  (GPR), magnetometry,
electromagnetic conductivity (EM) and resistivity
surveys.
2.8     PARAMETERS FOR ANALYSIS

If the historical data review yields little information
about the types of waste on site, use applicable field
screening  methods to narrow the parameters for
analysis  by  ruling  out  the  presence  of  high
concentrations of  certain contaminants.   If the
screening results are  inconclusive, send a subset of
samples  from the  areas  of concern for a  full
chemical characterization by an off-site laboratory.
It is advised that samples from known or suspected
source areas be sent to the laboratory for a full
chemical characterization so that all contaminant^ of
concern can be  identified (even at  low  detection
levels), and future sampling and  analysis can then
focus on those substances.

Away from source areas, select a limited number of
indicator parameters (e.g., lead, PAHs) for analysis
based on  the suspected contaminants  of concern.
This will result in significant cost savings over a full
chemical characterization of each sample.  Utilize
EPA-approved   methodologies  and   sample
preparation, where possible, for  all requested off-
site laboratory analyses.
2.9     REPRESENTATIVE SAMPLING
        APPROACHES

Selecting sampling locations for field screening or
laboratory  analysis  entails choosing  the  most
appropriate sampling approach.   Representative
sampling approaches include judgmental, random,
stratified   random,  systematic grid, systematic
random,  search,  and  transect  sampling.   A
representative sampling plan may combine two or
more of these approaches.   Each  approach is
defined below.

2.9.1  Judgmental  Sampling

Judgmental sampling is the subjective selection of
sampling locations at a site, based on  historical
information,  visual  inspection,  and   on  best
professional judgment of the sampling team  Use
judgmental sampling to identify the contaminants
present at areas having the highest concentrations
(i.e., worst-case conditions).  Judgmental sampling
has no randomization associated with the sampling
strategy, precluding any statistical interpretation of
the sampling results.

2.9.2  Random  Sampling

Random  sampling is the  arbitrary collection of
samples within defined boundaries of the area of
concern.  Choose random sample locations using a
random selection procedure  (c.g.,  using a random
number table).  Refer to U.S. EPA,  I984a, for a
random number table.  The arbitrary selection of
sampling points requires each sampling point to be
selected independent of the location of all other
points, and results in all locations within the area of
concern having an equal chance of being selected.
Randomization  is  necessary in order  to make
probability or confidence  statements  about  the
sampling results.  The key to  interpreting these
probability statements is the assumption that the
site is homogeneous with respect to the parameters
being  monitored.    The  higher  the degree  of
heterogeneity,  the   less   the  random  sampling
approach   will   adequately  characterize  true
conditions  at the site.  Because hazardous waste
sites are very rarely homogeneous, other statistical
sampling approaches (discussed below) provide ways
to subdivide the site  into more homogeneous areas.
These  sampling  approaches  may  be  more
appropriate for  removal  activities than random
sampling.  Refer to U.S. EPA, February 1989, pages
5-3  to 5-5 for  guidelines  on selecting  sample
coordinates for random  sampling.     Figure  1
illustrates a random sampling approach.

2.9.3  Stratified  Random Sampling

Stratified random sampling often relies on historical
information and prior  analytical results (or field
screening data) to divide  the  sampling  area  into
smaller areas called strata.  Each strata is more

-------
               Figure 1:  Random Sampling
**
   100-


   75-
tu
ffi  50-
   25-
           II     I    T    I     I    1     I     I
          25   50   75   100  125  150  175  200  225
                            FEET
           Figure 2:  Stratified Random Sampling
          Figure 3:  Systematic Grid Sampling
  **
   100-
   75-


 ui 50H
   25-
          25   50   75   100  125  150  175  200  225
                            FEET


              ** After U.S. EPA, February, 1989
                         LEGEND
                   SAMPLE AREA BOUNDARY

                   SELECTED SAMPLE LOCATION

                   SAMPLE LOCATION

-------
homogeneous than the site is as a whole.  Strata c* i
be  defined based on various factors,  including:
campling depth, rgซ>tyปปyiaiปt concentration levels,
and contaminant source  areas.   Place sample
locations within each of these strata using random
selection procedures.  Stratified random sampling
imparts some control upon the sampling scheme but
still allows  for   random  sampling  within  each
stratum.  Different sampling approaches may also
be  selected to address the different strata at the
site.  Stratified random  sampling  is a useful and
flexible  design   for  estimating  the   pollutant
concentration within each depth interval or area of
concern.   Figure  2 illustrates a stratified random
sampling approach where strata are defined based
on  depth. In this example, soil coring devices are
used  to  collect  samples from given  depths  at
randomly selected locations within  the strata.

2.9.4 Systematic Grid Sampling

Systematic grid sampling involves  subdividing the
area of concern by using a square or triangular grid
and collecting samples from the nodes (intersections
of the grid lines).  Select the origin  and direction
for placement of  the grid using an initial random
point.  From that point, construct a coordinate axis
and grid over the whole site.  The distance between
sampling  locations   in  the  systematic  grid  is
determined by the size of the area to be sampled
and the  number  of samples  to  be   collected.
Systematic grid sampling is often used to delineate
the  extent  of  contamination  ffnr*  to  define
contaminant concentration gradients.  Refer to U.S.
EPA  February  1989,  pages  5-5  to  5-12,  for
guidelines on selection of sample coordinates  for
systematic grid sampling.   Figure 3 illustrates a
systematic grid sampling approach.

2.9.5  Systematic Random Sampling

Systematic random sampling is a useful and flexible
design  for  estimating the  average   pollutant
concentration within grid cells.  Subdivide the area
of concern using a  square  or  triangular grid  (as
described in section 2.9.4) then collect samples from
within each cell using random selection procedures.
Systematic random sampling allows for the isolation
of cells that may require additional  sampling and
analysis. Figure 4 illustrates a systematic random
sampling approach.

2.9.6  Search Sampling

Search sampling utilizes either a systematic grid or
systematic random sampling approach to search for
areas where contaminants exceed applicable  clean-
up standards (hot spots). The number of samples
and the grid spacing are determined on the basis of
the acceptable level of error (i.e.,  the  chance of
missing a hot spot).  Search sampling requires that
assumptions be  made  about the size, shape,  and
depth of the hot spots.  As illustrated in figure 5,
the smaller and/or narrower the hot spots are, the
                           Figure 4:  Systematic Random Sampling
                  100-

                  75-

                 ' 50-


                  25-
                            I     T     I      I     I     I      I      I      I
                           25   50    75   100   125   150   175  200  225
                                                FEET

                                  After  U.S. EPA, February, 1989
                                              LEGEND
                                       SAMPLE AREA BOUNDARY
                                       SELECTED SAMPLE LOCATION

-------
smaller the grid spacing must be in order to locate
them.  Also, the smaller the acceptable error of
nii^ing hot spots is, the  smaller the grid  spacing
must  be.  This,  in  effect, means  collecting more
samples.

Once grid spacing has been selected, the probability
of locating a hot spot can be determined. Using a
systematic grid approach, table 1 lists approximate
probabilities of mining an elliptical hot spot based
on the  grid  method chosen as well  as  the
dimensions of the hot spot. The lengths of the long
and  short axes (L  and S) are represented as a
percentage  of the  grid  spacing  chosen.   The
triangular grid method consistently shows lower
probabilities of mining a hot spot in comparison to
the block grid method.  Table 1 can be used in two
ways. If the acceptable probability of missing a hot
spot  is known, then  the size of the hot spot which
can be located  at  that probability level  can  be
determined. Conversely, if the approximate size of
the hot spot is known, the probability of locating it
can be determined. For example, suppose the block
grid method is chosen with a grid spacing of 25 feet.
The  OSC is  willing to accept a  10% chance of
missing an elliptical  hot spot.  Using table L, there
would be a 90% probability of locating an elliptical
hot spot with L equal to  90% of the grid  spacing
chosen and S equal to 40% of the grid  spacing
chosen. Therefore the smallest elliptical hot spot
which can be located would have a long axis L =
0.90 x 25ft. =  22.5 ft.  and a short  axis S ป 0.40 x
25ft.  * 10 ft.
                      Similarly, if the approximate size of the hot spot
                      being searched for is known, then the probability of
                      missing  that hot spot can  be determined.  For
                      example, if a triangular grid method was  chosen
                      with a 25  foot grid  spacing and the approximate
                      shape  of  the  hot  spot   is  known,  and L  is
                      approximately 15 feet or 60% of the grid spacing,
                      and S is approximately 10 feet or 40% of the grid
                      spacing,  then there is approximately a  15%  chance
                      of missing  a hot spot of this size and shape.

                      2.9.7   Transect Sampling

                      Transect sampling involves establishing one or more
                      transect  lines across  the surface of a site.  Collect
                      samples at  regular intervals along the transect lines
                      at the surface and/or at one or more given depths.
                      The length of the transect line and the number  of
                      samples  to be  collected  determine the  spacing
                      between sampling  points  along  the transect.
                      Multiple transect  lines  may be parallel or non-
                      parallel to one another. If the lines are parallel, the
                      sampling objective is  similar to systematic grid
                      sampling.  A primary benefit of transect sampling
                      over  systematic  grid  sampling  is the  ease  of
                      establishing and relocating individual transect lines
                      versus an entire grid.  Transect sampling is often
                      used to delineate the extent of contamination and to
                      define contaminant concentration gradients.  It is
                      also used,  to a  lesser  extent,  in  compositing
                      sampling schemes.    For  example,   a transit
                      sampling approach might be used to characterize a
                                   Figure 5:  Search Sampling
                 100-
                  75-
               S 50-
               LL
                  25-
                            I
                          25
  I
50
 I
75
100
125   150  175
200   225
                                                FEET
                                  After:  U.S. EPA, February, 1989
                                             LEGEND
                                ""^ SAMPLE AREA BOUNDARY
                                 9   SELECTED SAMPLE LOCATION
                                IT) HOT SPOT

-------
O
CL
o
X

"CD
o

J3-

Lu

CO
O)
c

to
CD

O
W
CL
.0
CO
O

O

ฃ
CO
g
cr
o
u_
O
LU
O
     2
     LU
     O
     cc
     UJ
     CL
     CO
     <
     CO
cc
o

c/5
LL
O
X
     LU
          S
          5?
                     R
                          oo
                                  00
                                         p
                                         d
                                         R
                                                   p
                                                   O
                                                 p
                                                 o
                                                        p
                                                        0
                                                      p
                                                      o
                                                             q
                                                             o
                                                           p
                                                           c
                                                             p
                                                             o
                                                           p
                                                           o
  p
  o
p
o
       ONIDVdS QIH9 dO 39VlN30d3d V SV SIXV 9NO1 dO H19N31
                                                                 r<-
                                                                 8
                                                                 o
                                                                 _c
                                                                 w
                                                                 0>
                                                                 25
                                                                 2

                                                                 o
                                                                 ul
                                                                     •B-S
                                                                     s ซ
                                                                     II
                                                                     ฃ
                                                                     ii
                                                                       CO
                                    10

-------
 linear feature such as a drainage ditch. A transect
 line is run down the center of the ditch, along its
 full length. Sample aliquots are collected at regular
 intervals  along the transect  line  and are  then
 composited.  Figure 6 illustrates transect sampling.
 Table 2  summarizes  the various  representative
 sampling approaches and ranks the approaches from
 most to  least suitable, based on the sampling
 objective.  Table 2 is intended to provide general
 guidelines, but it  cannot cover all  site-specific
 conditions encountered in the Removal Program.
 2.10   SAMPLING LOCATIONS

 Once a sampling approach has been selected, the
 next  step  is to select  sampling  locations.   For
 statistical  (non-judgmental)   sampling,  careful
 placement  of each sampling point is important to
 achieve representativeness.

 Factors such as the difficulty in collecting a sample
 at a given point, the presence of vegetation,  or
 discoloration  of the soil could bias a  statistical
 sampling plan.

 Sampling points may be located with a variety of
 methods.  A relatively simple method for locating
 random points consists of using either a compass
and a measuring tape, or pacing, to locate sampling
points with respect to a permanent landmark, such
as a survey marker. Then plot sampling coordinates
on a map and mark  the actual sampling points for
 future  reference.   Where the  sampling  design
 demands a greater degree of precision, locate each
 sample point by means of a  survey.  After field
 sample collection, mark each  sample point with a
 permanent  stake so that  the  survey  team can
 identify all the locations.
 2.11   EXAMPLE SITE

 2.11.1  Background
          Information

The ABC Plating Site is located
in Carroll County, Pennsylvania,
approximately  U  miles north  of the town of
Jonesville (figure 7). The site covers approximately
4 acres,  and operated as an electroplating facility
from  1947 to 1982.  During its years of operation,
the company plated automobile and airplane  parts
with  chromium,  nickel,  and  copper.   Cyanide
solutions were used in the  plating process.   ABC
Plating  deposited electroplating  wastes into two
shallow surface settling lagoons  in the northwest
sector of the site. The county environmental health
department was attempting to  enforce cleanup by
the  site owner,  when,  in early  1982, a fire on site
destroyed most of the process building. The owner
then abandoned the facility and could not be located
by enforcement and legal authorities. The county
contacted EPA  for an assessment of the site  for a
possible removal action.
                                 Figure 6:  Transect Sampling
                  100-

                  75-

               S  50-j
               u.

                  25-
                            i     i      i      i     i      i      i      i     r
                           25   50    75   100   125   150   175  200   225
                                                FEET
                                 After:  U.S.  EPA, February, 1989
                                            LEGEND

                                    SAMPLE AREA BOUNDARY
                                    SELECTED SAMPLE LOCATION
                                                11

-------
                Table 2:  Representative Sampling Approach Comparison
                                                 SAMPLING APPROACH
SAMPLING OBJECTIVE
ESTABLISH
THREAT
IDENTIFY
SOURCES
DELINEATE EXTENT
OF CONTAMINATION
EVALUATE
TREATMENT
AND DISPOSAL
OPTIONS
CONFIRM
CLEANUP
JUDGMENTAL
1
1
4
3
4
|
4
4
3
3
1C
STRATIFIED
RANDOM
3
2
3
1
3
SYSTEMATIC
GRID
2a
2a
1b
2
1b
i SYSTEMATIC
RANDOM
3
3
1
2
1
I
3
2
1
4
1
TRANSECT
2
3
1
2
1d
              1  - PREFERRED APPROACH
              2  - ACCEPTABLE APPROACH
              3  - MODERATELY ACCEPTABLE APPROACH
              4  - LEAST ACCEPTABLE APPROACH
              8  - SHOULD BE USED WITH FIELD ANALYTICAL SCREENING
              b  - PREFERRED ONLY WHERE KNOWN TRENDS ARE PRESENT
              C  - ALLOWS FOR STATISTICAL SUPPORT OF CLEANUP VERIFICATION IF SAMPLING
                   OVER ENTIRE SITE
              d  - MAY BE EFFECTIVE WHป COMPOSITING TECHNIQUE IF SITE IS PRESUMED TO BE CLEAN
2.11.2  Historical Data Review and
        Site Reconnaissance

The EPA On-Scene Coordinator (OSC) reviewed
the county site file, finding that in 1974, the owner
was cited  for violating the  dean Streams Act and
for storing and treating industrial waste without a
permit  The owner was  ordered to file a site
closure plan and to remediate the storage lagoons.
The owner, however, continued operations and was
then ordered to begin remediation in 90 days or be
issued a cease and desist order.  Soon  after, a
follow-up  inspection revealed that the lagoons had
been backfilled without removing the waste.

The OSC  and members of the Technical Assistance
Team  (TAT) arrived on  site  to interview local
officials,   fire  department officers,  neighboring
residents  (including a past facility employee), and
county representatives, regarding  site operating
practices and other site details.  A past employee
sketched facility process features on a map which
was obtained from  the county  (figure 7).  The
features included two settling lagoons and a feeder
trench which transported plating wastes from the
process building to the lagoons. The OSC obtained
copies of aerial photographs of the site area from
the district office of the  U.S. Soil Conservation
Service.  The county also provided the OSC with
copies of all historical site and violation reports.

The OSC and  TAT made a site entry utilizing
appropriate  personal  protective  equipment  and
instrumentation.   They observed  12 vats, likely
containing  plating  solutions, on  a  concrete  pad
where the  original  facility building once stood.
Measurements of Ph  ranged  from 1  to  11.  In
addition, 50 drums and numerous smaller containers
(some on the concrete pad, others sitting directly on
                                                12

-------
     Figure 7:  Site Sketch and Phase 1 Soil Sampling Locations
                        ABC Plating Site
 \
                                   HOUSE
                                  TRAILER
           •FENCE
     SCALE  IN  FEET
100    50    0
100
                                    LEGEND
                                                         DAMAGED
                                                         BUILJ3ING
                                                          AREA
              4|   SAMPLING LOCATIONS

             	  SURFACE FLOW

             	SITE BOUNDARY
                              13

-------
the ground) were leaking and bulging,  due to the
fire. TAT noted many areas of stained toil, which
indicated container leakage, poor  waste
Estimate the volume of
the associated removal costs.
                                       soil and
practices, and possible illegal dumping of wastes.

2.11.3   Identification of Migration
         Pathways, Transport
         Mechanisms and Receptors

During the site entry, the OSC and TAT noted that
several areas were devoid of vegetation, threatening
wind erosion which could transport heavy metal-
and cyanide-contaminated soil particulates off site.
These particulates could be deposited on residential
property  downwind or be inhaled  by  nearby
residents.

Erosion gullies located on site indicated soil erosion
and fluvial  transport  due  to  storms.   Surface
drainage  sloped  towards the  northwest.   TAT
observed   stressed  and  discolored   vegetation
immediately  off  site,  along the surface drainage
route.   Surface  drainage  of heavy  metals  and
cyanide  was  a   direct  contact  hazard to  local
residents.  Further downgradient, runoff enters an
intermittent tributary of Little Creek. Little Creek
in turn feeds Barker Reservoir, the primary water
supply for the City of Jonesville and  neighboring
communities, which   are   located  2-5  miles
downgradient of the  site.   The site  entry  team
observed  that the site was  not secure and there
were signs  of trespass  (confirming a neighbor's
claim  that children play at the facility).   These
activities could lead to direct contact with cyanide
and heavy metal contaminants, in  addition  to the
potential  for chemical burns from direct  contact
with strong acids and bases.

2.11.4  Sampling Objectives

The OSC selected three specific sampling objectives,
as follows:

•   Phase 1 — Determine whether a threat to public
     health,  welfare, and  the  environment  exists,
     Identify sources of contamination to support an
     immediate  CERCLA-funded  activation  for
     containment  of  contaminants and security
     fencing,

•   Phase 2  - Define the extent of contamination
     at the site and adjacent  residential properties.
•   Phase  3 - After excavation (or treatment),
    document the attainment of clean-up goals.
    Assess  that cleanup  was completed to the
    selected level.

2.1 1 .5  Selection of  Sampling
        Approaches

The OSC selected a judgmental sampling approach
for Phase  1.  Judgmental sampling  supports the
Action Memorandum process by best defining on
site contaminants  in  the  worst-case  scenario in
order to  evaluate the  threat to human health,
welfare, and the environment. Threat is typically
established  using  a  relatively  small  number of
samples (less than 20) collected from source areas,
or  suspected  contaminated  areas based  on the
historical data review and site reconnaissance. For
this site,  containerized  wastes were  screened to
categorize  the contents  and to establish  a worst-
case  waste  volume, while  soil  samples  were
collected  to demonstrate  whether a  release had
already occurred.

For Phase 2, a stratified systematic grid design was
selected to define the extent of contamination. The
grid can accommodate field analytical screening and
geophysical surveys and allow for contaminated soil
excavation on a cell-by-cell bask.  Based on search
sampling conducted at similar sites, the hot spots
being searched for were assumed to be elliptical in
shape and  45 feet by 20 feet in size.   Under these
assumptions, a block grid,  with a  SO foot grid
spacing, was selected. This grid size ensured a no
more than 10% probability  of missing a hot spot
(see table  1).  The grid was extended to adjacent
residential properties when contaminated soil was
identified  at grid  points near the boundary of the
site.

Phase 3 utilJ7r.fl a systematic grid sampling approach
to  confirm  the  attainment  of  clean-up  goals.
Following  cleanup, field analytical  screening was
conducted  on  excavated  soil  areas  using   a
transportable  X-ray fluorescence   (XRF)  unit
mounted in a trailer (mobile laboratory instrument).
Based on  the results, each area was documented as
clean,  or  was excavated  to  additional depth, as
necessary.
                                                  14

-------
2.11.6  Field Analytical Screening,
         Geophysical Techniques,
         and Sampling Locations

During Phase 1 operations,  containerized wastes
were   screened   using  hazard   categorization
techniques to identify the presence of acids, bases,
oxidizers, and flammable substances. Following this
procedure,  photoionization detector (PID)  and
flame  ionization detector  (FID)  instruments,  a
radiation meter, and a cyanide monitor were  used
to  detect  the  presence  of  volatile   organic
compounds, radioactive substances,  and  cyanide,
respectively, in the containerized wastes.   Phase 1
screening indicated the presence of strong acids and
bases  and  the  absence  of  volatile   organic
compounds. TAT collected a total of 12 surface soil
samples  (0-3 inches) during this phase  and sent
them to a laboratory for analysis.  The soil sampling
locations  included   stained  soil  areas,  erosion
channels and soil adjacent to leaking  containers.
Background samples were  not collected during
Phase   1   because   they  were  unnecessary  for
activating funding. Phase 1 sampling locations are
shown in figure 7.   Based on  Phase 1 analytical
results,  consultation  with  a  Regional  EPA
toxicologist and with the  Agency  for Toxic
Substances  and Disease Registry (ATSDR),  an
action  level of 100 ppm for  chromium was selected
for cleanup.

During Phase 2 sampling activities, the OSC used a
transportable XRF unit installed in an on-site trailer
to screen samples for  total chromium in order to
limit the number of samples to be sent for off-site
laboratory analysis. The transportable XRF (rather
than a portable unit) was selected for field analytical
screening to accommodate the 100 ppm action level
for chromium. Sampling was performed at all grid
nodes  at the surface  (0-4 inches)  and subsurface
(36-40  inches) (figure 8). The 36-40 inch depth was
selected based on information obtained from county
reports and local interviews  which indicated the
lagoon wastes were  approximately 3 feet below
ground surface.  The samples were  homogenized
and sieved (discussed in chapter 4), then  screened
for chromium using  the XRF.   The surface and
subsurface samples from areas downgradient of the
original facility (21 grid nodes) and three upgradient
(background)  locations  were  sent  for  off-site
laboratory analysis following XRF screening.  The
analytical  results from these  samples allowed for
site-specific calibration of the XRF unit. Once grid
nodes with a contamination level greater than the
selected  action  level  were  located,  composite
samples were collected from each adjoining celL
Surface  aliquots   were   collected   and   then
composited, sieved, thoroughly  homogenized, and
screened using the XRF to pinpoint contaminated
cells.   Additionally, four subsurface aliquots were
collected at  the  same locations as  the  surface
aliquots.    They  were  also  composited,  sieved,
thoroughly  homogenized, and screened using the
XRF.  Figure 9 illustrates a Phase 2 sampling grid
cell diagram,  Based on  the  XRF data,  each
adjoining cell was either identified as dean (below
action level), or designated for excavation (at or
above action  level).

For Phase  3  sampling, cleanup  was confirmed by
collecting and compositing four aliquots from the
surface of each grid cell excavated during Phase 1
The surface composites were  then screened (as  in
Phase  2),  using  the  transportable  XRF.   Ten
percent of  the screened samples were also sent  to
an off-site  laboratory  for confirmatory sampling.
Based on  the Phase  3  screening  and sampling
results, each  cell  was documented as  dean, or,
excavated to additional depth, as necessary.

During Phase 2,  the OSC  conducted  ground
penetrating  radar  (GPR)  and  electromagnetic
conductivity  (EM) geophysical  surveys  to   help
delineate the  buried trench and lagoon areas along
with any other waste burial areas. The GPR survey
was run along the  north-south grid axis across the
suspected   locations  of the  trench  and  lagoons.
Several structural discontinuities, defining possible
disturbed  areas, were detected.   One anomaly
corresponded with  the  suspected  location  and
orientation    of  the   feeder   trench.     Several
discontinuities were  identified  in  the  suspected
lagoon areas;  however, the data did not condusiveiy
pinpoint precise locations. This could be due to a
disturbance of that  area during the  backfilling
process by the PRP.  The GPR survey is illustrated
in figure 10.

For the comprehensive EM survey, the original 50
foot grid spacing was decreased to 25 feet along the
north-south grid axis.  The EM  survey was run
along  the  north-south  axes  and  readings  were
obtained at the established grid nodes.  The EM
survey was utilized  throughout the site to detect the
presence of buried metal objects (e.g^ buried  pipe
leading to  the lagoons), and  potential subsurface
contaminant  plumes.   The EM survey identified
several high conductivity anomalies:  the suspected
feeder trench location, part of the lagoon area, and
                                                  15

-------
       Figure 8: Phase 2 Soil Sampling and XRF Screening Locations
                             ABC Plating Site
                                        €
ฃ
i
ฑ
at
              (...X.1..:5:XZ....JZ3	JM
                           (EAST-VEST  GRID COORDINATES)
                                                                DAMAGES
                                                                BUILDING
                                                                  AREA
               .' .'FENCE
            SCALE IN FEET
100    50    0
                             100
                                           LEGEND
         SCREENING LOCATION

 A  DOWNGRAD1ENT
 ^  SAMPLING  LOCATION
 .ux  BACKGROUND
 "^  SAMPLING  LOCATION
	SFTE BOUNDARY
                                   16

-------
  Figure 9:  Phase 2 Sampling Grid
              Cell Diagram*
     GRID NODE
COMPOSITE ALIQUOTS
                          a small area west of the process building (figure
                          11), which could have been an illegal waste dumping
                          area.     Several  areas  of   interference   were
                          encountered due to the presence  of large metal
                          objects at the surface (a dumpster, surface vats and
                          a junk car).
2.11.7  Parameters for Analysis

During Phase  1  sampling  activities, full priority
pollutant  metals  and  total  cyanide analyses were
conducted on all  samples.  Since Phase 1 samples
were collected from the areas of highest suspected
contaminant  concentration  (i.e.,   sources  and
drainage pathways), Phase 2 samples were run for
total chromium  and  cyanide,  the only  analytes
detected during the Phase 1 analyses.  During Phase
3, the samples sent to the laboratory for screening
confirmation were analyzed for total chromium and
cyanide.   Throughout the removal, it  was  not
possible to screen soils on site for cyanide, therefore
the OSC  requested laboratory cyanide analysis on
the 10% confirmatory samples.
     CHROMIUM ABOVE ACTION LEVEL
Surface samples should be taken over a
minimum area of one square foot.  Sampling
areas for depth sampling are limited by the
diameter of the sampling equipment (e.g.,
auger, split spoon, or coring devices).
                                             17

-------
                 Figure 10:  GPR Survey Results
                       ABC Plating Site
                                                       DAMAGED
                                                       BUILDING
                                                         AREA
     SCALE  IN FEET
100    50    0
100
                                   LEGEND
                                       (STRUCTURAL
                                       DISCONTINUITY (GPR)

                                   	SCTE BOUNDARY
                              18

-------
                 Figure 11:  EM-31 Survey Results
                         ABC Plating Site
                                                        DAMAGED
                                                        BUILDING
                                                          AREA
         .' .'FENCE
     SCALE  IN  FEET
100    50
100
                                   LEGEND
                                        EM-31 > 9
                                        MILL1MHOS  / METER
                                   	SfTE BOUNDARY
                              19

-------
                                     3.0   EQUIPMENT
 3.1    INTRODUCTION

Sample collection requires an understanding of the
capabilities of the sampling equipment, since using
inappropriate  equipment may  result in  biased
samples.   This chapter  provides information for
selecting field sampling and screening equipment
 3.2    FIELD ANALYTICAL
        SCREENING EQUIPMENT

Field analytical screening methods provide cm-site
measurements of contaminants of concern, limiting
the number of samples which need to be sent to an
off-site laboratory for time-consuming and  often
costly analysis. Field screening techniques can also
evaluate  soil  samples  for  indications that soil
contamination exists  (e.g.,  X-ray  fluorescence
(XRJF) for target metals or soil gas  survey for
identification of buried wastes or other subsurface
contamination). All field screening equipment and
methods described in this section are portable (the
equipment is hand-held, and generally no external
power is necessary).  Examples are photoionization
detectors (PID), flame ionization detectors (FID),
and some XRF devices.

Field screening generally provides analytical data of
suitable quality for site characterization, monitoring
during removal activities, and on-site  health and
safety decisions.  The methods presented  here can
provide  rapid,  cost-effective,   real-time   data;
however, results are often not compound-specific
and not quantitative.

When  selecting one field screening  method over
another, consider relative cost, sample analysis time,
potential  interferences or instrument  limitations,
detection limit, QA/QC requirements,  level of
training  required  for  operation,   equipment
availability, and data bias.  Also consider which
elements, compounds, or classes  of compounds the
field screening instrument is designed  to analyze.
As discussed in section 2.7,  the  screening method
selected should be sensitive enough to minimize the
potential  for  false negatives.   When collecting
samples for  on-site analysis (e.&,  XRF),  evaluate
the detection  limits  and bias  of the screening
method by sending a minimum of 10% of the
samples to an off-site laboratory for  confirmation.
Table   3  summarizes  the   advantages   and
disadvantages of selected portable field screening
equipment.
 3.3    GEOPHYSICAL EQUIPMENT

Geophysical techniques can be used in conjunction
with field analytical screening to help delineate
areas of subsurface contamination, including buried
drums and tanks. Geophysical data can be obtained
relatively rapidly, often without disturbing the site.
Geophysical  techniques  suitable  for  removal
activities include: ground penetrating radar (GPR),
magnetometry, electromagnetic conductivity (EM)
and   resistivity.     Specific   advantages   and
disadvantages associated with geophysical equipment
are summarized in table 4.  See also  EPA  ERT
Standard  Operating  Procedure  (SOP)  #2159,
General Surface Geophysics  (U.S.  EPA, January
1991).
3.4    SELECTING SAMPLING
        EQUIPMENT

The mechanical method by which a sampling tool
collects the sample may impact representativeness.
For  example, if the  sampling  objective is to
determine the concentrations of contaminants at
each soil  horizon  interface,  using a  hand auger
would be  inappropriate:  the augering technique
would disrupt and mix soil horizons, making the
precise horizon  interface  difficult to  determine.
Depth of sampling is another factor to  consider in
the proper selection of sampling equipment.  A
trowel, for example, is suitable for unconsolidated
surface soils, but may be a poor choice for sampling
at 12 inches, due to changes in soil consistency with
depth.

All sampling devices should be of sufficient quality
not to contribute contamination to samples (e.g.,
painted  surfaces which  could chip  off into the
sample).   In  addition,  the  sampling  equipment
should be either easily  decontaminated, or cost-
effective if considered to be expendable. Consider
ease of use when selecting sampling equipment.

Complicated sampling procedures usually  require
increased training and introduce a greater likelihood
                                                21

-------
                  Table 3:  Portable Field Analytical Screening Equipment
Euiment
                   Application to
X-ray fluorescence  Detects heavy metals
(portable)          in soils.
Flame ionization
detector (FID)
Photoionization
detector (FED)
Field test kits
Radiation detector
    Semi-quantitativery
    detects VOCs in soils.
    Detects total concentration
    of VOCs and some non-
    volatile organics and
    inorganics  in soils.

    Detects specific elements,
    compounds, or compound
    classes in soils.
    Detects the presence of selected
    forms of radiation in soils or
    other waste materials.
Rapid sample analysis; may be used in situ;
requires   trained   operator;   potential   matrix
interferences; may be used with a generic or site-
specific  calibration  model;  detection  limit  may
exceed action level; detects to ppm level; detection
limit should be calculated on a site-specific basis.

Immediate results; can be  used in GC mode to
identify specific organic compounds; detects VOCs
only, detects to ppm level

Immediate results; easy to use; non-compound
specific; results affected by high ambient humidity
and electrical sources such as radios; does not
respond to methane; detects to ppm level

Rapid results; easy to use; low cost; limited number
of kit types available; kits may be customized to
user needs; semi-quantitative; interferences by other
analytes is common; colorimetric interpretation is
needed; detection level dependent upon type of kit
used; can  be prone to error.

Easy to use; low cost; probes for one or a
combination of alpha, beta or gamma forms of
radiation;  unit and detection limits vary greatly,
detailed site surveys are time intensive and require
experienced personnel to interpret results.
Sources
U.S. EPA, September 1988a; U.S. EPA, December 1987; U.S. EPA, 1987.
                                                  22

-------
                               Table 4:  Geophysical Equipment
Equipment

Ground penetrating
radar (GPR)
Magnetometer
Electromagnetic
conductivity
meter (EM)
Wadi
                       Application to
Detects reflection anomalies caused
by lithoiogy changes or buried
objects; varying depths of investi-
gation, 15 to 30 feet, are possible.
Detects presence and area! extent
of ferromagnetic material in
subsurface soils, including buried
metal containers. Single 55-gallon
drums can be identified at depths
up to 10 feet and large masses of
drums up  to 30 feet or more.

Detects electrical conductivity
changes in subsurface geologic lith-
oiogy, pore fluids, and buried
objects. Depth of investigation
varies from 9 feet to 180 feet
depending on instrument used, coil
spacing, and coil configuration.

Detects electrical conductivity
changes in surface and sub-surface
materials utilizing existing very low
frequency (VLF) radio waves.
Advantages and Disadvantages

Capable of high resolution; generates
continuous measurement profile; can survey
large area quickly; site specific best results are
achieved in dry, sandy soils; day-rich and water
saturated  soils produce  poor  reflections and
limit depth of penetration; data interpretation
requires a trained geophysicist.

Quick and easy to operate; good initial survey
instrument; readings are often affected by
nearby man-made steel structures (including
above-ground fences, buildings, and vehicles);
data interpretation may require geophysicist.
Rapid data collection; can delineate inorganic
and large-scale organic contamination in sub-
surface fluids; sensitive to man-made structures
(including buried cables, above-ground steel
structures and electrical power lines); survey
planning and data interpretation may require
geophysicist.

Utilizes existing long-distance communication
VLF radio waves (10-30 Khz range): no need to
induce electrical field; directional problems can
be overcome with portable transmitters.
Resistivity meter
Detects electrical resistivity var-
iations in subsurface materials (e.g
lithoiogy, pore fluids, buried pipe-
lines and drums).  Vertical resol-
ution to depths of 100 feet are
possible.
Detects lateral and vertical variations;
instrument requires direct ground contact,
making it relatively labor intensive; sensitive to
outside interference; data interpretation requires
a trained geophysicist.
Sources :   Benson, et. al. 1988; NJDEP, 1988.
                                                  23

-------
of  procedural   errors.     Standard   operating
procedures help to avoid  such errors.  Sample
volumr  is  another  selection  concern.   Specific
advantages and  disadvantages of  soil sampling
equipment are given in table 5.  Refer also to EPA
ERT SOP #2012, Soil Sampling  (in US. EPA,
January 1991) for guidance on using various types of
soil sampling equipment.
3.5    EXAMPLE SITE

3.5.1  Selection of
        Sampling
        Equipment
Dedicated plastic  scoops were
used for Phase 1 soil sampling.  For Phase 2, the
OSC  used bucket augers for  both surface  and
subsurface soil sampling because of their ease of
use, good vertical depth range, and uniform surface
sampling volume.  Standard operating procedures
were followed to promote proper sample collection,
         and decontamination.  From the bucket
auger,  each sample was placed into  a dedicated
plastic  pan  and  mixed using a dedicated  plastic
scoop.   Samples were further prepared for XRF
screening and laboratory analysis (section 4.8).
3.5.2  Selection of Field Analytical
        Screening Equipment

Phase 1 sampling identified the sources and types of
on-site contaminants in order to establish a threat.
Hazard categorization techniques, organic  vapor
detecting instruments, and radiation and cyanide
monitors  were  utilized  to  tentatively identify
containerized liquid wastestreams in order to select
initial judgmental soil  sampling locations. During
Phase 2 sampling, a portable XRF unit was used to
determine the  extent of  contamination and to
identify additional hot spots. Samples to be sent for
laboratory analysis were then placed into sampling
jars (as discussed in section 4.8).  Samples collected
from upgradient grid nodes for XRF screening only
were stored  on site for later treatment/disposal.
For Phase 3, the XRF was used to confirm whether
contaminated areas identified during Phase 2 were
sufficiently excavated.

3.5.3  Selection of Geophysical
        Equipment

The GPR instrument delineated buried trench and
lagoon  boundaries.   The  EM meter  detected
subsurface conductivity changes due to buried metal
containers  and  contaminants.   The  EM-31 (a
shallower-surveying  instrument  than  the EM-34)
was selected because expected contaminant depth
was less than  10  feet  and  because  of  the
instrument's maneuverability and ease of use.
                                                24

-------
                               Table 5:  Soil Sampling Equipment
Equipment

Trier


Scoop or trowel
    Applicability

    Soft surface soil


    Soft surface soil
Tulip bulb planter      Soft soil, 0-6 in.
Soil coring device       Soft soil, 0-24 in.
Thin-wall tube sampler  Soft soil, 0-10 ft
Split spoon sampler     Soil, 0 in.-bedrock
Shelby tube sampler    Soft soil, 0 in.-bedrock
Bucket auger
Hand-operated
power auger
    Soft soil, 3 in.-10 ft
    Soil, 6 in.-L5 ft
Advantages and Disadvantages

Inexpensive; easy to use and decontaminate; difficult to use
in stony, dry, or sandy soil

Inexpensive; easy to use and decontaminate; trowels  with
painted surfaces should be avoided.

Easy  to use and decontaminate; uniform  diameter  and
sample volume; preserves soil core (suitable for VOA and
undisturbed sample collection); limited depth capability, not
useful for  hard  soils.

Relatively easy to use; preserves soil core (suitable for VOA
and undisturbed sample collection); limited depth capability;
can be difficult  to decontaminate.

Easy  to use; preserves soil core (suitable for VOA  and
undisturbed sample collection);  may be used  in conjunction
with bucket auger, acetate sleeve  may  be  used to  help
maintain integrity of VOA samples; easy to decontaminate;
can be difficult  to remove cores from sampler.

Excellent depth range; preserves soil core (suitable for VOA
and undisturbed sample collection); acetate sleeve may be
used to help maintain integrity of VOA samples; useful for
hard  soils; often  used  in conjunction  with drill  rig for
obtaining deep  cores.

Excellent depth range; preserves soil core (suitable for VOA
and undisturbed sample collection);  tube may be used to
ship sample to lab undisturbed;  may be used  in conjunction
with drill rig for obtaining deep cores and for permeability
testing; not durable in rocky soils.

Easy to use; good depth range; uniform diameter and sample
volume; acetate  sleeve may be used  to  help maintain
integrity of VOA samples; may disrupt and mix soil horizons
greater than 6 inches in thickness.

Good depth range; generally used in conjunction with bucket
auger for sample collection; destroys soil core (unsuitable for
VOA and undisturbed sample collection); requires 2 or more
equipment operators; can be difficult to decontaminate;
requires gasoline-powered  engine   (potential  for  cross-
contamination).
Sources:
NJDEP, 1988;  UJS. EPA, January 1991.
                                                  25

-------
            4.0   FIELD SAMPLE COLLECTION AND PREPARATION
4.1     INTRODUCTION

In addition  to  sampling equipment, field sample
collection includes  sample quantity  and sample
volume.   Field sample  preparation refers to all
aspects of sample handling after collection, until the
sample is received by  the  laboratory.   Sample
preparation for soils may include, but is not limited
to:
    removing extraneous material;
    sieving samples;
    homogenizing samples;
    splitting samples;
    compositing samples; and
    final preparation.
Sample preparation depends  on  the  sampling
objectives  and analyses to be performed. Proper
sample preparation  and handling help to maintain
sample integrity. Improper handling can result in a
sample becoming unsuitable for the type of analysis
required.  For example, homogenizing, sieving, and
compositing samples ail result in a loss of volatile
constituents and are therefore inappropriate when
volatile contaminants are the concern.
4.2     SAMPLE COLLECTION

How   a  sample  is  collected  can  affect  its
representativeness.  The greater the  number of
samples collected from  a site and  the larger the
volume of each sample, the more representative the
analytical  results will  be.   However, sampling
activities are often limited by sampling budgets and
project schedules.  The following sections provide
guidelines on  appropriate  sample  numbers  and
volumes.

4.2.1   SAMPLE NUMBER

The number of samples needed will  vary according
to the particular sampling approach that is being
used.  For example, in grid sampling, one sample is
generally collected at each grid node, regardless of
grid  size.   As  discussed in section 111.6, once
contaminated grid  node  samples  are  located,
adjoining grid cells can be sampled more thoroughly
to define  areas of contamination.  Four aliquots
from  each grid  cell, situated equidistant from the
sides of each cell and each other (as illustrated in
figure 9), are recommended for grid cells measuring
up to 100 x 100 feet. One additional aliquot may be
collected from the center of each cell, making a
total of five aliquots per cell. For grid sizes greater
than 100 feet x 100 feet, nine aliquots, situated
equidistant from the sides of each cell and each
other (as illustrated in figure 12), are recommended.
Depending on budget and other considerations, grid
cell aliquots can be  analyzed as separate samples or
composited into one or more samples per cell

4.2.2  Sample  Volume

Both sample depth and area are considerations in
determining  appropriate    sample  volume.
Depending  on  the analytes  being  investigated,
samples are  collected  at  the surface  (0-3  in.),
extended surface (0-6 in.), and/or at one-foot depth
intervals. Non-water soluble contaminants such as
dioxin and  PCBs are often encountered within the
first six inches of soil. Water-soluble  contaminants
such as metals, acids, ketones,  and alcohols will be
encountered at deeper depths  in most soils except
days.  Contaminants in solution, such as PCPs in
diesel fuel and pesticides in solvents, can penetrate
to great depths (e.g., down to bedrock), depending
on soil type.

For  surface samples, collect soil over a surface area
of one square foot per sample.  A square cardboard
template measuring 12 in.  x  12 in., or a round
template with a 12 in. diameter can be used to mark
sampling areas.  For subsurface samples, one of
several coring devices may be  used (see table 5).
Using a coring device results in a smaller diameter
sampling  area  than  a  surface  template,  and
therefore somewhat lessens the representativeness
of the sample.
4.3     REMOVING EXTRANEOUS
        MATERIAL

Identify and discard materials in a field sample
which are not relevant or vital for characterizing the
sample  or the  site,  since  their presence  may
introduce  an error  in the sampling or analytical
procedures. Examples of extraneous material in soil
samples include  pieces of glass, twigs or leaves.
However,  not all non-soil material is extraneous.
                                                27

-------
Figure 12:   Phase 2 Sampling Grid Cell
              Diagram (Grid  Sizes  > 100
              x 100 ft.)
      GRID NODE
COMPOSITE ALIQUOTS
For example, when sampling at a junkyard, lead-
contaminated battery casing pieces should not be
removed  from a sample if the casing composes
more than 10% of the sample composition. For a
sample to be representative, it must also incorporate
the lead from the casing.  Collect samples of any
material  thought to  be a  potential source of
contamination for a laboratory extraction procedure.
Discuss any special  analytical  requirements  for
extraneous  materials  with  project  management,
geologists, and chemists and notify the laboratory of
any special sample Handling requirements.
4.4    SIEVING SAMPLES

Sieving is the process of physically sorting a sample
to obtain uniform particle sizes, using sieve screens
of predetermined size.  For example, the sampler
may wish to sieve a certain number of samples to
determine if particle size is related to contaminant
distribution. In  the Removal Program, sieving is
generally  only  conducted  when  preparing  soil
samples for XRF screening. For this purpose, a 20-
mesh screen size is recommended.

Be aware of  the intent of the sampling  episode,
when deciding whether to sieve a sample prior to
                           analysis.  Prior to sieving, samples may need to be
                           oven-dried.   Discarding non-soil  or  non-sieved
                           materials, as well as the sieving process itself, can
                           result in physical and chemical losses. Sieving is not
                           recommended where  volatile compounds  are of
                           concern.   Analyze the discarded material^,  or  a
                           fraction thereof, to determine their contribution to
                           the contamination of the site being investigated.
4.5    HOMOGENIZING SAMPLES

Homogenization is the mixing or blending of a soil
sample  in  an   attempt  to  provide  uniform
distribution of contaminants.  (Do not homogenize
samples for volatile  compound analysis).  Ideally,
proper homogenization ensures that portions of the
containerized samples are equal  or identical  in
composition and are representative of the total soil
sample collected.  Incomplete homogenization will
increase  sampling  error.    All  samples  to be
composited or split should be  homogenized after all
aliquots   have   been  combined.     Manually
homogenize samples using a stainless steel spoon or
scoop  and a  stainless  steel bucket,  or  use   a
disposable scoop and  pan.  Quarter and split the
sample as illustrated in  figure  12, repeating each
step a minimum  of 5 times until the  sample  is
visually homogenized.   Samples can also be
homogenized using a mechanically-operated stirring
device as depicted in ASTM standard D422-63.
                            4.6     SPLITTING  SAMPLES

                            Splitting  samples  after  collection   and  field
                            preparation into two  or more equivalent parts is
                            performed when two or  more portions of the same
                            sample  need  to be  analyzed  separately.   Split
                            samples are most often collected in enforcement
                            actions to compare sample results obtained by EPA
                            with those obtained by  the potentially responsible
                            party (PRP). Split samples also provide a measure
                            of  the  sample  variability, and  a  measure  of  the
                            analytical and extraction errors.  Before  splitting,
                            follow homogenization techniques outlined  above.
                            Fill two sample collection jars simultaneously with
                            alternate spoonfuls (or scoopfuls) of homogenized
                            sample. To simultaneously homogenize and split a
                            sample, quarter  (as  illustrated  in  figure  13)  or
                            mechanically split the sample using a riffle sample
                            splitter. The latter two techniques are described in
                            detail in ASTM Standard C702-S7.
                                                28

-------
                 Rgure 13:  Quartering to  Homogenize and Split Samples
Stepl:

•  Cone Sample on Hard Clean Surface
• Mix by Forming New Cone
Step 2:

•    Quarter After Flattening Cone
Step 3:

•    Divide Sample
     into Quarters
Step 4:

•  Remix Opposite Quarters
•  Reform Cone
•  Repeat a Minimum of 5 Times
                                                                    After  ASTM Standard C702-S7
4.7    COMPOSITING SAMPLES

Compositing is the process of physically combining
and homogenizing several  individual soil aliquots.
Compositing   samples  provides   an  average
concentration  of contaminants  over  a  certain
number of sampling points, which reduces both the
number of required lab analyses and the sample
variability.  Compositing can be a useful technique,
but must  always be implemented with caution.
Compositing is not  recommended where volatile
compounds are of concern.

Specify the method of selecting the aliquots that are
composited and  the compositing  factor in the
sampling plan.    The  compositing factor  is the
number of aliquots to  be composited into one
sample (e.g., 3 to 1; 10 to 1). Determine this factor
by evaluating detection  limits  for parameters of
interest and comparing them with the selected
             action level for that parameter. Compositing also
             requires that each discrete aliquot be the same in
             terms of volume or weight and that the aliquots be
             thoroughly homogenized. Since compositing dilutes
             high concentration aliquots, the applicable detection
             limits should be  reduced accordingly.   If  the
             composite  value is to be compared to  a selected
             action level, then the action level must be divided by
             the number of aliquots that make up the composite
             in order to determine the appropriate  detection
             limit  (e.gn  if the action level for a   particular
             substance is  50 ppb, an action level of 10 ppb
             should  be  used  when  analyzing  a  5-aliquot
             composite).   The detection  level  need not be
             reduced if the composite area is assumed  to be
             homogeneous in concentration (for example, stack
             emission  plume  deposits  of  particulate
             contamination across an area, or roadside spraying
             of waste oils).
                                                29

-------
 4.8    FINAL PREPARATION

Select   sample  containers  on  the  basis   of
compatibility  with  the  material being  sampled,
resistance to  breakage, and  volume.   For soil
sampling,  use wide-mouth  glass containers with
Teflon-lined lids. Appropriate sample volumes and
containers will vary  according to the parameter
being   analyzed.     Keep   low  and  medium
concentration  soil  samples  to  be  analyzed  for
organic constituents at 4ฐC. Actual sample volumes,
appropriate  containers, and  holding times  are
specified in the QA/QC Guidance  for  Removal
Activities (U.S. EPA, April 1990), in 40 CFR 136,
and in  the Compendium of ERT Soil  Sampling and
Surface Geophysics  (U.S.  EPA,  January 1991).
Package all samples in compliance with Department
of Transportation  (DOT)  or  International Air
Transport Association (1ATA) requirements.

It is sometimes possible to ship  samples to  the
laboratory directly in  the sampling equipment. For
example, the  ends  of a Shelby tube can be sealed
with caps,  taped, and  sent  to  the laboratory for
analysis. To help  maintain the integrity of VOA
samples, collect soil cores using acetate sleeves and
send the sleeves to the laboratory. To ensure the
integrity of  the  sample  after  delivery to  the
laboratory, make  laboratory sample preparation
procedures part of all laboratory bid  contracts.
4.9    EXAMPLE SITE

After placing each sample in a
dedicated pan  and mixing (as
discussed in section 3 J.I), plant
matter, stones, and broken glass
were removed.  Soil  samples
were oven-dried (at 104* C) and sieved using a 20-
mesh screen  in preparation  for XRF  analysis.
Samples were then homogenized and split using the
quartering  technique.    Opposite quarters  were
remixed and quartering was repeated five times to
ensure thorough bomogenization.  A portion of
each sample was placed into XRF analysis cups for
screening.   The remainder of each  sample was
placed  into 8-ounce, wide-mouth glass jars  with
Teflon-lined lids  and  sent to a laboratory for
inorganic analysis. The samples were packaged in
compliance with IATA requirements.  Chain-of-
custody paperwork was prepared for the samples.
Laboratory  paperwork   was   completed  as
appropriate and the samples were shipped to the
predesignated laboratories for analysis.
                                                 30

-------
       5.0   QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL  EVALUATION
5.1     INTRODUCTION

The  goal of representative  sampling is to  collect
samples which yield analytical results that accurately
depict site conditions  during a given time  frame.
The  goal  of  quality  assurance/quality  control
(QA/QC) is to identify and implement correct
methodologies which limit the introduction of error
into  the  sampling  and  analytical  procedures,
ultimately affecting the analytical data.

QA/QC samples  evaluate  the  degree  of site
variation, whether samples were cross-contaminated
during sampling and sample handling procedures, or
if  a discrepancy in  sample results  is  due to
laboratory handling and analysis procedures.
The  QA/QC sample results are used to assess the
quality  of  the  analytical results of  waste  and
environmental samples collected from a site.
5.2     QA/QC OBJECTIVES

Three QA/QC objectives (QA1, QA2, and QA3)
have been defined by the Removal Program, based
on  the   EPA  QA   requirements  for  precision,
accuracy (bias), representativeness, completeness,
comparability, and  detection  level   The  QA1
objective applies when a large amount of data are
needed quickly and relatively inexpensively, or when
preliminary screening data, which do not need to be
analyte or concentration specific, are useful.  QA1
requirements  are  used  with  data  from   field
analytical   screening   methods,  for   a  quick,
preliminary  assessment  of  site contamination.
Examples of QA1 activities include:  determining
physical and/or chemical  properties  of samples;
assessing  preliminary on-site health  and safety,
determining the extent and degree of contamination;
assessing waste compatibility,  and characterizing
hazardous wastes.

QA2 verifies analytical results.  The QA2 objective
intends to provide a certain level of confidence for
a select  portion (10% or more)  of the preliminary
data.  This objective allows the OSC to use  field
screening  methods  to  quickly  focus on  specific
pollutants and concentration levels, while at the
same time requiring laboratory verification and
quality assurance for at least 10% of the samples.
QA2  verification  methods are  analyte specific
Examples of QA2 activities include: defining the
extent and degree of contamination; verifying site
cleanup;   and   verifying   screening   objectives
obtainable   with   QAI,   such   as    pollutant
identification.

QA3  assesses  the  analytical   error  of   the
concentration level,  as well as  the identity of the
anaryte(s) of interest. QA3 data provide the highest
degree of qualitative and quantitative accuracy and
confidence of ail QA objectives by using rigorous
methods   of   laboratory  analysis  and  quality
assurance.  Examples of  QA3 activities include:
selecting  treatment and disposal options; evaluating
health  risk  or environmental  impact;  verifying
cleanup; and identifying pollutant source. The QA3
objective  should be used only when determination
of analytical precision in  a certain  concentration
range is crucial for decision-making.
5.3     SOURCES OF ERROR

Identifying and quantifying the error or variation in
sampling and laboratory analysis can be difficult
However, it is important to limit their effect(s) on
the data. Four potential sources of error are:

•   sampling design;
•   sampling methodology,
•   sample heterogeneity, and
•   analytical procedures.

5.3.1   Sampling Design

Site  variation includes the variation  both  in  the
types  and  in   the  concentration   levels   of
contaminants throughout a site.   Representative
sampling should accurately identify and define this
variation. However, error can be introduced by the
selection of a sampling design which 'misses' site
variation.   For  example, a sampling  grid with
relatively large distances between sampling points or
a  biased  sampling  approach  (i.e., judgmental
sampling) may allow significant contaminant trends
to go unidentified, as illustrated in figure 14.
                                                31

-------
     Figure 14:  Sampling Error Due
            to Sampling Design
                 LEGEND

           X  SAMPLING POINTS

              CONTAMINATED SOIL

              SOURCE OF CONTAMINATION
5.3.2   Sampling Methodology

Error  can  be   introduced  by   the   sampling
methodology and sample handling procedures, as in
cross-contamination from inappropriate use  of
sample  collection  equipment,  unclean sample
containers,   improper   sampling   equipment
decontamination  and  shipment procedures, and
other  factors.     Standardized  procedures  for
collecting, handling and shipping samples allow for
easier identification of the source(s) of error, and
can  limit  error  associated   with   sampling
methodology.   The use  of  standard  operating
procedures ensures that  all sampling  tasks for  a
given matrix and anarytc  will be performed in the
same manner, regardless of the individual sampling
team, date, or location of sampling activity.  Trip
blanks, field blanks, replicate samples, and rinsate
blanks  are used  to identify error due to sampling
methodology and sample  handling procedures.
5.3.3  Sample Heterogeneity

Sample heterogeneity is a potential source of error.
Unlike water, soil is rarely a homogeneous medium
and  it exhibits variable  properties with  lateral
distance and with depth.  This heterogeneity may
also be present in the sample container unless the
sample was homogenized in the field or  in  the
laboratory.  The laboratory uses only a small aliquot
of the sample for analysis; if  the  sample  is  not
properly homogenized, the analysis may not be truly
representative   of  the  sample   and  of   the
corresponding  site.   Thoroughly  homogenizing
samples, therefore, can limit error associated with
sample heterogeneity.

5.3.4  Analytical Procedures

Error which may originate in analytical procedures
includes cross-contamination, inefficient extraction,
and  inappropriate methodology.   Matrix  spike
samples, replicate samples, performance evaluation
samples, and associated quality assurance evaluation
of recovery, precision,  and bias, can be used to
distinguish  analytical error from  error introduced
during sampling activities.
5.4    QA/QC SAMPLES

This section briefly describes the types and uses of
QA/QC samples that are collected in the field, or
prepared for or by the laboratory.  QA/QC samples
are  analyzed  in  addition to field samples and
provide information on the variability and usability
of environmental  sample results.  They assist in
identifying the origin of analytical discrepancies to
help determine how the analytical results should be
used.  They are used mostly to validate  analytical
results. Field replicate, collocated, background, and
rinsate  blank samples are  the  most commonly
collected field QA/QC  samples.   Performance
evaluation, matrix spike, and matrix spike duplicate
samples, either prepared  for or by the laboratory,
provide additional measures of control for the data
generated.   QA/QC results may  suggest the need
for  modifying sample  collection,  preparation,
         or  analytical  procedures  if the resultant
c
data  do not meet  site-specific quality assurance
objectives.  Refer to data validation procedures in
U.S.  EPA, April 1990, for guidelines  on utilizing
QA/QC  analytical  results.     The  following
paragraphs briefly describe each type  of QA/QC
sample.
                                                32

-------
5.4.1  Field Replicates

Field replicates are field samples obtained from one
location,  homogenized,   divided  into   separate
containers   and   treated  as   separate  samples
throughout  the  remaining sample  handling  and
analytical  processes.   These samples are used to
assess error associated with sample  heterogeneity,
sample methodology and analytical procedures.  Use
field  replicates when  determining total  error for
critical samples with contamination concentrations
near the action level  For statistical analysis to be
valid  in such a case, a minimum of eight  replicate
samples would be required.

5.4.2  Collocated Samples

Collocated samples are  collected adjacent  to the
routine field sample to determine local variability of
the soil and contamination at the site.  Typically,
collocated samples are collected about one-half to
three feet away from the selected sample  location.
Analytical results from collocated samples can be
used  to assess  site  variation,   but  only in  the
immediate  sampling  area.   Due  to  the  non-
homogeneous  nature  of  soil at sites,  collocated
samples should  not be  used to assess variability
across a site and are not recommended for assessing
error.  Determine the applicability of collocated
samples on a  site-by-site basis.  Collecting many
samples (more than 50 samples/acre), is sufficient
to demonstrate site variation.

5.4.3  Background Samples

Background samples are collected upgradient of the
area(s)  of contamination  (either on or  off site)
where there is little or no chance of migration of
the contaminants of concern. Background samples
determine  the natural  composition of  the  soil
(especially  important   in   areas  with   high
concentrations of naturally-occurring metals)  and
are considered 'dean" samples. They provide a
basis  for comparison of contaminant concentration
levels with samples collected on site.  At least one
background soil  sample  should   be  collected;
however,  more  are warranted  when site-specific
factors  such as  natural variability  of  local  soil,
multiple  on-site  contaminant  source  areas,  and
presence of off-site facilities potentially contributing
to soil contamination  exist.  Background samples
may be collected for all QA objectives, in order to
evaluate potential error
associated   with   sampling   design,   sampling
methodology, and analytical procedures.

5.4.4  Rlnsate Blanks

Rinsate blanks are samples obtained by running
analyte-free water over decontaminated sampling
equipment to test for residual contamination.  The
blank is placed in sample containers for handling,
shipment, and  analysis identical to the samples
collected that day.  A rinsate blank is used to assess
cross-contamination brought about  by  improper
decontamination  procedures.   Where  dedicated
sampling  equipment is not utilized, collect  one
rinsate blank, per type  of sampling device, per day
to meet QA2 and QA3 objectives.

5.4.5  Performance  Evaluation
        Samples

Performance evaluation (PE) samples evaluate the
overall bias of the analytical laboratory and detect
any error in the analytical method  used.   These
samples are usually prepared by a third party, using
a  quantity of analyte(s) which is  known to the
preparer but unknown to the laboratory, and always
undergo certification analysis. The analyte(s) used
to prepare  the  PE  sample is  the  same as the
analyte(s) of concern. Laboratory procedural error
is evaluated by the percentage of analyte identified
in the PE sample (percent recovery). Even though
they are  not available for all analytes, PE samples
are required to achieve  QA3 objectives.  Where PE
samples are unavailable for an  analyte of interest,
QA2 is the highest QA standard achievable.

5.4.6  Matrix Spike Samples

Matrix spike and  matrix spike duplicate samples
(MS/MSDs) are environmental samples that are
spiked in the laboratory with a known concentration
of a  target analyte(s) to verify  percent recoveries.
MS/MSDs  are  primarily used  to  check  sample
matrix interferences.   They can also be used to
monitor  laboratory  performance.    However,  a
dataset of at least three  or more results is necessary
to distinguish between laboratory performance and
matrix interference.

MS/MSDs can also monitor method performance.
Again, a  dataset is helpful to  assess  whether a
method is performing property.  Generally,
                                                 33

-------
interference  and  poor method  performance go
together.

MS/MSDs can also evaluate error due to Laboratory
bias and precision (when four or more pairs are
analyzed).  Analyze one MS/MSD pair to assess
bias for every 20 soil samples.   Use the  average
percent  recovery for the pair.  To assess precision,
analyze  at least 8 matrix spike replicates from the
same sample, determine the standard deviation and
the coefficient of variation. See pages 9 - 10 of the
QA/QC Guidance for Removal Activities (US. EPA,
April 1990) for procedures on  calculating analytical
error.   MS/MSDs  are  optional  for  QA2  and
required to meet QA3 objectives as one of several
methods to determine analytical error.


 5.4.7  Field Blanks

Field blanks are samples prepared in the field using
certified dean sand or soil and are then submitted
to the laboratory for analysis.  A field blank is used
to evaluate  contamination error  associated  with
sampling methodology and laboratory procedures.
If available, submit field blanks at a rate of one per
day.


 5.4.8  Trip Blanks

Trip blanks are samples  prepared prior  to going
into the field. Trip blanks consist of certified clean
sand or soil and  are  handled,  transported,  and
analyzed in the same manner as the other volatile
organic samples acquired  that day. Trip blanks are
used to evaluate error  associated with sampling
methodology   and  analytical    procedures   by
determining if any contamination was  introduced
into samples during sampling, sample handling and
shipment, and/or during laboratory handling and
analysis.  If available, utilize  trip blanks  to  meet
QA2  and QA3  objectives  for  volatile   organic
analyses only.
 5.5     EVALUATION  OF  ANALYTICAL
         ERROR

The percentage and types  of QA/QC samples
needed to help identify the error and confidence in
the data is based on the sampling objectives and the
corresponding QA/QC objectives.  The acceptable
level of error is determined by the  intended use of
the data and the sampling objectives, including such
factors as:   the degree of threat to public health,
welfare, or the environment; selected action levels;
litigation concerns; and budgetary constraints.

The  use of  replicate  samples is  one method to
evaluate  error.  To evaluate  the total error of
samples with contaminant concentrations near the
selected  action  level,  prepare  and  analyze  a
minimum of eight replicates of the same sample.
Analytical data from replicate samples can also be
used for a quick  check on errors associated with
sample  heterogeneity,  sample  methodology  and
analytical procedures.   Differing analytical results
from two or more replicate samples could indicate
improper sample  preparation  (e.g.,  incomplete
homogenization),   or   that  contamination   was
introduced during  sample collection, preparation,
handling^ shipment, or analysis.

It  may be desirable to try to quantify confidence;
however, quantification or analytical data correction
is not always possible. A 95% confidence level (i.e.,
5% acceptable error) should be adequate for most
Removal Program sampling activities.  Experience
will provide  the best determination of whether to
use a higher (e.g., 99%) or lower  (e.g.,  90%) level
of confidence. It must be recognized that the use of
confidence levels is based on the assumption that a
sample  is homogeneous.  See also section 6.8 for
information  on total error.
 5.6    CORRELATION BETWEEN
        FIELD SCREENING RESULTS
        AND CONFIRMATION RESULTS

 One  cost-effective  approach for delineating the
 extent  of site   contamination  is  to  correlate
 inexpensive  field screening  data and other field
 measurements (e.g., XRF, soil-gas measurements)
 with laboratory results.  The relationship between
 the  two  methods  can  then be described by a
 regression analysis  and  used to predict laboratory
 results based on field  screening measurements. In
 this manner, cost-effective field screening  results
 may be used in addition to, or in lieu of,  off-site
 Laboratory sample analysis.

 Statistical regression  involves developing a model
 (equation) that relates two or more variables at an
 acceptable  level  of  correlation.   When field
 screening techniques,  such as XRF, are used along
 with  laboratory  methods  (e.g., atomic absorption
 (AA)), a regression equation can be used to predict
 a laboratory value based  on  the results  of  the
c
                                                 34

-------
screening device. The model can also be used to
place  confidence   limits   around  predictions.
Additional discussion of correlation and regression
can  be  found  in  most  introductory statistics
textbooks.   A simple regression equation  (e.g.,
linear) can be developed on  many calculators or
computer databases; however, a statistician should
be consulted to check the accuracy of more complex
models.

Evaluation of the accuracy of a model in part relies
on  statistical  correlation.   Statistical  correlation
involves computing  an index called the correlation
coefficient (r)  that indicates the degree and nature
of the relationship  between  two or more  sets of
values.   The  correlation coefficient ranges  from
-1.0 (a  perfect  inverse  or negative relationship),
through  0  (no  relationship),  to +1.0  (a  perfect
direct, or positive, relationship).  The square of the
correlation  coefficient, called the coefficient  of
determination, or simply R2,  is an estimate of the
proportion   of  variance  in  one  variable  (the
dependent variable) that can be accounted for by
the independent variables.  The R2 value  that is
acceptable depends on the sampling objectives and
intended data  uses.   As a rule of thumb, statistical
relationships should have an R2 value of at least 0.6
to determine a reliable model; however, for health
or risk assessment purposes, the acceptable R2 value
may be made  more stringent  (e.g., 0.8).  Analytical
calibration regressions have an R2 value of 0.98 or
better.

Once  a  reliable regression  equation  has  been
derived,  the field screening  data  can  be used to
predict laboratory results.  These predicted values
can then be located on a base map and contoured
(mapping methods  are  described  in chapter 6).
These maps  can  be  examined to evaluate the
estimated extent of contamination and the adequacy
of the sampling  program.
5.7     EXAMPLE SITE

The   field   screening   of
containerized   liquid   wastes
performed  during  Phase  1
utilized the QA1 objective.  The
purpose of this screening was to
quickly obtain  data indicating  general chemical
class. The screening did not need to be analyte or
concentration specific nor was confirmation of the
results  needed.   The  Phase  1  sampling  was
performed according to the QA2  objective.  The
analyses were analyte  and concentration  specific.
Confirmational analysis was  run on  10% of the
samples in  order  to  verify  screening  results.
Recoveries  of matrix  spike  and matrix  spike
duplicate samples indicated no matrix interferences.
Dedicated  equipment  was used  during Phase  1
sampling, making rinsate blanks unnecessary. Phase
2 field screening (XRF) was performed according to
the QA2 objective.  During Phase 2, samples were
collected at 30% of the nodes screened with the
XRF. These samples were sent for laboratory AA
analysis. A correlation was eclabiished by plotting
the Phase 2 AA and XRF data.  This allowed the
XRF data from the other 70% of the nodes to be
used to evaluate the chromium levels across the site.

For Phase 2 and 3 sampling, 10% of the data were
confirmed by running replicate analyses to obtain an
estimate of precision.  The results indicated good
correlation.   Matrix  spikes  and matrix  spike
duplicate samples indicated no matrix interferences.
During   Phase 2,  the  OSC opted   to  include
performance evaluation (PE) samples for metals to
evaluate the overall laboratory bias (although not
required for QA2 data quality).   The  laboratory
achieved  92% recovery,  which was  within  the
acceptable control limits.

During  Phases  2  and 3, a  rinsate  blank was
collected each day.  Following the decontamination
of the bucket augers, analyte-free water was poured
over the augers and the rinsate was placed into 1-
liter  polyethylene bottles and  preserved.   The
rinsate  blanks were analyzed for total metals and
cyanide  to determine  the  effectiveness of  the
decontamination procedures and the  potential for
cross-contamination.   All rinsate blank  samples
were "dean*, indicating sufficient decontamination
procedures.

The correlation analysis run on Phase 2 laboratory
(AA) data and corresponding XRF values resulted
in r values of 0.97 for both surface and subsurface
data, which indicated a strong relationship  between
the AA and XRF data.  Following the correlation
analyses, regression analyses were run and equations
to predict laboratory values based on the XRF data
were developed.  The resulting equation for the
surface  data was:  AA = 0.87 (XRF) -t- 10.16. The
resulting regression equation for the subsurface data
was:  AA - 0.94 (XRF)  -t- 030.
                                                  35

-------
6.1    INTRODUCTION

Data presentation  and  analysis techniques are
performed with  analytical,  geophysical,  or field
screening results. The techniques disnissrd below
can be  used to  compare  analytical  values,  to
evaluate  numerical  distribution   of   data,  to
determine and illustrate the location of hot spots
and the extent of contamination across a site, and to
assess the need  for removal of contaminated soil
with concentrations at or near the action level The
appropriate methods to present and analyze sample
data depend on the sampling objectives, the number
of samples collected, the sampling approaches used,
and a variety of other considerations.
6.2    DATA POSTING

Data posting involves placement of sample values
on  a site basemap.  Data  posting is useful for
displaying the spatial distribution of sample values
to visually depict extent of contamination and to
locate hot spots. Data posting requires each sample
to  have  a   specific  location  (e.g^  X  and  Y
coordinates). Ideally, the sample coordinates would
be  surveyed  values to facilitate placement on a
scaled map.
between sample points. Contour lines can be drawn
manually  or  be  generated  by  computer  n*ing
contouring software. Although the software makes
the contouring process easier, computer programs
have a limitation:  they may interpolate between all
data points, attempting to fit a contour interval to
the full range of data values. This can result in a
contour map  that  does  not  accurately represent
general site contaminant trends.  Typical removal
sites have low concentration/non-detect areas and
hot spots.  Computer contouring programs  may
represent  these features as  in figure  15 which
illustrates a site that has a 4000 mg/kg hot spot.
Because there is a large difference in concentration
between the hot spot and the surrounding area, the
computer  contouring  program  used  a contour
interval  that eliminated  most  of  the  subtle site
features and general trends. However, if that same
hot spot concentration value is posted at a reduced
value, then the contouring program can select a
more appropriate  contour   interval  to  better
illustrate the general site  trends. Figure 16 depicts
the same site  as  in figure IS but the hot  spot
concentration value has been arbitrarily posted at
1400 mg/kg.  The  map was  recontoured and the
contouring program selected a contour interval that
resulted in a map which enhanced the subtle detail
and general site contaminant trends.
6.3    GEOLOGIC GRAPHICS

Geologic graphics include cross-sections and fence
diagrams, which are two-  and three-dimensional
depictions, respectively, of soils and strata to a given
depth beneath the site.  These types of graphics are
useful for posting subsurface analytical data as well
as  for   interpreting  subsurface  geology  and
contaminant migration.
6.4     CONTOUR  MAPPING

Contour maps are useful for depicting contaminant
concentration  values throughout a site.   Contour
mapping requires an accurate, to-scale basemap of
the site. After data posting  sample values on the
basemap,  insert contour  lines  (or isopleths) at a
specified contour interval, interpolating values
6.5    STATISTICAL GRAPHICS

The  distribution or  spread of  the  data set  is
important  in   determining   which   statistical
techniques to use. Common statistical analyses such
as the t-test relies on  normally  distributed data.
The  histogram  is  a  statistical bar  graph which
displays the distribution of a data set. A normally
distributed data  set takes the shape of a bell curve,
with  the  mean  and median dose together about
halfway between  the  maximum  and  minimum
values.   A  probability plot  depicts  cumulative
percent  against   the    concentration   of  the
contaminant  of  concern.  A normally distributed
data  set, when plotted as a probability plot, would
appear as a straight line.  Use a  histogram or
probability plot  to see trends and anomalies in the
data  prior to conducting  more rigorous  forms of
statistical analysis.
                                                 37

-------
 Figure  15:  Computer Generated Contour Map (4000 mg/kg Hot Spot)
                           ABC Plating Site
             EAST-WEST COORDINATES
                                                   Total Chromium Concentration
                                                         Unto - mg/kg
                                                   Contour Interval - 100 mg/kg

                                                   Includes 4000 mg/kg Hot Spot
Figure 16: Computer Generated Contour Map (1400 mg/kg Hot Spot)
                          ABC Plating Site
                                                   Total Chromium Concentration
                                                         Units = mg/kg
                                                   Contour Interval * 100 mg/kg

                                                   Includes 1400 mg/kg Hot Spot*
             EAST-WEST COORDINATES
1400 mg/kg hot spot is substituted for
4000 mg/kg hot spot (see section 6.4
- Contour Mapping)
                                  f
                                 38

-------
6.6    GEOSTATISTICS

Geostatistical methods are useful for data analysis
and presentation.   The  characteristic feature  of
geostatistics is the use of variograms to quantify and
model the spatial relationship between values  at
different sampling locations and for interpolating
(e.g., kriging) estimated values across a site.  The
geostatistical analysis can be broken down into two
phases. First, a model is developed that describes
the spatial relationship between sample locations on
the basis of a  plot of spatial  variance versus the
distance between pairs of samples.  This  plot is
called a variogram. Second, the spatial relationship
modeled by  the variogram is  used to  compute a
weighted-aver age interpolation of the data.  The
result of geostatistical mapping by data interpolation
is a contour map that represents estimates of values
across a site, and maps depicting potential error in
the estimates.   The  error  maps are  useful for
deciding if additional samples  are needed  and for
calculating best or worst-case scenarios for site
cleanup.  More information on geostatistics  can be
found  in U.S.  EPA, September  1988b and  U.S.
EPA,   1990.     Gco-EAS   and  GEOPACK,
geostatistical environmental assessment software
packages developed by U.S. EPA, can greatly assist
with geostatistical analysis methods.
6.7     RECOMMENDED DATA
        INTERPRETATION METHODS

The data interpretation method chosen depends on
project-specific considerations, such as the number
of sampling locations and their associated range in
values.  A site depicting extremely  low data values
(e.g.,  non-detects) with  significantly higher values
(e.g., 5,000 ppm)  from neighboring hot spots, with
little or no concentration gradient in-between, does
not  lend  itself  to contouring and  geostatistics,
specifically  the   development  of   variograms.
However, data posting would be useful at such a
site  to  illustrate  hot  spot  and clean  areas.
Conversely, geostatistics and contour mapping, as
well as data posting, can be applied  to site data with
a wide distribution of values (i.e., depicting a "bell
shaped" curve) with beneficial results.
6.8    UTILIZATION OF DATA

When conducting search sampling to determine the
locations of hot spots (as discussed in section 19),
analyze the data using one of the methods discussed
in this chapter. For each node that is determined to
be dose to or above the action level, the following
procedure is recommended.

Investigate all neighboring grid  cells to determine
which  areas  must be  excavated  and/or treated.
From each grid  cell,  take  a composite  sample
consisting of four or  more aliquots,  using  the
procedure described in section  2.11.6.  Grid cells
with contaminant concentrations significantly above
the action level (e.g^ 20%) should be marked for
removal.     Grid   cells   with  contaminant
concentrations significantly less than the action level
should be designated as clean. For grid cells with
contaminant concentrations close to the action level,
it is recommended that additional sampling be done
within that grid cell to determine whether it is truly
a hot spot, or whether the analytical result is due to
sampling and/or  analytical procedural error.  If
additional sampling is to be performed, one of the
following methods should be considered:

•   Collect a minimum of four grab samples within
    the grid cell in question. Use these samples to
    develop a 95% confidence interval around the
    mean concentration.  If the action  level falls
    within or below this confidence interval, then
    consider  removal/treatment of the soil within
    that grid cell More information on confidence
    intervals  and standard deviation can be found
    in Gilbert, 1987.

•   Collect additional composite samples from the
    grid  ceils in question  using the  technique
    discussed in section  2.11.6.    From these
    additional samples, determine  the  need for
    removal/treatment.

These two practical approaches  help to determine
the total  error associated with collecting a sample
from a non-homogeneous site. Total error includes
design  error, sampling error,  non-homogeneous
sampling error, and analytical error.

If additional sampling is being considered, weigh the
cost-effectiveness  of   collecting  the  additional
samples versus removing the soil from the areas in
question. This decision must be  made on a site-by-
site basis.
                                                 39

-------
After removal/treatment of the contaminated soil,
re-investigate the grid cells to verify cleanup below
the action level   Each  grid  cell that  had  soil
removed must either be composite sampled again,
or have multiple grab samples collected with a 95%
confidence interval  set  up  again.   Again,  this
decision must be made on a site-by-site basis. The
methodology should be repeated until all  grid cells
are determined to have soil concentrations below
the action level
6.9    EXAMPLE SITE

The  Phase   2  XRF/atomic
absorption  (AA)  data  were
examined  to   determine  the
appropriate data interpretation
method to use.  A  histogram
was generated  to illustrate the distribution of the
data as  depicted  in  figure  17.   The  histogram
showed an uneven distribution of the data with most
values  less than 50  (approximately 4 on the  LN
scale of the histogram).  Also, the presence of a
single data point of 4000 (8 on the LN  scale)  was
shown  on the histogram.  The data were initially
posted as illustrated in figures 18 and  19.  Data
posting was performed manually to give  the OSC a
quick depiction of the general site contamination
trends.  A contour mapping  program was used to
generate contours based on the posted data. Figure
15 illustrates the results of contouring with the 4000
mg/kg  hot spot  included.    This contour  map
exaggerated the  hot spot while eliminating  the
subtle site features and contaminant trends. Figure
16  depicts the same site data with the hot spot
arbitrarily reduced to 1400 mg/kg.  The resulting
contour  map  enhanced  more of the subtle  site
features and trends while reducing the effects of the
hot spot.
AA  concentrations predicted  by the regression
equations were kriged and contoured using Geo-
EAS (figures 20 and 21). Both the kriged contours
and the data posting showed the same general site
contaminant trends. However, data posting gave a
more representative depiction  of  actual  levels of
contamination and the OSC used data posting for
decision-making.

For each node with chromium concentrations close
to or above the 100 ppm action level, the adjacent
grid  cells were  further investigated.   Composite
samples  consisting  of four  aliquots of soil were
taken from within each grid cell in question  and
analyzed.    If  the  soil  concentration level  was
significantly below 100 ppm  of chromium, the cell
was designated as clean. Each  cell that had a soil
concentration level well above the action level was
marked for treatment/removal.  Any cells having
soil concentrations  dose to  the action level  were
sampled further using the compositing method to
better   quantify   the  actual   contaminant
concentration.   Since  the  surrounding  area  is
residential, on-site landfilling was not considered a
viable    treatment   option.       To   expedite
treatment/disposal,   all  excavated   soil   from
contaminated cells was stockpiled  on site  until
treatment/disposal could be accomplished under a
fixed-price contract.  The stockpile, placed in the
area of the  most highly  contaminated grid  cells
(where the lagoons were located), was covered until
treatment/disposal could be arranged. Cleanup was
verified with composite sampling in the excavated
cells.  Results of  the  composite  sampling  were
compared  with the action level to verify  cleanup.
All action levels were  met.  The  excavation pits
were filled with stone and clean soil, covered with
topsoil,  graded and seeded.
€
                                                  40

-------
Figure 17: Histogram of Surface Chromium Concentrations
                    ABC Plating Site
Histogran
Data tile: tarigsurf . dat
48.

30.
I
0
c
1
\ 20.
1
1,
*

IB.
0.
a








3









rinn^
Statistics
N Total 59
N Fliss 8
N Used 59
Hean 4.388
Uariance 1.426
SU. Dev 1.194
x C.U. 27.771
Skemess 1.219
Kurtosis 3.712
flinimun 3.462
25th x 3.462
flcdian 3.462
75th X 5. 864
rtajcimiN 8.299
6. 9. 12.
UUCMROMIUn)
                          41

-------
            Figure 18: Phase 2 Surface Data Posting for Chromium
                              ABC Plating Site
                                       i
  Y7
3
  rs
  Y4
  r/
                    -,GATE   500 ppm

	SITE BOUNDARY
                                    42

-------
        Figure 19:  Phase 2 Subsurface Data Posting for Chromium
                            ABC Plating Site
  Y7
2
3 rs
i
i Y4
  rz
                                                               :DAMAGED
                                                               :BUIU3ING
                                                               :  ARฃA
                .Zf..;.ซ?: XZ	X3.....X4. ..XS	XK .... XZ...

                           (EAST-VEST GRTO COORDINATES)
            I i
           SCALE IN FEET
      100    50
100
                                          LEGEND
 (*")   < 100 ppm

        100 -  500  ppm

      > 500 ppm

	SrTE BOUNDARY
                                  43

-------
  Figure 20:  Contour Map of Surface Chromium Data (ppm)
                        ABC Plating Site
            480.
            400.
            MO.
            300.
            2SO.
            200.
            IBO.
            100.
               100.    190.   ZOO.    290.   MO.   JSO.
                         ฃMt-WMt Grid Coordinate*
Figure 21:  Contour Map of Subsurface Chromium Data (ppm)
                        ABC Plating Site
           480.
           400.
           sac.
           300.
           JSO.
           190.
           100.
           SOJ3
                 100.    190.   200.    290.   MO.    390.   400.
                                44

-------
                                          References

American Society for Testing and Materials. 1987. Standard Practice for Reducing Field Samples of Aggregate
    to Testing Size.  ASTM C702-87.

American Society for Testing and Materials. 1972. Standard Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils. ASTM
    D422-63.

Barth, Delbert.  1987.   Statistical Considerations to Include the Importance of a Statistics Design for Soil
    Monitoring Programs.   Proc. Third Annual Solid Waste  Testing and Quality Assurance Symposium,
    Washington D.C., Jury 13-17, 1987.

Benson, R., Robert A. Glaccum, and Michael R. NoeL  1988. Geophysical Techniques for Sensing Buried Wastes
    and Waste Migration.  National Water Well Association: Ohio.

Brady, Nyle C.  1974. The Nature and Properties of Soils. 8th ed. McMillan: New York.

Clark, I.  1979.  Practical Geostatistics.  Elsevier Science: New York.

Flatman, George T.  1987.  QA/QC Considerations to Include Types  and Numbers of Samples: Proc Third
    Annual Waste Testing and Quality Assurance Symposium, Washington, D.C., July 13-17, 1987.

Gilbert, Richard O.  1987. Statistical Methods for the Environmental Pollution Monitoring.  Pacific Northwest
    Laboratory.  Van Nostrand Reinhold: New York.

Gy, P.M. 1982. Sampling of Paniculate Material. Elsevier Amsterdam.

Jernigan, R.W.  1986. A Primer on Kriging. Washington, D.C.:  U.S. EPA Statistical Policy Branch. 83 pp.

Journal, A.G. 1989.  Geostatistics for the Environmental Sciences. (Draft). Las Vegas: U.S. EPA Environmental
    Monitoring Systems Laboratory.  135 pp.

New Jersey Department of Environmental  Protection.  February 1988.  Field Sampling Procedures Manual.

Taylor, J.K.  1987. Quality Assurance of Chemical Measurements.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.   Office of Emergency and  Remedial Response.   January  1991.
    Compendium of ERT Soil Sampling and Surface Geophysics Procedures. Interim Final OSWER Directive
    9360.4-02.

U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency. Office of Emergency and Remedial Response.  April 1990.  Quality
    Assurance/Quality Control Guidance for Removal Activities:  Sampling QA/QC Plan  and Data Validation
    Procedures.  Interim Final. EPA/540/G-90/004.

U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency. 1990.  Geostatistics for Waste Management: A User's Manual for the
    GEOPACK (Version  1.0) Geostatistical Software  System.   Robert S. Kerr  Environmental  Research
    Laboratory, Ada, Oklahoma. EPA/600/8-90/004.

U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency. February 1989.  Methods for Evaluating the Attainment of Cleanup
    Standards.  Volume 1, Soils and Solid Media. EPA/230/02-89/042.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1989a. Soil Sampling Quality Assurance User's Guide.  2nd ed. (Draft).
    EPA/600/8-89/046. Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory, Las Vegas, NV.
                                                45

-------
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 198%. Data Quality Objectives Workshop. (Briefing Notes).

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. December 1988. User's Guide to the Contract Laboratory Program.
    EPA/540/8-89/012.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. September 1988&. Field Screening Methods Catalog - User's Guide.
    EPA/540/2-88/005.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. September 1988b. Geo-EAS (Geostatistical Environmental Assessment
    Software) User's Guide.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.  December 1987. A Compendium of Superfund Field Operations
    Methods.  EPA/540/P-87/001. OSWER Directive 9355.0-14.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.  1987.  Data  Quality  Objectives for Remedial Response Activities.
    EPA/540/G-87/004. OSWER Directive 93550.7B.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Region IV. April 1986. Engineering Support Branch Standard Operating
    Procedures and Quality Assurance Manual,  Environmental Services Division, Athens, Georgia.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.   1986.  Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste.  Volume  II, Field
    Manual Physical/Chemical Methods.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1984a.  Characterization of Hazardous Waste Sites-A Methods Manual.
    Volume I, Site Investigations. Section 7: Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory, Las Vegas, Nevada.
    EPA/600/4-84/075.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 19845.  Characterization of Hazardous Waste Sites • A Methods Manual.
    Volume II, Available Sampling Methods, Second Edition.  Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory,
    Las Vegas, Nevada. EPA/600/4-84/076.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1983. Preparation of Soil Sampling Protocol: Techniques and Strategies.
    EPA/600/4-83/020.

van EC, J J., LJ. Blume, and T.H. Starks. 1989.  A Rationale for the Assessment of Errors in the Sampling of
    Soils.  Las Vegas: U.S. EPA Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory.  59 pp.
                                                46

-------
      APPENDIX B
   Compendium of ERT
Waste Sampling Procedures

-------
                                            EPA/540/P-91/008
                                      OSWER Directive 9360.4-07
                                                January 1991
COMPENDIUM OF ERT  WASTE
    SAMPLING PROCEDURES
 Sampling Equipment Decontamination

 Drum Sampling

 Tank Sampling

 Chip, Wipe, and Sweep Sampling

 Waste Pile Sampling
                Interim Final
          Environmental Response Team
           Emergency Response Division
      Office of Emergency and Remedial Response
        U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
             Washington, DC 20460
                                   (J59 Printed on Recycled Paper

-------
                                              Notice
c
This document has been reviewed in accordance with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency policy and approved
for publication.   Mention  of  trade names or commercial  products  does not constitute endorsement  or
recommendation for use.

The policies and procedures established in this document are intended  solely for the guidance of government
personnel, for use in the Superfund Removal Program.  They are not intended, and cannot be relied upon, to
create any rights, substantive or procedural, enforceable by any party in litigation with the United States.  The
Agency reserves the right to act at variance with these policies and procedures and to change them at any time
without public notice.

Depending on circumstances and needs, it may not be possible or appropriate to follow these procedures exactly
in all situations  due  to site conditions, equipment limitations,  and limitations of the standard procedures.
Whenever these procedures cannot be followed as written, they may be  used as general guidance with any and
all modifications fully documented in either QA Plans, Sampling Plans,  or final reports of results.

Each Standard Operating Procedure in this compendium contains  a discussion on quality assurance/quality
control (QA/QC).  For  more information on QA/QC objectives and  requirements, refer  to the Quality
Assurance/Quality Control Guidance for Removal Activities,  OSWER directive 9360.4-01, EPA/540/G-90/004.

Questions, comments, and recommendations are welcomed regarding the Compendium of ERT Waste Sampling
Procedures. Send remarks to:

                                       Mr. William A. Coakley
                                 Removal Program QA Coordinator
                                          U.S.  EPA  - ERT
                                 Raritan Depot  - Building 18, MS-101
                                      2890 Woodbridge Avenue
                                        Edison,  NJ 08837-3679

For additional copies of the Compendium of ERT Waste Sampling Procedures,  please contact:

                             National Technical Information Service (NTIS)
                                   U.S. Department  of Commerce
                                        5285 Port Royal Road
                                        Springfield, VA 22161
                                           (703) 487-4600

-------
                                      Table of Contents

Section                                                                                        Page

1.0     SAMPLING EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION:  SOP #2006

        1.1     Scope and Application                                                              1
        1.2     Method Summary                                                                  1
        1.3     Sample Preservation, Containers, Handling, and Storage                                1
        1.4     Interferences and Potential Problems                                                 1
        1.5     Equipment/Apparatus                                                              1
        1.6     Reagents                                                                          2
        1.7     Procedures                                                                        2
                   i
               1.7.1    Decontamination Methods                                                   2
               1.7.2    Field Sampling Equipment Cleaning Procedures                                3

        1.8     Calculations                                                                       3
        1.9     Quality Assurance/Quality Control                                                   3
        1.10    Data Validation                                                                    4
        1.11    Health and Safety                                                                  4


2.0     DRUM SAMPLING: SOP #2009

        2.1     Scope and Application                                                              5
        2.2     Method Summary                                                                  5
        2.3     Sample Preservation, Containers, Handling, and Storage                                5
        2.4     Interferences and Potential Problems                                                 5
        2.5     Equipment/Apparatus                                                              6

               2.5.1    Bung Wrench                                                               6
               2.5.2    Drum Deheader                                                            6
               2.5.3    Hand Pick, Pickaxe, and Hand Spike                                          6
               2.5.4    Backhoe Spike                                                             6
               2.5.5    Hydraulic Drum Opener                                                     6
               2.5.6    Pneumatic Devices                                                          6

        2.6     Reagents                                                                          6
        2.7     Procedures                                                                        7

               2.7.1    Preparation                                                                7
               2.7.2    Drum Inspection                                                            7
               2.7.3    Drum Staging                                                               7
               2.7.4    Drum Opening                                                             8
               2.7.5    Drum Sampling                                                            9

        2.8     Calculations                                                                      11
        2.9     Quality Assurance/Quality Control                                                  11
        2.10    Data Validation                                                                   11
        2.11    Health and Safety                                                                 11
                                                111

-------
Section                                                                                        Page


3.0      TANK SAMPLING: SOP #2010

        3.1     Scope and Application                                                              13
        3.2     Method Summary                                                                  13
        3.3     Sample  Preservation, Containers, Handling, and Storage                               13
        3.4     Interferences and Potential Problems                                                 13
        3.5     Equipment/Apparatus                                                              14
        3.6     Reagents                                                                          14
        3.7     Procedures                                                                        14

               3.7.1)    Preparation                                                                14
               3.7.2    Preliminary Inspection                                                      14
               3.7.3    Sampling Procedures                                                       15
               3.7.4    Sampling Devices                                                           15

        3.8     Calculations                                                                       18
        3.9     Quality  Assurance/Quality Control                                                  18
        3.10    Data Validation                                                                    18
        3.11    Health and Safety                                                                  18
4.0      CHIP, WIPE, AND SWEEP SAMPLING: SOP #2011

        4.1     Scope and Application                                                              21
        4.2     Method Summary                                                                  21
        4.3     Sample Preservation, Containers, Handling, and Storage                               21
        4.4     Interferences and Potential Problems                                                21
        4.5     Equipment/Apparatus                                                              21
        4.6     Reagents                                                                          22
        4.7     Procedures                                                                        22

               4.7.1    Preparation                                                               22
               4.7.2    Chip Sample Collection                                                     22
               4.7.3    Wipe Sample Collection                                                    22
               4.7.4    Sweep Sample  Collection                                                   23

        4.8     Calculations                                                                       23
        4.9     Quality Assurance/Quality Control                                                  23
        4.10    Data  Validation                                                                    24
        4.11    Health and Safety                                                                  24
5.0     WASTE PILE SAMPLING: SOP #2017

        5.1     Scope and Application                                                             25
        5.2     Method Summary                                                                 25
        5.3     Sample Preservation, Containers, Handling, and Storage                               25
        5.4     Interferences and Potential Problems                                                25
        5.5     Equipment/Apparatus                                                             26
        5.6     Reagents                                                                         26
                                                 IV

-------
Section                                                                                    Page
                                •
       5.7     Procedures                                                                     26

               5.7.1    Preparation                                                             26
               5.7.2    Sample Collection                                                        26

       5.8     Calculations                                                                    29
       5.9     Quality Assurance/Quality Control                                                29
       5.10    Data Validation                                                                 29
       5.11    Health and Safety                                                               29


APPENDIX A - Drum Data Sheet Form                                                          31

APPENDDC B - Figures                                                                        35

APPENDIX C - Calculations                                                                    51

REFERENCES                                                                               55

-------
                                      List of Exhibits
Table 1:
Recommended Solvent Rinse for Soluble Contaminants
Drum Data Sheet Form
Figure 1:       Univeral Bung Wrench
Figure 2:       Drum Deheader
Figure 3:       Hand Pick, Pickaxe, and Hand Spike
Figure 4:       Backhoe Spike
Figure 5:       Hydraulic Drum Opener
Figure 6:       Pneumatic Bung Remover
Figure 7:       Glass Thief
Figure 8:       COLIWASA
Figure 9:       Bacon Bomb Sampler
Figure 10:      Sludge Judge
Figure 11:      Subsurface Grab Sampler
Figure 12:      Bailer
Figurt 13:      Sampling Augers
Figure 14:      Sampling Trier
Figure 15:      Grain Sampler
Calculation Sheet: Various Volume Calculations
SOP
#2006
#2009
#2009
#2009
#2009
#2009
#2009
#2009
#2009
#2009
#2010
#2010
#2010
#2010
#2017
#2017
#2017
#2010
Page
4
33
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
52
                                              VI

-------
                                    Acknowledgments
Preparation of this document was directed by William A. Coakley, the Removal Program QA Coordinator of
the Environmental Response Team, Emergency Response Division. Additional support was provided under U.S.
EPA contract #68-03-3432 and U.S. EPA contract #68-WO-0036.
                                             VII

-------
      1.0    SAMPLING EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION:  SOP #2006
1.1     SCOPE AND APPLICATION

This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) describes
methods  used  for preventing or reducing  cross-
contamination,  and provides general guidelines for
sampling equipment decontamination procedures at
a hazardous waste site.  Preventing  or minimizing
cross-contamination  in  sampled media  and  in
samples is important for preventing the introduction
of error into samplirlg results and for protecting the
health and safety of site personnel.

Removing or neutralizing contaminants that have
accumulated  on   sampling  equipment  ensures
protection of personnel from permeating substances,
reduces or eliminates transfer of contaminants to
clean areas,  prevents the mixing of incompatible
substances, and minimizes the likelihood of sample
cross-contamination.
1.2    METHOD SUMMARY

Contaminants can  be physically  removed from
equipment,  or  deactivated  by  sterilization   or
disinfection.  Gross  contamination  of equipment
requires  physical   decontamination,   including
abrasive and non-abrasive methods.  These include
the use of brushes, air and wet blasting, and high-
pressure water cleaning, followed by a wash/rinse
process using appropriate cleaning solutions.  Use
of a  solvent rinse  is  required  when  organic
contamination is present.
1.3    SAMPLE PRESERVATION,
       CONTAINERS, HANDLING, AND
       STORAGE

This section is not applicable to this SOP.
1.4    INTERFERENCES AND
       POTENTIAL PROBLEMS

    •   The  use  of  distilled/dcionizcd  water
       commonly  available  from  commercial
       vendors   may  be   acceptable   for
       decontamination of sampling equipment
       provided  that  it  has  been  verified  by
       laboratory analysis to be analyte free.

    •  An untreated potable water supply is not
       an acceptable substitute for tap water. Tap
       water may be used from any municipal
       water treatment system  for  mixing  of
       decontamination solutions.

    •  Acids  and   solvents  utilized  in  the
       decontamination sequence pose the health
       and  safety risks  of inhalation  or skin
       contact,  and raise  shipping  concerns  of
       permeation or degradation.

    •  The site work plan must  address disposal
       of the spent decontamination solutions.

    •  Several procedures  can be established to
       minimize  contact  with  waste  and  the
       potential for contamination. For example:

              Stress   work    practices   that
              minimize contact with hazardous
              substances.

              Use remote sampling,  handling,
              and container-opening techniques
              when appropriate.

              Cover  monitoring and sampling
              equipment with protective material
              to minimize contamination.

              Use disposable  outer  garments
              and   disposable   sampling
              equipment when appropriate.
1.5    EQUIPMENT/APPARATUS
       appropriate personal protective clothing
       non-phosphate detergent
       selected solvents
       long-handled brushes
       drop cloths/plastic sheeting
       trash container
       paper towels
       galvanized tubs or buckets
       tap water

-------
        distilled/deionized water
        metal/plastic  containers for  storage  and
        disposal of contaminated wash solutions
        pressurized   sprayers   for   tap   and
        deionized/distilled water
        sprayers for solvents
        trash bags
        aluminum foil
        safety glasses or splash shield
        emergency eyewash bottle
1.6     REAGENTS
                     i
There are no reagents used in this procedure aside
from  the actual  decontamination solutions  and
solvents.   In general, the following solvents are
utilized for decontamination purposes:

    •   10% nitric acid(1)
    •   acetone (pesticide grade)(2)
    •   hexane (pesticide grade)(2)
    •   methanol

(1> Only if sample is to be analyzed for trace metals.
(2) Only if sample is to be analyzed for organics.
1.7     PROCEDURES

As part of the health and safety plan, develop and
set up a decontamination plan before any personnel
or equipment enter the areas of potential exposure.
The  equipment  decontamination  plan  should
include:

    •   the   number,  location,   and  layout  of
        decontamination stations

    •   which decontamination apparatus is needed

    •   the appropriate decontamination methods

    •   methods  for  disposal of  contaminated
        clothing, apparatus, and solutions

1.7.1   Decontamination Methods

All personnel, samples, and equipment leaving the
contaminated   area   of   a   site   must   be
decontaminated. Various decontamination methods
will   either   physically   remove   contaminants,
inactivate  contaminants   by   disinfection   or
sterilization, or do both.
In many cases, gross contamination can be removed
by physical means.  The physical decontamination
techniques   appropriate   for   equipment
decontamination  can   be  grouped  into   two
categories:   abrasive methods and  non-abrasive
methods.

Abrasive Cleaning Methods

Abrasive cleaning methods work by rubbing and
wearing away the top layer of the surface containing
the contaminant.  The following abrasive methods
are available:

    •   Mechanical: Mechanical cleaning methods
        use  brushes  of metal or  nylon.    The
        amount and type of contaminants removed
        will  vary with  the hardness of bristles,
        length of  brushing time,  and degree of
        brush contact.

    •   Air  Blasting:   Air blasting  is  used  for
        cleaning   large   equipment,   such  as
        bulldozers,  drilling rigs or auger bits.  The
        equipment   used  in  air  blast  cleaning
        employs compressed air to force abrasive
        material through a nozzle at high velocities.
        The  distance between the  nozzle and  the
        surface cleaned, as well as the pressure of
        air, the time of application, and the  angle
        at which the abrasive strikes the surface,
        determines cleaning efficiency. Air blasting
        has several disadvantages:  it is unable to
        control the amount of material removed, it
        can aerate  contaminants, and it generates
        large amounts of waste.

    •   Wet Blasting:   Wet blast  cleaning, also
        used to clean large equipment, involves use
        of a suspended fine abrasive delivered by
        compressed air to the contaminated  area.
        The amount of materials removed can be
        carefully controlled  by using  very  fine
        abrasives.   This method generates a large
        amount of waste.

Non-Abrasive Cleaning Methods

Non-abrasive cleaning methods work by forcing the
contaminant off of a  surface with  pressure.   In
general, less of the equipment surface is removed
using non-abrasive  methods.  The  following non-
abrasive methods are available:

-------
     •  High-Pressure  Water:     This  method
        consists  of  a  high-pressure  pump,  an
        operator-controlled directional nozzle, and
        a high pressure hose. Operating pressure
        usually ranges from 340 to 680 atmospheres
        (atm) which  relates to flow rates of 20 to
        140 liters per minute.

     •  Ultra-High-Pressure  Water:   This  system
        produces  a pressurized water jet  (from
        1,000 to  4,000  atm).   The  ultra-high-
        pressure   spray  removes  tightly-adhered
        surface  film.  The water  velocity  ranges
        from 500 m/sec (1,000 atm) to 900 m/sec
        (4,000  atm).  Additives can enhance the
        method.  This method is not applicable for
        hand-held sampling equipment.

Disinfection/Rinse Methods

     •  Disinfection:  Disinfectants are a practical
        means of inactivating infectious agents.

     •  Sterilization:      Standard   sterilization
        methods  involve heating  the  equipment.
        Sterilization  is  impractical  for   large
        equipment.

     •  Rinsing:   Rinsing removes contaminants
        through dilution,  physical  attraction,  and
        solubilization.

1.7.2  Field Sampling Equipment
        Cleaning Procedures

Solvent rinses are not necessarily required  when
organics are not a contaminant of concern and may
be eliminated from the  sequence specified  below.
Similarly, an acid rinse  is not required if analysis
does not include inorganics.

1.   Where  applicable,  follow physical  removal
    procedures specified in  section  1.7.1.

2.   Wash   equipment  with  a   non-phosphate
    detergent solution.

3.   Rinse with tap water.

4.   Rinse with distilled/deionized water.

5.   Rinse with 10% nitric acid if the sample will be
    analyzed for trace organics.
6.   Rinse with distilled/deionized water.

7.   Use  a  solvent rinse (pesticide grade) if the
     sample will be analyzed for organics.

8.   Air dry the equipment completely.

9.   Rinse again with distilled/deionized water.
Selection   of  the   solvent  for  use   in   the
decontamination   process   is  based   on   the
contaminants present  at the site.  Use of a solvent
is required when  organic contamination is present
on-site.   Typical solvents  used for  removal  of
organic contaminants  include  acetone,  hexane,  or
water. An acid rinse step is required if metals are
present on-site. If a particular contaminant fraction
is  not  present   at   the  site,  the   nine-step
decontamination  procedure listed above  may be
modified for site  specificity. The decontamination
solvent used should not be among the contaminants
of concern at the  site.

Table 1 on page 4 lists solvent  rinses which may be
required for  elimination of particular  chemicals.
After each solvent rinse, the equipment  should be
air dried and rinsed with distilled/deionized water.

Sampling equipment that requires the use of plastic
tubing should  be  disassembled  and  the tubing
replaced with clean tubing, before commencement
of sampling and between sampling locations.
1.8     CALCULATIONS

This section is not applicable to this SOP.
1.9     QUALITY ASSURANCE/
        QUALITY CONTROL

One type of quality control sample specific to  the
field decontamination process is the rinsate blank.
The  rinsate  blank  provides  information  on  the
effectiveness  of  the  decontamination   process
employed in the field.  When used in conjunction
with field blanks and trip blanks, a rinsate blank can
detect  contamination  during  sample  handling,
storage and sample transportation to the laboratory.

-------
            Table 1:  Recommended Solvent Rinse for Soluble Contaminants
               SOLVENT
             SOLUBLE CONTAMINANTS
 Water
•   Low-chain hydrocarbons
•   Inorganic compounds
                                             Salts
                                             Some organic acids and other polar compounds
 Dilute Acids
•   Basic (caustic) compounds
•   Amines
•   Hydrazines
 Dilute Bases -- for example, detergent
 and soap
•   Metals
•   Acidic compounds
•   Phenol
•   Thiols
•   Some nitro and sulfonic compounds
 Organic Solvents'" - for example,
 alcohols, ethers, ketones, aromatics,
 straight-chain alkanes (e.g., hexane), and
 common petroleum products (e.g., fuel,
 oil, kerosene)
    Nonpolar compounds (e.g., some organic compounds)
(1> - WARNING:  Some organic solvents can permeate and/or degrade protective clothing.
A rinsate blank consists of a sample of analyte-free
(i.e,  deionized)  water which is  passed  over  and
through a field decontaminated sampling device and
placed  in a clean sample container.

Rinsate blanks should be run for all parameters of
interest at a rate of 1 per  20 for each parameter,
even if samples  are not shipped that day. Rinsate
blanks  are not  required  if dedicated  sampling
equipment is used.
1.10    DATA VALIDATION

This section is not applicable to this SOP.


1.11    HEALTH AND SAFETY

When working with potentially hazardous materials,
follow U.S. EPA,  OSHA and  specific  health and
safety procedures.

Decontamination can pose hazards under certain
circumstances even though  performed to protect
           health  and safety.  Hazardous substances  may be
           incompatible with decontamination methods.  For
           example, the  decontamination solution or solvent
           may react  with  contaminants  to produce  heat,
           explosion, or  toxic products.   Decontamination
           methods may be incompatible  with clothing or
           equipment; some solvents can permeate or degrade
           protective clothing. Also, decontamination solutions
           and solvents  may pose a direct health  hazard to
           workers through  inhalation  or skin contact, or if
           they combust.

           The decontamination solutions and solvents must be
           determined to be  compatible  before  use.   Any
           method  that permeates, degrades,  or  damages
           personal protective equipment should not be used.
           If decontamination  methods pose a direct health
           hazard,  measures  should  be  taken  to  protect
           personnel or  the methods should be modified to
           eliminate the hazard.

-------
                        2.0   DRUM SAMPLING:  SOP #2009
2.1    SCOPE AND APPLICATION

The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure
(SOP) is to provide technical guidance on safe and
cost-effective response actions  at hazardous waste
sites  containing  drums with  unknown  contents.
Container  contents are sampled and characterized
for disposal, bulking, recycling, grouping,  and/or
classification purposes.
2.2     METHOD SUMMARY

Prior  to sampling, drums must  be inventoried,
staged, and opened. An inventory entails recording
visual qualities of each drum and any characteristics
pertinent to the contents' classification.  Staging
involves   the   organization,   and    sometimes
consolidation of drums which have similar wastes or
characteristics.  Opening of closed drums can be
performed manually or remotely.  Remote drum
opening is recommended for worker safety.  The
most  widely  used  method  of  sampling  a drum
involves the use of a glass thief.  This method is
quick, simple,  relatively inexpensive, and requires no
decontamination.
2.3     SAMPLE PRESERVATION,
        CONTAINERS, HANDLING, AND
        STORAGE

Samples collected from drums are considered waste
samples.  No preservatives should be added since
there is a potential  reaction of the sample with the
preservative.  Samples  should, however, be cooled
to 4ฐC and  protected  from sunlight in order to
minimize any potential reaction due to the light
sensitivity of the sample.

Sample bottles  for collection  of waste  liquids,
sludges, or  solids are typically wide-mouth amber
jars with Teflon-lined screw caps.  Actual volume
required  for analysis  should be  determined in
conjunction  with the  laboratory  performing  the
analysis.

Follow these waste  sample handling procedures:

1.  Placr' sample container in two Ziploc plastic bags.
2.   Place  each bagged  container in a  1-gallon
    covered can  containing  absorbent  packing
    material.  Place the lid on the can.

3.   Mark the sample identification number on the
    outside of the can.

4.   Place  the  marked cans in a cooler, and  fill
    remaining  space  with   absorbent  packing
    material.

5.   Fill out chain of custody form for each cooler,
    place in plastic, and affix to inside lid of cooler.

6.   Secure and custody seal the lid of cooler.

7.   Arrange  for  the  appropriate transportation
    mode  consistent with  the type of hazardous
    waste involved.
2.4     INTERFERENCES AND
        POTENTIAL PROBLEMS

The practice of tapping drums to determine their
contents is neither safe nor effective and should not
be used if the drums are visually overpressurized or
if shock-sensitive materials are suspected. A laser
thermometer may be used instead.

Drums that have been overpressurized, to the extent
that the head is  swollen  several  inches above the
level of the chime, should not be moved. A number
of devices have been developed for venting critically
swollen drums. One method that has proven to be
effective  is  a  tube and spear device.   A light
aluminum tube (3 meters long) is positioned at the
vapor space of the  drum.  A rigid, hooking device
attached to the tube goes over the chime and holds
the tube securely in place. The spear is inserted in
the tube and positioned against the drum wall. A
sharp blow on the end  of the  spear drives the
sharpened tip through the drum and the gas vents
along the grooves.   The venting should  be done
from behind a wall or barricade. This device can be
cheaply and easily designed and constructed where
needed.  Once the  pressure has been relieved, the
bung can be removed and the drum sampled.

-------
2.5     EQUIPMENT/APPARATUS

The following arc standard materials and equipment
required for sampling:

    •   personal protection equipment
    •   wide-mouth glass jars with Teflon cap liner,
        approximately 500 mL volume
    •   uniquely numbered  sample identification
        labels with corresponding data sheets
    •   1-gallon  covered  cans half-filled  with
        absorbent (vermiculite)
    •   chain of custody forms
    •   decontamination materials
    •   glass  thief tubes or  Composite  Liquid
        Waste Samplers (COLIWASA)
    •   laser thermometer
    *   drum opening devices

Drum opening devices include the following:

2.5.1   Bung Wrench

A common method for opening drums manually is
using a  universal bung  wrench.  These  wrenches
have fittings made to remove nearly all commonly
encountered bungs. They are usually constructed of
cast iron, brass, or a bronze-beryllium, non-sparking
alloy formulated to reduce the likelihood of sparks.
The  use of a  non-sparking bung wrench does not
completely eliminate the possibility of a spark being
produced.  (See Figure 1, Appendix B.)

2.5.2  Drum Deheader

When a  bung is not removable with a bung wrench,
a drum  can be opened  manually by using a drum
deheader.  This tool is constructed of forged steel
with an alloy steel blade and is designed to cut the
lid of a  drum  off or part way off  by means of a
scissors-like cutting action.  A limitation  of this
device is that it can be attached only to closed head
drums.  Drums with  removable heads  must be
opened  by other means. (See  Figure 2, Appendix
B.)

2.5.3  Hand Pick,  Pickaxe, and Hand
        Spike

These tools   re usually constructed of brass or a
non-sparkint   'loy with  a sharpened point that can
penetrate  th  drum lid or head when the tool  is
swung.  The hand picks or pickaxes that are most
commonly used are commercially available; whereas
the spikes are generally uniquely fabricated 4-foot
long poles with a pointed end.  (See Figure 3,
Appendix B.)

2.5.4   Backhoe Spike

The most common means  used  to open drums
remotely for sampling is the use of a metal spike
attached or welded  to  a backhoe bucket.   In
addition to being  very efficient, this method  can
greatly reduce the  likelihood of personal exposure.
(See Figure 4, Appendix B.)

2.5.5   Hydraulic Drum Opener

Another remote method for opening drums is with
remotely operated hydraulic devices.  One  such
device uses hydraulic pressure to pierce through the
wall of a drum.  It consists of a manually operated
pump which pressurizes soil through a length of
hydraulic line.  (See Figure 5, Appendix B.)

2.5.6   Pneumatic Devices

A  pneumatic  bung  remover  consists  of  a
compressed air supply that is controlled by a heavy-
duty, two-stage regulator.  A high-pressure air line
of desired length  delivers  compressed air  to  a
pneumatic drill, which is  adapted to turn a bung
fitting selected to  fit the bung  to be removed.  An
adjustable bracketing system has been designed to
position and align the pneumatic drill over the bung.
This bracketing system must  be  attached to the
drum before the drill can be operated. Once the
bung has been loosened, the bracketing system must
be removed before the drum can be  sampled. This
remote  bung opener  does not permit the slow
venting of the container, and therefore appropriate
precautions  must  be taken.   It also requires the
container to be upright and relatively level.  Bungs
that are rusted  shut cannot be removed  with this
device.  (See Figure 6, Appendix B.)
2.6    REAGENTS

Reagents are not typically inquired for preserving
drum samples.   However, reagents are  used for
decontaminating   sampling  equipment.
Decontamination solutions are  specified in ERT
SOP #2006, Sampling Equipment Decontamination.

-------
2.7     PROCEDURES

2.7.1   Preparation

1.   Determine the extent of the sampling effort, the
    sampling methods to be employed, and which
    equipment and supplies are needed.

2.   Obtain  necessary  sampling and  monitoring
    equipment.

3.   Decontaminate  or  preclean equipment,  and
    ensure that it is in working order.

4.   Prepare scheduling  and coordinate with staff,
    clients, and regulatory agency, if appropriate.

5.   Perform a general site survey prior to site entry
    in accordance with the site-specific health and
    safety plan.

6.   Use stakes, flagging, or buoys  to identify and
    mark  all sampling locations.  If  required, the
    proposed locations may be  adjusted based on
    site access, property boundaries, and  surface
    obstructions.

2.7.2   Drum Inspection

Appropriate procedures for handling drums depend
on the contents. Thus, prior to any handling, drums
should  be visually inspected to  gain as much
information as possible about their contents. Those
in  charge  of inspections  should be on the look-out
for:

•   drum  condition, corrosion, rust, and  leaking
    contents

•   symbols, words, or other markings on the drum
    indicating hazards (i.e., explosive, radioactive,
    toxic,  flammable)

•   signs that the drum is under pressure

•   shock  sensitivity

Monitor   around   the   drums   with  radiation
instruments, organic vapor monitors (OVA) and
combustible gas indicators (CGI).

Classify the drums into categories, for instance:
        radioactive
        leaking/deteriorating
        bulging
        drums containing lab packs
        explosive/shock sensitive
All personnel should assume that unmarked drums
contain hazardous  materials until their  contents
have been  categorized, and that labels on drums
may not accurately describe their contents.

If it is presumed that there are buried drums on-
site, geophysical investigation  techniques  such as
magnetometry, ground penetrating radar, and metal
detection  can  be   employed  in  an  attempt  to
determine depth and location  of the drums.  See
ERT SOP #2159, General Surface Geophysics.

2.7.3  Drum Staging

Prior  to sampling,  the drums should be staged to
allow  easy access.  Ideally, the staging area should
be located just far  enough from the drum opening
area to prevent a chain reaction if one drum should
explode or  catch fire when opened.

While staging, physically  separate the drums into
the following categories:  those containing liquids,
those  containing solids, lab  packs,  or gas cylinders,
and those which are empty.  This  is done because
the   strategy   for  sampling   and   handling
drums/containers in each of these categories will be
different. This may be achieved by:

    •   Visual  inspection  of  the drum  and  its
        labels, codes,  etc.  Solids  and sludges are
        typically disposed of in open-top drums.
        Closed-head drums with  a  bung opening
        generally contain liquid.

    •   Visual  inspection of the  contents  of the
        drum   during   sampling  followed   by
        restaging, if needed.

Once   a drum  has  been excavated  and  any
immediate   hazard  has   been  eliminated   by
overpacking or transferring the drum's contents,
affix a numbered tag to the  drum and transfer it to
a staging area.  Color-coded tags, labels, or bands
should be used to mark similar waste types. Record
a  description  of each drum, its  condition,  any
unusual markings,  and the location where it  was
buried or stored, on a drum data  sheet (Appendix
A).    This  data  sheet  becomes  the  principal

-------
recordkeeping tool for tracking the drum onsite.

Where there  is  good reason to suspect that some
drums contain  radioactive,  explosive,  and shock-
sensitive materials, these drums should be staged in
a separate, isolated area.  Placement of explosives
and shock-sensitive materials in diked  and fenced
areas will minimize  the hazard  and  the adverse
effects of any premature detonation of  explosives.

Where space allows, the drum opening  area should
be physically separated from the drum removal and
drum staging operations.  Drums are moved from
the staging area to the1 drum opening area one at a
time  using forklift trucks  equipped  with  drum
grabbers or a barrel grappler. In a large-scale drum
handling operation, drums may be conveyed to the
drum opening area using a roller conveyor.

2.7.4 Drum Opening

There  are three  basic  techniques available for
opening drums at  hazardous waste sites:

    •  Manual opening with non-sparking bung
       wrenches,

    •  Drum deheading, and

    •  Remote drum puncturing or bung removal.

The  choice  of drum  opening  techniques  and
accessories depends on the number of drums to be
opened, their waste contents, and physical condition.
Remote drum opening equipment should always be
considered in  order  to  protect  worker  safety.
Under OSHA 1910.120, manual drum opening with
bung wrenches or deheaders should be performed
only with structurally sound drums having contents
that are known  to be (1) not shock sensitive, (2)
non-reactive,  (3)   non-explosive,  and  (4)  non-
flammable.

Manual Drum Opening with a Bung
Wrench

Manual drum opening with bung wrenches (Figure
1, Appendix B) should not be performed unless the
drums are structurally  sound  (no evidence  of
bulging or deformation)  and their  contents  are
known to  be  non-explosive.  If opening the drum
with  bung wrenches  is deemed  reasonably cost-
effective and safe, then follow these procedures to
minimize the  hazard:
1.  Fully outfit field personnel with protective gear.

2.  Position drum upright with the bung up, or, for
    drums with bungs on the side, lay the drum on
    its side with the bung pli'3 up.

3   Wrench the bung with a slow, steady pulling
    motion across the drum.  If the length of the
    bung wrench   handle  provides  inadequate
    leverage  for unscrewing the plug,  attach  a
    "cheater bar" to the handle to improve leverage.

Manual Drum Opening with a  Drum
Deheader

Drums are opened with a drum deheader (Figure 2,
Appendix B)  by first positioning the  cutting edge
just inside the top chime and then tightening the
adjustment screw so  that  the  deheader is  held
against the side of the drum.  Moving the handle of
the deheader up  and  down  while sliding  the
deheader along the chime will cut off the entire top.
If the top chime of  a drum has been damaged or
badly dented, it may not be possible to cut off the
entire top. Since there is always the possibility that
a drum may be under pressure, make the initial cut
very slowly to  allow  for the gradual release of any
built-up pressure. A safer technique would be to
use a remote method to puncture the drum prior to
using  the deheader.

Self-propelled  drum  openers  which are either
electrically or pneumatically driven can be used for
quicker and more efficient  deheading.

Manual Drum Opening with a  Hand
Pick, Pickaxe, or Spike

When a drum  must  be opened and  neither a bung
wrench nor a drum deheader is suitable, the drum
can be opened for sampling by  using a hand pick,
pickaxe, or spike (Figure 3, Appendix B). Often the
drum lid or head must be  hit with a great deal of
force  in  order to penetrate it.  The  potential for
splash or spraying  is greater  than with  other
opening  methods and, therefore, this method  of
drum opening is not recommended, particularly
when  opening drums containing liquids.   Some
spikes used have been modified by the addition of
a  circular splash plate near the penetrating end.
This plate acts as a shield and reduces the amount
of splash in  the  direction of the person  using the
spike.  Even  with this shield, good splash gear  is
essential.

-------
Since drums cannot be opened slowly with these
tools, spray from drums is  common requiring
appropriate safety measures.  Decontaminate  the
pick or spike after each drum  is opened to avoid
cross-contamination  and/or   adverse  chemical
reaction from incompatible materials.

Remote Drum  Opening with a Backhoe
Spike

Remotely  operated drum opening tools are  the
safest available means of drum opening.  Remote
drum opening is slow, but is much safer compared
to manual methods of opening.

Drums should be "staged" or placed in rows with
adequate aisle  space  to  allow ease  in  backhoe
maneuvering.  Once staged,  the drums  can  be
quickly opened by punching a hole in the drum
head or lid with the spike.

The spike  (Figure 4,  Appendix B)  should  be
decontaminated  after  each drum  is  opened  to
prevent  cross-contamination.  Even though some
splash or spray may occur when this method is used,
the operator of the backhoe can be protected by
mounting a large shatter-resistant shield in front of
the operator's cage.   This, combined with  the
required level of personal protection gear, should be
sufficient  to  protect the operator.   Additional
respiratory protection can be afforded by providing
the operator with  an on-board airline system.

Remote Drum  Opening with Hydraulic
Devices

A piercing device  with a metal point is  attached to
the end of a hydraulic line and is pushed into  the
drum by hydraulic pressure (Figure 5, Appendix B).
The piercing  device can  be attached  so that  the
sampling hole can be made on either the side or the
head of the drum.  Some of the metal piercers  are
hollow or lube-like so that they can be left in place
if desired and serve as a permanent tap or sampling
port.  The piercer is designed  to establish  a tight
seal after penetrating the container.

Remote Drum  Opening with Pneumatic
Devices

Pneumatically-operated devices utilizing compressed
air have  been designed  to remove drum bungs
remotely (Figure 6, Appendix B).
2.7.5  Drum Sampling

After  the   drum  has  been  opened,  monitor
headspace gases using an explosimeter and organic
vapor analyzer. In most cases it is impossible to
observe the contents of these  sealed or partially
sealed vessels.  Since some layering or stratification
is likely in any solution left undisturbed over time,
take a sample that represents the entire  depth of
the vessel.

When sampling a previously sealed vessel, check for
the presence of a bottom  sludge.  This is easily
accomplished  by  measuring  the depth  to  the
apparent bottom, then comparing it to the known
interior depth.

Glass  Thief Sampler

The most widely used implement  for sampling is a
glass tube commonly referred  to as a glass thief
(Figure 7, Appendix B).  This tool is  simple, cost
effective, quick,  and collects  a  sample without
having to decontaminate.  Glass thieves are typically
6mm to 16mm I.D. and 48 inches long.

Procedures for using a glass thief are as follows:

1.   Remove cover from sample container.

2.   Insert glass tubing almost to the bottom of the
    drum or until a solid  layer is  encountered.
    About one foot of tubing should extend above
    the drum.

3.   Allow  the waste  in the  drum  to  reach  its
    natural level in the tube.

4.   Cap the top of the sampling  tube with a
    tapered stopper or thumb, ensuring liquid does
    not come into contact with  stopper.

5.   Carefully remove the capped tube frbm  the
    drum and insert  the  uncapped  end in  the
    sample container.

6.   Release stopper  and allow the glass thief to
    drain until the container is approximately  2/3
    full.

7.   Remove tube from the sample container, break
    it into pieces and place the  pieces in the drum.

-------
8.   Cap  the  sample container tightly  and place
    prelabeled sample container in a carrier.

9.   Replace the bung or place plastic over the
    drum.

10.  Log all samples in the site logbook and on field
    data sheets.

11.  Package  samples  and   complete  necessary
    paperwork.

12.  Transport  sample to decontamination zone to
    prepare it  for  transport  to  the analytical
    laboratory.

In many instances a drum containing waste material
will have  a sludge layer  on the bottom.   Slow
insertion of the  sample tube  down into 'iiis  layer
and then a gradual withdrawal will allow the sludge
to act as a bottom  plug to mainta;r. the fluid in the
tube.  The  plug can be gently removed and placed
into the sample container by the • sc of a stainless
steel lab spoon.

It should be noted that in some V,tanc'.'S Disposal
of the tube by  breaking it  intc  '.'r^ o:iur  may
interfere with eventual plans for U1- removal  of its
contents. This practice should be dei.-e j wv.h the
project  officer  or  other   dispo a!   techniques
evaluated.

COLIWASA  Sampler

Some equipment is  designed to collect a  sample
from the full depth of a drum and maintain it in the
transfer tube  until delivery to the sample bottle.
These  designs include  primarily the  Composite
Liquid   Waste   Sampler   (COLIWASA)   and
modifications thereof. The COLIWASA (Figure 8,
Appendix B)  is a much cited sampler designed  to
permit representative sampling of multiphase wastes
from drums and other containerized wastes.  One
configuration  consists of a 152 cm  by 4 cm I.D.
section of tubing with  a  neoprene stopper at one
end attached by a rod running the length of the
tube to a locking mechanism at the other end.

Manipulation of the locking mechanism opens and
closes  the  sampler  by raising and  lowering the
neoprene stopper.  One model of the COLIWASA
is shown in Appendix B; however, the design can be
modified and/or adapted somewhat I" meet the
needs of the sampler.
The  major  drawbacks  associated  with  using a
COLIWASA concern decontamination and costs.
The  sampler  is  difficult,  if  not  impossible to
decontaminate  in the field  and  its high  cost in
relation to alternative procedures (glass tubes) maJce
it  an impractical throwaway  item.   It  still has
applications, however, especially in instances where
a true representation  of a multiphase waste  is
absolutely necessary.

Follow these procedures for using the COLIWASA:

1.   Put the sampler in the open position by placing
    the stopper rod handle  in the T-position and
    pushing the rod down  until the handle sits
    against the sampler's locking block.

2.   Slowly lower the sampler into the liquid waste.
    Lower the sampler at a rate that permits the
    levels of  the  liquid  inside and  outside  the
    sampler tube to be about the same. If the level
    of the liquid in  the sample tube  is lower than
    that  outside the sampler, the sampling rate is
    too fast and will result in a non-representative
    sample.

3.   When the sampler stopper hits the bottom of
    the waste  container,  push the sampler  tube
    downward against the  stopper to close  the
    sampler.   Lock the  sampler  in  the closed
    position  by turning  the T-handle until  it is
    upright and one end rests tightly on the locking
    block.

4.   Slowly withdraw the  sample from the  waste
    container with  one   hand while  wiping  the
    sampler  tube with a disposable cloth or rag
    with the other hand.

5.   Carefully discharge the  sample into a suitable
    sample  container by  slowly pulling the lower
    end  of the T-handle away from  the locking
    block while the lower end  of  the sampler is
    positioned in a sample container.

6.   Cap  the  sample container tightly and place
    prelabeled sample container in a carrier.

7.   Replace the  bung or place plastic over the
    drum.

8.   Log all samples in the site logbook and on field
    data sheets.
                                                 10

-------
9.   Package  samples  and  complete  necessary
    paperwork.

10.  Transport sample to decontamination zone to
    prepare  it  for  transport  to  the  analytical
    laboratory.
2.8    CALCULATIONS

This section is not applicable to this SOP.
2.9    QUALITY ASSURANCE/
       QUALITY CONTROL

The following general quality assurance procedures
apply:

    •  Document all data on standard chain of
       custody forms, field data sheets, or within
       site logbooks.

    •  Operate all instrumentation in accordance
       with operating instructions as supplied by
       the   manufacturer,   unless  otherwise
       specified in  the work plan.  Equipment
       checkout and calibration  activities must
       occur  prior  to  sampling/operation,  and
       they must be documented.
2.10   DATA VALIDATION

This section is not applicable to this SOP.


2.11   HEALTH AND SAFETY

When working with potentially hazardous materials,
follow U.S. EPA,  OSHA,  and specific  health and
safety procedures.

The opening of closed containers is one of the most
hazardous site activities. Maximum efforts should
be made to ensure the safety of the sampling team.
Proper  protective equipment  and   a  general
awareness of the possible dangers will minimize the
risk inherent in sampling operations.   Employing
proper drum-opening techniques and equipment will
also  safeguard  personnel.   Use remote sampling
equipment whenever feasible.
                                              II

-------
                        3.0   TANK SAMPLING:   SOP #2010.
3.1     SCOPE AND APPLICATION

The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure
(SOP)  is to  provide protocols for sampling tanks
and other confined spaces from outside the vessel.
3.2    METHOD SUMMARY

The safe  collection of a  representative sample
should  be the  criterion  for  selecting sample
locations. A representative sample can be collected
using techniques or equipment that are designed for
obtaining liquids or sludges from various depths.
The structure and characteristics of storage tanks
present  problems with collection of samples from
more than one location; therefore, the selection of
sampling devices is  an important consideration.

Depending on the type of vessel and characteristics
of the material  to be sampled, one can  choose a
bailer, glass thief,  bacon  bomb sampler,  sludge
judge, COLIWASA, or subsurface grab sampler to
collect the sample.  For depths of less than 5-feet,
a bailer, COLJWASA, or sludge judge can be used.
A sludge judge, subsurface grab sampler,  bailer, or
bacon bomb sampler can be used for depths greater
than 5-feet. A sludge judge or bacon bomb can be
used to determine  if the tank consists of various
strata.

All  sample locations  should  be  surveyed for air
quality prior  to  sampling.   At  no time  should
sampling continue with an LEL reading greater than
25%.

All  personnel  involved in tank sampling should be
advised as to the hazards associated with working in
unfavorable conditions.
3.3    SAMPLE PRESERVATION,
       CONTAINERS, HANDLING, AND
       STORAGE

Samples collected from tanks are considered waste
samples and, as such, addition of preservatives is
not required due to the potential reaction of the
sample with the preservative.  Samples should,
however, be cooled to 4ฐC and  protected from
sunlight in order to minimize any potential reaction
due to the light sensitivity of the sample.

Sample bottles  for  collection  of waste liquids,
sludges, or solids are typically wide-mouth amber
jars with Teflon-lined screw caps.  Actual volume
required for  analysis  should  be  determined  in
conjunction with the  laboratory  performing  the
analysis.

Waste sample handling procedures should  be  as
follows:

1.   Place sample  container in two Ziploc plastic
    bags.

2.   Place each  bagged container in a  1-gallon
    covered can  containing  absorbent  packing
    material.  Place the lid on the can.

3.   Mark the sample identification number on the
    outside of the can.

4.   Place the marked cans in a cooler, and fill
    remaining  space   with  absorbent   packing
    material.

5.   Fill out a  chain  of custody form  for  each
    cooler, place it  in plastic, and affix  it to the
    inside lid of the cooler.

6.   Secure and custody seal the lid of cooler.

7.   Arrange for the transportation appropriate for
    the type of hazardous waste involved.
3.4     INTERFERENCES AND
        POTENTIAL PROBLEMS

Sampling a storage tank requires a great deal of
manual  dexterity,  often requiring the sampler to
climb to the top of the tank upon a narrow vertical
or spiral stairway or ladder while wearing protective
clothing and carrying sampling equipment.

Before  climbing  onto  the  vessel,  perform  a
structural survey of the tank to ensure the sampler's
                                               13

-------
sa..:y  ai.J accessibility  prior  to initiating field
activities.

As  in  all opening  of containers,  take extreme
caution to avoid ignition or combustion  of volatile
contents.   All tools used must be constructed of a
non-sparking  material and electronic instruments
must be intrinsically safe.

All  sample locations should be  surveyed for  air
quality prior  to sampling.   At  no time  should
sampling continue with an LEL reading greater than
25%.
3.5     EQUIPMENT/APPARATUS

Storage tank materials include liquids, sludges, still
bottoms, and solids of various structures.  The type
of sampling equipment chosen should be compatible
with the waste. Samplers commonly used for tanks
include: the bacon bomb sampler, the sludge judge,
glass thief, bailer, COLIWASA, and subsurface grab
sampler.
        sampling plan
        safety equipment
        tape measure
        weighted tape line or equivalent
        camera/film
        stainless steel bucket or bowl
        sample containers
        Ziploc plastic bags
        logbook
        labels
        field data sheets
        chain  of custody forms
        flashlight (explosion proof)
        coolers
        ice
        decontamination supplies
        bacon bomb sampler
        sludge judge
        glass thief
        bailer
        COLIWASA
        subsurface grab sampler
        water/oil level indicator
        OVA (organic vapor analyzer or
        equivalent)
        cxplosimctcr/oxygcn meter
        high volume blower
3.6     REAGENTS

Reagents  are  not  typically  required  for   the
preservation of waste samples.  However, reagents
will be utilized for decontamination of equipment.
Decontamination solutions required are specified in
ERT    SOP   #2006,  Sampling   Equipment
Decontamination.
3.7     PROCEDURES

3.7.1   Preparation

1.   Determine  the extent of the sampling effort,
    the sampling methods to be employed, and
    which equipment and supplies are needed.

2.   Obtain  necessary sampling and  monitoring
    equipment.

3.   Decontaminate  or preclean equipment, and
    ensure that it is in working order.

4.   Prepare scheduling and  coordinate with staff,
    clients, and regulatory agency, if appropriate.

5.   Perform a general site survey prior to site entry
    in accordance with the site-specific health and
    safety plan.

6.   Identify and mark all sampling locations.

3.7.2  Preliminary Inspection

1.   Inspect the external structural characteristics of
    each  tank  and  record  in  the  site logbook.
    Potential sampling points should be evaluated
    for safety, accessibility, and sample quality.

2.   Prior to opening a tank for internal inspection,
    the tank sampling team should:

    •   Review safety procedures and emergency
        contingency plans with the Safety Officer,

    •   Ensure that the tank is properly grounded,

    •   Remove all  sources  of ignition from the
        immediate area.

3.  Each   tank  should   be  mounted  using
    appropriate means.   Remove manway covers
    using non-sparking tools.
                                                 14

-------
4.  Collect  air  quality  measurements for each
    potential   sample   location    using   an
    explosimeter/oxygen   meter  for  a  lower
    explosive  limit  (LEL/O2)  reading  and  an
    O VA/HNU for an organic vapor concentration.
    Both readings should be taken from the tank
    headspace, above the sampling port, and in  the
    breathing zone.

5.  Prior to sampling, the tank headspace should be
    cleared  of  any  toxic  or   explosive  vapor
    concentration using a high volume blower.  No
    work should start if LEL readings exceed 25%.
    At 10%  LEL,  work  can continue but with
    extreme  caution.

3.7.3   Sampling Procedures

1.  Determine the depth of any and all liquid-solid
    interface, and depth of sludge using a weighted
    tape  measure,   probe  line,  sludge judge,  or
    equivalent.

2.  Collect liquid samples from 1-foot below  the
    surface, from mid-depth of liquid, and from 1-
    foot above the bottom sludge layer. This  can
    be accomplished with a subsurface grab sampler
    or bacon bomb.  For liquids  less than 5-feet in
    depth, use  a glass thief  or COLIWASA to
    collect the sample.

    If sampling storage tanks, vacuum trucks, or
    process vessels, collect at least one sample from
    each compartment in the tank. Samples should
    always be collected through an opened hatch at
    the top of the tank.  Valves near  the bottom
    should   not   be  used,  because  of  their
    questionable or  unknown integrity. If  such a
    valve cannot be closed once opened, the entire
    tank  contents  may  be  lost  to  the  ground
    surface.    Also,  individual  strata  cannot  be
    sampled separately through  a valve near  the
    bottom.

3.  Compare the three samples for visual phase
    differences.  If   phase  differences  appear,
    systematic  iterative   sampling  should   be
    performed.  By halving the  distance between
    two discrete sampling points, one can determine
    the depth of the phase change.

4.  If another sampling port is available, sample as
    above to verify the phase information.
5.   Measure the outside diameter of the tank and
    determine the volume of wastes using the depth
    measurements.     (See  Appendix  C   for
    calculations.)

6.   Sludges can be collected using a bacon bomb
    sampler, glass thief, or sludge judge.

7.   Record all information  on  the sample  data
    sheet or site logbook.  Label the container with
    the appropriate sample tag.

8.   Decontaminate  sampling equipment as per
    ERT   SOP   #2006,  Sampling  Equipment
    Decontamination.

3.7.4  Sampling  Devices

Bacon Bomb Sampler

The bacon bomb sampler (Figure 9, Appendix B) is
designed to collect  material from various levels
within a storage tank.  It consists of a cylindrical
body, usually  made  of chrome-plated  brass and
bronze with an internal tapered plunger that acts as
a valve to admit the sample. A line attached to the
top of the plunger opens  and closes the valve.  A
line is attached to the removable top cover which
has a locking mechanism to keep the plunger closed
after sampling.

1.   Attach the sample line and the plunger line to
    the sampler.

2.   Measure and then mark the sampling line at
    the desired depth,

3.   Gradually lower  the bacon  bomb  sampler  by
    the sample  line until the  desired  level  is
    reached.

4.   When the desired level is reached,  pull up on
    the plunger line  and  allow the sampler to fill
    before releasing the plunger line to seal off the
    sampler.

5.   Retrieve the sampler by the sample line.  Be
    careful not to pull up on the plunger line and
    thereby prevent  accidental  opening  of  the
    bottom valve.

6.   Rinse or wipe off the exterior of the sampler
    body.
                                                15

-------
7.   Position the sampler over the sample container
    and release its contents by pulling up on  the
    plunger line.

8.   Cap  the sample  container tightly and  place
    prelabeled sample container in a carrier.

9.   Replace the bung or place plastic over the tank.

10. Log all samples in the site logbook and on field
    data sheets and label all samples.

11. Package  samples   and  complete  necessary
    paperwork.

12. Transport sample to decontamination zone to
    prepare  it for  transport  to  the  analytical
    laboratory.

Sludge Judge

A  sludge judge (Figure 10, Appendix B) is used for
obtaining  an accurate reading of solids which  can
settle,  in  any liquid, to any depth. The sampler
consists of 3/4-inch plastic pipe in 5-foot sections,
marked at   1-foot increments,  with  screw-style
fittings. The top section includes a nylon line for
raising the sampler.

1.   Lower the  sludge judge to the bottom  of the
    tank.

2.   When the bottom  has  been reached, and  the
    pipe has filled to  surface level, tug slightly on
    the rope as you begin  to raise the unit. This
    will seat the check valve, trapping the column of
    material.

3.   When the unit has been raised clear of the tank
    liquid, the amount of sludge in the sample  can
    be read using the 1-foot increments marked on
    the pipe  sections.

4.   By touching the pin extending from the bottom
    section against a hard  surface, the material is
    released  from the unit.

5.   Cap  the sample  container tightly and  place
    prelabeled  sample  container in a carrier.

6.   Replace the bung or place plastic over the tank.

7.   Log all samples in the site logbook and on field
    data sheets and label all samples.
8.   Package  samples  and  complete  necessary
    paperwork.

9.   Transport sample to  decontamination zone to
    prepare  it  for  transport  to the  analytical
    laboratory.

Subsurface Grab Sampler

Subsurface grab samplers (Figure 11, Appendix B)
are designed to collect samples of liquids at various
depths.   The sampler is  usually constructed of
aluminum  or  stainless   steel   tubing  with  a
polypropylene or Teflon head that attaches to a 1-
liter sample container.

1.   Screw  the  sample bottle onto the sampling
    head.

2.   Lower the sampler to the desired  depth.

3.   Pull the ring at the top which opens the spring-
    loaded plunger in the head assembly.

4.   When  the  bottle  is full,  release the ring, lift
    sampler,  and remove sample bottle.

5.   Cap the  sample  container  tightly and  place
    prelabeled  sample  container in a carrier.

6.   Replace the bung or place plastic over the tank.

7.   Log all samples in the site logbook and on field
    data sheets and label all samples.

8.   Package   samples  and  complete  necessary
    paperwork.

9.   Transport sample to decontamination zone to
    prepare  it  for  transport  to  the analytical
    laboratory.

Glass  Thief

The most widely used implement for sampling is a
glass  tube  commonly  referred  to as a glass  thief
(Figure 7, Appendix B).  This tool  is simple, cost
effective,  quick,  and   collects  a sample  without
having to decontaminate.  Glass thieves are typically
6mm  to 16mm  I.D. and 48 inches long.

1.   Remove  cover from sample container.

2.   Insert glass tubing almost to the bottom of the
                                                  16

-------
    tank  or until  a  solid  layer is encountered.
    About 1 foot of tubing should extend above the
    tank.

3.  Allow the waste in the tank to reach its natural
    level in the tube.

4.  Cap the top  of the sampling tube with  a
    tapered stopper or thumb, ensuring liquid does
    not come into contact with stopper.

5.  Carefully remove  the capped tube from  the
    tank and insert the uncapped end in the sample
    container. Do not spill liquid on the outside of
    the sample container.

6.  Release stopper and allow the glass  thief to
    drain until  the container is approximately  2/3
    full.

7.  Remove tube from the sample container, break
    it into pieces and  place the pieces in the tank.

8.  Cap the sample  container tightly and  place
    prelabeled sample container in a carrier.

9.  Replace the bung or place plastic over the tank.

10. Log all samples in the site logbook and on field
    data sheets and label all samples.

11. Package  samples  and   complete  necessary
    paperwork.

12. Transport sample to decontamination zone to
    prepare  it   for transport  to  the  analytical
    laboratory.

In many instances a tank containing  waste material
will have a sludge layer on  the bottom.  Slow
insertion of the  sample tube down  into this layer
and then a gradual withdrawal will allow the sludge
to act as a bottom  plug to maintain the fluid  in the
tube.  The plug can be gently removed and placed
into the sample container by the use of a stainless
steel lab spoon.

Bailer

The positive-displacement volatile sampling bailer
(manufactured by  GPI or equivalent) (Figure  12,
Appendix B) is perhaps  the most appropriate  for
collecting water samples for volatile analysis. Other
bailer types (messenger,  bottom fill, etc.)  are less
desirable, but may be  mandated by cost and site
conditions.   Generally,  bailers  can provide an
acceptable sample, providing that  the sampling
personnel use extra care in the collection process.

1.   Make sure clean plastic sheeting surrounds the
    tank.

2.   Attach a line to the bailer.

3.   Lower the bailer slowly and gently into the tank
    so as not to splash the  bailer  into the  tank
    contents.

4.   Allow the bailer to fill completely and retrieve
    the bailer from the tank.

5.   Begin slowly pouring from the bailer.

6.   Cap the sample  container  tightly  and place
    prelabeled sample container in a carrier.

7.   Replace the bung or place plastic over the tank.

8.   Log all samples in the site logbook and on field
    data sheets and label all samples.

9.   Package   samples   and  complete  necessary
    paperwork.

10. Transport sample to decontamination zone to
    prepare  it  for  transport  to   an  analytical
    laboratory.

COLIWASA

Some equipment is designed to  collect a sample
from the full depth of a tank and maintain it in the
transfer tube until delivery to the  sample  bottle.
These  designs  include  primarily  the  Composite
Liquid Waste Sampler  (COLIWASA)  (Figure 8,
Appendix B)  and  modifications  thereof.    The
COLIWASA  is a much cited sampler designed to
permit representative sampling of multiphase wastes
from tanks and  other containerized  wastes.  One
configuration consists of a 152  cm by  4 cm I.D.
section of tubing with a neoprene stopper  at one
end attached by a rod running  the  length  of the
tube to a locking mechanism  at the  other  end.
Manipulation of the locking mechanism  opens and
closes the  sampler by  raising and  lowering  the
neoprene stopper.
                                                 17

-------
The  major  drawbacks  associated  with using a
COLIWASA  concern  decontamination  and  costs.
The  sampler  is  difficult  if  not  impossible  to
decontaminate in the field and  its high cost in
relation to alternative procedures (glass tubes) make
it  an  impractical throwaway  item.  It still  has
applications, however, especially in instances where
a  true representation of  a  multiphase waste is
absolutely necessary.

1.   Put the sampler in the open position by placing
    the stopper rod handle in  the T-position  and
    pushing the  rod down until the handle  sits
    against  the sampler's locking block.

2.   Slowly lower the sampler into the liquid waste.
    Lower  the sampler at  a rate that permits the
    levels of the liquid inside and outside  the
    sampler tube to be about the same. If the level
    of the liquid  in the sample  tube  is lower than
    that outside the sampler, the sampling rate is
    too fast and will result in a non-representative
    sample.

3.   When the sampler stopper hits the  bottom of
    the waste container, push the  sampler  tube
    downward against  the stopper to  close  the
    sampler.   Lock the  sampler  in  the  closed
    position by  turning the T-handle  until  it is
    upright and one end  rests tightly on the locking
    block.

4.   Slowly  withdraw the sample from  the  waste
    container  with  one hand  while wiping  the
    sampler tube with a disposable cloth or rag with
    the other hand.

5.   Carefully discharge the sample  into a suitable
    sample container by slowly pulling the  lower
    end  of the T-handle  away from the locking
    block while the lower end of  the sampler is
    positioned in a sample container.

6.   Cap  the  sample container tightly  and place
    preiabcled sample container in  a carrier.

7.   Replace the bung or  place plastic over the tank.

8.   Log all samples  in the site logbook and on field
    d;ita  sheets and  label all samples.

9.   Package  samples  and  complete   necessary
    paperwork.

10. Transport sample to decontamination zone to
    prepare  it  for transport  to  the  analytical
    laboratory.

3.8    CALCULATIONS

Refer to Appendix C for calculations to determine
tank volumes.
3.9     QUALITY ASSURANCE/
        QUALITY CONTROL

There are no  specific quality assurance activities
which  apply  to  the  implementation  of  these
procedures.  However, the  following general QA
procedures apply:

    •   All data must be documented on field data
        sheets or within site logbooks.

    •   All  instrumentation must be operated in
        accordanqe with operating instructions as
        supplied  by  the  manufacturer,  unless
        otherwise  specified  in  the work  plan.
        Equipment   checkout   and  calibration
        activities   must   occur   prior   to
        sampling/operation  and  they must  be
        documented.
3.10   DATA VALIDATION

This section is not applicable to this SOP.


3.11   HEALTH AND SAFETY

When working with potentially hazardous materials,
follow  U.S.  EPA, OSHA,  and specific health and
safety procedures.   More specifically, the hazards
associated with tank sampling may cause bodily
injury,  illness, or death to  the worker.  Failure to
recognize potential  hazards of waste containers is
the cause of most accidents.  It should be assumed
that the most unfavorable conditions exist, and that
the danger  of explosion  and poisoning will be
present.  Hazards specific to tank sampling are:

     •   Hazardous atmospheres can be flammable,
        toxic, asphyxiating, or corrosive.

     •   If   activating  electrical  or  mechanical
        equipment would cause injury, each  piece
        of equipment should  be  manually isolated
                                                 18

-------
to  prevent inadvertent activation  while
workers are occupied.

Communication is  of utmost importance
between  the  sampling  worker  and  the
standby person to prevent distress or injury
going  unnoticed.     The   Illuminating
Engineers  Society  Lighting  Handbook
requires  suitable illumination to  provide
sufficient visibility for work.

Noise  reverberation  may  disrupt verbal
communication with standby personnel.
Tank vibration may affect  multiple body
parts and organs of the sampler depending
on vibration characteristics.

General hazards include falling scaffolding,
surface   residues   (which  could   cause
electrical  shock,  incompatible  material
reactions, slips, or  falls), and  structural
objects    (including  baffles/trays   in
horizontal/vertical  tanks,  and  overhead
structures).
                                           19

-------
           4.0   CHIP, WIPE, AND SWEEP SAMPLING:   SOP #2011
4.1    SCOPE AND APPLICATION

This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) outlines
the recommended  protocol and  equipment for
collection of representative  chip, wipe, and sweep
samples   to   monitor   potential   surficial
contamination.

This method of sampling is appropriate for surfaces
contaminated  with non-volatile species of analytes
(i.e., PCB,  PCDD, PCDF,  metals, cyanide, etc.)
Detection limits are analyte specific.  Sample size
should be determined based  upon the detection
limit desired and the amount of sample requested
by the analytical laboratory.  Typical sample area is
1 square  foot.   However,  based  upon sampling
location, the area may need modification due to
area configuration.
4.2     METHOD SUMMARY

Since surface situations vary widely, no universal
sampling method can be recommended.  Rather,
the method and implements used must be tailored
to suit  a  specific sampling  site.   The sampling
location should be selected based upon the potential
for contamination as a  result  of  manufacturing
processes or personnel practices.

Chip sampling is appropriate for porous surfaces
and is generally accomplished with either a hammer
and chisel, or an electric hammer.  The sampling
device should be laboratory cleaned and wrapped in
clean, autoclaved aluminum foil until ready for use.
To collect the sample, a measured and marked  off
area is chipped both horizontally and vertically to an
even depth  of 1/8  inch.   The sample is then
transferred to the proper sample container.

Wipe samples are collected from smooth surfaces to
indicate surficial contamination;  a sample location
is measured  and marked off.  Sampling personnel
wear a new pair of surgical gloves to open a sterile
gauze pad, and then soak it with  solvent.  The
solvent  used  is dependent on the  surface being
sampled. This pad is then stroked firmly over the
sample surface, first vertically, then horizontally, to
ensure  complete coverage.   The  pad is then
transferred to the sample container.
Sweep  sampling is an effective  method for the
collection of dust  or  residue on porous or non-
porous surfaces.   To collect such a sample,  an
appropriate area is measured off.  Then, while
wearing a new pair of disposable surgical gloves,
sampling personnel use a dedicated brush to sweep
material into a dedicated dust pan.  The sample is
then transferred to the proper sample container.

Samples collected by all three methods are sent to
the laboratory for analysis.
4.3    SAMPLE PRESERVATION,
       CONTAINERS, HANDLING, AND
       STORAGE

Samples should be stored out of direct sunlight to
reduce photodegredation and shipped on ice (4ฐC)
to  the  laboratory  performing  the  analysis.
Appropriately-sized,   laboratory-cleaned,   glass
sample jars should be used for sample collection.
The amount of sample required  is determined in
concert with the analytical laboratory.
4.4     INTERFERENCES AND
        POTENTIAL PROBLEMS

This method has few significant interferences or
problems.   Typical problems  result  from  rough
porous surfaces which may be difficult to wipe, chip,
or sweep.
4.5     EQUIPMENT/APPARATUS
       lab-clean sample containers of proper size
       and composition
       field and travel blanks
       site logbook
       sample analysis  request forms
       chain of custody forms
       custody seals
       sample labels
       disposable surgical gloves
       sterile wrapped  gauze pad (3 in. x 3 in.)
       appropriate pesticide (HPLC) grade solvent
                                              21

-------
    •   medium-sized,  laboratory-cleaned  paint
        brush
        medium-sized, laboratory-cleaned chisel
        autoclaved aluminum foil
        camera
        hexane (pesticide/HPLC grade)
        iso-octane
        distilled/deionized water
4.6     REAGENTS

Reagents are not required for preservation of chip,
wipe or sweep samples. However, reagents will be
utilized for decontamination of sampling equipment.
Decontamination solutions are specified in  ERT
SOP #2006, Sampling Equipment Decontamination.
4.7     PROCEDURES

4.7.1   Preparation

1.   Determine the extent of the sampling effort, the
    sampling methods to be  employed, and the
    types and amounts of equipment and supplies
    needed.

2.   Obtain  necessary sampling  and  monitoring
    equipment.

3.   Decontaminate  or  preclean  equipment,  and
    ensure that it is  in working order.

4.   Prepare  scheduling  and coordinate with staff,
    clients, and regulatory agencies, if appropriate.

5.   Perform a general site survey prior to site entry
    in accordance with the site-specific health and
    safety plan.

6.   Mark all sampling locations.  If required, the
    proposed locations may be adjusted based on
    site access,  property boundaries, and surface
    obstructions.

4.7.2   Chip Sample Collection

Sampling   of  porous   surfaces   is  generally
accomplished by using  a chisel  and hammer or
electric  hammer.  The sampling device should be
laboratory cleaned or field decontaminated as per
ERT SOP#  2006,  Sampling  Equipment  Decon-
tamination.   It  is  then  wrapped  in  cleaned,
autoclaved  aluminum  foil.   The sampler should
remain in this wrapping until it is needed.  Each
sampling device should be used for only one sample.

1.   Choose appropriate sampling points; measure
    off the designated area and photo document.

2.   To facilitate later calculations, record surface
    area to be chipped.

3.   Don a new pair of disposable surgical gloves.

4.   Open a laboratory-cleaned chisel or equivalent
    sampling device.

5.   Chip  the  sample  area  horizontally,  then
    vertically to an even depth of approximately 1/8
    inch.

6.   Place the sample in an appropriately-prepared
    sample container with a Teflon-lined cap.

7.   Cap the sample container, attach the label and
    custody seal, and place in a double plastic bag.
    Record all pertinent data in the site logbook.
    Complete the sampling analysis  request form
    and chain of custody form before taking the
    next  sample.

8.   Store samples out of direct sunlight and cool to
    4ฐC.

9.   Leave  contaminated sampling  device in the
    sampled  material,  unless decontamination  is
    practical.

10. Follow  proper  decontamination procedures,
    then deliver sample(s)  to the laboratory  for
    analysis.

4.7.3  Wipe Sample Collection

Wipe sampling is accomplished by using a sterile
gauze  pad,  adding  a  solvent  in  which the
contaminant  is most soluble, then  wiping a pre-
determined, pre-measured area.   The sample  is
packaged   in   an   amber   jar   to   prevent
photodegradation  and  packed  in   coolers  for
shipment to the  lab.   Each  gauze pad is used for
only one wipe sample.

1.   Choose appropriate sampling points;  measure
    off the designated area and photo document.
                                                22

-------
2.  To facilitate later calculations, record  surface
    area to be wiped.

3.  Don a new pair of disposable surgical gloves.

4.  Open new sterile package of gauze pad.

5.  Soak the pad with the appropriate solvent.

6.  Wipe the  marked  surface  area using firm
    strokes.   Wipe vertically, then horizontally to
    ensure complete  surface coverage.

7.  Place the  gauze  pad  in   an  appropriately
    prepared sample container with a Teflon-lined
    cap.

8.  Cap the sample container, attach the label and
    custody seal, and place in a double plastic bag.
    Record all  pertinent  data in the  site logbook.
    Complete the sampling  analysis request form
    and chain of custody form before  taking the
    next sample.

9.  Store samples out of direct sunlight and cool to
    4ฐC.

10. Follow proper  decontamination procedures,
    then deliver  sample(s)  to the laboratory for
    analysis.

4.7.4  Sweep Sample Collection

Sweep   sampling   is   appropriate   for   bulk
contamination.  This procedure utilizes a dedicated,
hand-held sweeper brush  to acquire a sample from
a pre-measured area.

1.  Choose appropriate sampling points; measure
    off the designated area and photo document.

2.  To  facilitate later  calculations, record  the
    surface area to be swept.

3.  Don  a new pair of disposable surgical gloves.

4.  Sweep the  measured area using a dedicated
    brush; collect the sample in a dedicated dust
    pan.

5.  Transfer  sample  from   dust  pan to  sample
    container.

6.  Cap the sample container, attach the label and
    custody seal, and place in a double plastic bag.
    Record all pertinent data in the site logbook.
    Complete the sampling analysis request form
    and chain of custody form before  taking the
    next sample.

7.  Store samples out of direct sunlight and cool to
    4ฐC.

8.  Leave  contaminated  sampling device in  the
    sample material, unless decontamination  is
    practical.

9.  Follow proper  decontamination procedures,
    then deliver sample(s)  to the laboratory for
    analysis.
4.8    CALCULATIONS

Results are usually  provided  in  mg/g, pg/g or
another  appropriate weight   per  unit  weight
measurement.  Results may also be given in a mass
per unit area.
4.9    QUALITY ASSURANCE/
        QUALITY CONTROL

The following general quality assurance procedures
apply:

    •   All data must be documented on standard
        chain of custody forms, field data sheets or
        within the site logbook.

    •   All instrumentation  must be operated in
        accordance  with operating instructions as
        supplied  by  the   manufacturer,  unless
        otherwise  specified  in  the  work plan.
        Equipment   checkout   and   calibration
        activities   must   occur   prior   to
        sampling/operation,  and they  must  be
        documented.

The following specific quality  assurance activities
apply to wipe samples:

    •   A  blank should be collected  for  each
        sampling event.  This consists of a sterile
        gauze  pad,  wet  with  the  appropriate
        solvent,  and placed in  a prepared  sample
        container.   The blank will help identify
        potential introduction of contaminants via
                                                23

-------
        the sampling methods, the pad, solvent or       4.10   DATA VALIDATION
        sample container.
                                                     Review the quality control samples and use the data
    •   Spiked wipe samples can also be collected       to qualify the environmental results.
        to better assess the data being generated.
        These are  prepared by spiking a  piece of
        foil of known area with a standard of the       411   HEALTH AND  SAFETY
        analyte of  choice.  The solvent containing
        the standard is allowed to evaporate, and       when wofking ^ potentiaily hazardous materials,
        the foil is  wiped in a manner identical to       foUow  y s  EpA> QSHA and    ^ heakh and
        the other wipe samples.                        safcty procedures.

Specific quality assurance activities  for chip and
sweep  samples should be determined  on a site-
specific basis.
                                                 24

-------
                    5.0   WASTE  PILE  SAMPLING:   SOP #2017
5.1     SCOPE AND APPLICATION

The objective of this Standard Operating Procedure
(SOP) is to outline the equipment and methods
used in collecting representative samples from waste
piles, sludges or other solid or liquid waste mixed
with  soil.
5.2    METHOD SUMMARY

Stainless steel shovels or scoops should be used to
clear  away surface material before  samples are
collected.  For samples at depth, a decontaminated
auger may be required to advance the hole, then
another decontaminated auger used  for sample
collection.   For a sample core,  thin-wall  tube
samplers or grain samplers may  be  used.   Near
surfaces samples can  be collected with a clean
stainless steel spoon or trowel.

All samples collected,  except those  for volatile
organic analysis, should  be  placed into a Teflon-
lined  or stainless steel pail and mixed thoroughly
before being transferred  to an appropriate sample
container.
5.3    SAMPLE PRESERVATION,
        CONTAINERS, HANDLING, AND
        STORAGE

Chemical preservation of solids is  generally  not
recommended. Refrigeration to 4ฐC is usually the
best approach, supplemented by a minimal holding
time.

Wide mouth glass containers with Teflon-lined caps
are typically used for waste pile samples.  Sample
volume  required is a  function of the analytical
requirements  and should be  specified in the work
plan.
5.4    INTERFERENCES AND
       POTENTIAL PROBLEMS

There  are  several variables  involved in  waste
sampling,  including  shape  and  size  of  piles,
compactness, and structure of the waste material.
Shape and size of waste material or waste piles vary
greatly in areal extent and height. Since state  and
federal regulations often require a specified number
of samples per  volume of waste, size  and  shape
must be used to calculate volume and to plan for
the correct number of samples. Shape must also be
accounted for when planning physical access  to the
sampling point and when selecting the appropriate
equipment to successfully collect the sample at that
location.

Material  to be sampled may be homogeneous or
heterogeneous.  Homogeneous material resulting
from known situations may not require an extensive
sampling protocol. Heterogeneous  and unknown
wastes require more extensive sampling and analysis
to ensure the  different  components  are  being
represented.

The term "representative sample" is commonly used
to denote a sample that  has the properties and
composition  of the population from which it was
collected, in  the same proportions as found in  the
population.  This can be misleading unless one is
dealing with  a homogenous waste from  which one
sample can represent the whole population.

The  usual   options  for  obtaining   the  most
"representative sample" from waste piles  are simple
or stratified  random  sampling.  Simple random
sampling is the method  of choice unless (1) there
are known distinct strata; (2) one wants to prove or
disprove that there are distinct strata; or (3) one is
limited in the number of samples and  desires to
minimize the size of a  "hot  spot" that  could go
unsampled.   If  any of  these  conditions  exist,
stratified  random  sampling  would be  the better
strategy.

This strategy, however, can be employed only if all
points within the pile can be accessed.   In such
cases, the pile  should be  divided into a three-
dimensional grid system; the grid sections assigned
numbers; and the sampling  points  chosen  using
random-number   tables   or   random-number
generators.    The only  exceptions   to  this  are
situations in which representative samples cannot be
collected safely or where the  investigative team is
trying to determine worst-case conditions.
                                               25

-------
If sampling is limited to certain portions of the pile,
a statistically based sample will be representative
only  of  that  portion,  unless  the   waste   is
homogenous.
5.5     EQUIPMENT/APPARATUS

Waste pile solids include powdered, granular, or
block materials of various sizes, shapes, structure,
and  compactness.  The type of sampler chosen
should  be compatible  with the  waste.  Samplers
commonly used for waste piles include:  stainless
steel scoops, shovels', trowels, spoons, and stainless
steel hand  augers, sampling  triers,  and grain
samplers.

Waste pile sampling equipment check list:
        sampling plan
        maps/plot plan
        safety equipment, as specified in the health
        and safety plan
        compass
        tape measure
        survey stakes or flags
        camera and film
        stainless steel, plastic, or other appropriate
        homogenization bucket or bowl
        1-quart mason jars w/Teflon liners
        Ziploc plastic bags
        logbook
        labels
        chain of custody forms and seals
        field data sheets
        cooler(s)
        ice
        decontamination supplies/equipment
        canvas or plastic sheet
        spade or shovel
        spatula
        scoop
        plastic or stainless  steel spoons
        trowel
        continuous flight (screw) auger
        bucket auger
        post hole auger
        extension rods
        T-handle
        thin-wall tube sampler
        sampling trier
        grain sampler
5.6     REAGENTS

No chemical reagents are used for the preservation
of waste pile samples;  however, decontamination
solutions may be required.  If decontamination of
equipment  is required,  refer to  ERT Standard
Operating  Procedure  (SOP)  #2006,  Sampling
Equipment Decontamination, and  the site-specific
work plan.
5.7     PROCEDURES

5.7.1   Preparation

1.   Determine  the extent  of the sampling effort,
    the sampling methods to  be employed, and
    which equipment and supplies are required.

2.   Obtain  necessary sampling  and  monitoring
    equipment.

3.   Decontaminate  or preclean  equipment, and
    ensure that it is in working order.

4.   Prepare schedules, and coordinate with staff,
    client, and regulatory agencies, if appropriate.

5.   Perform a general site survey prior to site entry
    in accordance with the site-specific health and
    safety plan.

6.   Use stakes  or flagging  to identify and mark all
    sampling  locations.    Specific  site  factors,
    including extent  and nature  of  contaminants,
    should be  considered  when  selecting sample
    locations.  If required, the proposed locations
    may be adjusted based on site access, property
    boundaries, and surface obstructions.

5.7.2  Sample Collection

SAMPLING  WITH SHOVELS AND
SCOOPS

Collection of samples from surface portions of the
pile can be accomplished with tools such as spades,
shovels, and scoops.   Surface  material  can be
removed to the  required depth with this equipment,
then a stainless steel or plastic scoop  can be used to
collect the  sample.

Accurate, representative samples can be collected
with this  procedure depending on  the  care and
                                                26

-------
precision demonstrated by sample team members.
Use of a flat, pointed mason trowel to cut a block
of  the  desired material can  be  helpful  when
undisturbed profiles are required. A stainless steel
scoop, lab  spoon,  or plastic spoon  will suffice in
most other applications.  Care should  be exercised
to avoid the use of devices plated with chrome or
other materials. Plating is particularly common with
implements such as garden trowels.

Use the following procedure  to collect  surface
samples:

1.  Carefully remove the top layer  of material to
    the  desired sample depth  with a precleaned
    spade.

2.  Using a precleaned stainless steel scoop, plastic
    spoon,  or trowel, remove and  discard a thin
    layer of material from the area which came in
    contact with the spade.

3.  If volatile organic analysis is to  be performed,
    transfer the sample into an appropriate, labeled
    sample  container  with  a  stainless steel  lab
    spoon,  plastic lab spoon,  or equivalent and
    secure  the cap tightly. Place the remainder of
    the  sample  into a stainless  steel, plastic,  or
    other  appropriate  homogenization container,
    and mix  thoroughly  to  obtain a homogenous
    sample representative of the entire sampling
    interval.  Then, either place the  sample into
    appropriate, labeled containers and secure  the
    caps tightly, or, if composite samples are to be
    collected,   place  a  sample  from   another
    sampling  interval  into  the  homogenization
    container   and  mix   thoroughly.    When
    compositing is complete, place the sample into
    appropriate, labeled containers and secure  the
    caps tightly.

SAMPLING WITH AUGERS AND THIN-
WALL TUBE SAMPLERS

This system  consists of  an auger,  a series  of
extensions,  a T"  handle,   and a  thin-wall tube
sampler (Figure 13, Appendix  B).  The auger is
used to bore a hole to a desired sampling depth,
and  is then  withdrawn.    The sample  may  be
collected directly from the auger.  If a  core sample
is to be collected, the auger tip is then replaced with
a  thin-wall  tube sampler.   The system  is then
lowered down the borehole, and driven into the pile
at the completion depth.  The system is withdrawn
and  the  core collected  from the  thin-wall  tube
sampler.

Several  augers  are  available.   These  include:
bucket, continuous flight (screw),  and  post  hole
augers. Bucket augers are better for direct sample
recovery  since they  provide  a  large  volume  of
sample in a short time.   When continuous flight
augers are  used, the sample can be  collected
directly from the flights, which are usually at 5-foot
intervals.    The  continuous flight  augers  are
satisfactory  for  use  when  a  composite of  the
complete waste pile column is desired.  Post hole
augers have limited utility for sample collection as
they are  designed to  cut through fibrous, rooted,
swampy areas.

Use the  following procedure for collecting waste
pile samples with the  auger:

1.  Attach the auger bit to a drill  rod  extension,
    and attach the "T" handle to the drill rod.

2.  Clear the area to be sampled  of any surface
    debris.  It may be advisable to remove the first
    3 to  6 inches of  surface material for an  area
    approximately 6  inches  in  radius around  the
    drilling location.

3.  Begin  augering,  periodically   removing  and
    depositing accumulated materials onto a plastic
    sheet spread  near the  hole.   This prevents
    accidental  brushing  of  loose  material back
    down the borehole when removing the auger or
    adding drill rods.  It also facilitates refilling the
    hole, and  avoids possible contamination of the
    surrounding area.

4.  After reaching the desired depth, slowly and
    carefully remove the auger from boring. When
    sampling directly from the auger, collect sample
    after the  auger is removed from boring and
    proceed to Step 10.

5.  Remove auger tip from  drill rods and replace
    with  a  precleaned  thin-wall   tube  sampler.
    Install proper cutting tip.

6.  Carefully  lower the  tube sampler  down  the
    borehole.   Gradually force the tube  sampler
    into  the pile.  Care should be  taken  to avoid
    scraping the borehole sides. Avoid hammering-**--
    the   drill  rods  to  facilitate  coring as  the
    vibrations  may   cause  the  boring  walls  to
    collapse.
                                                 27

-------
7.   Remove the tube sampler, and unscrew the drill
    rods.

8.   Remove  the  cutting tip  and the  core  from
    device.

9.   Discard the top of the core (approximately 1-
    inch),  as  this represents material collected
    before penetration  of the  layer of  concern.
    Place the remaining core into the appropriate
    labeled   sample  container.      Sample
    homogenization is not required.

10.  If volatile organic analysis is to be performed,
    transfer the sample into an appropriate, labeled
    sample  container  with  a stainless steel  lab
    spoon, plastic lab spoon, or equivalent and
    secure the cap tightly.  Place the remainder of
    the sample into a stainless steel,  plastic,  or
    other appropriate  homogenization container,
    and mix  thoroughly to obtain  a  homogenous
    sample representative  of the entire sampling
    interval.  Then, either place the sample into
    appropriate, labeled containers and secure the
    caps tightly; or, if composite samples are to be
    collected,   place   a  sample  from  another
    sampling  interval  into   the  homogenization
    container   and  mix   thoroughly.     When
    compositing is complete, place the sample into
    appropriate, labeled containers and secure the
    caps tightly.

11.  If another sample is to be collected in the same
    hole, but at a  greater depth, reattach the auger
    bit to the drill and assembly, and follow steps 3
    through 11, making sure to  decontaminate the
    auger and tube sampler between samples.

SAMPLING WITH A TRIER

This system consists of a  trier  and a T" handle.
The auger is driven into the waste pile and used to
extract a core sample  from the appropriate depth.

Use the following procedure to collect waste  pile
samples with a sampling trier:

1.   Insert the trier (Figure  14, Appendix B)  into
    the material to be sampled at a 0ฐ to 45ฐ angle
    from  horizontal.   This orientation minimizes
    spillage  of the  sample.    Extraction  of  the
    samples  might require  tilting of the sample
    containers.
2.   Rotate the trier once or twice to cut a core of
    material.

3.   Slowly withdraw the trier, making sure that the
    slot is facing upward.

4.   If volatile organic analysis is to be performed,
    transfer the sample into an appropriate, labeled
    sample  container  with  a stainless  steel  lab
    spoon, plastic lab spoon, or equivalent and
    secure the cap tightly. Place the remainder of
    the sample into a  stainless steel,  plastic,  or
    other appropriate  homogenization container,
    and mix thoroughly to obtain a homogenous
    sample  representative of the entire sampling
    interval.   Then, either place the sample into
    appropriate, labeled containers and secure the
    caps tightly; or, if composite samples are being
    collected,  place  samples  from the   other
    sampling  intervals  into  the  homogenization
    container  and  mix  thoroughly.     When
    compositing is complete, place the sample into
    appropriate, labeled containers and secure the
    caps tightly.

SAMPLING WITH A GRAIN SAMPLER

The grain sampler (Figure 15, Appendix B)  is used
for sampling powdered or  granular  wastes  or
materials  in   bags,  fiberdrums,  sacks,   similar
containers or piles.  This sampler is most useful
when the  solids are no greater than 0.6 cm (1/4
inch)  in diameter.

This  sampler consists  of two slotted telescoping
brass or stainless steel tubes.  The outer tube has a
conical, pointed tip at one end that permits the
sampler to penetrate the material being sampled.
The sampler is opened and closed by rotating the
inner tube.  Grain samplers are generally 61 to 100
cm (24 to 40 inch) long by 1.27 to 2.54 cm  (1/2 to
1 inch) in diameter and are commercially available
at laboratory supply houses.

Use the following procedures to collect  waste pile
samples with a grain sampler:

1.  With the sampler in the closed position, insert
    it into the granular or powdered material or
    waste being sampled from a point near a top
    edge  or corner, through the center, and to a
    point diagonally opposite the point of entry.
                                                  28

-------
2.  Rotate the sampler inner tube into the open
    position.

3.  Wiggle the  sampler  a  few  times to  allow
    material to enter the open slots.

4.  With  the  sampler  in  the closed position,
    withdraw it from the material being sampled.

5.  Place the sampler in a horizontal position with
    the slots facing upward.

6.  Rotate the outer tube and slide it  away from
    the inner tube.

7.  If volatile organic analysis is to be  performed,
    transfer the sample into an appropriate, labeled
    sample container with  a stainless steel lab
    spoon,  plastic  lab spoon, or  equivalent and
    secure the  cap tightly. Place the remainder of
    the  sample into a  stainless steel,  plastic, or
    other  appropriate homogenization container,
    and mix thoroughly to obtain  a homogenous
    sample representative of the entire sampling
    interval. Then, either  place the sample into
    appropriate, labeled containers and secure the
    caps tightly; or, if composite samples are to be
    collected,  place  a  sample  from  another
    sampling   interval into   the  homogenization
    container  and   mix  thoroughly.     When
    compositing is complete, place the sample into
    appropriate, labeled containers and secure the
    caps tightly.
5.9    QUALITY ASSURANCE/
        QUALITY CONTROL

There are no  specific quality assurance activities
which  apply  to  the  implementation  of these
procedures. However, the following QA procedures
apply:

    •   All data must be documented on field data
        sheets or within site logbooks.

    •   All instrumentation must  be  operated in
        accordance with operating instructions as
        supplied   by   the  manufacturer,   unless
        otherwise specified  in  the  work plan.
        Equipment  checkout   and   calibration
        activities   must   occur   prior   to
        sampling/operation,  and  they  must  be
        documented.
5.10   DATA VALIDATION

This section is not applicable to this SOP.


5.11   HEALTH AND  SAFETY

When working with potentially hazardous materials,
follow U.S. EPA, OSHA and specific health  and
safety procedures.
5.8     CALCULATIONS

This  section is not applicable to this SOP.
                                               29

-------
   APPENDIX A



Drum Data Sheet Form
        31

-------
                                     Drum  Data Sheet Form

                                          SOP  #2009
Drum ID#:	                        Date Sampled:

Estimated Liquid Quantity:	                        Time:	

Grid Location:' 	
Staging Location:

Sampler's Name:

Drum Condition:

Sampling Device:
Physical Appearance of the Drum/Bulk Contents:

Odor:  	

Color:  	
pH:  	  % Liquid:
Laboratory                                                            Date of Analysis:
Analytical Data:  	
Compatibility:

Ha/ard:  	
Waste ID:
Treatment Disposal Recommendations:
Approval

Lab: 	                            Dale:

Site Manager:  	                            Dale:
* Area ol site where drum was originally located.
Based  on  di  Napoli,  I')S2.   Table oiiginally  printed in the Proceeding;* of llic  National  (.'onletcncc on
Management  of Uncontrolled ll.i/ardous  Waslc Sites,  I'>S2.  Available fiotn  ll.i/.irdous Mjleti.il> Control
Research Inslilule, 
-------
APPENDIX B




   Figures
     35

-------
Figure 1:  Universal Bung Wrench



         SOP #2009
              36

-------
Figure 2: Drum Deheader



      SOP #2009
           37

-------
             Figure 3:  Hand Pick, Pickaxe, and Hand Spike



                          SOP #2009
HAND PICK
                                                 PICKAXE
                                HAND SPIKE
                              38

-------
Figure 4:  Backhoe Spike



      SOP #2009
          39

-------
Figure 5:  Hydraulic Drum Opener



         SOP #2009
              40

-------
Figure 6: Pneumatic Bung Remover



          SOP #2009
               41

-------
                           Figure 7: Glass Thief

                                SOP# 2009
Insert  open  tube  (thief)  sampler
in containerized  liquid.
 3.
 Cover top  of  sampler  with gloved
 thumb.
 4.
Remove   open  tube  (thief)  sampler
from  containerized liquid.
Place open tube  sampler over
appropriate sample bottle and
remove gloved thumb.
                                     42

-------
                                  Figures:  COLIWASA

                                       SOP #2009
    T handle
                    loT
Locking block
    Stopper
                        6.35  cm<2MO
                        152
                                                    — 2.86
                                                      17.8  cn(7')
                                                  I	I
                                                            10.16 cn<4'>
                                                              Pipe, PVC,  translucent
                                                              4.13 end3/*') I.D.,
                                                              4.26 cn  O.D.
                                                              Stopper, neoprene, tt9,  tapered,
                                                              0.95 cnC3/8'> PVC lock nut
                                                              and washer
          SAMPLING  POSITION
CLOSED  POSITION
                                            43

-------
Figure 9: Bacon Bomb Sampler



        SOP #2010
             44

-------
Figure 10:  Sludge Judge



      SOP #2010
          45

-------
Figure 11: Subsurface Grab Sampler



           SOP #2010
      0   0
                    PM
                  CD CD
               46

-------
       Figure 12: Bailer

         SOP #2010
       STAINLESS WIRE
       CABLE
       1-1/4"  O.D.XTl.D.TEFLON
       EXTRUDED TUBING,
       18 TO  36"  LONG
r^Ui— 3/4"  DIAMETER
       GLASS  OR TEFLON

       1"  DIAMETER TEFLON
       EXTRUDED ROD
    5/16"  DIAMETER
    HOLE
            47

-------
    Figure 13:  Sampling Augers

         SOP #2017
                U
 TUBE
AUGER
BUCKET
 AUGER
             48

-------
   Figure 14:  Sampling Trier



         SOP #2017
8?
to
                L-— 1.27-2.
54 cm
              49

-------
Figure 15:  Grain Sampler

       SOP #2017

;
>1-1
(2V
\
,
30 cm
-40")

a
N.
J
^
J
"\
J
V
                   1.27-2.54 cm
                     (1/2-1')
            50

-------
APPENDIX C



 Calculations
    51

-------
                          Various Volume Calculations

                                 SOP #2010
        SPHERE
            ELLIPTICAL CONTAINER
ANY RECTANGULAR CONTAINER
       ,^\T
 Total Volume
 V=1/6 7TD3  =0.523498D3
 Partial Volume
 V=1/3 nd2  (3/2 D-d)
L
   B
H
     — b
                              Total Volume
                              V= ^BDH
                              Partial Volume
                              V=
TRIANGULAR CONTAINER
    Total Volume
     V=1/2 HBL
                               r
                r
                              Case 1
                           Partial Volume
                            V=1/2 hBL
                                             Case 2
                                          Partial  Volume
                                         V=1/2 L(HB-hB)
                                                                        7>\  H
                                                                          r— W
                                             Total Volume
                                             V=HLW
                                             Partial Volume
                                             V=hl_W
                                                             RIGHT CYLINDER
          Total  Volume
          V=1/47vD2 H

          Partial Volume
          V=1/47vD2 h
                                      52

-------
            Various Volume Calculations (Cont'd)
      FRUSTUM OF  A  CONE
  Case  1                   Case 2
            CONE
Case 1                  Case 2
     PARABOLIC  CONTAINER
. n .1
D -|
/
\^_^y
— b —
hH
PS
\
— B— j
1
" — 	 L - -• •• -mj


Total Volume
V=2/3 HDL


,

rh
t
1 i
rh
i
u
1 1

                                                  Fatal Volume
                                                         2
V= rr/12 H(D,2 -D,
                                                  Partial Volume
                                     ~f~    V= TV/12 h(D? -rD, d+d2)
      Total Volume
      V= 7T/12-D2H

  Partial Volume Cose 1
      V= 7T/12-d2h
  Partial Volume Case  2
    V= 7T/12-(D2H-d2h)
                                                     Case 1
                                                  Partial  Volume
                                                          hdL
                                                     Case 2
                                                  Partial  Volume
                                                 V=2/3 (HD-hd)-L
                           53

-------
                                          References
Illuminating Engineers Society. 1984.  IES Lighting Handbook.  New York, NY.  eds. John E. Kaufman and
        Jack Christensen. (2 volumes).

National Institute for Safety and Health.  October 1985. Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for
        Hazardous Waste Site Activities.

New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection, Division of Hazardous Site Mitigation.  1988.  Field
        Sampling Procedures Manual.

U.S. EPA.  1985.   Guidance  Document for Cleanup of Surface Tank and  Drum  Sites.  OSWER Directive
        9380.0-3.  NT IS Ref:  PB-87-110-72.

U.S. EPA. 1986.  Drum Handling Practices at Hazardous Waste Sites. EPA/600/2-86/013.

U. S. EPA/Region IV, Environmental Services Division. April 1, 1986.  Engineering Support Branch Standard
        Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Manual.  Athens, Georgia.

U.S. EPA/OSWER. November, 1986. Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Third Edition, Vol. II, Field
        Manual. EPA Docket SW-846.

U.S. EPA.  1987.  A Compendium of Superfund Field Operations Methods.  EPA/540/5-87/001.  Office of
        Emergency and Remedial Response. Washington, D.C. 20460.
•U.S. Government Printing Office: 1991 — 548-187/40582                55

-------
           APPENDIX C
Compendium of ERT Soil Sampling and
   Surface Geophysics Procedures

-------
                                                 EPA7540/P-91/006
                                            OSWER Directive 9360.4-02
                                                     January 1991
COMPENDIUM OF ERT SOIL SAMPLING AND
    SURFACE GEOPHYSICS PROCEDURES
               Sampling Equipment Decontamination

               Soil Sampling

               Soil Gas Sampling

               General Surface Geophysics
                        Interim Final
                  Environmental Response Team
                  Emergency Response Dhision
              Office of Emergency and Remedial Response
                U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
                    Washington, DC 20460
                                              Printed on Recycled Paper

-------
                                              Notice
This document has been reviewed in accordance with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency policy and approved
for publication.   Mention  of trade  names or  commercial products  does not constitute endorsement  or
recommendation for use.

The policies and procedures estabb'shed in this document are intended  solely for the guidance of government
personnel for use in the Superfund Removal Program.  They are not intended, and cannot  be relied upon, to
create any rights, substantive or procedural, enforceable by any party in litigation with the United States. The
Agency reserves the right to act at variance with these policies and procedures and to change them at any time
without public notice.

Depending on circumstances and needs, it may not be possible or appropriate to follow these  procedures exactly
in all situations  due  to site conditions, equipment limitations,  and limitations of the  standard procedures.
Whenever these procedures cannot be followed as written, they may be  used as general guidance with any and
all modifications fully documented in  either QA Plans, Sampling Plans,  or final reports of results.

Each Standard Operating Procedure  in this compendium contains  a discussion on quality assurance/quality
control  (QA/QC).  For more information on  QA/QC objectives and requirements,  refer to the Quality
Assurance/Quality Control Guidance for Removal Activities, OSWER directive 9360.4-01, EPA/540/G-90/004.

Questions, comments, and recommendations are  welcomed regarding the Compendium of ERT Soil Sampling
and Surface Geophysics Procedures.  Send remarks to:

                                       Mr. William A. Coakley
                                  Removal Program QA Coordinator
                                          U.S.  EPA - ERT
                                 Raritan Depot  - Building 18, MS-101
                                      2890 Woodbridge Avenue
                                        Edison, NJ 08837-3679

For additional copies of the Compendium of ERT Soil Sampling and Surface Geophysics Procedures, please
contact:

                             National Technical Information Service  (NTIS)
                                    U.S. Department of Commerce
                                        5285  Port Royal Road
                                        Springfield, VA 22161
                                           (703) 487-4600

-------
                                      Table of Contents

Section                                                                                      Page

i.o     SAMPLING EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION: SOP #2006

        1.1     Scope and Application                                                             1
        1.2     Method Summary                                                                 1
        1.3     Sample Preservation, Containers, Handling, and Storage                                1
        1.4     Interferences and Potential Problems                                                 1
        1.5     Equipment/Apparatus                                                             1
        1.6     Reagents                                                                         2
        1.7     Procedures                                                                       2

               1.7.1    Decontamination Methods                                                   2
               1.7.2    Field Sampling Equipment Cleaning Procedures                                3

        1.8     Calculations                                                                       3
        1.9     Quality Assurance/Quality Control                                                   3
        1.10    Data Validation                                                                    4
        1.11    Health and Safety                                                                 4


2.0     SOIL SAMPLING: SOP #2012

        2.1     Scope and Application                                                             5
        2.2     Method Summary                                                                 5
        2.3     Sample Preservation, Containers, Handling, and Storage                                5
        2.4     Interferences and Potential Problems                                                 5
        2.5     Equipment/Apparatus                                                             5
        2.6     Reagents                                                                         5
        2.7     Procedures                                                                        6

               2.7.1    Preparation                                                                6
               2.7.2    Sample Collection                                                          6

        2.8     Calculations                                                                       9
        2.9     Quality Assurance/Quality Control                                                   9
        2.10    Data Validation                                                                    9
        2.11    Health and Safely                                                                 9
3.0     SOIL GAS SAMPLING: SOP #2149

       3.1      Scope and Application                                                            11
       3.2     Method Summary                                                                11
       3.3     Sample Preservation, Containers, Handling, and Storage                              11

               3.3.1    Tcdlar Bag                                                              11
               3.3.2   Tcnax Tube                                                              11
               3.3.3   SUMMA Canister                                                        11
                                               in

-------
3.4     Interferences and Potential Problem

        3.41    HNU Measurements 12
        3.4.2    Factors Affecting Organic Concentrations in Soil Gas                            12
        3.4.3    Soil Probe Clogging                                                          12
        3.4.4    Underground Utilities                                                        12

3.5     Equipment/Apparatus                                                               12

        3.5J    Slam Bar Method                                                            12
        3.5.2    Power Hammer Method                                                      13

3.6     Reagents                                                                            13
3.7     Procedures                                                                          13

        3.7.1    Soil Gas Well Installation                                                     13
        3.7.2    Screening with Field Instruments                                              14
        3.7.3    Tedlar Bag Sampling                                                         14
        3.7.4    Tenax Tube Sampling                                                        14
        3.7.5    SUMMA Canister Sampling                                                  16

3.8     Calculations                                                                         16

        3.8.1    Field Screening Instruments                                                   16
        3.8.2    Photovac GC Analysis                                                        16

3.9     Quality Assurance/Quality Control                                                    16

        3.9.1    Field Instrument Calibration                                                  16
        3.9.2    Gilian Model HFS113A Air Sampling Pump Calibration                         16
        3.9.3    Sample Probe Contamination                                                  16
        3.9.4    Sample Train Contamination                                                  16
        3.9.5    Field Blank                                                                 16
        3.9.6    Trip Standard                                                                16
        3.9.7    Tedlar Bag Check                                                            17
        3.9.8    SUMMA Canister Check                                                     17
        3.9.9    Options                                                                     17

3.10     Data Validation                                                                      17
3.11     Health and Safety                                                                    17
                                          IV

-------
4.0     SOIL SAMPLING AND SURFACE GEOPHYSICS: SOP #2159

        4.1      Scope and Application                                                               19
        4.2      Method Summary                                                                   19

                4.2J    Magnetics                                                                   19
                4.2.2    Electromagnetics                                                            20
                4.2.3    Electrical Resistivity                                                         20
                4.2.4    Seismic                                                                     21
                4.2.5    Ground Penetrating Radar                                                   22

        4.3      Sample Preservation, Containers, Handling and Storage                                23
        4 4      Interferences arid Potential Problems                                                 23
        4 5      Equipment/Apparatus                                                               24

                4.5.1    Magnetics                                                                   24
                4.5.2    Electromagnetics                                                            24
                4.5.3    Electrical Resistivity                                                         24
                4.5.4    Seismic                                                                     24
                4.5.5    Ground Penetrating Radar                                                   24

        4.6      Reagents                                                                           24
        4.7      Procedures                                                                          24
        4.8      Calculations                                                                         24
        4.9      Quality Assurance/Quality Control                                                   24
        4.10     Data Validation                                                                     24
        411     Health and Safety                                                                   24
APPENDIX A  - Figures

APPENDIX B  - HNU Field Protocol

REFERENCES

-------
                                       List of Exhibits






Exhibit                                                            SOP






Table 1:        Recommended Solvent Rinse for Soluble Contaminants    #2006




Figure 1:       Sampling Augers                                     #2012




Figure 2:       Sampling Trier                                      #2012




Figure 3:       Sampling Train Schematic                             #2149
Page






   4




  26




  27




  28

-------
                                    Acknowledgments
Preparation of this document was directed by William A. Coakley, the Removal Program QA Coordinator of
the Environmental Response Team, Emergency Response Division. Additional support was presided under U.S.
EPA contract #68-03-3482 and U.S. EPA contract #6S-WO-0036.
                                              \n

-------
      1.0     SAMPLING  EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION:  SOP #2006
 1.1     SCOPE AND APPLICATION

 This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) describes
 methods used for  preventing or reducing cross-
 contamination, and provides general guidelines for
 sampling equipment decontamination procedures at
 a hazardous waste site.  Preventing or minimizing
 cross-contamination  jn  sampled media  and in
 samples is important for preventing the introduction
 of error into sampling results and for protecting the
 health and safety of site  personnel.

 Removing or neutralizing  contaminants that have
 accumulated  on  sampling  equipment  ensures
 protection of personnel from permeating substances,
 reduces  or  eliminates transfer of contaminants to
 clean  areas, prevents  the  mixing of incompatible
 substances,  and minimizes  the likelihood of sample
 cross-contamination.
 1.2     METHOD SUMMARY

 Contaminants  can  be  physically  removed  from
 equipment,   or  deactivated  by  sterilization  or
 disinfection.   Gross  contamination  of equipment
 requires  physical   decontamination,   including
 abrasive and non-abrasive methods.  These include
 the use of brushes, air and wet blasting, and high-
 pressure water cleaning, followed by  a  wash/rinse
 process using appropriate cleaning solutions.  Use
 of a  solvent  rinse  is  required  when  organic
 contamination is present.
1.3    SAMPLE PRESERVATION,
       CONTAINERS, HANDLING, AND
       STORAGE

This section is not applicable to this SOP.
1.4    INTERFERENCES AND
       POTENTIAL PROBLEMS

    •   The  use  of  distilled/dcionized  water
       commonly  available  from  commercial
       vendors   may  be   acceptable   for
       decontamination of sampling equipment
       provided that  it  has  been  verified  by
       laboratory analysis to be analyte free.

    •  An untreated potable water supply is not
       an acceptable substitute for tap water. Tap
       water may be  used from any municipal
       water  treatment system  for  mixing  of
       decontamination solutions.

    •  Acids   and  solvents  utilized   in  the
       decontamination sequence pose the health
       and  safety risks of inhalation  or skin
       contact, and raise  shipping  concerns  of
       permeation or degradation.

    •  The site work plan  must  address disposal
       of the spent decontamination solutions.

    •  Several  procedures  can be established  to
       minimize  contact   with  waste  and the
       potential for contamination. For example:

               Stress   work    practices   that
               minimize contact with hazardous
               substances.

               Use remote sampling,  handling,
               and container-opening technique's
               when appropriate.

               Cover  monitoring and  sampling
               equipment with protective material
               to minimize contamination.

               Use  disposable  outer garments
               and   disposable   sampling
               equipment when appropriate.
1.5    EQUIPMENT/APPARATUS

    •   appropriate personal protective clothing
    •   non-phosphate detergent
    •   selected solvents
    •   long-handled brushes
    •   drop cloths/plastic sheeting
    •   trash container
    •   paper towels
    •   galvanized tubs or buckets
    •   tap water

-------
        distilled/deionized water
        metal/plastic containers for storage  and
        disposal of contaminated wash solutions
        pressurized   sprayers   for   tap   and
        deionized/distilled water
        sprayers for solvents
        trash bags
        aluminum foil
        safety glasses or splash shield
        emergency eyewash bottle
1.6     REAGENTS

There are no reagents used in this procedure aside
from  the actual  decontamination solutions  and
solvents.   In  general,  the  following solvents are
utilized for decontamination purposes.

    •   10% nitric acidto
    •   acetone (pesticide grade)(2)
    •   hexane (pesticide grade)'2'
    •   methanol

(1) Only if sample is to be analyzed for trace metals.
(2) Only if sample is to be analyzed for organics.
1.7     PROCEDURES

As part of the health and safety plan, develop and
set up a decontamination plan before any personnel
or equipment enter the areas of potential exposure.
The   equipment  decontamination  plan   should
include:

    •   the   number,  location,   and  layout  of
        decontamination stations

    •   which decontamination apparatus is needed

    •   the appropriate decontamination methods

    •   methods  for  disposal  of  contaminated
        clothing, apparatus, and solutions

1.7.1   Decontamination Methods

All personnel, samples, and equipment  leaving the
contaminated   area   of   a   site   must   be
decontaminated. Various decontamination methods
will   cither   physically   remove    contaminants,
inactivate   contaminants   by   disinfection   or
sterilization, or do bc'h.
In many cases, gross contamination can be removed
by physical means.  The physical decontamination
techniques   appropriate   for  equipment
decontamination   can  be   grouped  into  two
categories:   abrasive methods  and non-abrasive
methods.

Abrasive Cleaning Methods

Abrasive cleaning  methods  work by rubbing and
wearing, away the top layer of the surface containing
the contaminant.  The following abrasive methods
are available:

    •   Mechanical: Mechanical cleaning methods
        use  brushes  of metal  or  nylon.   The
        amount and type of contaminants removed
        will  vary  with  the hardness of  bristles,
        length of  brushing time, and degree  of
        brus'h contact.

    •   Air  Blasting:   Air blasting  is used  for
        cleaning   large   equipment,   such   as
        bulldozers, drilling  rigs or auger bits.  The
        equipment  used  in  air  blast  cleaning
        employs compressed air to force abrasive
        material through a nozzle at high velocities.
        The  distance between the nozzle and the
        surface cleaned, as well as the pressure  of
        air, the lime of  application, and the angle
        at which  the abrasive strikes the  surface,
        determines cleaning efficiency. Air blasting
        has several disadvantages:  it is  unable  to
        control the amount of material removed, it
        can aerate contaminants, and it generates
        large amounts of waste.

    •   Wet  Blasting:  Wet blast  cleaning,  also
        used to clean large  equipment, involves use
        of a  suspended  fine abrasive delivered by
        compressed air to the contaminated area.
        The  amount of  materials removed  can be
        carefully  controlled  by  using  wry  fine
        abrasives.  This method generates  a large
        amount of waste.

Non-Abrasive Cleaning Methods

Non-abrasive cleaning methods work by forcing the
contaminant  off of a surface with  pressure.   In
general, less  of the equipment  surface is removed
using non-abrasive methods.  The  following non-
abrasive methods are available:

-------
    •   High-Pressure   Water:    This   method
        consists  of  a  high-pressure  pump,  an
        operator-controlled directional nozzle, and
        a high pressure hose.  Operating pressure
        usually ranges from 340 to 680 atmospheres
        (atm) which relates to flow rates of 20 to
        140 liters per minute.

    *   Ultra-High-Pressure Water:  This system
        produces a  pressurized water jet  (from
        1,000  to 4,000  atm).    The  ultra-high-
        pressure  spray  removes  tightly-adhered
        surface  film.1  The  water velocity ranges
        from 500 m/sec (1,000 atm)  to 900 m/sec
        (4,000  atm).  Additives can enhance  the
        method.  This method is not  applicable for
        hand-held sampling equipment.

Disinfection/Rinse Methods

    •   Disinfection:  Disinfectants are a practical
        means of inactivating infectious agents.

    •   Sterilization:      Standard   sterilization
        methods involve heating the equipment.
        Sterilization   is   impractical  for  large
        equipment.

    •   Rinsing:  Rinsing removes  contaminants
        through dilution,  physical attraction, and
        solubilization.

1.7.2   Field Sampling Equipment
        Cleaning  Procedures

Solvent  rinses are not necessarily required  when
organics are not a contaminant of concern and may
be eliminated from  the  sequence specified below.
Similarly, an acid rinse is not required if analysis
does not include inorganics.

1.   Where  applicable,  follow  physical   removal
    procedures specified in section 1.7.1.

2.   Wash   equipment   with   a  non-phosphate
    detergent solution.

3.   Rinse with tap water.

4.   Rinse with distilled/dcionized water.

5.   Rinse with 10% nitric acid if the sample will be
    analyzed for trace organics.
6.  Rinse with distilled/deionized water.

7.  Use a solvent rinse (pesticide grade) if  the
    sample will be analyzed for organics.

8.  Air dry the equipment completely.

9.  Rinse again with distilled/deionized water.

Selection   of   the  solvent   for   use   in   the
decontamination   process   is   based   on   the
contaminants present at the site. Use of  a solvent
is required when organic contamination is present
on-site.    Typical  solvents  used  for  removal  of
organic  contaminants include acetone,  hexane,  or
water.  An acid rinse step is required if metals  are
present on-site. If a particular contaminant fraction
is  not   present   at  the   site,   the  nine-step
decontamination  procedure listed  above   may  be
modified for site specificity.  The decontamination
solvent used should not be among the contaminants
of concern at the site.

Table 1 lists solvent rinses which may be  required
for elimination of particular chemicals.  After each
solvent rinse, the equipment should be air dried and
rinsed with distilled/deionized water.

Sampling equipment that requires the use of plastic
tubing  should be  disassembled and  the  tubing
replaced with clean tubing, before commencement
of sampling and between sampling locations.
1.8     CALCULATIONS

This section is not applicable to this SOP.
1.9     QUALITY ASSURANCE/
        QUALITY CONTROL

One type of quality control sample specific to  the
field decontamination process is the rinsate blank.
The  rinsate blank provides  information  on  the
effectiveness  of  the  decontamination   process
employed in the  field.  When used in conjunction
with field blanks and trip blanks, a rinsate blank  can
detect   contamination  during sample  handling,
storage and sample transportation to the laboratory.

-------
             Table  1:  Recommended Solvent Rinse for Soluble Contaminants
               SOLVENT
          SOLUBLE CONTAMINANTS
 Water
Low-chain hydrocarbons
Inorganic compounds
Salts
Some organic acids and other polar compounds
 Dilute Acids
Basic (caustic) compounds
Amines
Hydrazines
 Dilute Bases -- for example, detergent
 and soap
Metals
Acidic compounds
Phenol
Thiols
Some nitro and sulfonic compounds
 Organic Solvents'1' - for example,
 alcohols, ethers, kctoncs, aromatics,
 straight-chain alkanes (e.g., hexanc), and
 common petroleum products (e.g., fuel,
 oil, kerosene)
Nonpolar compounds (e.g., some organic compounds)
  - WARNING:  Some organic solvents can permeate and/or degrade protective clothing.
A rinsate blank consists of a sample of analytc-free
(i.c,  dcionized) water which is passed over  and
through a field decontaminated sampling device and
placed  in a clean sample container.

Rm.salc blanks should be run for all parameters oi
interest at a rate of 1 per  20 for each parameter,
c\cn if samples arc not shipped that  day.  Rinsate
blank1;  arc  not  required  if dedicated sampling
jquipmcnt :s used.
1.10    DATA VALIDATION

This section  is not applicable to this SOP.


1.11    HEALTH AND  SAFETY

When working with potentially ha/ardous materials.
follow U.S. EPA, OS HA and specific  health and
safety procedures.

Decontamination can  pose ha/ards under certain
circumstances  even though performed to protect
        health and safety.  Hazardous substances  may be
        incompatible with decontamination methods.  For
        example, the decontamination solution or solvent
        may  react  with contaminants  to produce  heat,
        explosion,  or toxic  products.   Decontamination
        methods may be  incompatible  svith  clothing or
        equipment; some solvents can permeate or degrade
        protective clothing. Also, decontamination solutions
        and solvents may pose a  direct health  hazard to
        workers through inhalation or  skin contac:  or if
        they combust.

        The decontamination solutions and solvents must be
        determined  to be compatible  before  use.   Any
        method  that  permeates,  degrades,  or  damages
        personal protective equipment should not be used.
        If decontamination  methods  pose a  direct  health
        ha/ard,  measures should  be  taken  to  protect
        personnel or the methods  should  be  modified to
        eliminate ihe hazard.

-------
                        2.0   SOIL  SAMPLING:  SOP #2012
2.1     SCOPE AND APPLICATION

The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure
(SOP) is to describe the procedures for collecting
representative soil samples. Analysis of soil samples
may determine whether concentrations of specific
soil pollutants exceed estabb'shed action  levels, or if
the concentrations of, soil pollutants present a risk
to public health, welfare, or the environment.
2.2    METHOD SUMMARY

Soil samples may be  collected using a %'ariety of
methods and  equipment.    The methods  and
equipment used are dependent on the depth of the
desired  sample,  the  type of  sample required
(disturbed versus undisturbed), and the type of soil.
Near-surface soils may be easily sampled using a
spade,  trowel,  and scoop.  Sampling  at greater
depths  may be performed using a hand auger, a
trier, a split-spoon, or, if required, a backhoe.
2.3     SAMPLE PRESERVATION,
        CONTAINERS, HANDLING, AND
        STORAGE

Chemical preservation  of  solids  is not generally
recommended. Refrigeration to 4ฐC, supplemented
by a  minimal holding  time,  is usually the best
approach.
2.4     INTERFERENCES  AND
        POTENTIAL PROBLEMS

There are two primary interferences or potential
problems associated with  soil  sampling.  These
include  cross-contamination  of  samples  and
improper sample collection.  Cross-contamination
problems can be eliminated or minimized through
the use of dedicated sampling equipment.  If this is
not possible or practical, then decontamination of
sampling equipment is necessary.  Improper sample
collection   can  involve   using   contaminated
equipment, disturbance of  the matrix  resulting in
compaction   of  the  sample,   or   inadequate
homogenization  of  the samples where  required,
resulting in variable, non-representative results.
2.5    EQUIPMENT/APPARATUS
       sampling plan
       maps/plot plan
       safety equipment, as specified in the health
       and safety plan
       compass
       tape measure
       survey stakes or flags
       camera and film
       stainless steel, plastic, or other appropriate
       homogenization bucket or bowl
       1-quart mason jars w/Teflon liners
       Ziploc plastic bags
       logbook
       labels
       chain of custody forms and seals
       field data sheets
       cooler(s)
       ice
       decontamination supplies/equipment
       canvas or plastic sheet
       spade or shovel
       spatula
       scoop
       plastic or stainless steel spoons
       trowel
       continuous flight (screw) auger
       bucket auger
       post  hole auger
       extension rods
       T-handle
       sampling trier
       thin-wall tube sampler
       Vehimeycr soil sampler outfit
       -  tubes
       -  points
       -  drive head
       -  drop hammer
       -  puller jack and  grip
       backhoe
2.6    REAGENTS

Reagents are not used for the preservation of soil
samples. Decontamination solutions are specified in

-------
 ERT   SOP    #2006,   Sampling   Equipment
 Decontamination.
2.7    PROCEDURES

2.7.1  Preparation

1.  Determine the extent of the sampling effort, the
    sampling methods to be employed, and which
    equipment and supplies are required.

2.  Obtain  necessary1 sampling  and  monitoring
    equipment.

3.  Decontaminate  or  preclean  equipment, and
    ensure that it is in working order.

4.  Prepare schedules,  and coordinate with staff,
    client, and regulatory agencies, if appropriate.

5.  Perform a general site survey prior to site entry
    in accordance with the site-specific health and
    safety plan.

6.  Use stakes,  buoys, or flagging to identify and
    mark all sampling locations. Consider specific
    site factors,  including extent  and nature  of
    contaminant, when selecting sample location. If
    required,  the  proposed  locations  may  be
    adjusted   based  on   site  access,   property
    boundaries,  and surface   obstructions.  All
    staked  locations will be utility-cleared  by the
    property owner prior to soil sampling.

2.7.2  Sample Collection

Surface  Soil Samples

Collect  samples from near-surface soil with tools
such  as spades, shovels,  and scoops.   Surface
material can be removed to the required depth with
this equipment,  then a stainless steel or  plastic
scoop can be used to collect the sample.

This method can be used in most soil types but is
limited  to sampling near surface areas.  Accurate,
representative  samples can be collected with this
procedure depending on  the  care  and precision
demonstrated by the sampling  team member. The
use of a flat, pointed mason trowel to cut a block of
the desired soil  can be helpful when undisturbed
profiles are required. A stainless steel scoop,  lab
spoon, or  plastic spoon will suffice in most other
applications. Avoid the use of devices plated with
chrome or other materials.  Plating is particularly
common with garden implements  such as potting
trowels.

Follow these procedures to  collect  surface soil
samples.

1.   Carefully remove the top layer of soil  or debris
     to the desired sample depth with a pre-cleaned
     spade.

2.   Using   a  pre-cleaned,  stainless   steel  scoop,
     plastic spoon, or trowel, remove and  discard a
     thin layer of soil from the area which came in
     contact with the spade.

3.   If volatile organic analysis is to be performed,
     transfer a portion of the sample directly into an
     appropriate, labeled sample container(s) with a
     stainless steel lab spoon, plastic lab spoon,  or
     equivalent and secure the cap(s) tightly.  Place
     the remainder of the sample  into a  stainless
     steel,   plastic,   or   other   appropriate
     homogenization container, and mix thoroughly
     to obtain a homogenous sample representative
     of the  entire sampling interval.  Then, either
     place the sample  into an appropriate, labeled
     container(s) and secure the cap(s)  tightly; or, if
     composite samples are to be collected, place  a
     sample  from another sampling interval into the
     homogenization container  and mix thoroughly.
     When   compositing  is  complete, place the
     sample  into appropriate, labeled  container(s)
     and secure the cap(s) tightly.

Samp/ing at Depth with Augers and Thin-
Wall Tube Samplers

This  system consists of  an  auger,   a series  of
extensions,   a  "T"  handle,  and  a thin-wall tube
sampler (Appendix A, Figure 1). The auger is used
to bore a hole to a desired sampling depth, and is
then  withdrawn.   The sample may  be  collected
directly from the  auger.  If a core  sample is to be
collected, the auger tip is then replaced with a thin-
wall tube sampler.   The system  is then  lowered
down the borehole, and driven into the soil at the
completion depth. The system is withdrawn and the
core collected from the thin-wall tube  sampler.

Several types of  augers  arc  available.    These
include:  bucket, continuous  flight (screw), and
pesthole augers.  Bucket augers are better for direct

-------
sample recovery since they provide 'a large volume
of sample in a short time. When continuous flight
augers  are  used,  the sample can  be  collected
directly from the flights, which are usually at 5-feet
intervals.    The  continuous  flight  augers  are
satisfactory  for  use  when  a composite  of  the
complete soil column is desired.  Posthole augers
have limited utility for sample collection as they are
designed to cut  through  fibrous, rooted, swampy
soil.

Follow these procedures for collecting soil samples
with the auger and a thin-wall tube sampler.

1.  Attach the auger bit to  a drill rod  extension,
    and attach the T handle to the drill rod.

2.  Clear the  area to be sampled of any surface
    debris  (e.g., twigs, rocks,  litter).   It may  be
    advisable to remove  the first  3 to 6  inches of
    surface soil for an area approximately 6 inches
    in radius around the drilling location.

3.  Begin  augering,  periodically removing and
    depositing accumulated  soils onto  a  plastic
    sheet  spread  near the  hole.  This prevents
    accidental brushing of loose material back down
    the borehole  when  removing the   auger  or
    adding drill rods.  It also facilitates refilling the
    hole, and avoids possible contamination  of the
    surrounding area.

4.  After  reaching the desired depth, slowly and
    carefully remove the auger from boring.  When
    sampling directly from the auger, collect sample
    after the auger is removed  from boring and
    proceed to Step 10.

5.  Remove auger tip from drill rods and replace
    with a  pre-cleaned  thin-wall tube  sampler.
    Install proper cutting tip.

6.  Carefully lower the  tube  sampler  down  the
    borehole.  Gradually force the tube sampler
    into the soil.  Care should be taken to avoid
    scraping the  borehole sides. Avoid hammering
    the drill  rods to  facilitate coring as  the
    vibrations  may cause the  boring  walls  to
    collapse.

7.  Remove the tube sampler, and unscrew the drill
    rods.

8.  Remove the  cutting tip and the core from the
    device.
9.  Discard the top of the core (approximately 1
    inch),  as this represents material collected
    before penetration of  the  layer  of concern.
    Place the remaining core into the appropriate
    labeled   sample   container(s).      Sample
    homogenization is not required.

10. If volatile organic analysis is to be performed,
    transfer a portion of the sample directly into an
    appropriate, labeled sample container(s) with a
    stainless  steel lab spoon,  plastic lab spoon, or
    equivalent and secure the cap(s) tightly. Place
    the remainder of the sample into a stainless
    steel,   plastic,    or  other   appropriate
    homogenization container, and mix thoroughly
    to obtain a homogenous sample representative
    of the entire sampling  interval.   Then, either
    place the sample into an appropriate,  labeled
    container(s) and secure the cap(s) tightly; or, if
    composite samples are to be collected, place a
    sample from another sampling interval into the
    homogenization container and mix thoroughly.
    When  compositing is  complete,  place   the
    sample   into    the    appropriate,   labeled
    container(s) and secure the cap(s) tightly.

11. If another sample is to be collected in the same
    hole, but at a greater depth,  reattach the auger
    bit to the drill and assembly, and follow steps
    3 through 11, making sure  to decontaminate
    the auger and tube sampler  between samples.

12. Abandon the hole according to applicable state
    regulations.    Generally,  shallow  holes   can
    simply be backfilled with  the  removed   soil
    material.

Sampling at Depth with  a  Trier

The system consists of a trier, and  a T"  handle.
The auger is driven into the soil to be sampled and
used to extract a core sample from the appropriate
depth.

Follow these procedures to collect soil samples  with
a sampling trier.

1.  Insert the trier (Appendix A, Figure 2) into the
    material  to  be sampled at  a 0ฐ  to  45ฐ angle
    from horizontal.   This orientation minimizes
    the spillage of sample.

2.  Rotate the trier  once or twice to cut a core of
    material.

-------
3.  Slowly withdraw the trier, making sure that the
    slot is facing upward.

4.  If volatile organic analysis is to be performed,
    transfer a portion of the sample directly into an
    appropriate, labeled sample container(s) with a
    stainless steel lab spoon, plastic lab spoon, or
    equivalent and secure the cap(s) tightly. Place
    the remainder of the  sample  into a stainless
    steel,    plastic,    or    other    appropriate
    homogenization container, and  mix thoroughly
    to obtain a homogenous sample representative
    of the  entire sampling  interval.  Then, either
    place the sample into  an appropriate,  labeled
    container(s) and secure the cap(s) tightly; or, if
    composite samples are to be collected,  place a
    sample from another sampling interval into the
    homogenizatior. container and mix thoroughly.
    When  compositing is  complete, place  the
    sample into an appropriate, labeled container(s)
    and secure the cap(s) tightly.

Sampling  at  Depth with a  Split Spoon
(Barrel) Sampler

The procedure for split spoon  sampling  describes
the collection and extraction of  undisturbed soil
cores of 18  or 24  inches in length.  A  series of
consecutive  cores may be  extracted  with  a  split
spoon sampler  to  give a  complete  soil  column
profile, or  an auger may be used to drill down to
the desired depth for sampling. The split spoon is
then  driven  to  its  sampling depth  through the
bottom of the augured hole  and the core extracted

When split  tube sampling is performed to  gain
geologic information, all work should be performed
in accordance \vith ASTM D 1586-67 (reapproved
1974).

Follow these procedures for collecting soil samples
with a split spoon.

1.  Assemble the sampler by aligning both sides of
    the barrel and then screwing the bit onto the
    bottom  and the  heavier head  piece onto the
    top.

2.  Place the sampler in a perpendicular position
    on the sample material.

3.  Using  a sledge  hammer  or  well  ring,  if
    available, drive the tube. Do not drive past the
    bott.om of the head piece or compression of the
    sample will result.

4.  Record in  the site  logbook or on  field data
    sheets the length of the tube used to penetrate
    the material being sampled, and the number of
    blows required to obtain this depth.

5.  Withdraw the sampler, and open by unscrewing
    the bit and head and splitting the barrel. If a
    split sample is desired, a cleaned, stainless steel
    knife should be used to divide the tube contents
    in half, longitudinally.  This sampler is typically
    available in diameters of 2 and 3 1/2 bches.
    However, in order  to obtain the  required
    sample volume, use of a larger barrel may be
    required.

6.  Without  disturbing the core, transfer it  to an
    appropriate labeled sample container(s) and
    seal tightly.

Test  Pit/Trench Excavation

These relatively  large  excavations are  used  to
remove sections of soil, when detailed examination
of soil characteristics  (horizontal  structure,  color,
etc.)  are required.  It is  the  least cost effective
sampling method due to the relatively high cost  of
backhoe operation.

Follow these procedures for collecting soil samples
from  test pit/trench excavations.

1.  Prior  to  any excavation with a backhoe, it is
    important to ensure that all sampling locations
    are clear of utility lines and poles (subsurface
    as well as above surface).

2.  Using   the  backhoe,   dig   a  trench   to
    approximate!)   3   feet    in   width   and
    approximately  1   foot below  the  cleared
    sampling location. Place removed or excavated
    soils on plastic sheets.  Trenches greater than
    5 feet deep must  be sloped or  protected by a
    shoring  system,   as   required  by  OSHA
    regulations.

3.  Use a shovel to remove a  1- to 2-inch layer of
    soil from the vertical  face  of the  pit  where
    sampling is to be done.

4.  Take  samples using a trowel, scoop, or  coring
    device at the desired  intervals.  Be  sure  to
    scrape the vertical face at the point of sampling

-------
    to remove any soil that may have fallen from
    above, and to expose fresh soil for Campling. In
    many instances,  samples  can be  collected
    directly from the backhoe bucket.

5.  If volatile organic analysis is to be performed,
    transfer a portion of the sample directly into an
    appropriate,  labeled sample  container(s) with a
    stainless steel lab spoon, plastic lab  spoon, or
    equivalent and secure the cap(s) tightly. Place
    the remainder  of the sample into a stainless
    steel,   plastic,    or   other   appropriate
    homogenization container, and mix thoroughly
    to  obtain a homogenous sample representative
    of  the entire sampling interval.  Then, either
    place the sample into an appropriate,  labeled
    container(s)  and secure the cap(s) tightly; or, if
    composite samples are to be collected, place a
    sample from  another sampling interval into the
    homogenization container and mix thoroughly.
    When compositing  is  complete, place  the
    sample into  appropriate, labeled container(s)
    and secure the cap(s) tightly.

6.  Abandon the pit  or excavation according to
    applicable state regulations.  Generally, shallow
    excavations can simply be backfilled with the
    removed soil material.
2.8     CALCULATIONS

This  section is not applicable to this SOP.
2.9    QUALITY ASSURANCE/
        QUALITY CONTROL

There  are no specific quality assurance activities
which  apply  to  the  implementation  of  these
procedures.  However, the following QA procedures
apply:

    •   All data must be documented on field data
        sheets or within site logbooks.

    •   All  instrumentation must  be operated  in
        accordance with operating instructions  as
        supplied  by  the  manufacturer,  unless
        otherwise  specified  in the  work  plan.
        Equipment   checkout   and   calibration
        activities   must   occur   prior    to
        sampling/operation,  and  they  must  be
        documented.
2.10   DATA VALIDATION

This section is not applicable to this SOP.


2.11   HEALTH AND SAFETY

When working with potentially hazardous materials,
follow U.S. EPA,  OSHA, and specific  health and
safety procedures.

-------
                     3.0    SOIL GAS  SAMPLING:  SOP #2149
 3.1    SCOPE AND APPLICATION

 Soil gas monitoring provides a quick means of waste
 site evaluation.  Using this  method, underground
 contamination can be identified,  and the  source,
 extent,  and movement of  the  pollutants  can be
 traced.

 This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) outlines
 the methods used by EPA/ERT in installing soil gas
 wells'; measuring organic levels in the soil gas using
 an HNU PI 101 Portable Photoionization Analyzer
 and/or  other air monitoring devices; and sampling
 the soil  gas using Tedlar bags, Tenax sorbent tubes,
 and SUMMA canisters.
3.2    METHOD SUMMARY

A 3/8-inch diameter hole is driven into the ground
to a depth of 4 to 5 feet using a commercially
available "slam bar". (Soil gas can also be sampled
at other depths by  the use of a longer bar or bar
attachments.) A 1/4-inch O.D. stainless steel probe
is inserted into the hole. The hole is then sealed at
the top around the probe using modeling clay. The
gas contained in the interstitial spaces of the soil is
sampled by pulling the sample through the probe
using an air sampling pump.  The sample may be
stored  in Tedlar  bags,  drawn  through  sorbent
cartridges,  or analyzed  directly using   a  direct
reading instrument.

The  air  sampling pump is not used for SUMMA
canister sampling of soil gas. Sampling is  achieved
by  soil   gas  equilibration  with the  evacuated
SUMMA  canister.    Other  field air monitoring
devices, such as the combustible gas indicator (MSA
CGI/02  Meter, Model 260) and the organic vapor
analyzer (Foxboro OVA, Model  128), can also be
used  depending   on  specific   site  conditions.
Measurement  of  soil   temperature  using  a
temperature probe  may also be desirable.  Bagged
samples  are usually analyzed in a field laboratory
using a portable Photovac GC.

Power driven sampling probes may be utilized when
soil conditions make sampling by hand unfeasible
(i.e., frozen ground, very dense clays, pavement,
 etc.).  Commercially available soil gas sampling
 probes (hollow, 1/2-inch O.D. steel probes) can be
 driven to the desired depth using a power hammer
 (e.g., Bosch Demolition Hammer).  Samples can be
 drawn through the probe itself, or through Teflon
 tubing inserted through the probe and attached to
 the  probe point.   Samples are collected  and
 analyzed as described above.
3.3    SAMPLE PRESERVATION,
        CONTAINERS, HANDLING, AND
        STORAGE

3.3.1   Tedlar Bag

Soil gas  samples  are  generally contained  in  1-L
Tedlar bags.  Bagged samples are best  stored in
coolers to protect the  bags from any damage that
may occur in the  field or in transit.  In addition,
coolers  ensure  the integrity of the samples  by
keeping them  at a cool temperature and  out of
direct sunlight. Samples should be analyzed as soon
as possible, preferably within 24 to 48 hours.

3.3.2  Tenax Tube

Bagged samples can also be drawn into  Tenax or
other sorbent tubes to undergo lab GC/MS analysis
If Tenax tubes are to be utilized, special care must
be taken to avoid contamination.  Handling of the
tubes should be kept to a minimum, and samplers
must wear nylon or other lint-free  clv'-cs.   After
sampling,  each tube should be stores in a clear,.
sealed culture tube; the ends packed with clean
glass  wool  to  protect the  sorbent  tube from
breakage.  The  culture tubes should  be  kept cool
and  wrapped in  aluminum  foil  to  prevent  arn
photodegradation of samples (see Section 3.7.4.).

3.3.3   SUMMA Canister

The SUMMA canisters used for soil gas sampling
have a 6-L sample capacity and arc certified clean
by GC/MS  analysis before being  ulili/ed  in  the
field.  After sampling is completed, they arc stored
and shipped in travel cases.
                                               11

-------
3.4     INTERFERENCES AND
        POTENTIAL PROBLEMS

3.4.1   HNU Measurements

A number of factors can affect the response of the
HNU PI  101.   High humidity  can cause  lamp
fogging  and decreased sensitivity.   This can be
significant when  soil  moisture levels are high, or
when a  soil gas  well  is  actually in groundwater.
High  concentrations   of methane  can  cause a
downscale deflection of the meter.   High and  low
temperature,   electrical   fields,   FM   radio
transmission,  and naturally occurring compounds,
such  as  terpenes  in wooded areas,  will also  affect
instrument response.

Other field screening instruments can be affected by
interferences.  Consult the manufacturers' manuals.

3.4.2   Factors Affecting Organic
        Concentrations in Soil Gas

Concentrations   in  soil  gas  are  affected  by
dissolution,   adsorption,   and   partitioning.
Partitioning refers to the ratio of component found
in a saturated vapor above an  aqueous solution to
the amount in the solution; this can, in theory, be
calculated  using  the  Henry's  Law  constants.
Contaminants can also be adsorbed onto inorganic
soil  components  or  "dissolved"  in   organic
components. These factors can result in a lowering
of the partitioning coefficient.

Soil "tightness" or amount of void space in the  soil
matrix, will affect the  rate of recharging of gas into
the soil gas well.

Existence of a high, or perched, water table, or of
an impermeable  underlying layer (such as a clay
lens  or  layer of  buried slag)  may  interfere with
sampling of the soil gas. Knowledge of site geology
is  useful  in  such situations, and  can  prevent
inaccurate sampling.

3.4.3   Soil Probe Clogging

A common problem with this  sampling method is
soil  probe  clogging.   A  clogged  probe can be
identified by using an in-line vacuum gauge or by
listening for the sound of the pump laboring. This
problem can usually be eliminated by using a wire
cable to clear the probe  (see procedure #3 in
Section 3.7.1).
3.4.4  Underground Utilities

Prior to selecting sample locations, an underground
utility search  is recommended.  The local utility
companies can be contacted and requested to mark
the locations of their underground lines.  Sampling
plans  can then  be drawn up accordingly.  Each
sample location should also be screened with a
metal detector or  magnetometer to verify that no
underground pipes or drums exist.
3.5     EQUIPMENT/APPARATUS

3.5.1   Slam Bar Method
       slam bar (one per sampling team)
       soil gas probes,  stainless steel tubing, 1/4-
       inch O.D., 5 foot length
       flexible wire or  cable used for clearing the
       tubing during insertion into the well
       "quick connect" fittings to connect sampling
       probe tubing, monitoring  instruments, and
       Gilian pumps to appropriate  fittings  on
       vacuum box
       modeling clay
       vacuum box for drawing a vacuum around
       Tedlar bag for sample collection (one per
       sampling team)
       Gilian pump Model HFS113A adjusted to
       approximately 3.0 L/min (one to two per
       sampling team)
       1/4-inch Teflon tubing, 2  to 3 foot lengths,
       for replacement of contaminated sample
       line
       Tedlar bags, 1  liter,  at least one bag per
       sample point
       soil gas sampling labels, field data sheets,
       logbook, etc.
       HNU Model PI  101,  or other field  air
       monitoring  devices,  (one  per  sampling
       team)
       ice chest, for carrying equipment and  for
       protection  of samples (two  per sampling
       team)
       metal detector or  magnetometer,   for
       detecting   underground    utilities/
       pipes/drums (one per sampling team)
       Photovac  GC,  for  field-lab analysis of
       bagged samples
       SUMMA  canisters  (plus  their shipping
       cases)   for   sample,   storage   and
       transportation
                                                12

-------
3.5.2  Power Hammer Method
        Bosch demolition hammer
        1/2-inch O.D. steel probes, extensions, and
        points
        dedicated aluminum  sampling points
        Teflon tubing, 1/4-inch O.D.
        "quick connect" fittings to connect sampling
        probe tubing, monitoring instruments, and
        Gilian pumps  to appropriate fittings  on
        vacuum box
        modeling clay
        vacuum box for drawing a vacuum around
        Tedlar bag for sample collection (one per
        sampling team)
        Gilian pump Model HFS113A adjusted to
        approximately 3.0 L/min (one to two per
        sampling team)
        1/4-inch Teflon tubing, 2 to 3 foot lengths,
        for  replacement of contaminated  sample
        line
        Tedlar bags, 1 liter,  at least one bag per
        sample point
        soil gas sampling labels,  field data sheets,
        logbook, etc.
        HNU Model  PI  101, or  other field  air
        monitoring  devices,   (one  per  sampling
        team)
        ice chest, for carrying equipment and for
        protection of samples (two per sampling
        team)
        metal detector  or   magnetometer,  for
        detecting   underground  utilities/
        pipes/drums (one per sampling team)
        Photovac GC, for   field-lab  anahsis  of
        bagged samples
        SUMMA canisters  (plus  their shipping
        cases)   for   sample,    storage   and
        transportation
        generator with extension  cords
        high lift jack assembly for removing probes
3.6     REAGENTS
        HNU  Systems Inc.  Calibration  Gas for
        HNU Model PI 101, and/or calibration gas
        for other field air monitoring devices
        deionizcd   organic-free   water,   for
        decontamination
        methanol,  HPLC   grade,  for
        decontamination
        ultra-zero grade compressed air,  for field
        blanks
     •   standard gas preparations for Photovac GC
        calibration and Tedlar bag spikes
3.7    PROCEDURES

3.7.1   Soil Gas Well Installation

1.   Initially, make a hole slightly deeper than the
    desired depth.  For sampling up to 5 feet, use
    a 5-foot single piston slam bar.   For  deeper
    depths, use a piston slam bar with threaded 4-
    foot-long extensions.  Other techniques can be
    used, so long as holes are of narrow diameter
    and no contamination is introduced.

2.   After the hole is made, carefully withdraw the
    slam bar to prevent collapse of the walls of the
    hole.  Then insert the soil gas probe.

3.   It is necessary to prevent plugging of the probe,
    especially for deeper holes.  Place a metal wire
    or cable, slightly longer than the probe, into the
    probe prior  to  inserting into the  hole.  Insert
    the  probe  to  full depth, then pull it up 3 to 6
    inches, then clear it by moving the cable up and
    down. The cable is removed before sampling,

4.   Seal the top of the sample hole at the surface
    against  ambient  air  infiltration  by  using
    modeling clay molded around the probe at the
    surface of the hole.

5.   If conditions  preclude  hand installation of the
    soil gas wells, the power driven  system may be
    employed.     Use   the   generator-powered
    demolition hammer to drive the  probe to the
    desired depth (up to  12  feet mav be attained
    with extensions).  Pull ihe probe up  1  to 3
    inches if the retractable point is used.  No clay
    is needed  to seal the hole.  After sampling,
    retrieve  the  probe  using  the  hieh  lift  jack
    assembly.

6.   If semi-permanent soil gas wells are  required,
    use   the  dedicated aluminum  probe  points.
    Insert these  points  into  the bottom  of the
    power-driven probe and attach it to the Teflon
    tubing.  Insert the probe as  in  step 5.  When
    the  probe is  removed, the point  and  Teflon
    tube remain in the hole, which may be scaled
    bv backfillinc with sand, bcntonite. or soil.
                                                 13

-------
3.7.2  Screening with Field
        instruments

1.  The well volume must be evacuated prior to
    sampling.  Connect the Gilian pump, adjusted
    to 3.0  L/min,  to the sample probe using a
    section of Teflon tubing as a connector. Turn
    the pump on, and a vacuum is pulled through
    the probe for approximately 15  seconds.  A
    longer  time is  required for sample  wells of
    greater depths.

2.  After  evacuation1, connect  the  monitoring
    instrument(s) to the  probe using  a Teflon
    connector.   When the reading is  stable,  or
    peaks,  record  the  reading.   For  detailed
    procedures   on  HNU  field  protocol,  see
    appendix B, and refer to  the manufacturer's
    instructions.

3.  Some readings  may  be above or  below  the
    range set on the field instruments.  The range
    may be reset, or the response recorded as a
    figure greater than or less than the range.
    Consider the recharge rate of the well with soil
    gas when sampling at a different  range setting.

3.7.3  Tedlar Bag Sampling

1.  Follow step 1 in section 3.7.2 to  evacuate well
    volume. If air monitoring instrument screening
    was performed prior to sampling, evacuation is
    not necessary.

2.  Use the vacuum box and sampling train (Figure
    3 in Appendix A) to  take the sample.  The
    sampling train  is designed  to minimize  the
    introduction of contaminants  and losses due to
    adsorption.  All wetled parts  are either Teflon-
    or  stainless steel.   The  vacuum  is drawn
    indirectly to avoid contamination from sample
    pumps.

3.  Place the Tedlar bag inside  the vacuum box,
    and attach it to  the sampling port. Attach the
    sample probe to the sampling port  via Teflon
    tubing and a "quick connect" fitting.

4.  Draw a vacuum  around the outside of the bag,
    using a Gilian pump connected to the vacuum
    box evacuation  port,  via Tygon  tubing and a
    "quick connect" fitting.  The vacuum  causes the
    bag to inflate, drawing the sample.
5.  Break the vacuum by removing the Tygon line
    from  the pump. Remove the baggeu sample
    from  the  box  and  close  valve.   Label  bag,
    record data on data  sheets  or  in  logbooks.
    Record the date, time, sample location ID, and
    the HNU,  or other instrument reading(s) on
    sample bag label.

CAUTION: Labels should not be pasted directly
onto the bags, nor should  bags be labeled directly
using a marker  or  pen.   Inks and adhesive  may
diffuse through the bag material, contaminating the
sample. Place  labels on the edge of the bags, or tie
the labels to the metal eyelets provided on the bags.
Markers with inks containing volatile organics (i.e.,
permanent ink markers)  should not be used.

3.7.4  Tenax Tube Sampling

Samples collected in Tedlar bags  may be sorbcd
onto Tenax tubes for further analysis by GC/MS.

Additional Apparatus

    •   Syringe  with a  luer-lock  tip capable of
        drawing a  soil  gas or air  sample from a
        Tedlar  bag  onto  a  Tenax/CMS sorbent
        tube.  The  syringe capacity is dependent
        upon the volume  of sample  being  drawn
        onto the sorbent tube.

    •   Adapters for  fitting  the  sorbent  tube
        between the Tedlar bag and  the sampling
        syringe.  The adapter attaching the Tedlar
        bag to  the sorbent   tube consists  of a
        reducing union (1/4-inch to 1/16-inch O.D.
        --  Swagelok cat.  #  SS-400-6-ILV  or
        equivalent)  with a  length of 1/4-inch O.D.
        Teflon tubing replacing the nut on the  1/6-
        inch (Tedlar bag) side.   A 1/4-inch  I.D.
        silicone O-ring replaces the ferrules in the
        nut on the 1/4-inch (sorbent  tube) side of
        the union.

        The adapter attaching the  sampling syringe
        to the sorbcnt tube consists of a  reducing
        union   (1/4-inch  to   1/16-inch  O.D.  -
        Swagelok   Cat.   #   SS-400-6-ILV   or
        equivalent)  with a 1/4-inch  I.D. silicone
        O-ring replacing the ferrules in the nut on
        the 1/4-inch (sorbent  tube) side and the
        needle   of  a  luer-lock  syringe  needle
        inserted into the  1/16-inch side  (held in
        place  with   a  1/16-inch   ferrule).    The
                                                 14

-------
        luer-lock end of the needle can be attached
        to the sampling syringe.  It is useful to have
        a  luer-lock on/off valve situated between
        the syringe and the needle.

     •   Two-stage glass sampling cartridge (1/4-
        inch  O.D. x  1/8-inch I.D. x 5  1/8 inch)
        contained   in   a  flame-sealed   tube
        (manufactured   by    Supelco   Custom
        Tenax/Spherocarb Tubes  or  equivalent)
        containing two sorbent sections retained by
        glass  wool:

        Front section:   150 mg of Tenax-GC
        Back  section:    150 mg of CMS
        (Carbonized Molecular Sieve)

        Sorbent tubes may also be prepared in the
        lab and  stored in either  Teflon-capped
        culture  tubes  or  stainless  steel   tube
        containers.  Sorbent tubes stored  in  this
        manner should not be kept more  than 2
        weeks without reconditioning.   (See SOP
        #2052  for   Tenax/CMS  sorbent   tube
        preparation).

     •   Teflon-capped  culture  tubes or stainless
        steel  tube containers  for  sorbent  tube
        storage.   These  containers  should   be
        conditioned by baking at 120ฐC for at least
        2 hours. The culture tubes should contain
        a glass wool plug to prevent sorbent tube
        breakage during transport. Reconditioning
        of the containers  should occur between
        usage or after extended periods of disuse
        (i.e., 2 weeks  or more).

    •   Nylon gloves  or lint-free cloth.  (Hewlett
        Packard Part  # 8650-0030 or equivalent.)

Sample  Collection

1.   Handle sorbent tubes with  care, using  nylon
    gloves  (or other  lint-free material) to  avoid
    contamination.

2.   Immediately before sampling, break one end of
    the  sealed  tube  and  remove  the  Tenax
    cartridge.  For in-house prepared tubes, remove
    cartridge from  its  container.

3.   Connect the valve on the Tedlar  bag to  the
    sorbent tube adapter. Connect the sorbent tube
    to  the sorbent tube adapter with  the  Tenax
           granular)  side of the tube facing  the
    Tedlar bag.

 4.  Connect the sampling syringe assembly to the
    CMS (black) side of the sorbent tube.  Fittings
    on the adapters should be very tight.

 5.  Open the valve on the Tedlar bag.

 6.  Open the on/off valve of the sampling syringe.

 7.  Draw a predetermined volume of sample onto
    the sorbent tube. (This may require closing the
    syringe  valve, emptying the syringe and then
    repeating the procedure, depending upon  the
    syringe   capacity  and   volume  of  sample
    required.)

 8.  After sampling, remove the tube  from  the
    sampling train with gloves or a clean cloth.  Do
    not label or write on the Tenax/CMS  tube.

 9.  Place  the  sorbent  tube  in  a  conditioned
    stainless steel  tube  holder or culture  tube
    Culture tube caps should be sealed with Teflon
    tape.

 Sample Labeling

 Each  sample tube  container (not tube) must  be
 labeled with the site name, sample station number,
 sample date, and  sample volume.

 Chain of custody forms must accompany all samples
 to the laboratory.

 Quality Assurance

 Before field  use, a QA check should be performed
 on each batch  of sorbent tubes by analyzing a tube
 with   thermal   desorption/cryogenic  trapping
 GC/MS.

 At least one blank sample must be submiitcd with
 each set of  samples collected at a site. This trip
 blank  must be treated the same as the sample tubes
 except  no sample will be drawn  through the tube.

Sample tubes should be stored out of UV light (i.e.,
sunlight) and kept on ice until analysis.

Samples  should  be  taken   in  duplicate, when
 possible.
                                                 15

-------
3.7.5  SUMMA Canister Sampling

1.   Follow item 1 in step 3.7.2 to evacuate well
    volume.  If HNU analysis was performed prior
    to taking a sample, evacuation is not necessary.

2.   Attach   a  certified  clean,  evacuated  6-L
    SUMMA canister via  the 1/4-inch  Teflon
    tubing.

3.   Open the valve on SUMMA canister. The soil
    gas  sample  is drawn  into the  canister  by
    pressure   equilibration.     The  approximate
    sampling time  for a 6-L  canister is 20 minutes.

4.   Site name, sample location, number, and date
    must  be  recorded on a  chain of custody form
    and on a blank tag attached to the canister.
3.8    CALCULATIONS

3.8.1  Field Screening Instruments

Instrument readings are usually read directly from
the meter. In some cases, the background level at
the soil gas station may be subtracted:
    Final Reading =
Sample Reading -
Background
3.8.2  Photovac GC Analysis

Calculations  used to determine  concentrations of
individual components by Photovac GC analysis are
beyond the scope of this SOP and are covered in
ERT SOP #2109, Photovac GC Analysis for Soil,
Water and Air/Soil  Gas.
3.9    QUALITY ASSURANCE/
       QUALITY CONTROL

3.9.1  Field Instrument Calibration

Consult the manufacturers' manuals for correct use
and calibration of all instrumentation.  The HNU
should be calibrated at least once a day.

3.9.2  Gilian Model HFS113A Air
       Sampling Pump  Calibration

Flow should  be set at approximately 3.0 L/min;
                             accurate flow adjustment is not necessary. Pumps
                             should be calibrated prior to bringing into the field.
3.9.3  Sample Probe Contamination

Sample probe contamination  is checked between
each sample by drawing ambient air  through the
probe via a Gilian pump and checking the response
of the HNU PI  101.  If HNU readings are higher
than background, replacement or decontamination
is necessary.

Sample probes may be decontaminated simply by
drawing ambient air  through  the probe until the
HNU reading is at background.  More persistent
contamination can be washed out using methanol
and water, then air drying.  Having more than one
probe per  sample team  will reduce  lag  times
between  .sample  stations  while   probes   are
decontaminated.

3.9.4  Sample Train  Contamination

The Teflon line forming the sample  train from the
probe to  the Tedlar  bag should be  changed  on a
daily basis.  If visible  contamination  (soil or water)
is  drawn into  the sampling  train,  it should  be
changed immediately.  When  sampling in highly
contaminated areas, the sampling train should be
purged  with ambient  air, via  a Gilian pump, for
approximately 30 seconds between each sample.
After purging, the sampling train can be checked
using an HNU, or other field monitoring device, to
establish the cleanliness of the Teflon  line.

3.9.5  Field Blank

Each cooler containing samples should also contain
one Tedlar bag of ultra-zero grade air, acting as a
field blank. The field blank should accompany the
samples in the  field  (while being  collected) and
when they are delivered for analysis. A fresh blank
must be provided to be placed in the empty cooler
pending additional sample collection. One new field
blank per cooler of samples is required. A chain of
custody  form  must  accompany each  cooler of
samples  and should  include  the  blank  that  is
dedicated to that group of samples.

3.9.6  Trip Standard

Each cooler containing samples should contain a
Tedlar  bag of standard  gas  to  calibrate the
                                               16

-------
 analytical instruments (Photovac GC, etc.).  This
 trip standard will be used to determine any changes
 in concentrations of the target compounds during
 the  course  of the  sampling  day (e.g.,  migration
 through   the   sample   bag,   degradation,  or
 adsorption). A fresh trip standard must be provided
 and placed in each cooler pending additional sample
 collection.   A chain of  custody form should
 accompany  each cooler  of samples  and should
 include the  trip standard that is  dedicated to that
 group of samples.

 3.9.7  Tedlar Bag Check

 Prior to use, one bag should be removed from each
 lot (case  of  100) of Tedlar bags to be  used for
 sampling and checked for possible contamination as
 follows: the test bag should be filled with ultra-zero
 grade air; a sample should be drawn from the bag
 and analyzed via Photovac GC or  whatever method
 is to be used for sample analysis.  This procedure
 will  ensure sample container cleanliness prior to the
 start of the sampling effort.

 3.9.8  SUMMA  Canister Check

 From each lot of four cleaned SUMMA  canisters,
 one  is to  be removed for a GC/MS certification
 check. If  the canister passes certification, then it is
 rc-cvacuatcd and all four canisters from that lot arc
 available for sampling.

 If the  chosen canister is contaminated,  then the
 entire  lot of  four  SUMMA  canisters  must be
 rcclcancd, and  a single canister is  rc-annly/cd by
 GC/MS for  certification.

 3.9.9  Options

Duplicate  Samples

A minimum  of 5%  of  all  samples should be
collected in duplicate (i.e., if a total  of 100 samples
 arc  to be  collected,  five  samples  should be
duplicated).     In  choosing  which  samples  to
 duplicate,  the following criterion  applies,  if,  after
 filling the  first Tedlar bag, and, evacuating the well
for 15 seconds,  the second  HNU (or other  field
monitoring device being used) reading matches or
is close  to  (within  50%)  the  first  reading,  a
duplicate sample may be (akcn.
Spikes

A Tedlar bag spike and Tenax tube spike may be
desirable in situations where high concentrations of
contaminants other than the target compounds are
found to exist (landfills, etc.).  The additional  level
of QA/QC attained by this practice can be useful in
determining the effects of interferences caused by
these non-target compounds.  SUMMA  canisters
containing samples are not spiked.
3.10   DATA VALIDATION

For   each   target  compound,   the   level   of
concentration found in the sample must be greater
than three times  the level  (for that compound)
found in the field blank which accompanied that
sample to be considered valid.  The  same criteria
apply to target  compounds detected in  the Tedlar
bag pre-sampling contamination check.
3.11   HEALTH AND SAFETY

Because   the   sample  is  being  drawn   from
underground, and no  contamination is  introduced
into  the breathing zone, soil gas sampling usually
occurs in Level D, unless the sampling location is
within the hot  zone of a site, which requires Level
B or Level C protection.  However, to ensure that
the proper level of protection is utilized, constantly
monitor the ambient air using the HNU PI 101 to
obtain backcround  readings during the sampling
procedure.  As long as the levels in ambient air do
not rise above  background, no upgrade of the level
of protection is needed

Also, perform an underground utility search prior to
sampling (sec  section  5 4.4).  When working with
potentially ha/ardous  materials, follow  U.S. EPA,
OSHA, and  specific health and safety procedures.
                                                 17

-------
                   4.0   General Surface Geophysics:   SOP #2159
 4.1     SCOPE AND APPLICATION

 This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) describes
 the general procedures  used to acquire surface
 geophysical data. This data is used  for delineating
 subsurface  waste, and  for interpreting  geologic,
 hydrogeologic or other  data related to hazardous
 waste site characterization.

 The media pertinent to  these surface geophysical
 methods are soil/rock  and groundwater.   The
 sensitivity or minimum response of a given method
 depends on the comparison of the object or area of
 study  to that  of its background (i.e.,  what  the
 media's  response would be like without the object
 of  study).   Therefore,  the suitability of surface
 geophysical methods for a given investigation must
 be judged on the object's ability to be measured and
 the extent to which the specific setting of the study
 interferes with the measurement.

 The  surface geophysical  method(s) selected  for
 application   at  a site   are  dependent   on  site
 conditions,  such  as  depth to bedrock, depth  to
 target,  urban disturbances  (fences, power  lines,
 surface  debris, etc.)  and  atmospheric  conditions.
 Detectability of the  target is dependent on  the
 sensitivity of the instrument and the variation of the
 field  measurement   from  the   ambient  noise.
 Ambient noise is the pervasive noise associated with
 an  environment.   Therefore,  the applicability  of
 geophysical methods  at a given site is dependent on
 the specific  setting at  that site.

 Five  geophysical  methods  may be utilized   in
 hazardous   waste   site   characterization:
 magnetometry,   electromagnetics,   resistivity,
 seismology and ground penetrating  radar  (GPR).
 Magnetometers  may be  used  to  locate buried
 ferrous  metallic objects and geologic information.
 Electromagnetic methods can be used to determine
 the  presence of metals, electrical conductivity of the
 terrain,   and  geologic information.   Resistivity
 methods  are used  to  determine  the  electrical
resistivity of the terrain and geologic information.
Seismic methods are useful in determining geologic
stratigraphy and structure.  GPR  may be  used  to
 locate disturbance in  the soil (i.e., trenches, buried
 utilities and  fill boundaries) and some near-surface
geologic  information.
 These  procedures  may  be varied  or changed  as
 required, dependent on  site conditions, equipment
 limitations or limitations imposed by the procedure.
 In all instances, the procedures employed should be
 documented and associated with the final report.
 4.2     METHOD SUMMARY

 4.2.1   Magnetics

 A magnetometer is an instrument which measures
 magnetic  field  strength  in  units  of  gammas
 (nanoteslas).  Local variations, or anomalies, in the
 earth's magnetic field are the result of disturbances
 caused mostly by variations in concentrations of
 ferromagnetic material  in  the  vicinity  of  the
 magnetometer's sensor.  A buried ferrous object,
 such  as  a  steel drum or tank, locally  distorts the
 earth's magnetic field and results in  a magnetic
 anomaly.  The objective of conducting a magnetic
 survey  at   a   hazardous  waste  or groundwater
 pollution site is  to map these  anomalies  and
 delineate the  area containing buried sources of the
 anomalies.

 Analysis of magnetic data can allow an experienced
 geophysicist to estimate  the areal extent of buried
 ferrous  targets, such  as  a steel  tank or  drum.
 Often,  areas  of burial  can  be  prioritized upon
 examination of the data, with  high  priori!) areas
 indicating  a  near  certainty  of  buried  ferrous
 material. In some instances,  estimates of depth of
 burial can  be  made from the data  Most of these
 depth  estimates   are   graphical   methods   o!
 interpretation, such as slope techniques and half-
 width rules, as described by Nellleton (1976). The
 accuracy of these methods is dependent upon th•".
 quality of the  data and the skill of the interpreting
 geophysicist.  An accuracy of 10 to 20 percent is
 considered acceptable. The magnetic method ma>
 also be used to map certain geologic features, such
 as igneous  intrusions, which may play an important
 role in the hydrogeology of  a groundwater pollution
 site.

Advantages

 Advantages of using the  magnetic method  for the
 initial assessment of hazardous waste sites are the
                                                 19

-------
relatively low cost of conducting the survey and the
relative ease  of  completing a survey  in  a  short
amount of time.  Little,  if any, site preparation is
necessary.   Surveying requirements  are  not  as
stringent  as  for  other   methods and  may be
completed  with a transit or Brunton-type pocket
transit and a non-metallic measuring  tape. Often,
a magnetic investigation is  a very  cost-effective
method for initial assessment of a hazardous waste
site  where  buried  steel  drums  or  tanks are a
concern.

Disadvantages

"Cultural noise" is  a limitation  of  the magnetic
method in certain areas.  Man-made structures that
are constructed with ferrous material,  such as steel,
have a detrimental effect  on the quality of the data.
Avoid features such as steel structures, power lines,
metal fences,  steel  reinforced concrete, pipelines
and underground utilities. When these features are
unavoidable, note their locations in a field notebook
and on the site map.

Another limitation  of the magnetic method is the
inability   of   the   interpretation   methods   to
differentiate between various steel objects.   For
instance, it is not possible  to  determine  if an
anomaly is  the result of a steel tank, or a group of
steel drums, or old washing machines.  Also, the
magnetic method does not allow the interpreter to
determine the contents of a  buried tank or drum.

4.2.2  Electromagnetics

The electromagnetic  method  is  a  geophysical
technique   based on  the  physical   principles  of
inducing and detecting electrical current flow within
geologic strata.  A  receiver detects these  induced
currents by measuring the  resulting  time-varying
magnetic  field.    The  electromagnetic  method
measures   bulk  conductivity   (the   inverse   of
resistivity)   of  geologic   materials   beneath   the
transmitter  and receiver coils.  Electromagnetics
should not be confused with the electrical resistivity
method. The difference between the tv-o techniques
is in the method  which the  electrical currents arc
forced  to flow in the earth.  In the electromagnetic
method, currents are induced by the application of
time-varying  magnetic   fields,  whereas  in   the
electrical resistivity  method,  current is injected into
the ground through surface electrodes.

Electromagnetics can be used to locate pipes, utility
lines, cables, buried steel drums, trenches, buried
waste, and concentrated contaminant plumes.  The
method can also be used to map shallow geologic
features, such as lithologic changes and fault zones.

Advantages

Electromagnetic measurements can be collected
rapidly and  with  a  minimum number  of  field
personnel. Most electromagnetic equipment used in
groundwater pollution investigations is lightweight
and easily portable. The electromagnetic method is
one  of  the more  commonly  used  geophysical
techniques  applied  to   groundwater  pollution
investigations.

Disadvantages

The main limitation of the electromagnetic method
is  "cultural noise".   Sources of "cultural noise" can
include:  large metal objects, buried cables, pipes,
buildings, and metal fences.

The electromagnetic method has limitations in areas
where the geology varies laterally. These can cause
conductivity anomalies or lineations, which might be
misinterpreted as contaminant plumes.

4.2.3  Electrical  Resistivity

The  electrical resistivity  method is used to map
subsurface electrical resistivity structure, which is in
turn interpreted by the geophysicist to determine
the geologic structure and/or physical properties of
the geologic materials.  Electrical resistivities  of
geologic materials are measured in ohm-meters, and
are  functions  of   porosity,  permeability,  water
saturation and the  concentration of  dissolved solids
in the  pore fluids.

Resistivity methods measure  the bulk resistivity of
the subsurface, as do the  electromagnetic methods.
The  difference between the  two methods is in  the
way that electrical currents arc forced to flow in the
earth.  In the electrical resistivity method, current is
injected into the ground through surface electrodes,
whereas in electromagnetic methods currents  arc
induced  by application of time-varying magnetic
fields.

-Advanfages

The  principal advantage of the electrical resistivity
method is that  quantitative  modeling  is  possible
                                                  20

-------
using either computer software or published master
curves.  The resulting models  can provide accurate
estimates of depths, thicknesses and resistivities of
subsurface layers.  The layer resistivities can then be
used  to  estimate  the  resistivity of  the  saturating
fluid, which is related to the total concentration of
dissolved solids in the fluid.

Disadvantages

The limitations  of using the resistivity method in
groundwater pollution site investigations are largely
due to site characteristics,  rather  than  Ln  any
inherent limitations of the  method.   Typically,
polluted sites are located  in  industrial areas that
contain an abundance of broad spectrum electrical
noise.    In  conducting a resistivity  survey,  the
voltages are relayed to the  receiver over long wires
that are grounded at each end. These wires act as
antennae receiving the radiated electrical noise that
in  turn  degrades  the  quality  of  the  measured
voltages.

Resistivity  surveys require a fairly  large area, far
removed  from  pipelines and grounded metallic
structures  such  as metal fences,   pipelines  and
railroad tracks.  This requirement precludes using
resistivity on many polluted  sites.   However,  the
resistivity method can often be  used successfully off-
site to map the stratigraphy of the area surrounding
the site.  A general "rule of thumb" for resistivity
surveying is that grounded structures be at least half
of the maximum  electrode spacing  distance away
from the axis of the survey line.

Another consideration in the  resistivity method is
that the fieldwork  tends to be  more labor intensive
than  some  other geophysical  techniques    A
minimum  of two  lo   three   crev.   members  are
required for  the fieldwork.

4.2.4  Seismic

Surface seismic techniques used  in groundwater
pollution site investigations are largely restricted to
seismic  refraction  and  seismic reflection methods.
The  equipment   used  for  both   methods  is
fundamentally the  same and both methods measure
the  travel-time   of acoustic  waves  propagating
through the subsurface.  In the refraction method,
the travel-time of waves refracted along an acoustic
interface is measured, and in the reflection method,
the travel-time of  a wave which  reflects or echoes
off an interface is  measured.
The  interpretation  of seismic  data  will  yield
subsurface velocity information, which is dependent
upon the  acoustic  properties  of the  subsurface
material.    Various geologic  materials  can  be
categorized by their acoustic properties or velocities.
Depth to geologic interfaces are calculated using the
velocities  obtained  from  a  seismic investigation.
The geologic information gained from a seismic
investigation is  then  used  in  the  hydrogeologic
assessment of a groundwater pollution site and the
surrounding  area.   The interpretation  of seismic
data .indicates  changes in lithology or stratigraphy,
geologic structure, or water saturation (water table).
Seismic methods are commonly used to determine
the   depth  and   structure   of  geologic   and
hydrogeologic    units,   to   estimate  hydraulic
conductivity, to detect cavities or voids, to determine
structure  stability, to  detect  fractures  and  fault
zones, and  to  estimate ripability.  The choice of
method depends upon the  information needed and
the nature of the study area.  This decision must be
made by a geophysicist who  is experienced in both
methods,  is  aware of the  geologic information
needed  by the hydrogeologist, and is also aware of
the environment of the study area.  The refraction
technique  has   been used  more often than the
reflection  technique  for  hazardous  waste  site
investigations.

Seismic Refraction Method

Seismic refraction is most  commonly used at sites
where bedrock is  less than 500 feet below the
ground  surface.  Seismic refraction is simply the
travel path of  a sound wave  through  an  upper
medium and along an interface and then back to the
surface.   A detailed  discussion of the  seismic
refraction technique can be found  in  Dobrin (1976),
Telford, et. al.  (1985), and Musgrave (1967).

Advantages:  Seismic refraction surveys are more
common   than   reflection   surveys   for   site
investigations.  The  velocities of each layer can be
determined from refraction  data, and a relatively
precise estimate of the depth to different interfaces
can be calculated.

Refraction surveys add to  depth information in-
between boreholes.  Subsurface  information can be
obtained between boreholes at a fraction  of the cost
of  drilling.    Refraction   data can be used  to
determine the depth to the water  table or bedrock.
In buried valley areas,  refraction  surveys map the
depth  to  bedrock.    The  velocity information
                                                   21

-------
obtained from a refraction survey can be related to
various  physical properties of the bedrock.  Rock
types have certain  ranges  of  velocities and these
velocities are not always unique to a particular rock
type.  However, they can  allow  a geophysicist to
differentiate between certain units, such  as shales
and granites.

Disadvantages:  The seismic refraction method
is  based on several assumptions.  To  successfully
resolve the subsurface using the refraction method,
the conditions  of the geologic environment must
approximate these assumptions:

    •   the velocities of the  layers  increase with
        depth,

    •   the velocity  contrast  between  layers is
        sufficient to resolve the interface, and

    •   the geometry of the geophones in relation
        to the  refracting  layers will  permit  the
        detection of thin layers.

These conditions must be met for accurate  depth
information.

Collecting and  interpreting seismic refraction data
has several disadvantages.  Data  collection can be
labor intensive. Also, large line lengths are needed;
therefore, as  a  general rule, the distance from the
shot, or  seismic source, to the first geophone station
must be at least three times the desired depth of
exploration.

Seismic Reflection  Method

The  seismic reflection method is  not as commonly
used on groundwatcr pollution site investigations as
seismic refraction. In the seismic reflection method,
a sound wave travels down to a geologic interface
and reflects back to the  surface.  Reflections occur
at an interface where  there  is  a  change in  the
acoustic properties of ihc subsurface material.

Advantages:   The  seismic reflection method
yields information  that  allows the  interpreter to
discern between fairly discrete layers, so it is  useful
for mapping stratigraphy. Reflection data is usually
presented in  profile form, and depths to  interfaces
are  represented as  a  function of  time.  Depth
information can be obtained by  converting time
sections into depth  measurements using velocities
obtained from seismic refraction data, sonic logs, or
velocity logs.   The reflection  technique  requires
much less space than refraction surveys.  The long
offsets of the seismic  source from the geophones,
common in refraction surveys, are not required in
the  reflection  method.     In   some   geologic
environments,  reflection data can  yield acceptable
depth estimates.

Disadvantages:   The major  disadvantage  to
using  reflection  data  is that  a  precise  depth
determination cannot be made.  Velocities obtained
from most reflection data are at least 10% and can
be 20% of the true velocities.  The interpretation of
reflection data requires a qualitative approach.   In
addition   to  being  more   labor  intensive,  the
acquisition of reflection data is more complex than
refraction data.

The reflection method places higher requirements
on  the  capabilities  of  the seismic  equipment.
Reflection data is commonly used in the petroleum
exploration industry and requires a large amount of
data processing time  and lengthy data collection
procedures.  Although mainframe computers are
often  used in the reduction and  analysis  of large
amounts of reflection data,  recent advances have
allowed for the  use of personal computers on small
reflection surveys for engineering purposes. In most
cases,  the data  must be   recorded   digitally   or
converted to  a digital format,  to employ various
numerical processing operations.  The use of high
resolution reflection seismic  methods relies heavily
on the geophysicist, the computer capacity, the data
reduction and   processing   programs,  resolution
capabilities of the seismograph and geophones, and
the ingenuity of the  interpreter.   Without these
capabilities,    reflection    surveys    are   not
recommended.

4.2.5  Ground Penetrating Radar

The  ground penetrating  radar (GPR) method is
used for a variety of civil  engineering,  groundwater
evaluation and  hazardous waste  site  applications.
This geophysical method is the most site-specific of
all  geophysical  techniques,   providing subsurface
information ranging in depth from several tens of
meters to only  a  fraction  of a  meter.   A basic
understanding  of  the   function  of the  GPR
instrument,  together  with   a  knowledge  of  the
geology  and  mineralogy of  the  site,  can help
determine if  GPR  will  be  successful in the  site
assessment.   When possible, the  GPR technique
should be integrated  with  other  geophysical  and
                                                  22

-------
 geologic data to provide the most comprehensive
 site assessment.

 The  GPR method uses a transmitter that  emits
 pulses of high-frequency electromagnetic waves into
 the subsurface.  The transmitter  is either moved
 slowly across the ground surface or moved at fixed
 station intervals. The penetrating electromagnetic
 waves are scattered  at  points  of change in  the
 complex dielectric permittivity, which is a property
 of the subsurface material dependent primarily upon
 the bulk density, clay content and water content of
 the   subsurface   (Olhoeft,    1984).     The
 electromagnetic energy which is scattered back to
 the receiving antenna on the surface is recorded as
 a function of time.

 Depth penetration is severely limited by attenuation
 of the transmitted electromagnetic wa\es into  the
 ground.   Attenuation is  caused  by the sum  of
 electrical conductivity, dielectric  relaxation,  and
 geometric scattering losses  in  the  subsurface.
 Generally, penetration  of radar  frequencies  is
 minimized by a shallow water table, an increase in
 the  clay  content  of  the  subsurface,  and   in
 environments where the electrical resistivity of  the
 subsurface is less than  30 ohm-meters (Olhoeft,
 1986). Ground penetrating radar works best in  dry
 sandy soil above the water table.   At applicable
 sites, depth resolution should  be between  1 and  10
 meters (Benson, 1982).

 The  analog  plot  produced  by  a  continuously
 recording GPR system is analogous  to a seismic
 reflection profile; that is. data is represented as a
 function of horizontal distance  versus time.  This
 representation  should not be   confused with  a
 geologic cross section which  represents data as a
 function   of  horizontal  distance   versus depth.
 Because very high-frequency electromagnetic waves
 in the megahertz range are used by radar systems,
 and time delays are measured in nanoseconds (10ฐ
 seconds), very high resolution of the subsurface is
 possible using GPR. This resolution can be as high
 as  0.1 meter.   For  depth  determinations,  it  is
 necessary to correlate the recorded features with
 actual depth measurements from boreholes or from
 the  results  of  other geophysical  investigations.
When properly interpreted, GPR data can optimally
resolve  changes in soil horizons, fractures,  water
insoluble contaminants, geological features, man-
made buried objects, and hydrologic features such
as water  table depth and wetting fronts.
Advantages

Most GPR systems can provide a continuous display
of  data along  a traverse  which  can  often  be
interpreted qualitatively in  the field.    GPR  is
capable of providing high resolution  data  under
favorable site conditions.  The real-time  capability
of GPR results  in a rapid turnaround, and  allows
the geophysicist to quickly evaluate subsurface site
conditions.

Disadvantages

One of the major limitations of GPR is the site-
specific nature of the technique. Another limitation
is the cost of site preparation which is necessary
prior to the  survey.   Most GPR units are  towed
across the ground  surface.   Ideally, the ground
surface should be flat, dry, and clear of any brush or
debris.  The quality of the data can be degraded by
a variety  of factors,  such  as an  uneven ground
surface or various cultural noise sources. For these
reasons, it  is mandatory that the site be visited by
the project geophysicist before a GPR investigation
is proposed.  The geophysicist should also evaluate
all  stratigraphic  information  available,  such  as
borehole data  and information  on  the  depth  to
water table in the survey area.
4.3    SAMPLE PRESERVATION,
        CONTAINERS,  HANDLING AND
        STORAGE

This section is not applicable to this SOP.
4.4     INTERFERENCES  AND
        POTENTIAL PROBLEMS

See section 4.2.1 for a discussion of limitations  of
the magnetic  method.

Sec section 4.2.2 for a discussion of limitations  of
the electromagnetic method.

See section 4.2.3 for a discussion of limitations  of
the electrical  resistivity method.

See section 4.2.4 for a discussion of limitations  of
the seismic  refraction method  and  the  seismic
reflection method.
                                                  23

-------
See section 4.2.5 for a discussion of limitations of
the ground penetrating radar (GPR) method.


4.5    EQUIPMENT/APPARATUS

4.5.1   Magnetics

    •   GEM GSM-19G
        magnetometer/gradiometer, EDA OMNI
        IV magnetometer/gradiometer,
        Geonics 856AGX (with built-in datalogger)
        or equivalent
    •   magnetometer base station
    •   300-foot tape measure
    •   non-ferrous  survey  stakes  (wooden  or
        plastic)

4.5.2   Electromagnetics

    •   Geonics EM-31, EM-34 or equivalent
    •   Polycorder datalogger
    •   Dat 31Q software (data dump software)
    •   300-foot tape measure
    •   survey stakes

4.5.3   Electrical Resistivity

    •   DC resistivity unit (non-specific)
    •   4 electrodes and appropriate cables (length
        dependent on depth of survey)
    •   1 or 2  12-volt  car batteries
    •   300-foot tape measure

4.5.4   Seismic

    •   12- or 24-channcl seismograph (Geometries
        2401 or  equivalent)
    •   30    lOHz  to  14Hx. geophones  (for
        refraction)
    •   30    50Hx. or greater geophones  (for
        reflection)
    •   300-foot tape measure
    •   survey stakes
    •   sledge  hammer and   metal  plate  or
        explosives

4.5.5   Ground Penetrating Radar
       GSSI SIR-8 or equivalent
       80   Mh/,   100   Mh/  or
       antenna/receiver pit
       200-foot cable
       300-foot tape measure
300  Mh/
                 4.6    REAGENTS

                 This section is not applicable to this SOP.


                 4.7    PROCEDURES

                 Refer to the manufacturer's operating manual for
                 specific  procedures  relating to operation  of the
                 equipment.


                 4.8    CALCULATIONS

                 Calculations vary based on the geophysical method
                 employed.  Refer to the instrument-specific users
                 manual for specific formulae.
                4.9    QUALITY ASSURANCE/
                        QUALITY CONTROL

                The following general quality  assurance activities
                apply to the implementation of these procedures.

                    •   All data must be documented on field data
                        sheets or within site logbooks.

                    •   All instrumentation  must be operated  in
                        accordance with operating instructions  as
                        supplied   by   the  manufacturer,  unless
                        otherwise specified  in  the  work  plan.
                        Equipment   checkout   and  calibration
                        activities   must   occur   prior    to
                        sampling/operation,  and they must  be
                        documented.

                Method-specific  quality assurance procedures may
                be found in the user's manual.
                4.10   DATA VALIDATION

                Evaluate data  as  per  the  criteria established  in
                section 4.9 above.
4.11   HEALTH AND SAFETY

When working with potentially ha/ardous materials
follow U.S. EPA, OSHA and specific  health an
safety procedures.
                                              24

-------
APPENDIX A




   Figures
    25

-------
   Figure 1:  Sampling Augers



          SOP #2012
 u
"J3E
              26

-------
    Figure 2:  Sampling Trier



          SOP #2012
r

             h
              n
:D
                   :.2"-2.5- cm

-------
                            Figure 3:  Sampling Train Schematic

                                       SOP  #2149
VACUUM
  BOX
                      EVACUATION
                        PORT
                                                           1/4" TEFLON TUBING
                                           SCREENING
                                              PORT
             TEDUR
              BAG
                                             1/4"  I.D. THIN  V/ALL
                                               TEFLON TUBING
                                                   1/4"  S.S.
                                                 SAMPLE  PROBE
                  SAMPL:NG
                   PORT
QUICK  CONNE
    FITTING
                                             28

-------
  APPENDIX B




HNU Field Protocol
      29

-------
                                       HNU Field Protocol
                                           SOP  #2149
Startup Procedure

1.   Before attaching the probe, check the function
    switch on the control panel to ensure that it is
    in  the "off position.  Attach  the probe by
    plugging it  into the  interface on the top of the
    readout module.    Use care in  aligning  the
    prongs in the  probe cord  with the socket: do
    not force it.

2.   Turn the function switch to the battery check
    position.  The needle on the meter should read
    within or above the  green area on the scale. If
    not, recharge the battery.  If the red indicator
    light comes on, the  battery needs recharging.

3.   Turn the function switch to any range setting.
    For no more than 2 to 3 seconds, look into the
    end of the probe to see if the lamp is on.  If it
    is on, you will see a purple glow.  Do not stare
    into the probe any  longer  than three seconds.
    Long term  exposure to UV light  can damage
    the eyes. Also, listen for  the hum of the  fan
    motor.

4.   To zero the instrument, turn the function switch
    to  the standby position and rotate  the zero
    adjustment  until  the  meter reads  zero.   A
    calibration  gas  is not needed since this is an
    electronic  zero  adjustment.    If  the  span
    adjustment  setting is changed after the zero is
    set, the zero should  be rechecked and adjusted,
    if necessary.  Wait  15 to 20 seconds to ensure
    that  the zero reading is stable.  If necessary,
    readjust the zero.

Operational Check

1.   Follow the  startup procedure.

2   With the instrument set on  the 0-20 range, hold
    a solvent-based Magic Marker near the probe
    tip.    If  the  meter  deflects  upscale,   the
    instrument  is  working.

Field Calibration Procedure

1   Follow   the   startup  procedure  and   the
    operational check.
2.   Set the function switch to the range setting for
    the concentration of the calibration gas.

3.   Attach  a  regulator  (HNU  101-351)  to  a
    disposable cylinder of isobutylene gas. Connect
    the regulator to the probe of the HNU with a
    piece of clean Tygon tubing.  Turn the valve on
    the regulator to the "on" position.

4.   After 15 seconds, adjust the span dial until the
    meter reading equals  the concentration of the
    calibration  gas used.   The  calibration gas is
    usually 100 ppm of isobutylene in zero air. The
    cylinders are marked in benzene equivalents for
    the  10.2 eV  probe (approximately  55  ppm
    benzene equivalent) and for the 11.7 eV probe
    (approximately 65 ppm benzene equivalent).
    Be careful to  unlock the  span dial before
    adjusting it. If the span has to be set below 3.0
    calibration, the lamp and ion chamber should
    be inspected and  cleaned as  appropriate. For
    cleaning  of the  11.7  eV probe, only use an
    electronic-grade, oil-free freon or similar water-
    free, grease-free solvent.

5.   Record in the field log: the  instrument  ID #
    (EPA decal or serial number if the instrument
    is  a  rental); the initial and final span settings;
    the date  and time; concentration and type of
    calibration  used;  and  the name of the person
    who calibrated the instrument.

Operation

1.   Follow  the  startup  procedure, operational
    check, and  calibration check.

2.   Set  the  function  switch to  the appropriate
    range. If the concentration of gases or vapors
    is  unknown, set the function  switch to the 0-20
    ppm range. Adjust it  as necessary.

3.   While taking care not to permit the HNU to be
    exposed  to   excessive  moisture,   dirt,   or
    contamination, monitor the  work activity as
    specified in the site health and safety plan.

4.   When the activity is completed or at the end of
    the day, carefully  clean the outside of the HNU
    with a damp disposable towel  to remove any
                                                  30

-------
    visible dirt. Return the HNU to a secure area        plastic to prevent it from  becoming contaminated
    and place on charge.                                 and to prevent water from getting inside in the
                                                        event of precipitation.
5.   With  the exception of the probe's inlet and
    exhaust, the HNU can be wrapped in clear
                                                  31

-------
                                        References

 SOPs #2006, 2012, 2149

 American Standards for Testing and Materials.  1988. Standard Method for Preparing Test and Split-
        Barrel Sampling of Soils: Annual Book of ASTM Standards.  Section 4, Volume 4.08.  ASTM
        D1586-84.

 Barth, D.S. and B J. Mason.  1984. Soil Sampling Quality Assurance User's Guide.  EPA/600/4-
        84/043.

 de Vera, E.R., B.Pf Simmons, R.D. Stephen, and D.L. Storm.  1980.  Samplers and Sampling
        Procedures for Hazardous Waste Streams. EPA/600/2-80/018.

 Gilian Instrument Corp.  1983.  Instruction Manual for Hi Flow Sampler: HFS 113, HFS 113 T, HFS
        113 U, HFS 113 UT.

 HNU Systems, Inc.  1975.  Instruction Manual for Model PI 101 Photoionization Analyzer.

 Mason, B.J. 1983.  Preparation of Soil Sampling Protocol: Technique and Strategies.  EPA/600/4-
        83/020.

 National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. October, 1985.  Occupational Safety and Health
        Guidance Manual for Hazardous Waste  Site Activities. NIOSH/OSHA/USCG/EPA.

 New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection. February, 1988. Field Sampling Procedures
        Manual.

 Roy F. Weston, Inc.  1987.  Weston Instrumentation Manual,  Volume I.

 U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency. December, 1984. Characterization of Hazardous Waste Sites -
        A Methods Manual:  Volume  II, Available Sampling Methods, 2nd Edition.  EPA/600/4-
        84/076.

 U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency. April 1,  1986. Engineering Support  Branch Standard
        Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Manual.  U.S.  EPA Region IV.

 L" S  Environmental Protection Agency  1987.  A Compendium of Supcrfund Field Operations
        Methods.  EPA/540/P-S7/001.  Office of Emergency and Remedial Response. Washington,
        D.C. 20460.
SOP #2159

        Magnetics

Breincr, S.  1973. Applications Manual for Portable Magnetometers:  EG&G GeoMctrics.  Sunnyvale,
        California.

Fowler, J. and D. Pasicznyk.  February, 1985.  Magnetic Survey Methods Used in the Initial Assessment
        of a Waste  Disposal Site:  National Water Well Association Conference on Surface and
        Borehole Geophysics.
                                             33

-------
Lilley, F. 1968. Optimum Direction of Survey Lines.  Geophysics 33(2): 329-336.

Nettleton, L.L. 1976.  Elementary Gravity and Magnetics for Geologists and Seismologists: Society of
        Exploration Geophysicists.  Monograph Series Number L

Redford, M.S. 1964. Magnetic Anomalies over Thin Sheets.  Geophysics 29(4): 532-536.

Redford, M.S. 1964. Airborne Magnetometer  Surveys for Petroleum Exploration:  Aero Service
        Corporation.  Houston, Texas.

Vacquier, V. and others. 195L Interpretation of Aeromagnetic Maps:  Geological Society of America.
        Memoir Number 47.
        Electromagnetics

Duran, P.B. 1982. The Use of Electromagnetic Conductivity Techniques in the Delineation of
        Groundwater Pollution Plumes:  unpublished master's thesis, Boston University.

Grant, F.S. and G.F. West.  1965. Interpretation Theory in Applied Geophysics. McGraw-Hill Book
        Company, New York, New York.

Greenhouse, J.P., and D.D. Slaine.  1983.  The Use of Reconnaissance Electromagnetic Methods to
        Map Contaminant Migration. Ground Water Monitoring Review 3(2).

Keller, G.V. and EC. Frischknecht.  1966.  Electrical Methods in  Geophysical Prospecting.  Pergamon
        Press, Long Island City, New York.

McNeill, J.D.  1980.  Electromagnetic Terrain Conductivity Measurements at Low Induction Numbers.
        Technical Note TN-6,  Geonics Limited. Mississauga, Ontario, Canada.

McNeill, J.D.  1980.  EM34-3 Survey Interpretation Techniques. Technical Note TN-8, Geonics
        Limited. Mississauga, Ontario, Canada.

McNeill, J.D.  1980.  Electrical Conductivity of Soils and Rocks. Technical Note TN-5, Geonics
        Limited. Mississauga, Ontario, Canada.

McNeill, J.D. and M.  Bosnar.  1986.  Surface and Borehole Electro-Magnetic Groundwater
        Contamination Surveys, Pittman Lateral Transect, Nevada:  Technical Note TN-22, Geonics
        Limited. Mississauga, Ontario, Canada.

Stewart,  M.T.  1982.  Evaluation of Electromagnetic Methods for Rapid Mapping of Salt Water
        Interfaces in Coastal Aquifers.  Ground Water 20.

Telford, W.M.,  L.P. Geldart, R.E. Sheriff, and DA.  Keys. 1977. Applied Geophysics. Cambridge
        University Press.   New York, New  York.
        Electrical Resistivity

Bisdorf, RJ. 1985. Electrical Techniques for Engineering Applications. Bulletin of the Association of
        Engineering Geologists 22(4).
                                               34

-------
Grant, F.S. and G.F. West.  1965.  Interpretation Theory in Applied Geophysics.  McGraw-Hill Book
        Company, New York, New York.

Keller, G.V. and EC. Frischnecht.  1966. Electrical Methods in Geophysical Prospecting.  Pergamon
        Press, Long Island City, New York.

Kelly, W.E. and R.K. Frohlich. 1985. Relations between Aquifer Electrical and Hydraulic Properties.
        Ground Water 23:2.

Stellar, R. and P. Roux  1975. Earth Resistivity Surveys -- A Method for Defining "Groundwater
        Contamination.  Ground Water 13.

Sumner, J.S.  1976;  Principles of Induced Polarization for Geophysical Exploration.  Elsevier Scientific
        Publishing, New York, New York.

Telford, W.M., L.P. Geldart, R.E. Sheriff, and DA. Keys. 1977.  Applied Geophysics.  Cambridge
        University Press, New York, New York.

Urish, D.W.  1983.  The Practical  Application of Surface Electrical Resistivity to Detection of Ground
        Water Pollution.  Ground Water 21

Van Nostrand, R.E,, and L.K. Cook.  1966.  Interpretation of Resistivity Data: U.S. Geological Survey
        Professional Paper 499, Washington, D.C.

Zohdy, AA.R.  1975.  Automatic Interpretation of Schlumberger Sounding Curves Uusing Modified
        Dar Zarrouk Functions.  U.S. Geological Survey Bulletin 1313-E, Denver, Colorado.
Coffeen, JA.  1978. Seismic Exploration Fundamentals.  PennWell Publishing, Tulsa, Oklahoma.

Dobrin, M.B.  1976.  Introduction to Geophysical Prospecting; 3rd ed.  McGraw-Hill, New York, New
        York.

Griffiths, D.H. and R.E. King. 1981. Applied Geophysics for Geologists and Engineers. Second edition.
        Pergamon Press, Oxford, England.

Miller, R.D., S.E. Pullan, J.S. Waldner. and F.P. Haeni.  1986.  Field Comparison of Shallow Seismic
        Sources.  Geophysics 51(11): 2067-92.

Musgrave, A.W.  1967.  Seismic Refraction Prospecting.  The Society of Exploration Geophysicists.
        Tulsa, Oklahoma.

Telford, W.M, L.P. Geldant,  R.E. Sheriff, and DA. Keys. 1985. Applied Geophysics.  Cambridge
        University Press, Cambridge, England.
        Ground Penetrating Radar

Benson, R.C., RA. Glaccum, and M.R. Noel.  1982.  Geophysical Tecliniqites for Sensing Buried Wastes
        and Waste Migrations.  Technos Inc.  Miami,  Florida.  236 pp.
                                               35

-------
Olehoft, G.R. 1984. Applications and Limitations of Ground Penetrating Radar:  Expanded Abstracts,
        Society of Exploration Geophysicists.  54th Annual Meeting: December 2-6, 1984.  Atlanta,
        Georgia.  147-148.
                                               36

-------
           APPENDIX D
Compendium of ERT Surface Water and
    Sediment Sampling Procedures

-------
                                                   EPA/540/P-91/005
                                              OSWER Directive 9360 4-03
                                                       January 1991
COMPENDIUM OF ERT SURFACE WATER AND
               SEDIMENT SAMPLING
                     PROCEDURES
                Sampling Equipment Decontamination

                Surface Water Sampling

                Sediment Sampling
                         Interim Final
                    Environmental Response Team
                    Emergency Response Division
               Office of Emergency and Remedial Response
                 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
                      Washington, DC 20460
                                                Printed on Recycled Paper

-------
                                             Notice
This document has been reviewed in accordance with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency policy and approved
for  publication.   Mention of trade names or commercial  products does not constitute  endorsement or
recommendation for use.

The policies and procedures established in this document are intended solely for the guidance of government
personnel, for use in the Superfund Removal Program.  They are not intended, and cannot be relied upon, to
create any rights, substantive or procedural, enforceable by any party in litigation with the United States.  The
Agency reserves the right to act at variance with these policies and procedures and to change  them at any time
without public notice.

Depending on circumstances and needs, it may not be possible or appropriate to follow these procedures exactly
in all situations due  to site conditions, equipment limitations,  and limitations of the  standard procedures.
Whenever these procedures cannot be followed as written, they may be used as general guidance with any and
all modifications fully documented in either QA Plans, Sampling Plans, or final reports of results.

Each Standard Operating Procedure in this compendium contains  a discussion on quality assurance/quality
control (QA/QC).  For more information on QA/QC objectives and  requirements, refer to the Quality
Assurance/Quality Control Guidance for Removal Activities, OSWER directive  9360.4-01, EPA/540/G-90/004.

Questions, comments, and recommendations are welcomed regarding the Compendium of ERT Surface Water
and Sediment Sampling Procedures.  Send remarks to:

                                       Mr. William A. Coakley
                                  Removal Program QA Coordinator
                                          U.S.  EPA - ERT
                                 Raritan Depot  - Building 18, MS-101
                                      2890 Woodbridge Avenue
                                        Edison, NJ 08837-3679

For additional copies of the Compendium of ERT  Surface Water and Sediment Sampling Procedures, please
contact:

                            National Technical Information Service (NTIS)
                                    U.S. Department of Commerce
                                        5285 Port Royal Road
                                        Springfield, VA 22161
                                           (703) 487-4600

-------
                                      Table of Contents

Section                                                                                      Page

1.0     SAMPLING EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION:  SOP #2006

       1.1     Scope and Application                                                             1
       1.2     Method Summary                                                                1
       1.3     Sample Preservation, Containers, Handling, and Storage                               1
       1.4     Interferences and Potential Problems                                                1
       1.5     Equipment/Apparatus                                                             1
       1.6     Reagents                                  .                                      2
       1.7     Procedures                                                                       2

               1.7.1    Decontamination Methods                                                  2
               1.7.2    Field Sampling Equipment Cleaning Procedures                               3

       1.8     Calculations                                                                      3
       1.9     Quality Assurance/Quality Control                                                  3
       1.10    Data Validation                                                                  4
       1.11    Health and Safety                                                                4


2.0     SURFACE WATER SAMPLING: SOP #2013

       2.1     Scope and Application                                                             5
       2.2     Method Summary                                                                5
       2.3     Sample Preservation, Containers, Handling, and Storage                               5
       2.4     Interferences and Potential Problems                                                5
       2.5     Equipment/Apparatus                                                             5
       2.6     Reagents                                                                        6
       2.7     Procedures                                                                       6

               2.7.1    Preparation                                                               6
               2.7.2    Sampling Considerations                                                   6
               2.7.3    Sample Collection                                                         6

       2.8     Calculations                                                                      7
       2.9     Quality Assurance/Quality Control                                                  7
       2.10    Data Validation                                                                  7
       2.11    Health and Safety                                                                8


3.0     SEDIMENT SAMPLING: SOP #2016

       3.1     Scope and Application                                                             9
       3.2     Method Summary                                                                9
       3.3     Sample Preservation, Containers, Handling, and Storage                               9
       3.4     Interferences and Potential Problems                                               10
       3.5     Equipment/Apparatus                                                            10
       3.6     Reagents                                                                       10
       3.7     Procedures                                                                      10
                                               111

-------
Section                                                                                        Page

               3.7.1    Preparation                                                               10
               3.7.2    Sample Collection                                                         10

        3.8     Calculations                                                                      13
        3.9     Quality Assurance/Quality Control                                                 13
        3.10    Data Validation                                                                   13
        3.11    Health and Safety                                                                 14


APPENDIX A - Figures                                                                          15


REFERENCES                                                                                  23
                                                 IV

-------
                                     List of Exhibits
 xhibit
Table 1: Recommended Solvent Rinse for Soluble Contaminants
Figure 1:  Kemmerer Bottle
Figure 2:  Bacon Bomb Sampler
Figure 3:  Dip Sampler
Figure 4:  Sampling Auger
Figure 5:  Ekman Dredge
Figure 6:  Ponar Dredge
Figure 7:  Sampling Core Device
 SOP








#2006





#2013





#2013





#2013





#2016





#2016





#2016





#2016
Page
  16






  17






  18





  19






  20






  21






  22

-------
                                    Acknowledgments
Preparation of this document was directed by William A. CoakJey, the Removal Program QA Coordinator of
the Environmental Response Team, Emergency Response Division. Additional support was provided under U.S.
EPA contract #68-03-3482 and U.S. EPA contract #68-WO-0036.
                                              VI

-------
     1.0    SAMPLING EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION:  SOP #2006
1.1     SCOPE AND APPLICATION

This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) describes
methods  used  for preventing or reducing cross-
contamination,  and provides general guidelines for
sampling equipment decontamination procedures at
a hazardous waste site.  Preventing or minimizing
cross-contamination  in  sampled media  and  in
samples is important for preventing the introduction
of error into sampling results and for protecting the
health and safety of site personnel.

Removing or neutralizing contaminants that  have
accumulated   on   sampling equipment  ensures
protection of personnel from  permeating substances,
reduces or eliminates transfer of contaminants to
clean  areas, prevents the mixing of incompatible
substances, and minimizes the likelihood of sample
cross-contamination.
1.2    METHOD SUMMARY

Contaminants can  be  physically removed  from
equipment,   or  deactivated  by  sterilization  or
disinfection.   Gross  contamination of equipment
requires  physical   decontamination,  including
abrasive and  non-abrasive methods.  These include
the use of brushes, air and wet blasting, and high-
pressure water cleaning, followed by a wash/rinse
process using appropriate cleaning solutions.  Use
of  a  solvent  rinse  is  required  when  organic
contaminalion is present.
1.3    SAMPLE PRESERVATION,
       CONTAINERS, HANDLING, AND
       STORAGE

This scclion is not applicable to this SOP.
1.4     INTERFERENCES AND
        POTENTIAL PROBLEMS

    •   The  use  of  di.slil!ed/deioni/ed   wjler
        commonly  available  from  commercial
        vendors   may   be   acceptable   for
        decontamination  of sampling equipment
       provided  that  it  has  been  verified  by
       laboratory analysis to be analyte free.

       An untreated potable  water supply is not
       an acceptable substitute for tap water. Tap
       water may be used from any  municipal
       water treatment system  for  mixing  of
       decontamination solutions.

       Acids  and   solvents   utilized  in  the
       decontamination sequence pose the health
       and  safety risks  of  inhalation  or skin
       contact,  and raise  shipping concerns  of
       permeation or degradation.

       The site work plan must address disposal
       of the spent decontamination solutions.

       Several procedures  can  be established to
       minimize  contact  with  waste  and  the
       potential for contamination. For example:

              Stress   work   practices   that
              minimize contact  with hazardous
              substances.

              Use remote  sampling,  handling,
              and container-opening techniques
              when appropriate.

              Cover  monitoring  and sampling
              equipment with protective malerial
              to minimi/.c contamination.

              Use disposable  outer  garments
              and   disposable   sampling
              equipment when appropriate.
1.5    EQUIPMENT/APPARATUS

    •  appropriate personal protective clothing
    •  non-pliosplialc detergent
    •  selected solvents
    •  long-handled brushes
    •  drop clolhs/pl.i.slic .sheeting
    •  trash container
    •  paper towels
    •  g.ilvani/ed tubs or (nickels
    •  lap w.iler

-------
        distilled/deionized water
        metal/plastic containers for storage  and
        disposal of contaminated wash solutions
        pressurized   sprayers  for   tap   and
        deionized/distilled water
        sprayers for solvents
        trash bags
        aluminum foil
        safety glasses or splash shield
        emergency eyewash bottle
1.6     REAGENTS

There are no reagents used in this procedure aside
from  the actual  decontamination solutions  and
solvents.   In general,  the following solvents are
utilized for decontamination purposes:

    •   10% nitric acid(1)
    •   acetone (pesticide grade)(2>
    •   hexane (pesticide grade)(2)
    •   methanol

(1)  Only if sample is to be analyzed for trace metals.
(2)  Only if sample is to be analyzed for organics.
1.7     PROCEDURES

As part of the health and safety plan, develop and
set up a decontamination plan before any personnel
or equipment enter the areas of potential exposure.
The   equipment  decontamination  plan  should
include:

    •   the   number,  location,   and  layout  of
        decontamination stations

    •   which decontamination apparatus is needed

    •   the appropriate decontamination methods

    •   methods  for  disposal of  contaminated
        clothing, apparatus, and solutions

1.7.1   Decontamination Methods

All personnel, samples, and equipment  leaving the
contaminated  area   of   a   site   must   be
decontaminated. Various decontamination  methods
will   either  physically   remove   contaminants,
inactivate   contaminants   by   disinfection   or
sterilisation, or  do both.
In many cases, gross contamination can be removed
by physical means.  The physical decontamination
techniques   appropriate   for   equipment
decontamination  can   be  grouped   into   two
categories:   abrasive  methods  and  non-abrasive
methods.

Abrasive  Cleaning Methods

Abrasive cleaning methods work by rubbing and
wearing away the top layer of the surface containing
the contaminant.  The following abrasive methods
are available:

    •   Mechanical: Mechanical cleaning methods
        use brushes of  metal or  nylon.    The
        amount and type of contaminants removed
        will vary with the  hardness  of bristles,
        length of brushing time, and degree of
        brush  contact.

    •   Air Blasting:   Air  blasting  is used  for
        cleaning  large   equipment,   such  as
        bulldozers,  drilling rigs or auger bits.  The
        equipment  used  in  air  blast  cleaning
        employs compressed air to  force abrasive
        material through a nozzle at high velocities.
        The distance between  the nozzle and  the
        surface cleaned, as well as the pressure of
        air, the time of application,  and the  angle
        at  which the abrasive  strikes  the surface,
        determines  cleaning efficiency. Air blasting
        has several  disadvantages:  it  is unable to
        control the  amount of material removed, it
        can aerate  contaminants, and it generates
        large amounts of waste.

    •   Wet  Blasting:   Wet  blast  cleaning,  also
        used to clean large equipment, involves use
        of a suspended  fine abrasive  delivered by
        compressed air to the contaminated area.
        The amount of  materials removed can be
        carefully  controlled by using  very  fine
        abrasives.   This method generates a large
        amount  of waste.

Non-Abrasive Cleaning Methods

Non-abrasive cleaning methods work by forcing the
contaminant off of a surface with  pressure.  In
general, less of the  equipment surface is removed
using non-abrasive  methods.   The following  non-
abrasive methods arc available:

-------
     •   High-Pressure  Water:     This  method
        consists  of  a high-pressure   pump,  an
        operator-controlled directional nozzle, and
        a high pressure hose.  Operating pressure
        usually ranges from 340 to 680 atmospheres
        (atm) which  relates to flow rates of 20 to
        140 liters per minute.

     •   Ultra-High-Pressure Water:   This system
        produces  a pressurized  water jet  (from
        1,000 to  4,000  atm).   The  ultra-high-
        pressure   spray  removes tightly-adhered
        surface  film.  The water velocity ranges
        from 500 m/sec (1,000 atm) to 900 m/sec
        (4,000  atm).   Additives  can  enhance the
        method.  This method is not applicable for
        hand-held sampling equipment.

Disinfection/Rinse Methods

     •   Disinfection:  Disinfectants are a practical
        means of inactivating infectious agents.

     •   Sterilization:       Standard    sterilization
        methods  involve heating  the  equipment.
        Sterilization   is   impractical   for  large
        equipment.

     •   Rinsing:   Rinsing removes  contaminants
        through dilution,  physical attraction,  and
        solubilization.

1.7.2   Field Sampling Equipment
        Cleaning Procedures

Solvent  rinses are not necessarily required  when
organics are not a contaminant of concern and  may
be eliminated from the sequence specified below.
Similarly, an acid rinse is  not required if analysis
does not include inorganics.

1.   Where  applicable, follow  physical  removal
    procedures specified in section 1.7.1.

2.   Wash  equipment  with   a  non-phosphate
    detergent solution.

3.   Rinse with tap water.

4.   Rinse with distillcd/dcionizcd water.

5.   Rinse with 10% nitric acid if the sample will be
    analyzed for trace organics.
6.  Rinse with distilled/dcionizcd water.

7.  Use a solvent rinse  (pesticide grade)  if the
    sample will be analyzed for organics.

8.  Air dry the equipment completely.

9.  Rinse again with distilied/deionized water.

Selection   of  the  solvent  for  use   in  the
decontamination   process  is   based   on  the
contaminants present at the site.  Use of a solvent
is required when  organic contamination is present
on-site.   Typical solvents  used for  removal  of
organic contaminants include  acetone, hexane,  or
water.  An acid rinse step is required if  metals are
present on-site. If a particular contaminant fraction
is  not  present   at  the  site,  the   nine-step
decontamination  procedure listed above  may  be
modified for  site  specificity. The decontamination
solvent used should not be among the contaminants
of concern at the site.

Table 1 lists  solvent rinses which may be required
for elimination of particular chemicals.  After each
solvent rinse, the equipment should be air dried and
rinsed with distilled/deionized water.

Sampling equipment that requires the use of plastic
tubing  should  be disassembled and  the   tubing
replaced with clean tubing, before commencement
of sampling and between sampling locations.
1.8     CALCULATIONS

This section is not applicable to this SOP.
1.9     QUALITY ASSURANCE/
        QUALITY CONTROL

One type  of quality control sample specific to the
field decontamination process is the rinsatc blank.
The  rinsate  blank provides  information on  the
effectiveness   of   the   decontamination  process
employed  in the field.  When used in conjunction
with field blanks and trip blanks, a rinsatc  blank can
detect   contamination  during sample   handling,
storage and sample transportation to the laboratory

-------
            Table 1:  Recommended Solvent Rinse for Soluble Contaminants
               SOLVENT
             SOLUBLE CONTAMINANTS
 Water
•   Low-chain hydrocarbons
•   Inorganic compounds
•   Salts
•   Some organic acids and other polar compounds
 Dilute Acids
•   Basic (caustic) compounds
•   Amines
•   Hydrazines
 Dilute Bases - for example, detergent
 and soap
•   Metals
•   Acidic compounds
•   Phenol
•   Thiols
•   Some nitro and sulfonic compounds
 Organic Solvents'1' - for example,
 alcohols, ethers, ketones, aromatics,
 straight-chain alkanes (e.g., hexane), and
 common petroleum products (e.g., fuel,
 oil, kerosene)
    Nonpolar compounds (e.g., some organic compounds)
(i)
  - WARNING:  Some organic solvents can permeate and/or degrade protective clothing.
A rinsate blank consists of a sample of analyte-free
(i.e, deionized)  water  which is  passed  over and
through a field decontaminated sampling device and
placed in a clean sample container.

Rinsate blanks should be run for all parameters of
interest at  a  rate of 1  per 20 for each parameter,
even if samples  are not shipped that day.  Rinsate
blanks  are not required  if dedicated  sampling
equipment is used.
1.10    DATA VALIDATION

This section is not applicable to this SOP.


1.11    HEALTH AND SAFETY

When working with potentially hazardous materials,
follow U.S. EPA,  OSHA  and  specific health and
safely procedures.

Decontamination can pose  hazards under certain
circumstances even though performed to protect
            health and safety.  Hazardous substances may be
            incompatible with decontamination methods.  For
            example, the decontamination solution or solvent
            may  react with contaminants to  produce  heat,
            explosion,  or  toxic products.   Decontamination
            methods may  be  incompatible  with clothing or
            equipment; some solvents can permeate or degrade
            protective clothing.  Also, decontamination solutions
            and solvents may pose a direct health hazard to
            workers through inhalation  or skin  contact, or if
            they combust.

            The decontamination solutions and solvents must be
            determined to be compatible before use.   Any
            method  that  permeates, degrades,  or  damages
            personal protective equipment should not be used.
            If decontamination methods pose a direct health
            hazard,  measures  should  be  taken  to protect
            personnel or the methods should be modified to
            eliminate the hazard.

-------
                2.0   SURFACE WATER SAMPLING:   SOP #2013
2.1    SCOPE AND APPLICATION

This Standard Operating Procedure  (SOP) is
applicable to the collection of representative liquid
samples,  both aqueous  and nonaqueous  from
streams, rivers, lakes, ponds,  lagoons, and surface
impoundments. It includes samples collected from
depth, as well as samples collected from the surface.
2.2    METHOD SUMMARY

Sampling situations vary widely and therefore no
universal sampling procedure can be recommended.

However, sampling of both aqueous and  non-
aqueous liquids from the above mentioned sources
is generally accomplished through the use of one of
the following samplers or techniques:

    •  Kemmerer bottle
    •  bacon bomb sampler
    •  dip sampler
    •  direct method

These  sampling techniques  will allow  for  the
collection of representative samples from  the
majority  of  surface  waters  and impoundments
encountered.
2.3    SAMPLE PRESERVATION,
       CONTAINERS, HANDLING, AND
       STORAGE

Once samples have been collected, follow these
procedures:

1.  Transfer the sample(s)  into suitable  labeled
   sample containers.

2.  Preserve the sample if appropriate, or use pre-
   prescrved sample bottles.

3.  Cap the container, put it  in a Ziploc plastic bag
   and place it on ice in a cooler.

4.  Record  all pertinent data in the site logbook
   and on a field data sheet.
5.   Complete the chain of custody form.

6.   Attach  custody seals to  the cooler  prior to
    shipment.

7.   Decontaminate all sampling equipment prior to
    the collection of additional samples.
2.4    INTERFERENCES AND
       POTENTIAL PROBLEMS

There are two primary interferences  or potential
problems with  surface water sampling.   These
include  cross-contamination  of  samples  and
improper sample collection.

    •  Cross-contamination  problems  can  be
       eliminated or minimized through the use of
       dedicated sampling equipment.  If this is
       not  possible   or  practical,  then
       decontamination of sampling equipment is
       necessary.  Refer to ERT SOP  #2006,
       Sampling Equipment Decontamination.

    •  Improper sample collection  can  involve
       using contaminated equipment, disturbance
       of the stream or  impoundment substrate,
       and sampling in  an obviously disturbed
       area.

Following proper  decontamination procedures and
minimizing  disturbance of  the  sample site will
eliminate these problems.
2.5    EQUIPMENT/APPARATUS

Equipment needed for collection of surface water
samples includes:

    •  Kemmerer bottles
    •  bacon bomb sampler
    •  dip sampler
    •  line and messengers
    •  sample bottle preservatives
    •  Ziploc bags
    •  ice
    •  coolcr(s)
    •  chain of custody forms, Held data sheets

-------
       decontamination equipment
       maps/plot plan
       safety equipment
       compass
       tape measure
       survey stakes, flags, or buoys and anchors
       camera and film
       logbook/waterproof pen
       sample bottle labels
2.6    REAGENTS

Reagents will be utilized for preservation of samples
and for decontamination of sampling equipment.
The  preservatives required  are  specified  by the
analysis to  be  performed.    Decontamination
solutions  are  specified  in  ERT  SOP  #2006,
Sampling Equipment Decontamination.
2.7     PROCEDURES

2.7.1   Preparation

1.   Determine the extent of the sampling effort, the
    sampling methods to be employed, and which
    equipment and supplies are needed.

2.   Obtain necessary sampling  and monitoring
    equipment.

3.   Decontaminate or  preclean  equipment,  and
    ensure that it is in working order.

4.   Prepare scheduling and coordinate with staff,
    clients, and regulatory agency, if appropriate.

5.   Perform a general site survey prior to site entry
    in accordance with the site-specific health and
    safety plan.

6.   Use stakes, flags,  or buoys to identify and mark
    all  sampling  locations.    If required,  the
    proposed  locations may be adjusted based on
    site access, property boundaries, and surface
    obstructions.

2.7.2  Sampling  Considerations

Representative Samples

In order to collect  a representative sample, the
hydrology and  morphometrics (e.g., measurements
of volume, depth, etc.) of a streamer impoundment
should be determined prior to sampling.  This will
aid in determining the presence of phases or layers
in lagoons or  impoundments,  flow patterns in
streams, and  appropriate  sample locations  and
depths.

Water  quality  data  should  be  collected  in
impoundments  to  determine  if  stratification is
present.  Measurements of dissolved oxygen,  pH,
and temperature can indicate if strata exist which
would effect  analytical results.    Measurements
should be  collected at 1-meter intervals  from the
substrate  to  the  surface  using  an appropriate
instrument, such as a Hydrolab (or equivalent).

Water  quality measurements  such as  dissolved
oxygen,   pH,   temperature,  conductivity,   and
oxidation-reduction potential  can assist  in  the
interpretation of analytical data and the selection of
sampling  sites and depths  anytime surface water
samples are collected.

Generally, the deciding factors in the selection of a
sampling  device for sampling liquids  in  streams,
rivers,  lakes,  ponds,  lagoons,  and   surface
impoundments are:

    •  Will  the  sample  be collected from the
       shore or from a boat on the impoundment?

    •  What is the  desired depth at which the
       sample  is  to be collected?

    •  What  is   the  overall   depth  and  flow
       direction of river or stream?

Sampler Composition

The appropriate  sampling  device must  be of a
proper composition. Samplers constructed of glass,
stainless steel, PVC or PFTE (Teflon) should be
used based upon the analyses to be performed.

2.7.3  Sample Collection

Kemmerer  Bottle

Kemmerer bottle  (Figure 1, Appendix A) may be
used in most situations where site access  is from  a
boat or structure such as a bridge or  pier, and
where samples  at  depth are required.   Sampling
procedures are  as follows:

-------
1.  Using a properly decontaminated Kemraere.r
    bottle,  set  the  sampling device  so  that the
    sampling end pieces are  pulled away  from the
    sampling tube,  allowing the  substance to be
    sampled to  pass through  this tube.

2.  Lower  the   pre-set  sampling  device to the
    predetermined   depth.      Avoid   bottom
    disturbance.

3.  When the Kemmerer bottle is at  the required
    depth, send down the messenger, closing the
    sampling device. '

4.  Retrieve the sampler and discharge the first 10
    to 20 mL to clear any potential contamination
    on the  valve.   Transfer the sample to the
    appropriate sample container.

Bacon Bomb Sampler

A bacon bomb sampler (Figure 2, Appendix A) may
be used in similar situations to those outlined for
the Kemmerer bottle.  Sampling procedures are as
follows:

1.  Lower the bacon bomb sampler carefully to the
    desired depth, allowing the line for the trigger
    to remain slack at all times. When the desired
    depth is reached, pull the trigger line until taut.

2.  Release  the  trigger  line  and  retrieve the
    sampler.

3.  Transfer the sample to the appropriate sample
    container by pulling the trigger.

Dip Sampler

A dip sampler (Figure 3, Appendix A) is useful for
situations where a sample is  to be recovered from
an outfall pipe or along a lagoon bank where direct
access is limited. The long handle on such a device
allows access from a discrete location.  Sampling
procedures are as follows:

1.  Assemble the device in  accordance  with the
    manufacturer's instructions.

2.  Extend the  device to  the sample  location and
    collect the sample.

3.  Retrieve the sampler and transfer the sample to
    the appropriate sample container.
Direct Method

For streams, rivers, lakes, and other surface waters,
the direct method may be utilized to collect water
samples from the surface.  This method is not to be
used for sampling lagoons or other impoundments
where contact with contaminants are  a concern.

Using  adequate protective  clothing, access the
sampling station by appropriate means. For shallow
stream stations, collect the sample under the water
surface pointing the sample container  upstream.
The container  must be upstream of  the collector.
Avoid disturbing the substrate. For lakes and other
impoundments, collect the sample under the water
surface avoiding surface debris and the boat wake.

When using the direct method,  do  not use  pre-
preserved sample bottles as the collection  method
may  dilute the   concentration  of  preservative
necessary for proper sample preservation.
2.8     CALCULATIONS

This section is not applicable to this SOP.
2.9     QUALITY ASSURANCE/
        QUALITY CONTROL

There  are no  specific quality assurance activities
which  apply  to  the   implementation  of  these
procedures.    However,   the  following  general
QA/QC procedures apply:

    •   All data must be documented on field data
        sheets or within site logbooks.

    •   All  instrumentation must be operated  in
        accordance with operating instructions  as
        supplied  by  the  manufacturer,  unless
        otherwise  specified  in  the  work  plan.
        Equipment   checkout   and  calibration
        activities   must   occur   prior    to
        sampling/operation  and  they  must   be
        documented.
2.10   DATA VALIDATION

This section is not applicable to this SOP.

-------
2.11    HEALTH AND SAFETY

When working with potentially hazardous materials,
follow U.S. EPA, OSHA and specific  health and
safety procedures.

More specifically, when sampling lagoons or surface
impoundments  containing  known  or  suspected
hazardous substances, take adequate precautions.
The sampling team  member collecting  the sample
should not get too  close  to  the edge of the
impoundment, where (bank failure may cause him or
her to lose their balance.  The person  performing
the sampling should be on a lifeline and be wearing
adequate protective equipment.  When conducting
sampling from a boat in an impoundment or flowing
waters,   follow  appropriate   boating   safety
procedures.

-------
                     3.0   SEDIMENT SAMPLING:   SOP~#2016
3.1     SCOPE AND APPLICATION

This Standard  Operating  Procedure  (SOP)  is
applicable  to  the  collection  of  representative
sediment samples.   Analysis  of sediment  may
determine  whether  concentrations  of  specific
contaminants exceed established  threshold  action
levels, or if the  concentrations present a risk to
public health, welfare, or the environment.

The methodologies discussed in this procedure are
applicable to the sampling of sediment in both
flowing  and standing water.  They are generic in
nature and  may be  modified in whole or part to
meet the handling and  analytical requirements of
the contaminants  of concern,  as  well  as the
constraints   presented  by  the  sampling   area.
However, if modifications  occur, they should be
documented  in   the  site  logbook  or  report
summarizing field activities.

For the  purposes of this procedure, sediments are
those  mineral  and  organic   materials  situated
beneath an  aqueous  layer. The aqueous layer may
be  either  static,  as in lakes,  ponds,  or   other
impoundments or flowing, as in rivers and streams.
3.2     METHOD SUMMARY

Sediment samples may be recovered using a variety
of methods and equipment, depending on the depth
of the aqueous layer, the portion of the sediment
profile  required  (surface versus  subsurface), the
type   of  sample  required  (disturbed  versus
undisturbed) and the sediment type.

Sediment  is  collected  from beneath  an  aqueous
layer cither directly, using a  hand-held device such
as a shovel, trowel, or auger, or indirectly using a
remotely activated  device such  as an Ekman or
Ponar dredge. Following collection, the sediment is
placed   into   a   container  constructed  of  inert
material,  homogcni7.cd,  and  transferred  to the
appropriate sample containers. The homogcnix.ation
procedure should not  be used if sample analysis
includes volatile organics.
3.3    SAMPLE PRESERVATION,
       CONTAINERS, HANDLING, AND
       STORAGE

    •  Chemical preservation of solids is generally
       not recommended.  Cooling is usually the
       best  approach,  supplemented  by  the
       appropriate holding time.

    •  Wide-mouth glass containers with  Teflon-
       lined  caps are  utilized for  sediment
       samples. The sample volume is a function
       of the analytical requirements and will be
       specified in the work plan.

    •  Transfer   sediment   from  the   sample
       collection device to an appropriate sample
       container using a stainless steel or plastic
       lab  spoon or equivalent.  If composite
       samples  are collected, place the sediment
       sample in a stainless steel, plastic or other
       appropriate composition  (e.g.:   Teflon)
       bucket, and mix thoroughly  to obtain a
       homogeneous sample representative of the
       entire sampling  interval.  Then place the
       sediment sample into labeled containers.

    •  Samples for volatile organic analysis must
       be  collected directly  from   the  bucket,
       before mixing the sample, to minimize loss
       due to volatilization of contaminants.

    •  All   sampling  devices   should   be
       decontaminated,   then  wrapped   in
       aluminum foil. The sampler should remain
       in this wrapping until it is needed.  Each
       sampler  should be  used for only  one
       sample.  Dedicated samplers for sediment
       samples  may be impractical  due  to the
       large number of sediment samples which
       may  be  required and  the   cost  of the
       sampler.  In this case, samplers should be
       cleaned    in   the   field   using  the
       decontamination  procedure  described in
       ERT SOP# 2006, Sampling Equipment
       Decontamination.

-------
3.4     INTERFERENCES AND
        POTENTIAL PROBLEMS

Substrate particle size  and organic content  are
directly  related   to  water  velocity  and  flow
characteristics of a body of water.  Contaminants
are more likely to be concentrated  in sediments
typified  by  fine particle  size and a  high organic
content. This type of sediment is most likely to be
collected from depositional zones.   In contrast,
coarse sediments with low organic content do not
typically concentrate pollutants and are found in
erosional zones.   The selection of a sampling
location  can,  therefore,   greatly  influence  the
analytical results.
3.5     EQUIPMENT/APPARATUS

Equipment needed  for collection  of  sediment
samples includes:
       maps/plot plan
       safety equipment
       compass
       tape measure
       survey stakes, flags, or buoys and anchors
       camera and film
       stainless steel, plastic, or other appropriate
       composition bucket
       4-oz., 8-oz., and one-quart, wide-mouth jars
       w/Teflon-lined  lids
       Ziploc plastic bags
       logbook
       sample jar labels
       chain of custody forms, field data sheets
       cooler(s)
       ice
       decontamination supplies/equipment
       spade or shovel
       spatula
       scoop
       trowel
       bucket auger
       thin-walled auger
       extension rods
       T-handle
       sampling trier
       sediment coring device (tubes, points, drive
       head, drop hammer, "eggshell" check valve
       devices, acetate cores)
       Ponar  dredge
       Ekman dredge
       nylon rope
3.6     REAGENTS

Reagents are not used for preservation of sediment
samples. Decontamination solutions are specified in
ERT   SOP   #2006,   Sampling  Equipment
Decontamination.
3.7    PROCEDURES

3.7.1  Preparation

1.   Determine the extent of the sampling effort,
    the  sampling  methods to be  employed,  and
    which equipment and supplies are required.

2.   Obtain necessary sampling and monitoring
    equipment.

3.   Decontaminate  or  preclean equipment,  and
    ensure that it is in working order.

4.   Prepare schedules,  and coordinate with staff,
    client, and regulatory agencies, if appropriate.

5.   Perform a general site survey prior to site entry
    in accordance with the site-specific health  and
    safety plan.

6.   Use stakes, flags, or buoys to identify and mark
    all   sampling   locations.     Specific   site
    characteristics, including  flow regime, basin
    morphometry,  sediment characteristics, depth
    of overlying aqueous  layer,  and extent  and
    nature of contaminant should be  considered
    when selecting sample location.   If required,
    the proposed locations may be adjusted based
    on site access, property boundaries, and surface
    obstructions.

3.7.2  Sample  Collection

Selection  of  a  sampling  device  is  most often
contingent upon:   (1) the depth of  water at the
sampling   location,   and   (2)  the   physical
characteristics of the medium to be sampled.

Sampling Surface Sediments with a
Trowel  or Scoop From Beneath a
Shallow Aqueous Layer

Collection  of surface sediment from  beneath a
shallow  aqueous layer can be accomplished  with
                                                10

-------
tools such as spades, shovels, and scoops.  Surface
material  can be removed  to the required depth;
then a stainless steel or plastic scoop should be used
to collect the sample.

This method can be used to collect consolidated
sediments but is limited somewhat by the depth of
the aqueous layer. Accurate, representative samples
can be collected with this procedure depending on
the care and precision demonstrated by the sample
team member.   A stainless steel or plastic scoop or
lab spoon will  suffice in most  applications.  Care
should be exercised to avoid  the use of devices
plated with chrome or other materials.  Plating is
particularly common with garden trowels.

Follow these procedures to collect sediment samples
with a scoop or trowel:

1.  Using a precleaned stainless steel scoop  or
    trowel,  remove the  desired   thickness   of
    sediment from the sampling area.

2.  Transfer the sample into an  appropriate sample
    or homogenization container.

Sampling Surface Sediments with a Thin-
Wall Tube Auger From Beneath a Shallow
Aqueous Layer

This system consists  of an auger, a series  of
extension  rods, and a "T" handle (see Figure 4,
Appendix A). The auger is driven into the sediment
and used to extract a core.  A sample of the core is
taken from the appropriate depth.

Use  the  following procedure to  collect sediment
samples with a  thin-walled auger:

1.  Insert the auger into the material to be sampled
   at  a  0ฐ to  45ฐ angle  from  vertical.  This
   orientation  minimizes  spillage of the sample
    from the sampler.  Extraction of samples may
   require tilting of the sampler.

2. Rotate the  auger once or twice to cut a core of
   material.

3. Slowly withdraw the auger, making sure that the
   slot  is facing upward.

4. An acetate  core may be inserted into the auger
   prior  to sampling,  if characteristics  of  the
   sediments or body of water warrant.  By using
    this technique, an intact core can be extracted.

5.   Transfer the sample into an appropriate sample
    or homogenization container.

Sampling Deep Sediments with
Augers  and  Thin-Wall  Tube  Samplers
From Beneath a Shallow Aqueous Layer

This system  uses an auger, a series of extension
rods,  a "T" handle,  and  a thin-wall tube  sampler
(Figure 4, Appendix A). The auger bores a hole to
a desired sampling depth and then is  withdrawn.
The auger tip is then replaced with a tube  core
sampler, lowered down the borehole,  and driven
into the  sediment at the  completion depth.  The
core is then  withdrawn and the sample collected.
This method  can be used to  collect consolidated
sediments, but is somewhat limited by the depth of
the aqueous layer.

Several augers are  available which include buckcl
and pesthole augers.  Bucket augers are better for
direct sample recovery, are fast, and provide a large
volume of sample.   Pesthole  augers have limited
utility for sample collection as they arc designed
more for their ability to cut through fibrous, rooted,
swampy areas.

Follow these procedures to collect sediment samples
with a hand auger:

1.   Attach the auger bit  to a drill  extension rod,
    then attach the  "T" handle to the drill extension
    rod.

2.   Clear the  area to be sampled of  any surface
    debris.

3.   Begin augcring, periodically  removing  any
    accumulated sediment from the auger buckcl.

4.   After reaching the desired depth,  slowly and
    carefully   remove the  auger  from  boring.
    (When sampling directly from the auger, collect
    sample after the auger is removed from boring
    and proceed to Step 10.)

5.   Remove auger  lip from drill rods and replace
    with  a  precleaned  thin-wall  lube  sampler.
    Install proper cutting lip.
6.   Carefully lower  lube sampler down borehole.
    Gradually force lube sampler into sedinienl.
                                                11

-------
    Care should be  taken  to avoid scraping  the
    borehole sides.  Also, avoid hammering of the
    drill  rods  to  facilitate  coring,  since   the
    vibrations  may  cause  the  boring  walls  to
    collapse.

7.   Remove tube sampler and unscrew drill rods.

8.   Remove cutting  tip and  remove  core  from
    device.

9.   Discard top of cpre (approximately 1 inch), as
    this represents material collected by the tube
    sampler before penetration  of the  layer  of
    concern.

10. Transfer sample into an appropriate sample or
    homogenization container.

Sampling Surface Sediments From
Beneath a Deep Aqueous Layer with
an Ekman or Ponar Dredge

This technique consists of lowering a  sampling
device  to the sediment by use of a rope, cable, or
extended handle. The mechanism is triggered, and
the device entraps sediment in spring-loaded jaws,
or within lever-operated jaws.

Follow these procedures for  collecting  sediment
with an Ekman dredge (Figure 5, Appendix A):

1.   Thread  a sturdy nylon or stainless steel cable
    through the  bracket, or secure the  extended
    handle to the bracket with machine bolts.

2.   Attach  springs  to both sides.  Arrange  the
    Ekman dredge sampler so that the jaws are in
    the open position and trip cables are positioned
    over the release studs.

3.   Lower  the sampler  to a point just above the
    sediment surface.

4.   Drop the sampler sharply onto the sediment.

5.   Trigger the jaw release mechanism by lowering
    a messenger down the line, or by depressing the
    button  on  the upper  end  of the  extended
    handle.

6.  Raise the  sampler and slowly decant any  free
    liquid  through  the  top of  the sampler.   Be
    careful to  retain fine sediments.
7.   Open the dredge and transfer the sediment into
    a stainless steel  or plastic bucket.  Continue to
    collect  additional  sediment  until  sufficient
    material has been  secured.  Thoroughly mix
    sediment to obtain a homogeneous sample, and
    then transfer   to  the  appropriate  sample
    container.

8.   Samples for volatile organic analysis must be
    collected directly from the bucket before mixing
    the   sample  to minimize volatilization  of
    contaminants.

Follow these procedures for  collecting sediment
with a Ponar dredge (Figure 6, Appendix A):

1.   Attach a sturdy nylon or steel cable to the hook
    provided on top of the dredge.

2.   Arrange the Ponar dredge sampler in the open
    position, setting the trip  bar  so  the  sampler
    remains open when lifted  from the top.

3.   Slowly lower the sampler to a  point just above
    the  sediment.

4.   Drop the sampler  sharply into the sediment,
    then pull sharply up on the line, thus releasing
    the  trip  bar and closing the dredge.

5.   Raise the sampler to the surface and slowly
    decant  any  free liquid through the screens on
    top of  the  dredge.  Be careful to retain  fine
    sediments.

6.   Open the dredge and transfer the sediment to
    a stainless steel or  plastic bucket.  Continue to
    collect   additional  sediment   until sufficient
     material has been  gained.   Thoroughly  mix
     sediment to obtain  a homogeneous sample, and
     then  transfer  to  the   appropriate  sample
     container.

7.   Samples for volatile organic analysis  must be
     collected directly from the bucket before mixing
     the  sample to  minimize  volatilization  of
     contaminants.

Sampling Subsurface  Sediments From
Beneath  a Deep Aqueous  Layer  with a1
Sample Coring  Device

 Follow  these  procedures when  using a sample
 coring device  (Figure  7, Appendix A) to collect
                                                 12

-------
subsurface sediments. It consists of a coring device,
handle, and  acetate core  utilized in the following
procedure:

1.   Assemble  the  coring device by inserting  the
    acetate core into the sampling tube.

2.   Insert the  "eggshell" check valve  mechanisms
    into  the tip  of the sampling  tube with  the
    convex  surface  positioned  inside the acetate
    core.

3.   Screw the coring point  onto the tip of  the
    sampling tube.

4.   Screw the  handle onto the  upper end of  the
    sampling  tube  and  add extension  rods  as
    needed.

5.   Place the sampler in  a perpendicular position
    on the material to be  sampled.

6.   This  sampler may be used with either a drive
    hammer for firm consolidated sediments, or a
    "T" handle for soft sediments. If the T handle
    is used, place downward pressure on the device
    until  the desired depth is reached. Rotate  the
    sampler  to shear off  the core of the  bottom,
    retrieve the device and proceed to Step 15.

7.   If the drive  hammer is selected, insert  the
    tapered  handle  (drive  head)  of the  drive
    hammer through the drive head.

8.   With left  hand holding  the tube, drive  the
    sampler  into the material to  the desired depth.
    Do not drive the tube further than the  tip of
    the hammer's guide.

9.   Record the length of  the tube that penetrated
    the sample material, and the number of  blows
    required to obtain this depth.

10.  Remove the drive hammer and fit the keyhole-
    like opening  on the flat  side of  the hammer
    onto  the drive head.  In  this position,  the
    hammer serves as a handle for the sampler.

11.  Rotate the sampler at least two revolutions to
    shear off the  sample at the bottom.

12.  Lower the sampler handle (hammer) until it
    just clears  the  two  car-like protrusions on  the
    drive head, and rotate about 90ฐ.
13.  Withdraw the  sampler by pulling the  handle
    (hammer) upwards and dislodging the hammer
    from the sampler.

14.  Unscrew the  coring  point and  remove  the
    "eggshell" check valve.

15.  Slide the acetate core out of the sampler tube.
    The acetate core may be capped at both ends.
    The sample may be used in this fashion, or the
    contents  transferred  to a stainJess  steel or
    plastic bucket and mixed thoroughly to obtain
    a homogeneous sample representative of the
    entire sampling interval.

16.  Samples for volatile organic analysis must be
    collected directly from the bucket before mixing
    the  sample  to  minimize volatilization of
    contaminants.
3.8     CALCULATIONS

This section is not applicable to this SOP.
3.9     QUALITY ASSURANCE/
        QUALITY CONTROL

There are no  specific quality assurance  activities
which  apply  to  the  implementation  of  these
procedures.    However,  the following  QA/QC
procedures apply:

1.   All  data must be  documented  on field  data
    sheets or within site logbooks.

2.   All   instrumentation  must  be  operated  in
    accordance  with   operating  instructions  as
    supplied by the manufacturer, unless otherwise
    specified  in  the  work  plan.    Equipment
    checkout and calibration activities must occur
    prior to sampling/operation, and they must be
    documented.
3.10   DATA VALIDATION

This section is not applicable to this SOP.
                                                13

-------
3.11    HEALTH AND SAFETY

When working with potentially hazardous materials
follow U.S. EPA, OSHA and specific health and
safety procedures.

More specifically, when  sampling sediment  from
bodies  of water containing known or suspected
hazardous substances, adequate precautions must be
taken to ensure  the sampler's  safety.  The  team
member collecting the sample should not get too
close to the edge of the water, where bank failure
may cause him  or her to lose  their balance. To
prevent  this, the person  performing the sampling
should be on a lifeline, and be wearing adequate
protective equipment. If sampling from a vessel is
necessary,   implement    appropriate  protective
measures.
                                                 14

-------
APPENDIX A




   Figures
     15

-------
          Figure 1:  Kemmerer Bottle
                SOP  #2013
                              MESSENGER

                              CABLE
                              TRIP HEAD
                              UPPER STOPPER

                              CHAIN
                              CENTER ROD
                             •BODY
BOTTOM DRAIN
                              LOV.ER STOPPER
                       16

-------
Figure 2: Bacon Bomb Sampler



        SOP #2013
           17

-------
Figure 3:  Dip Sampler



    SOP #2013
       1
                    u
         18

-------
   Figure 4: Sampling Auger

        SOP  #2016  '
                LL
 TUBE
AUGER
BUCKE'
 AUGER
           19

-------
Figure 5: Ekman Dredge



     SOP  #2016
           20

-------
Figure 6: Ponar Dredge




     SOP  #2016
         21

-------
 Figure 7:  Sample Coring Device

          SOP  #2016


PLASTIC
TUBE
                                     BRASS

                                       PLASTIC
               22

-------
                                          References
Earth, D.S. and B.J. Mason. 1984. Soil Sampling Quality Assurance User's Guide. EPA-600/4-84/043.

dc Vcra, E.R., B.P. Simmons, R.D. Stephen, and  D.L. Storm. 1980. Samplers and Sampling Procedures for
       Hazardous Waste Streams.  EPA/600/2-80/018.

Mason, B.J.  1983. Preparation of Soil Sampling Protocol: Technique and Strategies. EPA-600/4-83/020.

National Institute for Safety and Health. October, 1985.  Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for
       Hazardous Waste Site Activities.  [Alternate title: Guidance Manual for Hazardous Waste Sites]

New Jersey Department of Environmental  Protection, Division of Hazardous Site  Mitigation. 1988.   Field
       Sampling Procedures Manual.

U.S. EPA. 1984.   Characterization of Hazardous Waste Sites - A  Methods Manual: Volume II.  Available
       Sampling Methods, Second Edition. EPA/600/4-84/076.

U.S. EPA Region IV, Environmental Services Division.  April 1, 1986. Engineering Support Branch Standard
       Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Manual. Athens, Georgia.

U.S. EPA, OSWER/Remedial Planning and Response Branch. December 1,1987.  Compendium of Superfund
       Field Operation Methods. EPA/540/P-87/001.

U.S. Geological Survey. 1977.  National Handbook of Recommended Methods for Water Data Acquisition.
       Office of Water Data Coordination. Reston, Virginia.  (Chapter updates available).
                                               23

-------
         APPENDIX E
      Compendium of ERT
Groundwater Sampling Procedures

-------
                                                  EPA/540/P-91/007
                                            OSWER Directive 9360.4-06
                                                      January 1991
COMPENDIUM OF ERT GROUNDWATER
          SAMPLING PROCEDURES
             Sampling Equipment Decontamination

             Groundwater Well Sampling

             Soil Gas Sampling

             Monitoring Well Installation

             Water Level Measurement

             Well Development

             Controlled Pumping Test

             Slug Test
                      Interim Final
                Environmental Response Team
                 Emergency Response Division
            Office of Emergency and Remedial Response
              U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
                   Washington, DC 20460
                                           Printed on Recycled Paper

-------
                                              Notice
This document has been reviewed in accordance wilh U.S. Environmental Protection Agency policy and approved
for publication.   Mention  of  trade names or commercial products  does not constitute endorsement  or
recommendation for use.

The policies and procedures established in this document are intended  solely for the guidance of government
personnel, for  use in the Superfund Removal Program.  They are not intended, and cannot be relied upon, to
create any rights, substantive or procedural, enforceable by any party in litigation with the United States. The
Agency reserves the right to act at variance with these policies and procedures and to change them at any time
without public  notice.

Depending on  circumstances and needs, it may not be possible or appropriate to follow these procedures exactly
in all situations due  to site conditions, equipment limitations,  and limitations of the standard procedures.
Whenever these procedures cannot be followed as written, they may be  used as general guidance with any and
all modifications fully documented in either QA Plans, Sampling Plans, or final reports of results.

Each Standard Operating Procedure in this compendium contains  a discussion on quality assurance/quality
control (QA/QC). For more  information on QA/QC objectives and requirements, refer  to the  Quality
Assurance/Quality Control Guidance for Removal Activities, OSWER directive 9360.4-01, EPA/540/G-90/004.

Questions,  comments, and recommendations are welcomed regarding the Compendium of ERT Groundwater
Sampling Procedures.  Send remarks to:

                                       Mr. William A. Coakley
                                  Removal  Program QA Coordinator
                                          U.S.  EPA  - ERT
                                 Raritan Depot  - Building 18, MS-101
                                      2890 Woodbridge Avenue
                                       Edison, NJ 08837-3679

For additional copies of the Compendium of ERT Groundwater Sampling Procedures, please contact:

                             National Technical Information Service  (NTIS)
                                   U.S. Department  of Commerce
                                       5285 Port Royal Road
                                        Springfield, VA 22161
                                           (703) 437-4600

-------
                                      Table of Contents

Section                                                                                       Page

1.0     SAMPLING EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION:  SOP #2006

       1.1     Scope and Application                                                              1
       1.2     Method Summary                                                                  1
       1.3     Sample Preservation, Containers, Handling, and Storage                                1
       1.4     Interferences and Potential Problems                                                 1
       1.5     Equipment/Apparatus                                                              1
       1.6     Reagents                                                                          2
       1.7     Procedures                                                                        2

               1.7.1    Decontamination Methods                                                   2
               1.7.2    Field Sampling Equipment Cleaning Procedures                                3

       1.8     Calculations                                                                       3
       1.9     Quality Assurance/Quality Control                                                   3
       1.10    Data Validation                                                                    4
       1.11    Health and Safety                                                                  4


2.0     GROUNDWATER WELL SAMPLING: SOP #2007

       2.1     Scope and Application                                                              5
       2.2     Method Summary                                                                  5
       2.3     Sample Preservation, Containers, Handling and Storage                                 5
       2.4     Interferences and Potential Problems                                                 5

               2.4.1    General                                                                    5
               2.4.2    Purging                                                                    5
               2.4.3    Materials                                                                  6

       2.5     Equipment/Apparatus                                                              6

               2.5.1    General                                                                    6
               2.5.2    Bailer                                                                      8
               2.5.3    Submersible Pump                                                          8
               2.5.4    Non-Gas Contact Bladder Pump                                              8
               2.5.5    Suction Pump                                                              8
               2.5.6    Inertia Pump                                                               8

       2.6     Reagents                                                                          8
       2.7     Procedures                                                                        8

               2.7.1    Preparation                                                                 8
               2.7.2    Field Preparation                                                            8
               2.7.3    Evacuation of Static Water (Purging)                                          9
               2.7.4    Sampling                                                                  11
               2.7.5    Filtering                                                                   13
               2.7.6    Post Operation                                                            13
               2.7.7    Special Considerations for VOA Sampling                                    13
                                                in

-------
Section                                                                                          Page


        2.8      Calculations                                                                        14
        2.9      Quality Assurance/Quality Control                                                   14
        2.10     Data Validation                                                                    15
        2.11     Health and Safety                                                                  15


3.0      SOIL GAS SAMPLING:  SOP #2149

        3.1      Scope and Application                                                              17
        3.2      Method Summary                                                                  17
        3.3      Sample Preservation, Containers, Handling, and Storage                                17

                3.3.1   Tedlar Bag                                                                 17
                3.3.2   Tenax Tube                                                                17
                3.3.3   SUMMA Canister                                                          17

        3.4      Interferences and Potential Problems                                                 18

                3.4.1   HNU Measurements
                3.4.2   Factors Affecting Organic Concentrations in Soil Gas
                3.4.3   Soil Probe Clogging
                3.4.4   Underground Utilities

        3.5      Equipment/Apparatus

                3.5.1   Slam Bar Method                                                          18
                3.5.2   Power Hammer Method                                                     19

        3.6      Reagents                                                                          19
        3.7      Procedures                                                                        19

                3.7.1   Soil Gas  Well Installation                                                    19
                3.7.2   Screening with Field Instruments                                             20
                3.7.3   Tedlar Bag Sampling                                                        20
                3.7.4   Tenax Tube Sampling                                                       20
                3.7.5   SUMMA Canister Sampling                                                 22

        3.8      Calculations                                                                        22

                3.8.1   Field Screening Instruments                                                 22
                3.8.2   Photovac GC Analysis                                                       22

        3.9      Quality Assurance/Quality Control                                                   22

                3.9.1   Field Instrument Calibration                                                 22
                3.9.2   Gilian Model HFS113A Air Sampling Pump Calibration                        22
                3.9.3   Sample Probe Contamination                                                22
                3.9.4   Sample Train Contamination                                                 22
                3.9.5   Field Blank                                                                 22
                3.9.6   Trip Standard                                                              22
                3.9.7   Tedlar Bag Check                                                          23
                3.9.8   SUMMA Canister Check                                                    23

                                                 iv

-------
Section                                                                                        Page


               3.9.9    Options                                                                   23

        3.10    Data  Validation                                                                   23
        3.11    Health and Safety                                                                 23
4.0     MONITORING WELL INSTALLATION:  SOP #2150

        4.1     Scope and Application                                                             25
        4.2     Method Summary                                                                  25

               4.2.1    Hollow Stem Augering                                                     25
               4.2.2    Cable Tool Drilling                                                         25
               4.2.3    Rotary Drilling                                                             25

        4.3     Sample Preservation, Containers, Handling, and Storage                               25
        4.4     Interferences and Potential Problems                                                26
        4.5     Equipment/Apparatus                                                             26
        4.6     Reagents                                                                          26
        4.7     Procedures                                                                        26

               4.7.1    Preparation                                                                26
               4.7.2    Field Preparation                                                           26
               4.7.3    Well Construction                                                          28

        4.8     Calculations                                                                       29
        4.9     Quality Assurance/Quality Control                                                   30
        4.10    Data Validation                                                                    30
        4.11    Health and Safety                                                                  30
5.0      WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENT:  SOP #2151

        5.1     Scope and Application                                                              31
        5.2     Method Summary                                                                  31
        5.3     Sample Preservation, Containers, Handling and Storage                                31
        5.4     Interferences and Potential Problems                                                 31
        5.5     Equipment/Apparatus                                                              32
        5.6     Reagents                                                                          32
        5.7     Procedures                                                                        32

               5.7.1    Preparation                                                                32
               5.7.2    Procedures                                                                32

        5.8     Calculations                                                                       33
        5.9     Quality Assurance/Quality Control                                                  33
        5.10    Data Validation                                                                    33
        5.11    Health and Safely                                                                  33

-------
Section                                                                                        Page


6.0      WELL DEVELOPMENT: SOP #2156

        6.1     Scope and Application                                                             35
        6.2     Method Summary                                                                 35
        6.3     Sample Preservations, Containers, Handling, and Storage                              35
        6.4     Interferences and Potential Problems                                                35
        6.5     Equipment/Apparatus                                                             35
        6.6     Reagents                                                                         36
        6.7     Procedures                                                                       36

               6.7.11   Preparation                                                               36
               6.7.2   Operation                                                                36
               6.7.3   Post Operation                                                            37

        6.8     Calculations                                                                      37
        6.9     Quality Assurance/Quality Control                                                  37
        6.10    Data Validation                                                                   38
        6.11    Health and Safety                                                                 38


7.0      CONTROLLED PUMPING TEST:  SOP #2157

        7.1     Scope and Application                                                             39
        7.2     Method Summary                                                                 39
        7.3     Sample Preservation, Containers, Handling, and Storage                              39
        7.4     Interferences and Potential Problems                                                39
        7.5     Equipment/Apparatus                                                             39
        7.6     Reagents                                                                         40
        7.7     Procedures                                                                       40

               7.7.1   Preparation                                                               40
               7.7.2   Field Preparation                                                          40
               7.7.3   Pre-Test Monitoring                                                       40
               7.7.4   Step Test                                                                 40
               7.7.5   Pump Test                                                               41
               7.7.6   Post Operation                                                            42

        7.8     Calculations                                                                      43
        7.9     Quality Assurance/Quality Control                                                  43
        7.10    Data Validation                                                                   43
        7.11    Health and Safety                                                                43
8.0     SLUG TEST:  SOP #2158

        8.1      Scope and Application                                                             45
        8.2      Method Summary                                                                  45
        8.3      Sample Preservation, Containers, Handling and Storage                                45
        8.4      Interferences and Potential Problems                                                45
        8.5      Equipment/Apparatus                                                             45
        8.6      Reagents                                                                          45
        8.7      Procedures                                                                       45

                                                 vi

-------
Section                                                                                   Page


              8.7.1    Field Procedures                                                       45
              8.7,2    Post Operation                                                         47

       8.8     Calculations                                                                  47
       8.9     Quality Assurance/Quality Control                                               47
       8.10    Data Validation                                                               48
       8.11    Health and Safety                                                             48


APPENDIX A - Sampling Train Schematic                                                      49

APPENDIX B - HNU Field Protocol                                                           51

APPENDIX C - Forms                                                                       55

REFERENCES                                                                              61
                                              VH

-------
                                       List of Exhibits
Exhibit                                                     -     SOP

Table 1:        Recommended Solvent Rinse for Soluble Contaminants   #2006

Table 2:        Advantages and Disadvantages of Various Groundwater   #2007
               Sampling Devices

Table 3:        Advantages and Disadvantages of Various Drilling        #2150
               Techniques

Table 4:        Time Intervals for Measuring Drawdown in the          #2157
               Pumped Well

Table 5:        Time Intervals for Measuring Drawdown in an           #2157
               Observation Well

Figure 1:       Sampling Train Schematic                            #2149

Forms:         Well Completion Form                               #2150

               Groundwater Level Data Form                        #2151

               Pump/Recovery Test Data Sheet                      #2157

               Slug Test Data Form                                #2158
Page

   4

   7


  27


  41


  41


  50

  56

  57

  58

  60
                                              Vlll

-------
                                    Acknowledgments


Preparation of this document was directed by William A. Coakley, the Removal Program QA Coordinator of
the Environmental Response Team, Emergency Response Division. Additional support was provided under U.S.
EPA contract #68-03-3452 and U.S. EPA contract #68-WO-0036.
                                             IX

-------
      1.0    SAMPLING EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION:  SOP #2006
1.1    SCOPE AND APPLICATION

This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) describes
methods  used  for preventing or reducing  cross-
contamination,  and provides general guidelines for
sampling equipment decontamination procedures at
a hazardous  waste site.  Preventing or minimizing
cross-contamination  in  sampled  media and  in
samples is important for preventing the introduction
of error into  sampling results and for protecting the
health and safety of site personnel.

Removing or neutralizing contaminants  that have
accumulated  on  sampling equipment  ensures
protection of personnel from  permeating substances,
reduces or eliminates transfer of contaminants to
clean  areas,  prevents  the mixing of incompatible
substances, and minimizes the likelihood of sample
cross-contamination.
1.2     METHOD SUMMARY

Contaminants  can  be  physically  removed  from
equipment,   or  deactivated  by  sterilization  or
disinfection.   Gross  contamination  of equipment
requires  physical   decontamination,   including
abrasive and non-abrasive methods.  These include
the use of brushes, air and wet blasting, and  high-
pressure water cleaning, followed by a wash/rinse
process using appropriate cleaning solutions.  Use
of  a  solvent  rinse is  required  when  organic
contamination is present.
1.3    SAMPLE PRESERVATION,
       CONTAINERS, HANDLING, AND
       STORAGE

This section is not applicable to this SOP.
1.4    INTERFERENCES AND
       POTENTIAL PROBLEMS

    •  The  use   of  distilled/deionized  water
       commonly  available   from   commercial
       vendors    may   be    acceptable   for
       decontamination  of sampling  equipment
       provided  that  it  has  been  verified by
       laboratory analysis to be analyte free.

    •  An untreated potable water supply is not
       an acceptable substitute for tap water. Tap
       water may be  used from any municipal
       water treatment system  for  mixing of
       decontamination solutions.

    •  Acids  and  solvents  utilized  in   the
       decontamination sequence pose the health
       and  safety risks  of inhalation  or  skin
       contact,  and raise  shipping concerns of
       permeation or degradation.

    •  The site work plan must  address  disposal
       of the spent decontamination solutions.

    •  Several procedures  can be established to
       minimize  contact  with  waste  and  the
       potential for contamination. For example:

              Stress    work    practices   that
              minimize contact with hazardous
              substances.

              Use remote sampling, handling,
              and container-opening  techniques
              when appropriate.

              Cover  monitoring and sampling
              equipment with protective material
              to minimize contamination.

              Use disposable  outer garments
              and   disposable    sampling
              equipment when  appropriate.
1.5    EQUIPMENT/APPARATUS

    •  appropriate personal protective clothing
    •  non-phosphate detergent
    •  selected solvents
    •  long-handled brushes
    •  drop cloths/plastic sheeting
    •  trash container
    •  paper towels
    •  galvanized tubs or buckets
    •  tap water

-------
    •   distilled/deionized water
    •   metal/plastic  containers for storage  and
        disposal of contaminated wash solutions
    •   pressurized   sprayers   for   tap   and
        deionized/distilled water
    •   sprayers for solvents
    •   trash bags
    •   aluminum foil
    •   safety glasses or splash shield
    •   emergency eyewash bottle
1.6     REAGENTS

There are no reagents used in this procedure aside
from  the actual  decontamination solutions  and
solvents.   In general,  the following solvents are
utilized for decontamination purposes:

    •   10% nitric acid(1)
    •   acetone (pesticide grade)'2'
    •   hexane (pesticide gradc)(2)
    •   methanol
<"  On
(2)
Only if sample is to be analyzed for trace metals.
Only if sample is to be analyzed for organics.
1.7     PROCEDURES

As part of the health and safely plan, develop and
set up a decontamination plan before any personnel
or equipment enter the areas of potential exposure.
The   equipment  decontamination  plan  should
include:

    •   the   number,  location,   and  layout  of
        decontamination stations

    •   which decontamination apparatus is needed

    •   the  appropriate decontamination methods

    •   methods  for  disposal of  contaminated
        clothing, apparatus, and solutions

1.7.1   Decontamination Methods

All personnel, samples, and equipment  leaving the
contaminated   area   rl   a   site   must   be
decontaminated. Various decontamination methods
v,ill   either   physically   remove   contaminants.
inactivate    contaminants   by   disinfection   or
slcriliArtion, or do both
In many cases, gross contamination can be removed
by physical means.  The physical decontamination
techniques   appropriate   for   equipment
decontamination  can   be  grouped  into  two
categories:   abrasive  methods and  non-abrasive
methods.

Abrasive Cleaning Methods

Abrasive cleaning methods work by rubbing and
wearing away the top layer of the surface containing
the contaminant.  The following abrasive methods
are available:

    •   Mechanical: Mechanical cleaning methods
        use  brushes of metal or   nylon.    The
        amount and type of contaminants removed
        will  vary with  the  hardness of bristles,
        length  of  brushing  time, and degree of
        brush contact.

    •   Air  Blasting:   Air  blasting  is  used  for
        cleaning   large   equipment,   such  as
        bulldozers,  drilling rigs or auger bits.  The
        equipment  used  in   air  blast  cleaning
        employs compressed air to  force abrasive
        material through a nozzle at high velocities.
        The  distance between the nozzle and  the
        surface cleaned, as well as the pressure of
        air, the time of  application,  and the angle
        at which the abrasive  strikes the surface,
        determines cleaning efficiency. Air blasting
        has several disadvantages:  it is unable to
        control the  amount of  material removed, it
        can aerate  contaminants, and it generates
        large amounts of waste.

    •   Wet Blasting:   Wet   blast  cleaning, also
        used to clean large equipment, involves use
        of a suspended fine abrasive delivered by
        compressed air  to the  contaminated area.
        The amount of materials removed  can be
        carefully controlled  by using  very  fine
        abrasives.   This method generates  a large
        amount of waste.

Non-Abrasive Cleaning Methods

Non-abrasive cleaning methods work  by forcing the
contaminant  off of a surface with  pressure.   In
general, less of the equipment surface is removed
using non-abrasivv  methods.   The  following non-
abra.sivv methods are available:

-------
    •   High-Pressure  Water:    This   method
        consists  of  a  high-pressure  pump,  an
        operator-controlled directional nozzle, and
        a high pressure hose.  Operating pressure
        usually ranges from 340 to 680 atmospheres
        (atm) which relates to flow rates of 20 to
        140 liters per minute.

    •   Ultra-High-Pressure Water:  This system
        produces a  pressurized water jet (from
        1,000  to 4,000  atm).   The  ultra-high-
        pressure  spray  removes  tightly-adhered
        surface  film.  The  water  velocity ranges
        from 500 m/sec (1,000 atm)  to 900 m/sec
        (4,000 atm).  Additives can enhance  the
        method.  This method is not  applicable for
        hand-held sampling equipment.

Disinfection/Rinse Methods

    •   Disinfection:  Disinfectants are a practical
        means of inactivating infectious agents.

    •   Sterilization:      Standard   sterilization
        methods involve heating  the equipment.
        Sterilization   is   impractical  for  large
        equipment.

    •   Rinsing:  Rinsing removes  contaminants
        through dilution,  physical  attraction, and
        solubilization.

1.7.2   Field Sampling Equipment
        Cleaning  Procedures

Solvent  rinses are not necessarily  required  when
organics are not a contaminant of concern and may
be eliminated from  the sequence specified below.
Similarly, an acid rinse is not required if analysis
does not include inorganics.

1.   Where  applicable,  follow   physical   removal
    procedures specified in section  1.7.1.

2.   Wash  equipment  with   a  non-phosphate
    detergent solution.

3.   Rinse with tap water.

4.   Rinse with distilled/deionized water.

5.   Rinse with 10% nitric acid if the sample will be
    analyzed for trace organics.
6.  Rinse with distilled/deionized water.

7.  Use a solvent rinse (pesticide grade) if  the
    sample will be analyzed for organics.

8.  Air dry the equipment completely.

9.  Rinse again with distilled/deionized water.

Selection   of   the  solvent   for   use   in   the
decontamination   process   is   based   on   the
contaminants present at  the site. Use of  a solvent
is required when organic contamination is present
on-site.    Typical  solvents  used  for  removal  of
organic  contaminants include acetone,  hexane,  or
water.  An acid rinse step is required if metals  are
present on-site. If a particular contaminant fraction
is  not   present   at  the   site,   the  nine-step
decontamination procedure listed  above   may  be
modified for site specificity.  The decontamination
solvent used should not be among the contaminants
of concern at the site.

Table 1 lists solvent rinses which may be  required
for elimination of particular chemicals.  After each
solvent rinse, the equipment should be air dried and
rinsed with distilled/deionized water.

Sampling equipment that requires the use of plastic
tubing  should be disassembled and  the  tubing
replaced with clean tubing, before commencement
of sampling and between sampling locations.
1.8     CALCULATIONS

This section is not applicable to this SOP.
1.9     QUALITY ASSURANCE/
        QUALITY CONTROL

One type of quality control sample specific to the
field decontamination process is the rinsatc blank.
The  rinsate blank  provides  information  on the
effectiveness  of  the  decontamination   process
employed in the field.  When used in conjunction
with field blanks and trip blanks, a rinsate blank can
detect  contamination  during  sample  handling,
storage and sample transportation to the laboratory

-------
            Table 1:  Recommended Solvent Rinse for Soluble Contaminants
               SOLVENT
             SOLUBLE CONTAMINANTS
 Water
•   Low-chain hydrocarbons
•   Inorganic compounds
•   Salts
•   Some organic acids and other polar compounds
 Dilute Acids
    Basic (caustic) compounds
    Amines
    Hydrazines
 Dilute Bases -- for example, detergent
 and soap
    Metals
    Acidic compounds
    Phenol
    Thiols
    Some nitro and sulfonic compounds
 Organic Solvents05 - for example,
 alcohols, ethers, ketones, aromatics,
 straight-chain alkanes (e.g., hexane), and
 common petroleum products (e.g., fuel,
 oil, kerosene)
    Nonpolar compounds (e.g., some organic compounds)
  - WARNING:  Some organic solvents can permeate and/or degrade protective clothing.
A rinsate blank consists of a sample of analyte-free
(i.e,  deionized)  water which is  passed  over and
through a field decontaminated sampling device and
placed  in a clean sample container.

Rinsate blanks should be run for all parameters of
interest at a rate of 1 per 20 for each parameter,
even if samples  are not shipped that day.  Rinsate
blanks  are  not  required if dedicated  sampling
equipment is used.
1.10    DATA VALIDATION

This section is not applicable to this SOP.


1.11    HEALTH AND SAFETY

When working with potentially hazardous materials,
follow U.S. EPA,  OSHA  and  specific health  and
safety procedures.

Decontamination can pose  hazards under certain
circumstances even though performed to protect
           health and safety.  Hazardous substances may be
           incompatible with decontamination methods.  For
           example, the decontamination solution or solvent
           may  react  with  contaminants  to produce  heat,
           explosion, or  toxic products.   Decontamination
           methods may  be incompatible  with  clothing or
           equipment; some solvents can permeate or degrade
           protective clothing. Also, decontamination solutions
           and solvents may pose a direct health  hazard to
           workers through  inhalation  or skin contact, or if
           they combust.

           The decontamination solutions and solvents must be
           determined to be  compatible  before use.   Any
           method  that  permeates, degrades,  or  damages
           personal protective equipment should not be used.
           If decontamination  methods pose a  direct  health
           hazard,   measures  should  be  taken to  protect
           personnel or the methods should be  modified to
           eliminate the ha/ard.

-------
             2.0    GROUNDWATER  WELL SAMPLING:  SOP #2007
2.1    SCOPE AND APPLICATION

The objective of this Standard Operating Procedure
(SOP) is  to provide general reference information
on sampling of groundwater wells. This guideline is
primarily  concerned  with  the collection of water
samples from the saturated zone of the subsurface.
Every effort must be made  to ensure that  the
sample is representative of the particular zone of
water being  sampled.    These procedures  are
designed to be used in conjunction with analyses for
the  most   common  types   of   groundwater
contaminants (e.g., volatile and semi-volatile organic
compounds,   pesticides,  metals,   biological
parameters).
2.2     METHOD SUMMARY

Prior to sampling a monitoring well, the well must
be purged.  This may be done with a number of
instruments.  The most common of these are  the
bailer, submersible pump, non-gas contact bladder
pump and inertia pump. At a minimum, three well
volumes should be purged, if possible.  Equipment
must be decontaminated prior to use and between
wells.  Once purging is  completed and the correct
laboratory-cleaned sample  containers  have been
prepared, sampling may  proceed.  Sampling may be
conducted with any of the above instruments,  and
need not  be the same as  the  device  used  for
purging.  Care should be taken when choosing the
sampling device as some will affect the integrity of
the sample.   Sampling equipment  must  also be
decontaminated.   Sampling  should occur  in a
progression from the least  to most contaminated
well, if this information is known.
2.3    SAMPLE PRESERVATION,
       CONTAINERS, HANDLING, AND
       STORAGE

The type of analysis for  which a sample  is  being
collected determines the type of bottle, preservative,
holding time, and  filtering requirements.   Samples
should  be  collected directly from  the  sampling
device   into   appropriate  laboratory-cleaned
containers.  Check that a Teflon liner is present in
the cap, if required. Attach a sample identification
label.   Complete  a  field  data  sheet,  a  chain of
custody form and  record all pertinent  data in the
site logbook.

Samples shall be appropriately preserved, labelled,
logged, and placed in a cooler to be maintained at
4ฐC.   Samples must be shipped well before the
holding time is over and ideally  should be shipped
within  24  hours  of sample  collection.   It  is
imperative  that  these  samples  be  shipped  or
delivered  daily to the analytical laboratory in order
to maximize the time available for the laboratory to
perform the analysis.  The bottles should be shipped
with adequate packing and cooling to  ensure that
they arrive intact.

Certain  conditions may  require special  handling
techniques.  For example, treatment of a sample for
volatile  organic   (VOA)  analysis with  sodium
thiosulfate  preservative  is required  if  there  is
residual chlorine in the water (such as public water
supply) that could cause free radical chlorination
and change the identity of the original contaminants.
However, sodium thiosulfate should not be used if
chlorine  is  not present in the  water.   Special
requirements   must   be  determined  prior  to
conducting fieldwork.
2.4     INTERFERENCES AND
        POTENTIAL PROBLEMS

2.4.1   General

The  primary goal of groundwater sampling is to
obtain a representative sample of the groundwater
body.   Analysis can  be  compromised by field
personnel  in  two primary ways:   (1)  taking  an
unrepresentative  sample,   or (2)  by  incorrect
handling of the sample. There are numerous ways
of introducing foreign contaminants into a sample,
and  these  must be  avoided  by  following strict
sampling procedures and only utilizing trained field
personnel.

2.4.2   Purging

In a non-pumping well, there will be little or  no
vertical mixing of the water, and stratification  will

-------
occur.  The well water in the screened section will
mix  with  the groundwater  due  to  normaJ  flow
patterns, but the well water above  the  screened
section will remain  isolated, become stagnant and
lack  the VOAs representative of the groundwater.
Sampling  personnel should  realize that  stagnant
water may contain foreign material inadvertently or
deliberately introduced from the surface, resulting
in an  unrepresentative  sample.    To  safeguard
against collecting nonrepresentative stagnant water,
follow these guidelines during sampling:

    •   As a general rule, all  monitoring  wells
        should  be  pumped  or  bailed  prior to
        sampling.     Purge  water   should   be
        containerized  on  site   or  handled  as
        specified in the site-specific project  plan.
        Evacuation of a minimum of one volume of
        water in the well  casing, and  preferably
        three to five volumes, is recommended for
        a  representative sample.  In a high-yielding
        ground water formation and where there is
        no stagnant water in the well  above the
        screened  section,   evacuation  prior  to
        sample  withdrawal  is  not  as  critical.
        However, in all cases where the monitoring
        data  is to be used for enforcement actions,
        evacuation  is recommended.

    •   For wells that can be pumped or bailed to
        dryness with the equipment being used, the
        well  should be  evacuated and allowed to
        recover  prior to sample withdrawal.  If the
        recovery rate is  fairly   rapid  and  the
        schedule allows,  evacuation of more than
        one  volume  of  water is preferred.  If
        recovery is slow, sample the well  upon
        recovery after one evacuation.

    •   A nonrepresentative sample can also result
        from   excessive   pre-pumping   of   the
        monitoring  well.    Stratification of the
        Icachate concentration in the groundwater
        formation may occur, or hcavicr-than-watcr
        compounds may sink to the lower portions
        of the  aquifer.   Excessive pumping can
        dilute   or   increase   the  contaminant
        concentrations from what  is representative
        of the sampling point of interest.

2.4.3  Materials

Samplers  and   evacuation  equipment  (bladders,
pumps, bailers,  tubing, etc.)  should  be limited to
those made with stainless steel, Teflon, and glass in
areas where concentrations are expected to be at or
near the detection limit.  The tendency of organics
to leach into  and out of  many materials make the
selection of materials critical for trace  analyses.
The  use of plastics, such as PVC or polyethylene,
should be  avoided when analyzing for  organics.
However,  PVC  may  be  used   for  evacuation
equipment as it will  not  come in  contact with the
sample.

Table 2 on page 7 discusses the  advantages and
disadvantages of certain equipment.
2.5    EQUIPMENT/APPARATUS

2.5.1   General
        water level indicator
        -  electric sounder
        -  steel tape
        -  transducer
        -  reflection  sounder
        -  airline
        depth sounder
        appropriate keys for well cap locks
        steel brush
        HNU   or  OVA  (whichever   is   most
        appropriate)
        logbook
        calculator
        field data sheets
        chain of custody forms
        forms and seals
        sample containers
        Engineer's rule
        sharp knife (locking blade)
        tool  box (to include at least: screwdrivers,
        pliers,   hacksaw,   hammer,   flashlight,
        adjustable wrench)
        leather work gloves
        appropriate  health and safety gear
        5-gallon pail
        plastic sheeting
        shipping containers
        packing materials
        bolt  cutters
        Ziploc plastic bags
        containers for evacuation of liquids
        decontamination solutions
        tap water
        non-phosphate soap
        several brushes

-------
                                Table 2:  Advantages and Disadvantages
                                of Various Groundwater Sampling Devices
     Device
                  Advantages
               Disadvantages
Bailer
  The only practical limitations are size and
  materials
  No power source needed
  Portable
  Inexpensive; it can be dedicated and hung in a
  well reducing the chances of cross-
  contamination
  Minimal outgassing  of volatile organics while
  sample is  in bailer
  Readily available
  Removes stagnant water first
  Rapid, simple method for removing small
  volumes of purge water
•  Time consuming, especially for large wells
•  Transfer of sample may cause aeration
Submersible
Pump
• Portable; can be used on an unlimited number
  of wells
• Relatively high pumping rate (dependent on
  depth and size of pump)
• Generally very reliable; does not require
  priming
•  Potential for effects on analysis of trace
   organics
•  Heavy and cumbersome, particularly in
   deeper wells
•  Expensive
•  Power source needed
•  Susceptible to damage from silt or sediment
•  Impractical in low yielding or shallow wells
Non-Gas Contact
Bladder Pump
  Maintains integrity of sample
  Easy to use
•  Difficult to clean although dedicated tubing
   and bladder may be used
•  Only useful to approximately 100 feet in
   depth
•  Supply of gas for operation (bottled gas
   and/or  compressor) is difficult to obtain
   and is cumbersome
Suction Pump
  Portable, inexpensive, and readily available
• Only useful to approximately 25 feet or less
  in depth
• Vacuum can cause loss of dissolved gases
  and volatile organics
• Pump must be primed and vacuum is often
  difficult to maintain
• May cause pH modification
Inertia Pump
• Portable, inexpensive, and readily available
• Rapid method for purging relatively shallow
  wells
• Only useful to approximately 70 feet or less
  in depth
• May be time consuming to use
• Labor  intensive
• WaTerra pump is only effective in 2-inch
  diameter wells

-------
    •   pails or tubs
    •   aluminum foil
    •   garden sprayer
    •   preservatives
    •   distilled or deionized water

2.5.2   Bailer

    •   clean,  decontaminated   bailcr(s)   of
        appropriate size and construction material
    •   nylon line, enough to dedicate to each well
    •   Teflon-coated bailer wire
    •   sharp knife
    •   aluminum foil (to wrap clean bailers)
    •   5-gallon bucket

2.5.3   Submersible Pump

    •   pump(s)
    •   generator (110,  120, or 240 volt) or 12-volt
        battery if inaccessible to field vehicle
    •   1-inch black  PVC coil pipe - enough to
        dedicate to each well
    •   hose clamps
    •   safety cable
    •   tool box supplement
        -  pipe wrenches, 2
        -  wire strippers
        -  electrical tape
        -  heat shrink
        -  hose connectors
        -  Teflon tape
    •   winch or pulley
    •   gasoline for generator
    •   flow meter with gate  valve
    •   1-inch nipples and various plumbing (i.e.,
        pipe connectors)

2.5.4   Non-Gas Contact Bladder Pump

    •   non-gas contact bladder pump
    •   compressor or nitrogen gas tank
    •   batteries and charger
    •   Teflon tubing -- enough to dedicate to each
        well
    •   Swagclock  fitting
    •   toolbox   supplements   --   same   as
        submersible pump

2.5.5   Suction  Pump

    •   pump
    •   black coil tubinu -- enough  (o dedicate lo
        each well
    •   gasoline -- if required
    •   toolbox
    •   plumbing  fillings
    •   flow meter with gate valve

2.5.6   Inertia Pump

    •   pump  assembly (WaTerra  pump,  piston
        pump)
    •   5-gallon bucket
2.6     REAGENTS

Reagents will be utilized for preservation of samples
and for decontamination  of sampling equipment.
The  preservation  required is specified  by the
analy^s to  be  performed.    Decontamination
solutions  are  specified  in  ERT  SOP  #2006,
Sampling Equipment Decontamination.
2.7     PROCEDURES

2.7.1   Preparation

1.   Determine  the extent  of the sampling effort,
    the sampling methods to  be employed, and
    which equipment and supplies are needed.

2.   Obtain  necessary  sampling  and  monitoring
    equipment.

3.   Decontaminate  or prcclcan  equipment, and
    ensure that it is in working order.

4.   Prepare scheduling and coordinate with staff,
    clients, and regulatory agency, if appropriate.

5.   Perform a general site survey prior to site entry
    in accordance with the site-specific health and
    safety plan.

6.   Identify and mark all sampling locations.

2.7.2  Field  Preparation

1.   Start ,il llu1 least conlaminaled Nvcll, if known.

2.   Lay  plastic  sheeting  around  the  well   to
    minimi/e   likelihood  of  contamination   of
    equipment  from soil adjacent to the well.

-------
3.  Remove locking well cap, note location, time of
    day,  and   date  in  field  notebook  or   an
    appropriate log form.
4.  Remove well casing cap.

5.  Screen headspace of well with an appropriate
    monitoring  instrument  to  determine   the
    presence of volatile  organic  compounds and
    record in site logbook.

6.  Lower  water   level  measuring  device   or
    equivalent   (i.e.    permanently    installed
    transducers  or  airline)  into  well until water
    surface is encountered.

7.  Measure  distance  from  water surface  to
    reference measuring  point  on well casing  or
    protective  barrier  post  and  record  in  site
    logbook. Alternatively, if there is no reference
    point, note  that water  level  measurement is
    from top of steel casing, top of PVC riser pipe,
    from ground surface, or some other position on
    the well head.

8.  Measure total  depth of well  (do this at least
    twice to confirm measurement) and record in
    site logbook or on  log form.

9.  Calculate the volume of water in the well and
    the volume to be purged using the calculations
    in Section 2.8.

10. Select the  appropriate purging and sampling
    equipment.

2.7.3   Evacuation of Static Water
        (Purging)

The  amount of flushing a well receives prior  to
sample  collection depends  on  the  intent  of  the
monitoring program  as well as the  hydrogeologic
conditions.    Programs   where   overall   quality
determination of water resources  are involved may
require long pumping periods to  obtain a sample
that  is representative of a  large volume of that
aquifer.   The pumped  volume can be determined
prior to sampling so that the sample is a composite
of known volume of the aquifer, or the well can  be
pumped until the stabilization of parameters such as
temperature, electrical conductance, or pH  has
occurred.
However, monitoring  for  defining a contaminant
plume requires a  representative sample of a small
volume of the aquifer.  These circumstances require
that  the  well  be  pumped enough to remove  the
stagnant water but not enough to induce flow from
other areas.   Generally,  three well volumes  are
considered effective, or calculations can be made to
determine, on the basis of the aquifer parameters
and  well dimensions, the appropriate volume to
remove prior to sampling.

During purging, water level measurements may be
taken regularly at 15-  to 30-second intervals. This
data may be used to compute  aquifer transmissivity
and other hydraulic characteristics.

The  following  well evacuation devices  are most
commonly  used.   Other  evacuation devices  are
available, but have been omitted in this discussion
due to their  limited use.

Bailer

Bailers are the simplest purging  device used  and
have many advantages. They generally consist of a
rigid length of tube, usually with a ball check-valve
at the bottom.  A line is used to lower the  bailer
into  the well and retrieve a volume of water.  The
three most  common types  of  bailer are  PVC,
Teflon, and stainless steel.

This manual method  of purging is best suited to
shallow or narrow diameter wells.  For deep,  larger
diameter wells which require  evacuation of large
volumes of water, other mechanical devices may be
more appropriate.

Bailing equipment includes a clean decontaminated
bailer,  Teflon  or nylon line,  a  sharp knife,  and
plastic sheeting.

1.   Determine the volume of water to be purged as
    described  in Section 2.7.2, Field Preparation.

2.   Lay plastic sheeting around the well to prevent
    contamination of the bailer line with  foreign
    materials.

3.   Attach the line to the bailer and lower until the
    bailer is completely submerged.

4.   Pull bailer out ensuring that the line either falls
    onto a clean area of plastic sheeting or never
    touches the ground.

-------
5.   Empty the bailer  into  a pail until  full  to
    determine the number of bails necessary to
    achieve the required purge volume.

6.   Thereafter, pour the water into a container and
    dispose of purge waters as specified in the site-
    specific project plan.

Submersible Pump

Submersible pumps are generally  constructed of
plastic, rubber, and metal parts which may affect the
analysis of samples for certain trace organics and
inorganics. As a consequence, submersible pumps
may not be appropriate for investigations requiring
analyses   of   samples   for  trace   contaminants.
However,  they are  still  useful  for  pre-sample
purging.   However, the  pump must have a check
valve to prevent water  in  the pump and the pipe
from rushing back into the well.

Submersible pumps generally use one of two types
of power supplies, either electric or compressed gas.
Electric pumps can be  powered  by a 12-volt  DC
rechargeable  battery, or a  110-  or 220-volt  AC
power supply.  Those units powered by compressed
gas normally use a small electric compressor which
also needs 12-volt DC or 110-volt AC power. They
may also utilize compressed gas  from  bottles.
Pumps differ  according to  the depth and diameter
of the monitoring wells.

1.   Determine the volume of water to be purged as
    described  in section 2.7.2, Field Preparation.

2.   Lay plastic sheeting around the well to  prevent
    contamination of pumps, hoses or lines with
    foreign materials.

3.   Assemble pump, hoses  and  safety  cable,  and
    lower the  pump into the well.  Make sure the
    pump is deep enough  so that purging does not
    evacuate  all the water.   (Running the pump
    without water may  cause damage.)

4.   Attach flow  meter  to  the  outlet hose  to
    measure the volume of water purged.

5.   Attach power supply, and  purge  well until
    specified  volume of water has been evacuated
    (or until field parameters, such as temperature,
    pH, conductivity, etc. have stabilized).  Do not
    allow the pump to run dry. If the pumping rate
6.
exceeds the well recharge rate, lower the pump
further into the well, and continue pumping.

Collect and dispose of purge waters as specified
in the site-specific project plan.
Non-Contact Gas Bladder Pump

For this procedure, an all stainless-steel and Teflon
Middleburg-squeeze  bladder pump  (e.g.,  IEA,
TIMCO, Well Wizard, Geoguard,  and  others) is
used  to  provide  the least  amount  of material
interference  to  the sample (Barcelona,  1985).
Water comes into contact with the inside of the
bladder (Teflon) and the sample tubing, also Teflon,
that  may be dedicated to each well.  Some wells
may have permanently installed bladder pumps (i.e.,
Well  Wizard,  Geoguard), that will  be used  to
sample for all parameters.

L   Assemble Teflon tubing, pump  and charged
    control box.
2.
3.
Use the same procedure for purging with a
bladder pump as for a submersible pump.

Be sure to adjust flow rate to prevent violent
jolting of the hose as sample is drawn in.
Suction Pump

There are many different types of suction  pumps.
They include: centrifugal, peristaltic and diaphragm.
Diaphragm pumps can be used for well evacuation
at a fast  pumping rate  and  sampling  at  a low
pumping rate. The peristaltic pump is a low-volume
pump  that  uses  rollers  to squeeze the  flexible
tubing, thereby creating suction. This tubing can be
dedicated to a well to prevent cross-contamination.
Peristaltic pumps, however, require a power source.

1.  Assemble the pump,  tubing, and power source
    if necessary.

2.  To purge with a suction pump, follow the exact
    procedures outlined for the submersible pump.

Inertia Pump

Inertia pumps, such  as  the  WaTerra  pump and
piston  pump, are  manually operated.   They  are
appropriate to use when wells are too deep to bail
by hand, but are not inaccessible enough to warrant
an automatic (submersible,  etc.)  pump.   These
                                                 10

-------
pumps  are  made of plastic  and may be  either
decontaminated or discarded, after use.

1.   Determine the volume of water to be purged as
    described in Section 2.7.2, Field Preparation.

2.   Lay plastic sheeting around the well to prevent
    contamination of pumps or hoses with foreign
    materials.

3.   Assemble pump, and lower to the appropriate
    depth in the well.

4.   Begin pumping manually, discharging water into
    a 5-gallon bucket (or other graduated vessel).
    Purge until specified volume of water has been
    evacuated (or until field  parameters such as
    temperature,  pH,   conductivity,   etc.   have
    stabilized).

5.   Collect and dispose of purge waters as specified
    in the site-specific project plan.

2.7.4  Sampling

Sample  withdrawal methods  require the  use  of
pumps,  compressed  air,  bailers, and  samplers.
Ideally,  purging and sample withdrawal  equipment
should be completely inert, economical to use, easily
cleaned, sterilized, reusable,  able to operate at
remote sites in the absence  of power resources, and
capable  of  delivering variable rates for sample
collection.

There are  several factors to take into consideration
when choosing a sampling device.  Care should be
taken   when  reviewing    the   advantages   or
disadvantages of  any one device.   It may  be
appropriate to use a different device to sample than
that which was used to purge. The most common
example of this is the use of a submersible pump to
purge and a bailer to sample.

Bailer

The  positive-displacement volatile sampling  bailer
(by GPI)  is  perhaps the  most  appropriate for
collection  of  water samples for  volatile analysis.
Other bailer types (messenger, bottom fill, etc.) are
less desirable, but may be mandated by cost and site
conditions.    Generally,  bailers  can provide  an
acceptable    sample,   providing  that   sampling
personnel  use extra care in  the collection process.
1.   Surround the monitoring well with clean plastic
    sheeting.

2.   Attach a line to the bailer. If a bailer was used
    for purging, the same bailer and line may  be
    used for sampling.

3.   Lower the bailer  slowly and  gently into the
    well, taking care not to  shake  the casing  sides
    or to splash the  bailer  into the water.   Stop
    lowering at a point adjacent  to the screen.

4.   Allow bailer to fill and  then slowly and gently
    retrieve the bailer  from the  well, avoiding
    contact with the  casing, so as not  to knock
    flakes of rust or  other  foreign materials into
    the bailer.

5.   Remove the cap from the sample container and
    place it on the plastic sheet or in a location
    where  it will not  become contaminated.  See
    Section 2.7.7 for special considerations on VOA
    samples.

6.   Begin pouring slowly from the bailer.

7.   Filter  and  preserve samples  as  required  by
    sampling plan.

8.   Cap the sample container tightly and place prc-
    labeled sample container in a carrier.

9.   Replace the well cap.

10.  Log all samples in the site logbook and on field
    data sheets and label all samples.

11.  Package samples  and  complete  necessary
    paperwork.

12.  Transport sample to decontamination zone to
    prepare it for transport to analytical laboratory.

Submersible Pump

Although  it is  recommended that  samples  not  be
collected  with  a submersible pump due  to the
reasons stated  in  Section  2.4, there  are  some
situations where they may be used.

1.   Allow  the  monitoring  well  to recharge  afler
    purging,  keeping  the  pump  just above the
    screened section.
                                                  11

-------
2.   Attach gate valve to hose (if not already fitted),
    and reduce  flow  of  water to a manageable
    sampling rate.

3.   Assemble the appropriate bottles.

4.   If no gate valve is available, run the water down
    the  side  of a  clean  jar  and fill the  sample
    bottles from the jar.

5.   Cap the sample container tightly and place pre-
    labeled sample container in a carrier.

6.   Replace  the well cap.

7.   Log ah1 samples in the site logbook and on the
    field data sheets and label all samples.

8.   Package  samples  and  complete  necessary
    paperwork.

9.   Transport sample to decontamination zone for
    preparation   for   transport  to  analytical
    laboratory.

10.  Upon completion, remove pump and assembly
    and fully decontaminate prior to setting into the
    next sample well.  Dedicate  the tubing  to the
    hole.

Non-Gas Contact Bladder  Pump

The use of a  non-gas contact positive displacement
bladder  pump  is often  mandated by the  use of
dedicated pumps installed in wells.  These pumps
are  also suitable for shallow (less than  100 feet)
wells.  They  are somewhat difficult to  clean, but
may be used with dedicated sample tubing to avoid
cleaning. These pumps require a  power supply and
a compressed gas  supply (or compressor).  They
may be operated at variable flow and pressure rates
making them ideal for both purging and sampling.

Barcelona (1984) and Nielsen (1985) report that the
non-gas  contact positive displacement pumps cause
the  least amount of alteration in sample integrity as
compared to other  sample retrieval methods.

1.   Allow well to recharge after purging.

2.   Assemble the appropriate bottles.
3.   Turn pump  on,  increase the cycle time  and
    reduce the pressure to the minimum that will
    allow the sample to come to the surface.

4.   Cap the sample container tightly and place pre-
    labeled sample container in a carrier.

5.   Replace the  well cap.

6.   Log all samples in the site logbook and on field
    data sheets and label all  samples.

7.   Package  samples  and  complete  necessary
    paperwork.

8.   Transport sample to decontamination zone for
    preparation   for  transport   to  analytical
    laboratory.

9.   On completion,  remove  the  tubing from the
    well and either replace the Teflon tubing and
    bladder with new dedicated tubing and bladder
    or  rigorously  decontaminate  the  existing
    materials.

10.  Collect  non-filtered samples directly from the
    outlet tubing into the sample bottle.

11.  For filtered samples, connect the pump outlet
    tubing  directly to the filter unit.  The pump
    pressure should remain  decreased so that the
    pressure build-up on the filter does not blow
    out the pump bladder or displace the filter.
    For  the  Geotech  barrel  filter, no   actual
    connections  are necessary so this  is  not  a
    concern.

Suction Pump

In view of the limitations of suction pumps, they are
not recommended for sampling purposes.

Inertia Pump

Inertia pumps may be used to collect samples.  It is
more common, however, to purge with these pumps
and sample with  a bailer.

1.   Following well  evacuation, allow  the  well  to
    recharge.

2.   Assemble the appropriate bottles.
                                                 12

-------
3.   Since these pumps are manually operated, the
    flew rate may be regulated by the sampler.
    The sample may be discharged from the pump
    outlet  directly  into  the  appropriate  sample
    container.

4.   Cap the sample container tightly and place pre-
    labeled sample container in a carrier.

5.   Replace the well cap.

6.   Log all samples in the site logbook and on field
    data sheets and label all samples.

7.   Package  samples  and  complete  necessary
    paperwork.

8.   Transport sample  to decontamination zone for
    preparation   for   transport   to   analytical
    laboratory.

9.   Upon   completion,   remove   pump  and
    decontaminate or  discard, as appropriate.
2.7.5  Filtering

For samples that require filtering, such as samples
which will be analyzed for total metals, the filter
must be decontaminated prior to use and between
uses.  Filters work by two methods. A barrel filter
such as the "Geotech" filter works with a bicycle
pump, which is used to build up positive pressure in
the chamber containing the sample. The sample is
then forced through the filter paper (minimum size
0.45 ion) into a jar placed underneath. The barrel
itself is  filled manually from the bailer  or directly
via the hose of the sampling pump. The pressure
must  be maintained  up to 30  psi by  periodic
pumping.

A  vacuum  type filter  involves  two chambers, the
upper chamber contains  the sample and a filter
(minimum  size 0.45  Aon) divides  the  chambers.
Using a hand pump or a Gilian type pump, air is
withdrawn  from the  lower  chamber, creating a
vacuum  and  thus  causing  the sample  to  move
through the filter into the lower chamber where it
is drained into a sample jar, repeated pumping may
be required to drain all the sample into the lower
chamber. If preservation of the sample is necessary,
this should be done after  filtering.
2.7.6  Post Operation

After all samples are collected and preserved, the
sampling equipment should be decontaminated prior
to sampling  another  well.    This will  prevent
cross-contamination of  equipment and monitoring
wells between locations.

1.   Decontaminate all  equipment.

2.   Replace  sampling  equipment  in  storage
    containers.

3.   Prepare and transport water samples to the
    laboratory.  Check  sample documentation and
    make sure  samples are properly  packed for
    shipment.

2.7.7  Special  Considerations for  VOA
        Sampling

The  proper collection  of a  sample for volatile
organics requires minimal disturbance of the sample
to limit volatilization  and  therefore a  loss  of
volatiles from the sample.

Sample  retrieval systems suitable for the  valid
collection of volatile organic samples are:  positive
displacement    bladder  pumps,  gear    driven
submersible pumps, syringe  samplers and bailers
(Barcelona, 1984; Nielsen, 1985).  Field conditions-
and  other  constraints  will  limit  the  choice  of
appropriate systems. The focus of concern must be
to provide a valid sample for analysis, one which has
been subjected  to  the least amount of turbulence
possible.

The following procedures should be followed:

1.   Open the vial, set cap in a clean place, and
    collect  the  sample during the middle of the
    cycle. When collecting duplicates, collect both
    samples at  the same time.

2.   Fill the vial to just overflowing. Do not rinse
    the  vial, nor  excessively  overfill  it.    There
    should be a convex meniscus on the top of the
    vial.

3.   Check that the cap has not been contaminated
    (splashed) and carefully cap the vial.  Place the
    cap  directly over  the  top  and  screw down
    firmly.  Do not ovcrtighten and break  the cap.
                                                 13

-------
4.   Invert the vial and tap gently. Observe vial for
    at least 10 seconds.  If an air bubble appears,
    discard the  sample  and begin  again.   It is
    imperative  that  no  entrapped  air  is  in  the
    sample vial.

5.   Immediately place the  vial  in  the  protective
    foam sleeve and place into the cooler, oriented
    so that it is lying on its side,  not straight up.

6.   The holding time  for VOAs is 7 days. Samples
    should be shipped or delivered to the laboratory
    daily so  as  not' to  exceed the holding time.
    Ensure that the samples remain at 4ฐC, but do
    not allow them to freeze.
2.8     CALCULATIONS

There are no calculations necessary to implement
this  procedure.   However,  if it is  necessary  to
calculate  the  volume  of the  well,  utilize  the
following equation:

     Well volume = nr2h (cf)    [Equation 1]
where:
    n
    r
    h
               radius of monitoring well (feet)
               height of the water column  (feet)
               [This  may  be  determined  by
               subtracting the  depth  to  water
               from the total depth of the well as
               measured from the same reference
               point.]
    cf   =      conversion factor (gal/ft3) = 7.48
               gal/ft3  [In  this equation,   7.48
               gal/ft3 is the necessary conversion
               factor.]

Monitoring wells are typically 2, 3, 4, or 6 inches in
diameter.    If  you  know  the  diameter  of  the
monitoring well, there are  a number of standard
conversion factors which can be used to simplify the
equation above.

The volume, in gallons per linear foot, for various
standard  monitoring  well  diameters  can  be
calculated as follov-.s:
                                                                v = nr2 (cf)    [Equation 2]

                                                      where:
                                                          v   =  volume in gallons per linear foot
                                                          n   =  pi
                                                          r   =  radius of monitoring well (feet)
                                                          cf  =  conversion factor (7.48 gal/ft3)

                                                      For a 2-inch  diameter well,  the volume in gallons
                                                      per linear foot can be calculated as follows:

                                                          v   =  nr2  (cf)    [Equation 2]
                                                              =  3.14 (1/12 ft)2 7.48 gal/ft3
                                                              =  0.1632 gal/ft

                                                      Remember that if you have a 2-inch diameter, well
                                                      you must  convert this to the radius  in feet  to be
                                                      able to use the equation.

                                                      The volume  in  gallons  per linear  foot  for  the
                                                      common size monitoring  wells are as follows:
                                                      Well Diameter

                                                          2 inches
                                                          3 inches
                                                          4 inches
                                                          6 inches
                       v (volume in gal/ft.)

                               0.1632
                               0.3672
                               0.6528
                               1.4688
If you utilize the conversion factors above, Equation
1 should be modified as follows:

Well volume  = (h)(v)    [Equation 3]

where:
    h   =  height of water column (feet)
    v   =  volume in  gallons per  linear foot  as
           calculated from Equation 2


2.9    QUALITY ASSURANCE/
        QUALITY CONTROL

There  are no specific  quality assurance  activities
which  apply  to   the  implementation  of  these
procedures.   However, the following general QA
procedures apply:

     •   All data must be documented on field data
        sheets or within site logbooks.

     •   All  instrumentation must  be operated in
        accordance with operating  instructions as
        supplied   by   the  manufacturer,  unless
                                                  14

-------
        otherwise  specified  in  the  work  plan.
        Equipment   checkout   and   calibration
        activities   must   occur    prior   to
        sampling/operation  and  they must   be
        documented.
2.10   DATA VALIDATION

This section is not applicable to this SOP.


2.11   HEALTH AND SAFETY
                    i
When working with potentially hazardous materials,
follow U.S. EPA, OSHA and  specific  health and
safety procedures.   More  specifically,  depending
upon  the  site-specific  contaminants,  various
protective programs must be implemented prior to
sampling the first well.  The site health and safety
plan should be  reviewed with specific emphasis
placed on the  protection program planned for the
well  sampling  tasks.   Standard  safe  operating
practices should be  followed  such as  minimizing
contact  with  potential  contaminants in both  the
vapor phase and liquid matrix through  the use of
respirators and disposable clothing.

For volatile organic contaminants:

    •   Avoid  breathing constituents venting from
        the well.
    •   Pre-survey the  well  head-space  with an
        FID/PID prior to sampling.

    •   If  monitoring  results  indicate   organic
        constituents,  sampling  activities  may be
        conducted in Level C  protection.   At a
        minimum, skin protection will be afforded
        by disposable protective clothing.

Physical hazards associated with well sampling arc:

    •   Lifting injuries associated with pump and
        bailer retrieval; moving equipment.

    •   Use of pocket knives for cutting discharge
        hose.

    •   Heat/cold stress as a result of exposure to
        extreme temperatures (may be heightened
        by protective clothing).

    •   Slip,  trip,  fall  conditions as  a  result of
        pump discharge.

    •   Restricted mobility due to the wearing of
        protective clothing.
                                                 15

-------
                     3.0    SOIL  GAS SAMPLING:  SOP #2149
 3.1     SCOPE AND APPLICATION

 Soil gas monitoring provides a quick means of waste
 site evaluation.  Using this method, underground
 contamination can be identified, and the  source,
 extent, and  movement of the pollutants  can  be
 traced.

 This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) outlines
 the methods used by EPA/ERT in installing soil gas
 wells; measuring organic levels in the soil gas using
 an HNU PI  101 Portable Photoionization Analyzer
 and/or other air monitoring devices; and sampling
 the soil gas using Tedlar bags, Tenax sorbent tubes,
 and SUMMA canisters.
3.2    METHOD SUMMARY

A 3/8-inch diameter hole is driven into the ground
to a depth of 4 to 5 feet using a commercially
available "slam bar". (Soil gas can also be sampled
at other depths by the use of a longer bar or bar
attachments.) A 1/4-inch O.D. stainless steel probe
is inserted into the hole.  The hole is then sealed at
the top around the probe using modeling clay. The
gas contained in the interstitial spaces of the soil is
sampled by pulling the sample through the probe
using an air  sampling pump.  The sample may be
stored  in  Tedlar  bags,  drawn  through  sorbent
cartridges, or analyzed  directly  using  a  direct
reading instrument.

The air  sampling pump  is  not used for SUMMA
canister  sampling of soil gas. Sampling is achieved
by  soil  gas  equilibration with  the  evacuated
SUMMA  canister.   Other field air  monitoring
devices, such as the combustible gas indicator (MSA
CGI/02  Meter, Model 260) and the  organic vapor
analyzer (Foxboro OVA, Model 128),  can also be
used  depending   on  specific  site  conditions.
Measurement  of   soil   temperature   using  a
temperature probe  may also be desirable.  Bagged
samples  arc usually analy/cd in a field laboratory
using a portable Photovac GC.

Power driven sampling probes may be utilized when
soil conditions make sampling by hand unfeasible
(i.e., frozen ground, very  dense clays, pavement,
etc.).   Commercially available soil gas sampling
probes (hollow, 1/2-inch O.D. steel probes) can be
driven to the desired depth using a power hammer
(e.g., Bosch Demolition Hammer).  Samples can be
drawn through the probe itself, or through Teflon
tubing inserted through the probe and attached to
the probe point.   Samples are collected  and
analyzed as described above.
3.3    SAMPLE PRESERVATION,
        CONTAINERS, HANDLING, AND
        STORAGE

3.3.1   Tedlar Bag

Soil gas  samples  are generally contained in  1-L
Tedlar bags.  Bagged samples are best  stored in
coolers to protect the bags from any damage that
may occur in the  field or in  transit.  In addition,
coolers  ensure  the integrity of the samples  by
keeping them at a cool temperature and out of
direct sunlight. Samples should be analyzed as soon
as possible, preferably within 24 to 48 hours.

3.3.2  Tenax Tube

Bagged samples can also be drawn into  Tenax or'
other sorbent tubes to undergo lab GC/MS analysis.
If Tenax tubes are to be utilized, special care must
be taken to avoid contamination. Handling of the
tubes should be kept to a minimum, and samplers
must wear nylon or other lint-free gloves.   After
sampling, each tube should be stored in a clean,
sealed culture tube; the ends packed with clean
glass  wool to  protect the  sorbent  tube  from
breakage.  The  culture tubes should  be  kept cool
and  wrapped in aluminum  foil to  prevent  any
photodegradation of samples (see Section 3.7.4.).

3.3.3  SUMMA Canister

The SUMMA canisters  used for soil gas sampling
have a 6-L sample capacity and are certified clean
by GC/MS analysis before being utili/cd in  the
field.  After sampling is completed, they arc stored
and shipped in travel cases.
                                               17

-------
3.4    INTERFERENCES AND
       POTENTIAL PROBLEMS

3.4.1  HNU Measurements

A number of factors can affect the response of the
HNU PI  101.   High humidity  can cause  lamp
fogging and decreased  sensitivity.   This can be
significant when  soil  moisture levels are high, or
when a  soil gas  well is  actually in groundwater.
High  concentrations of  methane  can cause  a
downscale deflection of the meter.   High and low
temperature,  electrical   fields,   FM   radio
transmission,  and naturally occurring compounds,
such as terpenes  in wooded areas,  will  also  affect
instrument response.

Other field screening instruments can be affected by
interferences. Consult the manufacturers' manuals.

3.4.2 Factors Affecting Organic
       Concentrations in Soil Gas

Concentrations   in  soil  gas  are  affected by
dissolution,   adsorption,   and   partitioning.
Partitioning refers to the ratio of component found
in  a  saturated vapor above an aqueous solution to
the amount in the solution; this can, in theory, be
calculated  using the  Henry's  Law  constants.
Contaminants can also be adsorbed onto inorganic
soil   components   or   "dissolved"  in  organic
components. These factors can result in a lowering
of the partitioning coefficient.

Soil "tightness" or amount of void space in the soil
matrix, will affect the rate of recharging of gas into
the soil gas well.

Existence of a high, or perched, water table, or of
an impermeable  underlying layer (such as  a clay
lens or  layer of buried  slag) may interfere with
sampling of the soil gas. Knowledge of site geology
is  useful in such  situations, and  can prevent
inaccurate sampling.

3.4.3  Soil Probe Clogging

A  common problem with this sampling method  is
soil  probe clogging.  A clogged  probe can be
identified by  using an in-line vacuum gauge or by
listening  for the sound of the pump laboring. This
problem  can usually be eliminated by using  a wire
cable to  clear the  probe (see procedure  #3  in
Section 3.7.1).
3.4.4  Underground Utilities

Prior to selecting sample locations, an underground
utility search  is recommended.  The local  utility
companies can be contacted and requested to mark
the locations of their underground lines. Sampling
plans can then  be drawn up  accordingly.  Each
sample location should also be screened with  a
metal detector or  magnetometer to verify that no
underground pipes or drums exist.
3.5     EQUIPMENT/APPARATUS

3.5.1   Slam Bar Method

    •   slam bar (one per sampling team)
    •   soil gas probes, stainless steel tubing, 1/4-
        inch O.D., 5 foot length
    •   flexible wire or cable used for clearing the
        tubing during insertion into the well
    •   "quick connect" fittings to connect sampling
        probe tubing, monitoring instruments, and
        Gilian pumps  to appropriate  fittings  on
        vacuum box
    •   modeling clay
    •   vacuum box for drawing a vacuum around
        Tedlar bag for sample  collection (one per
        sampling team)
    •   Gilian pump Model HFS113A adjusted to
        approximately 3.0 L/min (one  to two per
        sampling team)
    •   1/4-inch Teflon tubing, 2 to 3 foot lengths,
        for replacement of contaminated  sample
        line
    •   Tedlar bags, 1 liter, at least one bag per
        sample point
    •   soil gas  sampling labels, field data sheets,
        logbook, etc.
    •   HNU Model PI 101, or other field  air
        monitoring  devices, (one per sampling
        team)
    •   ice chest, for carrying  equipment  and  for
        protection of samples (two per sampling
        team)
    •   metal  detector  or  magnetometer,  for
        detecting   underground   utilities/
        pipes/drums (one per sampling team)
    •   Photovac GC,  for  field-lab  analysis of
        bagged samples
    •   SUMMA  canisters  (plus  their  shippin,
        cases)    for   sample,    storage   an
        transportation
                                                18

-------
3.5.2   Power Hammer Method

    •   Bosch demolition hammer
    •   1/2-inch O.D. steel probes, extensions, and
        points
    •   dedicated aluminum sampling points
    •   Teflon tubing, 1/4-inch O.D.
    •   "quick connect" fittings to connect sampling
        probe tubing, monitoring instruments, and
        Gilian pumps to appropriate  fittings on
        vacuum box
    •   modeling  clay
    •   vacuum box for drawing a vacuum around
        Tedlar bag for sample collection (one per
        sampling team)
    •   Gilian pump Model HFS113A  adjusted to
        approximately 3.0 L/min (one to two per
        sampling team)
    •   1/4-inch Teflon tubing, 2 to 3 foot lengths,
        for replacement of contaminated sample
        line
    •   Tedlar bags, 1 liter, at least one bag per
        sample point
    •   soil gas sampling labels, field data sheets,
        logbook, etc.
    •   HNU Model  PI 101, or  other field  air
        monitoring  devices,  (one  per sampling
        team)
    •   ice chest, for carrying equipment and for
        protection of samples (two per sampling
        team)
    •   metal detector   or  magnetometer,  for
        detecting   underground   utilities/
        pipes/drums (one per sampling team)
    •   Photovac  GC,  for field-lab  analysis  of
        bagged samples
    •   SUMMA canisters (plus   their shipping
        cases)    for   sample,   storage   and
        transportation
    •   generator with extension cords
    •   high lift jack assembly for removing probes
3.6     REAGENTS

    •   HNU  Systems Inc.  Calibration Gas  for
        HNU Model PI 101, and/or calibration gas
        for other field air monitoring devices
    •   deionizcd  organic-free   water,   for
        decontamination
    •   mcthanol,   HPLC   grade,   for
        decontamination
    •   ultra-zero grade compressed air, for field
        blanks
        standard gas preparations for Photovac GC
        calibration and Tedlar bag spikes
3.7     PROCEDURES

3.7.1   Soil Gas Well  Installation

1.   Initially, make a hole slightly deeper than the
    desired depth. For sampling up to 5 feet, use
    a 5-foot single piston  slam bar.  For deeper
    depths, use a  piston slam bar with threaded 4-
    foot-long extensions. Other techniques can be
    used, so long  as holes  are of narrow diameter
    and no contamination is introduced.

2.   After the hole is made, carefully withdraw the
    slam bar to prevent collapse of the walls of the
    hole. Then insert  the soil gas probe.

3.   It is necessary to prevent plugging of the probe,
    especially for deeper holes. Place a metal wire
    or cable, slightly longer than the probe, into the
    probe prior to inserting into the hole.  Insert
    the  probe to full depth, then pull it up 3 to 6
    inches, then clear it by moving the cable up and
    down.  The cable is removed before sampling.

4.   Seal the top of the sample hole at  the surface
    against  ambient  air  infiltration   by  using
    modeling clay molded around the probe at the
    surface of the hole.

5.   If conditions preclude  hand installation of the
    soil gas wells, the power driven  system may be
    employed.     Use  the   generator-powered
    demolition hammer  to drive the probe to the
    desired depth (up to 12 feet may be attained
    with extensions).  Pull the probe  up 1  to 3
    inches if the retractable point is used.  No clay
    is needed to  seal  the  hole.  After sampling,
    retrieve the  probe  using  the  high lift  jack
    assembly.

6.   If scmi-pcrmancnt soil gas wells arc required,
    use the  dedicated  aluminum  probe points.
    Insert  these  points into  the bottom of the
    power-driven  probe and attach it to the Teflon
    tubing.  Insert the probe as in step 5.  When
    the  probe is  removed, the point  and Teflon
    tube remain in the hole, which may be scaled
    by backfilling with sand, bcntonitc, or soil.

-------
3.7.2  Screening with  Field
        Instruments

1.   The well volume must be evacuated prior to
    sampling.  Connect the Gilian pump, adjusted
    to 3.0  L/min, to the sample probe using a
    section of Teflon tubing as a connector.  Turn
    the pump on, and a vacuum is pulled through
    the probe for approximately 15 seconds.   A
    longer  time  is required  for sample wells of
    greater depths.

2.   After   evacuation,  connect  the  monitoring
    instrument(s) to the  probe using a Teflon
    connector.   When the reading is  stable,  or
    peaks,  record the  reading.    For detailed
    procedures   on  HNU  field  protocol,   see
    appendix B,  and refer to  the manufacturer's
    instructions.

3.   Some  readings may be  above or below  the
    range set on the field instruments.  The range
    may be reset, or the response  recorded as a
    figure  greater than or less than  the  range.
    Consider the recharge rate of the well with  soil
    gas when sampling at a different range setting.

3.7.3  Tedlar Bag Sampling

1.   Follow step 1 in section 3.7.2 to evacuate well
    volume. If air monitoring instrument screening
    was performed prior to sampling, evacuation is
    not necessary.

2.   Use the vacuum box and sampling train (Figure
    3 in Appendix A)  to  take  the sample.  The
    sampling train is designed to minimize  the
    introduction of contaminants and losses due to
    adsorption.  All wetted parts are either Teflon
    or stainless  steel.    The  vacuum  is  drawn
    indirectly to avoid contamination from sample
    pumps.

3.   Place the Tedlar bag inside the vacuum box,
    and attach it to the sampling port.  Attach  the
    sample probe to the sampling port via Teflon
    tubing and a "quick connect" fitting.

4.   Draw a vacuum around the outside of the bag,
    using a Gilian pump connected to the vacuum
    box evacuation port, via  Tygon  tubing and a
    "quick connect" fitting.  The vacuum causes  the
    bag to inflate, drawing the sample.
5.  Break the vacuum by removing the Tygon line
    from the pump. Remove the bagged sample
    from  the  box and  close  valve.   Label bag,
    record data on  data  sheets or  in logbooks.
    Record the date, time, sample location ID, and
    the HNU,  or other instrument reading(s)  on
    sample bag label.

CAUTION:  Labels should not be pasted directly
onto the bags, nor should  bags be labeled directly
using a marker or pen.   Inks and adhesive may
diffuse through the bag material, contaminating the
sample. Place labels on the edge of the bags, or tie
the labels to the metal eyelets provided on the bags.
Markers with inks containing volatile organics (i.e.,
permanent ink markers) should not be used.

3.7.4  Tenax Tube Sampling

Samples collected in Tedlar bags may be sorbed
onto Tenax tubes for further analysis by GC/MS.

Additional Apparatus

    •   Syringe with  a luer-lock tip capable  of
        drawing a soil gas or air sample from a
        Tedlar  bag onto  a Tenax/CMS sorbent
        tube.  The syringe capacity is dependent
        upon the volume  of sample  being drawn
        onto the sorbent tube.

    •   Adapters  for  fitting  the  sorbent  tube
        between the Tedlar bag and  the sampling
        syringe. The adapter attaching the Tedlar
        bag  to the  sorbent  tube  consists  of a
        reducing union (1/4-inch to 1/16-inch O.D.
        -  Swagelok  cat. #  SS-400-6-ILV  or
        equivalent) with a length of 1/4-inch O.D.
        Teflon tubing replacing the nut on the 1/6-
        inch (Tedlar bag)  side.  A  1/4-inch I.D.
        silicone O-ring replaces the ferrules in the
        nut on  the 1/4-inch (sorbent  tube) side of
        the union.

        The adapter attaching the sampling syringe
        to the sorbent tube consists of a reducing
        union  (1/4-inch  to   1/16-inch  O.D.  --
        Swagelok   Cat.   #    SS-400-6-ILV   or
        equivalent) with a 1/4-inch  I.D. silicone
        O-ring replacing the ferrules in the nut on
        the 1/4-inch (sorbent  tube) side and the
        needle  of  a  luer-lock  syringe  needle
        inserted into the  1/16-inch  side (held in
        place  with a  1/16-inch  ferrule).   The
                                                ?0

-------
        luer-lock end of the needle can be attached
        to the sampling syringe. !t is useful to have
        a luer-lock on/off valve situated between
        the  syringe and the needle.

    •   Two-stage  glass  sampling  cartridge  (1/4-
        inch O.D.  x 1/8-inch I.D x 5  !/'H  inch)
        contained   in   a   flame-scaled   tube
        (manufactured   by   Supclco   Custom
        Tenax/Spherocarb Tubes  or equivalent)
        containing two sorbent sections retained by
        glass wool:

        Front section:    150 mg of Tenax-GC
        Back section:    150 mg of CMS
        (Carbonized Molecular Sieve)

        Sorbent tubes may also he prepared in the
        lab  and  stored  in  either Teflon-capped
        culture  tubes  or  stainless  steel  lube
        containers.  Sorbent tubes stored in this
        manner should not  be  kept  more than 2
        weeks without reconditioning.   (Sec SOP
        #2052  for Tenax/CMS  sorbent  tube
        preparation).

    •   Teflon-capped culture  tubes or stainless
        steel  tube containers  for  sorbent  tube
        storage.    These containers should  be
        conditioned by baking at 120ฐC for at least
        2 hours.  The culture tubes should contain
        a glass wool plug to prevent  sorbent tube
        breakage during transport.  Reconditioning
        of the containers should  occur between
        usage or after extended periods of disuse
        (i.e., 2 weeks or more).

    •   Nylon gloves or  lint-free cloth.  (Hewlett
        Packard Part # 8650-0030 or equivalent.)

Sample Collection

1.   Handle  sorbent tubes with care, using nylon
    gloves (or  other  lint-free material) to avoid
    contamination.

2.   Immediately before sampling, break one end of
    the   scaled  tube  and   remove   the   Tcnax
    cartridge.  For in-house prepared lubes, u-move
    cartridge from il.s conluiner

3.   Connect the valve  on the Tccllar b;ti> lo (lie
    sorbent lube adapter. Connect the sorbent tube
    to the sorbent tube  ad.ipler  with the Tenax
4.
(white granular) side of the tube facing  the
Tedlar bag.

Connect the sampling syringe assembly to  the
CMS (black) side of the sorbent tube.  Fittings
on the adapters should be very tight.
5.   Open the valve on the Tedlar bag.

6.   Open the on/off valve of the sampling syringe.

7.   Draw a predetermined volume of sample onto
    the sorbent tube. (This may require closing the
    syringe  valve,  emptying the syringe and then
    repeating the procedure, depending upon the
    syringe   capacity  and  volume  of  sample
    required.)

8.   After sampling, remove the  tube  from the
    sampling train with gloves or a clean cloth. Do
    not label or write on the Tenax/CMS tube.

9.   Place  the   sorbent  tube  in  a  conditioned
    stainless steel  tube  holder or  culture  tube.
    Culture tube caps should be sealed with Teflon
    tape.

Sample Labeling

Each  sample tube  container (not tube) must be
labeled with the  site name, sample station number,
sample date, and sample volume.

Chain of custody forms must accompany all samples
to the  laboratory.

Quality Assurance

Before field use, a OA check should be performed
on each batch of sorbent tubes by analy/ing a tube
with   thermal    dcsorption/cryogcnic   trapping
GC/MS.

At least one blank sample must be submitted with
each set of samples collected at  a site. This trip
blank must be treated the same as the sample tubes
except no sample will be drawn through the tube.

Sample tubes should be stored out of UV light (i.e.,
sunlight) and kept on ice  until analysis.

Samples  should  be  taken  in  duplicate,  when
possible.
                                                 21

-------
3.7.5  SUMMA Canister Sampling

1.   Follow item 1 in step 3.7.2 to evacuate well
    volume. If HNU analysis was performed prior
    to taking a sample, evacuation is not necessary.

2.   Attach  a  certified  clean,  evacuated   6-L
    SUMMA  canister via  the 1/4-inch  Teflon
    tubing.

3.   Open the valve on SUMMA canister. The soil
    gas  sample is  drawn  into the  canister  by
    pressure  equilibration.    The  approximate
    sampling time fdr a 6-L canister is 20 minutes.

4.   Site name, sample location, number, and date
    must be recorded on a  chain of custody form
    and on a blank tag attached to the canister.
3.8    CALCULATIONS

3.8.1  Field Screening Instruments

Instrument readings are usually read directly from
the meter. In some cases, the background level at
the soil gas station may be subtracted:
    Final Reading
Sample Reading -
Background
3.8.2   Photovac GC Analysis

Calculations  used to determine concentrations of
individual components by Photovac GC analysis are
beyond the scope of this SOP and are covered in
ERT SOP #2109, Photovac GC Analysis for Soil,
Water and Air/Soil  Gas.
3.9    QUALITY ASSURANCE/
       QUALITY CONTROL

3.9.1  Field Instrument Calibration

Consult the manufacturers' manuals for correct use
and calibration of all instrumentation.  The HNU
should  be calibrated at  least once a day.

3.9.2  Gilian Model HFS113A Air
       Sampling Pump Calibration

Flow should be set at  approximately 3.0 L/min;
                             accurate flow adjustment is not necessary.  Pumps
                             should be calibrated prior to bringing into the field.
3.9.3  Sample Probe Contamination

Sample probe contamination is checked between
each sample by  drawing ambient air through the
probe via a Gilian pump and checking the response
of the HNU PI 101.  If HNU readings are higher
than background, replacement or decontamination
is necessary.

Sample probes may be decontaminated simply by
drawing ambient air through the probe until the
HNU reading is at background.  More persistent
contamination can be washed out using methanol
and water, then air drying.  Having more than one
probe per  sample team will  reduce lag  times
between  sample   stations   while   probes   are
decontaminated.

3.9.4  Sample Train Contamination

The Teflon line forming the sample train from the
probe to  the Tedlar bag should be  changed  on a
daily basis.  If visible contamination (soil or water)
is  drawn into the  sampling train, it  should  be
changed immediately.  When  sampling in highly
contaminated areas,  the sampling train should be
purged with ambient air, via a Gilian pump, for
approximately 30 seconds between each sample.
After purging, the sampling train can be checked
using an HNU, or other field monitoring device, to
establish the cleanliness of the Teflon line.

3.9.5  Field Blank

Each cooler containing samples should also contain
one Tedlar bag of ultra-zero grade air, acting as a
field blank. The field blank should accompany the
samples in the  field  (while  being collected) and
when they are delivered for analysis. A fresh blank
must be provided to be placed in the empty cooler
pending additional sample collection. One new field
blank per cooler of samples is required. A chain of
custody form must  accompany each cooler of
samples  and should include  the  blank  that  is
dedicated to that group of samples.

3.9.6  Trip Standard

Each cooler containing samples should contain a
Tedlar bag  of  standard  gas to  calibrate the
                                               22

-------
analytical instruments (Photovac GC,  etc.).  This
trip standard will be used to determine any changes
in concentrations of the target compounds during
the course of the  sampling day  (e.g., migration
through  the   sample   bag,   degradation,   or
adsorption). A fresh trip standard must be provided
and placed in each cooler pending additional sample
collection.   A  chain  of  custody  form  should
accompany each  cooler  of samples and  should
include the trip standard that is dedicated  to that
group of samples.

3.9.7  Tedlar  Bag Check

Prior to use, one bag should be removed from each
lot  (case of 100) of Tedlar bags  to be used for
sampling and checked for possible contamination as
follows: the test bag should be filled with ultra-zero
grade air; a sample  should be drawn from the bag
and analyzed via  Photovac GC or whatever method
is to be used for sample analysis.  This procedure
will ensure sample container cleanliness prior to the
start of the sampling effort.

3.9.8  SUMMA  Canister Check

From each  lot  of four cleaned SUMMA canisters,
one is  to be removed for a GC/MS certification
check.  If the canister passes certification, then it is
re-evacuated and all four canisters from that lot are
available for sampling.

If the  chosen  canister  is contaminated, then the
entire  lot  of  four  SUMMA canisters  must  be
rcclcancd, and a  single canister is rc-analy/cd  by
GC/MS for certification.

3.9.9  Options

Duplicate Samples

A minimum  of  5%  of all  samples  should  be
collected in duplicate (i.e., if a total of 100 samples
are to  be  collected,  five  samples  should  be
duplicated).    In   choosing  which  samples  to
duplicate, the following criterion applies:  if, after
filling the first Tedlar bag, and, evacuating the well
for  15  seconds, the second HNU (or  other field
monitoring  device being used) reading  matches or
is close  to (within 50'';)  the  first  reading,  a
duplicate sample may be taken.
Spikes

A Tedlar bag spike and "fenax tube spike may be
desirable in situations where high concentrations of
contaminants other than the target compounds are
found to exist (landfills, etc.).  The additional level
of QA/QC attained by this practice can be useful in
determining the effects of interferences caused bv
these non-target compounds.   SUMMA canisters
containing samples are not spiked.
3.10   DATA VALIDATION

For   each  target   compound,  the   level   of
concentration found in the sample must be greater
than three times the level (for that  compound)
found in the field blank  which accompanied  that
sample to be considered  valid.  The same criteria
apply to target compounds detected in the Tedlar
bag pre-sampling  contamination check.
3.11    HEALTH AND SAFETY

Because   the   sample  is   being   drawn   from
underground, and no contamination is introduced
into the breathing  zone, soil gas sampling usually
occurs in Level D, unless the sampling location is
within the hot  zone of a site, which requires Level
B or Level C protection.  However, to ensure that
the proper level of protection is utilized, constantly
monitor the ambient air using the HNU  PI 101 to
obtain background  readings during the  sampling
procedure.  As long as the levels in ambient air do
not rise above  background, no upgrade of the level
of protection is needed.

Also, perform an underground utility search prior to
sampling (sec  section 34.4).  When working with
potentially hazardous materials, follow U.S. EPA,
OSHA, and specific health and safety procedures

-------
            4.0    MONITORING WELL  INSTALLATION:  SOP #2150
4.1     SCOPE AND APPLICATION

The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure
(SOP) is to provide  an overview of the  methods
used for monitoring well installation.  Monitoring
well installation creates a permanent access for the
collection of samples to determine groundwater
quality  and  the  hydrogeologic properties of the
aquifer in which the contaminants exist. Such wells
should  not  alter the  medium which   is  being
monitored.

The most commonly used drilling methods are: (1)
hollow-stem augers, (2) cable tool drills, and (3)
rotary drills.  Rotary  drilling can be divided into a
mud rotary or air rotary method.
4.2    METHOD SUMMARY

There  is  no  ideal  monitoring well installation
method for all conditions; therefore, hydrogeologic
conditions at the site and project objectives must be
considered before deciding which drilling method to
use.

4.2.1   Hollow-Stem Augering

Hollow-stem  augering  is fast and  relatively  less
expensive than cable tool or rotary drilling methods.
It  is  possible to  drill  several  hundred feet of
borehole per day in unconsolidated formations.

4.2.2   Cable Tool  Drilling

Cable  tool drilling method  involves lifting  and
dropping a heavy, solid chisel-shaped bit, suspended
on a steel cable. This  bit pounds  a  hole through
soil and rock.  Temporary steel casing is used while
drilling to  keep the hole open and to isolate strata.
The temporary casing is  equipped with a drive shoe,
which is attached to the lower end, and which  aids
the advancement of  the casing by drilling  out a
slightly  larger diameter borehole  than  the  hole
made by the drill bit alone.

Water is sometimes used when drilling above the
saturated zone to reduce dust and to form a slurry
with the loosened material. This facilitates removal
of cuttings using a bailer or a sand pump.  Potable
water or distilled/deionized water should be used to
prevent the introduction of contamination into the
borehole.

4.2.3  Rotary  Drilling

Mud Rotary Method

In the mud rotary method, the borehole is advanced
by rapid rotation  of the drill bit, which cuts and
breaks the material at the bottom of the hole into
smaller pieces.  Cuttings are removed by pumping
drilling fluid (water, or water mixed with bentonite)
down through the drill rods and bit, and up the
annulus between the  borehole and  the drill rods.
The drilling fluid also serves to cool the drill bit and
prevent  the   borehole    from   collapsing  in
unconsolidated formations.

Air Rotary Method

The  air rotary method is the same  as the mud
rotary except  that  compressed air is pumped down
the drill rods  and  returns with the drill cuttings up
through the annulus. Air rotary method is generally
limited  to consolidated   and semi-consolidated
formations.  Casing is sometimes used to prevent
cavings in semi-consolidated formations.  The air
must   be  filtered to  prevent introduction  of
contamination into the borehole.
4.3     SAMPLE PRESERVATION,
        CONTAINERS, HANDLING, AND
        STORAGE

Often, a primary object of the drilling program is to
obtain  representative lithologic  or  environmental
samples.  Lithologic samples are taken in order to
determine the geologic or hydrogeologic regime at
a site. The most common techniques for retrieving
lithologic samples in unconsolidated  formations  arc
described below.

    •   Split   spoon   sampling,  carried    out
        continuously or at discrete intervals during
        drilling, is used to make  a field description
        of  the sample  and create  a  log of each
        boring.

-------
    •   Shelby tube sampling,  is  used  when  an
        undisturbed sample is required from clayey
        or silty soils, especially for geotechnical
        evaluation or chemical analysis.

    •   Cuttings description is used when a general
        lithologic  description  and  approximate
        depths are sufficient.

The  most  common techniques  for  retrieving
lithologic sampling in consolidated formations are
described below.

    •   Rock coring is carried out continuously or
        at  discrete intervals  during drilling  and
        enables the geologist  to write a field
        description of the sample,  create a log of
        each boring, and map  occurrences  and
        orientation of fractures.

    •   Cuttings description is used when a general
        lithologic  description  and  approximate
        depths are sufficient.
4.4    INTERFERENCES AND
        POTENTIAL PROBLEMS

Table 3 on page 27 displays the advantages  and
disadvantages of the various drilling techniques.
4.5     EQUIPMENT/APPARATUS

The drilling contractor will provide all operational
equipment   for  the   drilling  program  which  is
outlined. The geologist should bring:
        well log sheets
        metal case (container for well logs)
        ruler
        depth sounder
        water level indicator
        all required health and safety gear
        sample collection jars
        trowels
        description aids (Munsell, grain si/c charts,
        etc.)
4.6    REAGENTS

No chemical  reagents are used in this procedure.
Decontamination of  drilling  equipment  should
follow  ERT  SOP #2006, Sampling  Equipment
Decontamination and the site-specific work plan.
4.7     PROCEDURES

4.7.1   Preparation

The planning, selection and implementation of any
monitoring well installation program should include
the following steps.

1.   Review  existing data  on  site  geology  and
    hydrogeology including publications, air photos,
    water quality data, and existing  maps. These
    may be  obtained from local, state, or federal
    agencies.

2.   Visit  the  site to observe  field geology  and
    potential  access problems for  drill rig,  to
    establish water supply, and drill equipment and
    materials storage area.

3.   Prepare site safety plan.

4.   Define project objectives; select drilling, well
    development, and sampling methods.

5.   Select well construction materials including well
    construction  specifications (i.e.,  casing  and
    screen materials, casing  and screen diameter,
    screen length and  screen  interval, filter  pack
    and screen size).

6.   Determine   need   for   containing   drill
    cuttings/fluids and their  disposal.

7.   Prepare work plan including all  of the above.

8.   Prepare and execute the drilling contract.

9.   Implement the drilling program.

10. Prepare the final report, including  background
    data,  project objective,  field  procedure, well
    construction data including well logs  and well
    construction.

All drilling and well installation programs must be
planned   and   supervised   by  a    professional
gcologisl/hydrogeologist.

4.7.2  Field Preparation

1.   Prior to the mobili/ation of the  drill rig,

-------
               Table 3:  Advantages and Disadvantages of Various  Drilling Techniques
      Drilling Type
             Advantages
              Disadvantages
Auger
Allows sampling from different strata
during drilling.
Less potential for cross-contamination
between strata than in other
techniques.
Large diameter borehole may be
drilled for multiple-well completion.
Less well development is generally needed
than in  mud rotary because  '" the
relatively large diameter bo;  iole,  the
ability to emplace a large an 1 effective
gravel pack, and because no drilling fluids
are introduced into the borehole.
   Very slow or impossible in coarse
   materials such as cobbles and boulders.
   Cannot drill hard rock formations and is
   generally not suited for wells deeper than
   100 feet.
   Not good in caving formations.
   Potential for disturbing large volume of
   subsurface materials around the borehole;
   therefore affecting local permeabilities
   and creating annular channels for
   contaminant movement between different
   strata.
Cable Tool
Allows for easy and accurate detection of
the water table.
Driven casing seals off formation,
minimizing the threat of cross-
contamination in pollution investigation.
Especially successful for drilling in glacial
till.
•  Extremely slow rate of drilling.
•  Can lose casing in deep wells.
Mud Rotary
Quite fast, more than 100 feet of borehole
advancement per day is possible.
Geophysical logs such as  resistivity (which
must be run in an uncased borehole) can
be run before well construction.
   Potential cross-contamination of strata
   exposed to the circulating drilling fluid
   during drilling.
   Difficulty in removing mud residues
   during well development.
   Drilling mud may alter the groundwater
   chemistry by binding metals, sorbing
   organic compounds and by altering pH,
   cation exchange capacity and chemical
   oxidation demand of native  fluids.
   Drilling mud may change local
   permeability of the formation.
Air Rotary
Like mud rotary method, more than 100
feet of borehole advancement a day is
possible.
Sampling different strata during drilling is
possible if temporary casing is advanced.
   In contaminated formations, the use of
   high pressure air may pose  a significant
   hazard to the drill crew due to rapid
   transport of contaminated material up tl
   borehole during drilling.
   Introduction of air to ground water coul
   reduce concentration of volatile organic
   compounds locally.

-------
    thoroughly  decontaminate  the  rig  and  all
    associated equipment to remove all oil, grease,
    mud, etc.

2.   Before drilling each boring,  steam-clean  and
    rinse all  the "down-the-hole" drill equipment
    with  potable  water   to   minimize   cross-
    contamination.   Special attention should  be
    given to the thread section of the casings, and
    to the drill rods. All drilling equipment should
    be steam-cleaned at completion of the project
    to ensure  that no contamination is transported
    to or from the sampling site.

3.   Record  lithologic descriptions and all field
    measurements and comments on the well log
    form (Appendix C).  Include  well construction
    diagrams  on the  well log form for each well
    installed.  At a minimum, the  well construction
    information  should  show  depth  from surface
    grade, the bottom of the boring, the screened
    interval, casing material, casing diameter, gravel
    pack location, grout seal  and height of riser
    pipe above the ground.  Also  record the  actual
    compositions of the grout and seal on the well
    log  form.

4.7.3  Well Construction

The most commonly used casing  materials include
stainless steel, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and Teflon.
Monitoring wells are  constructed with casings and
materials  that  are  resistant  to  the  subsurface
environment.  The selection of well  construction
material is  based  on  the material's  long-term
interaction  with  the contaminated  groundwater.
Construction  materials  should  not   cause  an
analytical bias in the interpretation of the chemical
analysis of the water samples.

Well casing material should also be judged from a
structural standpoint.  Material should be rigid and
nonporous, with  a low surface-area-to-water ratio in
the wellbore  relative to the formation  materials
(U.S.  EPA, 1987).

1.   Fill the annular space between the well  screen
    and the boring with a uniform gravel/sand pack
    to serve  as  a filter media.  For wells deeper
    than   approximately    50   feet,   or  when
    recommended by the site geologist, emplace the
    sand  pack  using a  tremie pipe   (normally
    consisting of a 1.25-inch PVC or steel  pipe).
    Pump  sand  slurry composed  of  sand  and
    potable water through the tremie pipe into the
    annulus throughout the entire screened interval,
    and over the top of the screen.  It is necessary
    to pump sufficient sand/gravel slurry to cover
    the  screen after the  sand/gravel  pack  has
    settled and become dense.

2.   Determine the depth of the top of the  sand
    using the  tremie pipe,  thus   verifying  the
    thickness of the sand pack.  Add more sand to
    bring the top of the sand pack to approximately
    2-3 feet  above  the  top of  the  well  screen.
    Under no circumstances should the sand pack
    extend into any aquifer other than the one to
    be monitored.  In most cases, the well design
    can be modified to allow for a  sufficient sand
    pack  without threat  of  crossflow  between
    producing zones through the  sand pack.

3.   In materials  that will  not  maintain an  open
    hole,  withdraw the temporary or outer casing
    gradually during placement of sand pack/grout
    to the extent  practical.

    For example,  after filling 2 feet with sand pack,
    the outer casing should be withdrawn 2 feet.
    This  step  of  placing   more  gravel   and
    withdrawing  the  outer  casing  should  be
    repeated until the level  of  the sand pack  is
    approximately 3 feet  above the  top of the well
    screen. This ensures  that there is no locking of
    the permanent  (inner) casing  in  the outer
    casing.

4.   Emplace a bentonite  seal, composed of pellets,
    between  the  sand pack and  grout to  prevent
    infiltration of cement into the filter pack and
    the well screen.

    These pellets should  have a minimum purity of
    90% montmorillonite clay, and a minimum dry
    bulk density of 75 lb/ft3 for 1/2-inch pellets, as
    provided by American Colloid,  or equivalent.
    Bentonite pellets shall be poured directly down
    the annulus.

    Care  must be taken to avoid introducing pellets
    into the well  bore. A cap placed over the top
    of the well casing before pouring the bentonite
    pellets from  the bucket will  prevent this.  To
    ensure even application, pour the pellets from
    different points  around the  casing.  To  avoid
    bridging  of   pellets,  they  should  not  be
    introduced at a rate faster than they can settle.
    A tremie  pipe may be used to redistribute and

-------
     level out the top of the seal.

5.  If using a slurry of bentonite as an annular seal,
    prepare it by  mixing powdered or  granular
    bentonite  with potable water. The slurry must
    be  of sufficiently  high specific gravity  and
    viscosity to prevent its displacement by the
    grout  to   be  emplaced  above  it.    As  a
    precaution, regardless of depth, and depending
    on  fluid  viscosity,  add a  few  handfuls of
    bentonite  pellets to solidify the bentonite slurry
    surface.

6.  Place a mixture of cement and bentonite grout
    from the  top  of  the bentonite seal to the
    ground surface.

    Only Type I  or II cement without accelerator
    additives may be used. An approved source of
    potable water must be used for mixing grouting
    materials.  The following mixes are acceptable:

    •   Neat  cement, a  maximum of 6 gallons of
        water  per 94-pound bag of cement

    •   Granular   bentonite,   1.5   pounds   of
        bentonite per 1 gallon of water

    •   Cement-bentonite,  5  pounds   of  pure
        bentonite per 94-pound bag of cement with
        7-8 gallons of water; 13-14 pounds weight,
        if dry  mixed

    •   Cement-bentonite, 6 to 8 pounds of pure
        bentonite per 94-pound bag of cement with
        8-10 gallons of water, if water mixed

    •   Non-expandable  cement,  mixed  at  7.5
        gallons  of  water  to  1/2  teaspoon  of
        aluminum hydroxide, 94 pounds of neat
        cement (Type I)  and 4 pounds of bentonite

    •   Non-expandable cement, mixed at 7 gallons
        of water to 1/2 teaspoon  of  aluminum
        hydroxide, 94 pounds of neat cement (Type
        I and  Type II)

7.   Pump  grout  through  a tremie pipe  to  the
    bottom  of the  open annulus  until undiluted
    grout flows  from the  annulus at the  ground
    surface.

8.   In materials  that will  not  maintain an open
    hole,  the  temporary steel  casing should  be
    withdrawn in  a manner that prevents the level
    of grout from c
    the casing.

9.  Additional groi
    for the remove
    the tremie pip
    grout is at or ai

10. Place the protec
    should be instal---
    Exceptions are  >
    minimum  eleme-,
    include:
 low  the bottom of
  'ed to compensate
  porary casing and
  hat the top of the
  surface.

-  Protective casings
 i!| monitoring wells.
 !w-case basis.  The
, protection  design
     •   A protective steel cap to keep precipitation
        out of the protective casing, secured to the
        casing by padlocks.

     •   A 5-foot-minimum length of black iron or
        galvanized pipe, e tending about 1.5 to 3
        feet above the grc  md  surface, and  set in
        cement  grout.  Th: pipe diameter should
        be 8 inches  for 4-;ich wells, and 6 inches
        for  2-inch wells (  spending on approved
        borehole size).  A 0.5-inch drain hole near
        ground level is permitted.

     •   The installation of guard posts in addition
        to  the protective  ising, in areas where
        vehicular traffic rr   pose a hazard. These
        guard posts consist >i 3-inch diameter steel
        posts or tee-bar dr" /en steel posts.  Groups
        of three are  radially located 4 feet around
        each well 2  feet below and 4 feet  above
        ground  surface,  with flagging in areas of
        high vegetation.  Each post is cemented in-
        place.

     •   A  flush mount  of protective casing may
        also be used in areas  of high traffic or
        where  access  to other areas  would  be
        limited by a  well with stickup.

After the grout  sets (about  48 hours),  fill  any
depression  due  to  settlement  with  a grout  mix
similar to that described  above.
4.8    CALCULATIONS

To  maintain an open borehole using sand or water
rotary  drilling,  the  drilling  fluid  must  exert  a
pressure greater than the formation pore pressure.
Typical  pore pressure for ar unconfincd aquifer is

-------
0.433  psi/ft  and for  a confined aquifer  is 0.465
psi/ft.

The  calculation  for  determining the hydrostatic
pressure of the drilling fluid is:

    Hydrostatic Pressure  (psi)  =  Fluid  Density
    (Ib/gal) x Height  of Fluid Column (ft) x 0.052

The minimum grout volume necessary to grout  a
well can be calculated using:

    Grout Vol (ft3)   = Vol of Borehole (ft3) -
                      Vol of Casing (ft3)
                           B2 - rc2)
where:
    rB =  radius of boring (ft)
    rc =  radius of casing (ft)
    L = length of borehole to be grouted (ft)
4.9     QUALITY ASSURANCE/
        QUALITY CONTROL

There are no  specific quality assurance activities
which  apply  to  the  implementation  of  these
procedures.
However,  the  following  general QA  procedures
apply:

    •  All data must be documented on standard
       well completion forms, field data sheets or
       within  field/site logbooks.

    •  All instrumentation must be operated in
       accordance with  operating instructions as
       supplied   by  the  manufacturer,  unless
       otherwise specified  in  the  work  plan.
       Equipment  checkout   and  calibration
       activities   must   occur   prior   to
       sampling/operation  and  they  must   be
       documented.
4.10   DATA VALIDATION

This section is not applicable to this SOP.


4.11   HEALTH AND  3AFETY

When working with potentially hazardous materials,
follow U.S. EPA, OSHA, and specific health and
safety procedures.

-------
              5.0    WATER  LEVEL MEASUREMENT:  SOP  #2151
5.1    SCOPE AND APPLICATION

The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure
(SOP) is to set guidelines for the determination of
the depth  to water in  an  open borehole, cased
borehole, monitoring well or piezometer.

Generally,    water   level   measurements   from
boreholes,  piezometers, or monitoring  wells are
used to construct water table  or potentiometric
surface  maps.     Therefore,  all  water  level
measurements at a given site should be collected
within a 24-hour period.  Certain situations may
necessitate that  all water level  measurements  be
taken within a  shorter time  interval.    These
situations may include:

    •  the  magnitude  of  the  observed changes
       between wells appears too large

    •  atmospheric pressure  changes

    •  aquifers which are tidally influenced

    •  aquifers    affected  by   river   stage,
       impoundments,  and/or unlined ditches

    •  aquifers stressed by intermittent pumping
       of production wells

    •  aquifers being actively  recharged due to
       precipitation events
5.2    METHOD SUMMARY

A survey mark should be placed on the casing for
use  as a reference point for measurement.  Many
times the lip of the riser pipe is not flat.  Another
measuring reference should be located on the grout
apron. The measuring point should be documented
in the site logbook and on the groundwater level
data form (see Appendix C).

Water levels in piezometers and monitoring wells
should be allowed to stabilize for a minimum of 24
hours after well construction and development, prior
to measurement.  In low yield situations, recovery
may take longer.
Working with decontaminated equipment, proceed
from the least to the most  contaminated wells.
Open the  well and  monitor  headspace with the
appropriate monitoring instrument to determine the
presence of volatile organic compounds. Lower the
water level measurement device into the well until
water surface or bottom of casing is encountered.
Measure  distance  from  water  surface  to  the
reference point on the well casing and record in the
site logbook  and/or groundwater level data form.
Remove all downhole equipment, decontaminate as
necessary, and replace well casing cap.
5.3    SAMPLE PRESERVATION,
       CONTAINERS, HANDLING AND
       STORAGE

This section is not applicable to this SOP.
5.4    INTERFERENCES AND
       POTENTIAL PROBLEMS

    •  The  chalk  used  on  steel  tape  may
       contaminate the well.

    •  Cascading water may  obscure the water
       mark or cause it to be  inaccurate.

    •  Many types of electric  sounders use metal
       indicators at 5-foot  intervals around  a
       conducting wire. These intervals should be
       checked with a  surveyor's tape to ensure
       accuracy.

    •  If there is oil present on the water, it can
       insulate the  contacts of the probe on an
       electric sounder or give false readings due
       to thickness of the oil.  Determining the
       thickness and density of the oil layer may
       be  warranted, in order to  determine the
       correct water level.

    •  Turbulence in the well and/or cascading
       water can make water  level determination
       difficult with either an electric sounder or
       steel tape.

-------
        An  airline  measures  drawdown  during
        pumping.  It is only accurate to 0.5 foot
        unless   it  is   calibrated  for  various
        "drawdowns".
5.5     EQUIPMENT/APPARATUS

There are a number of devices which can be used to
measure water levels, such as steel tape or airlines.
The device should be adequate to attain an accuracy
of 0.01 feet.

The  following equipment is needed to measure
water levels:

    •   air monitoring equipment
    •   water  level measurement device
    •   electronic water level indicator
    •   metal  tape measure
    •   airline
    •   steel tape
    •   chalk
    •   ruler
    •   notebook
    •   paper  towels
    •   decontamination solution and equipment
    •   groundwater level data forms
5.6    REAGENTS

No chemical  reagents are  used  in this procedure,
with the exception  of  decontamination solutions.
Where decontamination of equipment is required,
refer  to  ERT SOP #2006, Sampling Equipment
Decontamination and the site-specific work plan.
5.7    PROCEDURES

5.7.1   Preparation

1.  Determine the extent of the sampling effort, the
    sampling methods to be  employed, and which
    equipment and supplies are needed.

2.  Obtain  necessary  sampling  and  monitoring
    equipment.

3.  Decontaminate  or  preclean equipment,  and
    ensure that it is in working order.

4  Prepare scheduling  and  coordinate with staff,
    clients, and regulatory agency, if appropriate.

5.   Perform a general site survey prior to site entry
    in accordance with the site-specific health and
    safety plan.

6.   Identify and mark all sampling locations.

5.7.2   Procedures

1.   Make sure water level measuring equipment is
    in good operating condition.

2.   If possible and where applicable, start at those
    wells that are least contaminated and proceed
    to those wells that are most contaminated.

3.   Clean all equipment entering the well by the
    following decontamination procedure:

    •   Triple rinse equipment  with  deionized
        water.

    •   Wash equipment with an Alconox solution
        followed by a deionized water rinse.

    •   Rinse with  an  approved solvent (e.g.,
        methanol,  isopropyl alcohol,  acetone)  as
        per the work plan, if organic contamination
        is suspected.

    •   Place equipment on clean surface such as
        a Teflon or polyethylene sheet.

4.   Remove locking well cap, note location, time of
    day,  and  date in  site  notebook  or   an
    appropriate groundwater level data  form.

5.   Remove well casing  cap.

6.   If required by site-specific condition, monitor
    headspace  of  well  with  PID  or  FID  to
    determine   presence   of   volatile   organic
    compounds and record in site logbook.

7.   Lower electric water level measuring device or
    equivalent   (i.e.,    permanently   installed
    tranducers or airline) into the well  until water
    surface is encountered.

8.   Measure the distance from the water surface to
    the  reference measuring point  on the well
    casing or protective barrier post and record in
    the field logbook.  In  addition, note that  the

-------
    water level measurement was from the top of
    the steel casing, top of the PVC  riser pipe,
    from the ground surface, or from some other
    position on the well head.

9.  The groundwater level data form in Appendix
    C should be completed as follows:

    •  site  name

    •  logger name: person taking field notes

    •  date:  the date when the water levels are
       being measured

    •  location:    monitor well  number  and
       physical location

    •  time:  the military time at which the water
       level measurement was recorded

    •  depth  to   water:    the   water   level
       measurement  in  feet,  or  in  tenths  or
       hundreds  of  feet,  depending  on  the
       equipment used

    •  comments:   any  information the  field
       personnel feels to be applicable

    •  measuring point: marked measuring point
       on PVC riser pipe, protective steel  casing
       or concrete  pad surrounding well  casing
       from which  all water level measurements
       for individual wells should  be  measured.
       This  provides consistency in future water
       level measurements.

10.  Measure total depth  of well (at least twice to
    confirm  measurement)  and  record  in  site
    notebook or on log form.

11.  Remove  all downhole equipment, replace well
    casing cap and lock steel caps.

12.  Rinse all downhole equipment  and store for
    transport to next well.

13.  Note  any physical changes such as  erosion or
    cracks in protective concrete pad or variation in
    total depth of well in field notebook and on
    field data sheets.

14.  Decontaminate all equipment  as outlined in
    Step 3 above.
5.8     CALCULATIONS

To determine groundwater elevation above mean
sea level, use the following equation:
                  Ew = E-D
    where:
5.9
        Ew  =  Elevation of water above mean sea
               level
        E  =   Elevation above sea level at point
               of measurement
        D  =   Depth to water
QUALITY ASSURANCE/
QUALITY CONTROL
The following general quality assurance procedures
apply:

    •  All data must be documented on standard
       chain of custody forms, field data sheets or
       within personal/site logbooks.

    •  All instrumentation must be operated in
       accordance with  operating instructions as
       supplied   by the  manufacturer,  unless
       otherwise specified  in  the  work  plan.
       Equipment  checkout   and   calibration
       activities   must    occur   prior    to
       sampling/operation,  and  they  must   be
       documented.

    •  Each well should be tested at least twice in
       order to compare results.
5.10   DATA VALIDATION

This section is not applicable to this SOP.


5.11   HEALTH AND SAFETY

When working with potentially hazardous materials,
follow U.S. EPA,  OSHA, and specific health and
safety procedures.

-------
                      6.0  WELL DEVELOPMENT:  SOP  #2156
 6.1     SCOPE AND APPLICATION

 The  purpose of monitoring well development is to
 ensure removal of fines from the vicinity of the well
 screen.  This allows free  flow of water from the
 formation into  the well  and  also  reduces the
 turbidity of the water during sampling events. The
 most common  well  development methods are:
 surging, jetting, and overpumping.

 Surging involves raising and lowering a surge block
 or surge plunger inside the well.  The  resulting
 motion surges water into the formation and loosens
 sediment to be pulled from the formation into the
 well. Occasionally, sediment must be removed from
 the well with a sand bailer to prevent sand locking
 of the  surge block.  This  method  may cause the
 sand pack around the screen to be displaced to a
 degree that damages its value as a filtering medium.
 For example, channels or voids may form near the
 screen if the filter pack sloughs away during surging
 (Keely  and Boateng, 1987).

 Jetting  involves lowering a small diameter pipe into
 the well to a few feet above the well screen, and
 injecting water  or  air  through  the pipe  under
 pressure so  that  sediments at  the  bottom  are
 geysered out the top of the  well. It is important not
 to jet air or water directly  across the screen. This
 may  cause fines in  the well  to be driven into the
 entrance of the screen  openings thereby causing
 blockages.

 Overpumping  involves pumping  at a rate rapid
 enough to draw the water level in the well as low as
 possible, and allowing it to recharge. This process
 is repeated until sediment-free water is produced.
 Overpumping  is not as vigorous  as  surging and
jetting and is probably the  most desirable for
 monitoring well development.
concern  is  that  the  method being  used  for
development does not  interfere with allowing  the
grout to set.

Open the monitoring well, take initial measurements
(e.g.  head  space air  monitoring  readings, water
level, well  depth, pH, temperature, and  specific
conductivity) and record results in the site logbook.
Develop the well by the appropriate method (i.e.,
overpumping, jetting, or surging) to accommodate
site conditions and project requirements. Continue
until  the developed water is clear and  free of
sediment.   Containerize all discharge water from
known or suspected contaminated areas.  Record
final measurements in the logbook.  Decontaminate
equipment as appropriate prior to use  in the next
well.
6.3    SAMPLE PRESERVATION,
        CONTAINERS, HANDLING, AND
        STORAGE

This section is not  applicable to this Standard
Operating Procedure (SOP).
6.4    INTERFERENCES AND
        POTENTIAL PROBLEMS

The following interferences or problems may occur
during well development:

    •   The possibility of disturbing the filter pack
        increases  with  surging and  jetting well
        development methods.

    •   The introduction of external water or air by
        jetting may alter the hydrochcmistry of the
        aquifer.
6.2    METHOD SUMMARY

Development  of a well should occur as soon as
practical after installation, but not sooner than 48
hours after grouting is completed,  if a rigorous well
development is  being  used.  If a less  rigorous
method, such as bailing, is used for development, it
may be initiated shortly after installation.  The main
6.5    EQUIPMENT/APPARATUS

The type of equipment used for well development is
dependent on  the  diameter  of the well.   For
example,  submersible pumps  cannot be used for
well development unless the wells arc 4 inches or
greater   in  diameter,   because  the   smallest

-------
submersible pump has a 3 1/4 inch O.D.

In general, the well  should be  developed  shortly
after  it is  drilled.   Most  drilling rigs have air
compressors or pumps that may be used for the
development process.
6.6     REAGENTS

No chemical reagents are used in  this  procedure
except  for   decontamination   solutions.    For
guidelines on equipment decontamination, refer to
ERT   SOP   #2006,   Sampling  Equipment
Decontamination and the site-specific work plan.
6.7     PROCEDURES

6.7.1   Preparation

1.  Coordinate site access and obtain keys to the
    monitoring well security cap locks.

2.  Obtain  information  on  each   well  to  be
    developed (i.e., drilling, method, well diameter,
    depth,   screened  interval,   anticipated
    contaminants, etc.).

3.  Obtain  a  water level meter, air monitoring
    equipment, materials for decontamination, pH
    and   electrical   conductivity   meters,   a
    thermometer, and a stopwatch.

4.  Assemble  containers  for temporary storage of
    water  produced  during well  development.
    Containers  must   be   structurally   sound,
    compatible with anticipated  contaminants, and
    easy to manage in  the  field.   The  use of
    truck-mounted tanks may be necessary in some
    cases; alternately, a portable water treatment
    unit  (e.g.  activated carbon)  may be  used to
    decontaminate the  purge water.

6.7.2  Operation

The  development should  be performed as soon as
practical after the  well is installed, but no sooner
than  48  hours  after  grouting  is  completed.
Dispersing agents, acids, or disinfectants should not
be used to enhance development of the well.

1.  Assemble  necessary  equipment  on a plastic
    sheet around the well.
2.   Record pertinent information in field logbook
    (personnel, time, location ID, etc.).

3.   Open monitoring well, and take air monitoring
    readings  at the top  of casing and  in  the
    breathing zone as appropriate.

4.   Measure depth to water and  the total depth of
    the monitoring well  from  the same datum
    point.

5.   Measure the  initial  pH, temperature,  and
    specific conductivity of the water and record in
    the logbook.

6.   Develop  the well until the water is  clear  and
    appears to be free of sediment. Note the initial
    color, clarity and odor of the water,

7.   All  water  produced by  development  in
    contaminated or suspected contaminated areas
    must be containerized or treated. Clearly label
    each   container   with  the   location   ID.
    Determination  of   the  appropriate  disposal
    method will be  based on the first  round of
    analytical results from each well.

8.   No water should be added to the well to assist
    development without prior approval by the site
    geologist. If a well cannot be cleaned of mud
    to produce formation water because the aquifer
    yields  insufficient  water, small amounts of
    potable water may be injected to clean up this
    poorly yielding well.   This  may be done by
    dumping in buckets of water.  When most of
    the mud is out,  continue  development with
    formation water only. It is essential that at
    least five times the amount  of water injected
    must be produced back from the well in order
    to ensure that  all  injected water is removed
    from the formation.

9.   Note the final  color, clarity and odor of the
    water.

10. Measure the final pH, temperature and specific
    conductance  of the  water and record in the
    field logbook.

11. Record the following data in the field logbook:

    •  well designation (location ID)
    •  date(s) of well installation
    •  date(s) and time of well development
    •  static  water   level   before   and  after

-------
        development
    •   quantity of water  removed  and time of
        removal
    •   type  and size/capacity of pump  and/or
        bailer used
    •   description of well development techniques
        used

6.7.3  Post Operation

1.   Decontaminate all equipment.

2.   Store  containers  of  purge  water  produced
    during development in a safe and secure area.

3.   After  the first round of analytical results have
    been  received, determine and  implement the
    appropriate purge water disposal  method.


6.8    CALCULATIONS

There are no calculations necessary to implement
this procedure.   However,  if it  is  necessary to
calculate  the  volume  of  the  well, utilize  the
following equation:

     Well volume = nr2h(cf)    [Equation  1]
where:
    n
    r
    h
                P1
                radius of monitoring well (feet)
                height of the water column (feet)
                [This  may  be  determined  by
                subtracting  the depth  to  water
                from the total depth of the well as
                measured from the same reference
                point.]
    cf   =       conversion factor (gal/ft3) =  7.48
                gal/ft3  [In   this   equation,   7.48
                gal/ft3 is the necessary conversion
                factor,  because 7.48  gallons of
                water occupy 1 ft3]

Monitoring wells arc typically 2 inches, 3 inches, 4
inches, or 6 inches in diameter.  If the diameter of
the monitoring well is known, a number of standard
conversion  factors can  be  used  to simplify  the
equation above.

The volume, in gallons per  linear foot, for various
standard  monitoring  well   diameters  can   be
calculated as follows:
                                                      where:
                                                          v   =
                                                          n   =
                                                          r   =
                                                          cf   =
                                                                     nr2(cf)    [Equation 2]
               volume in gallons per linear foot
               Pi
               radius of monitoring well (feet)
               conversion factor (7,48 gal/ft3)
                                                      For a 2-inch diameter well, the volume per linear
                                                      foot can be calculated as follows:

                                                          v   =      nr^cf)    [Equation 2]
                                                                     3.14 (1/12 ft)2  7.48 gal/ft3
                                                                     0.1632 gal/ft

                                                      Remember that if you have a 2-inch diameter well,
                                                      you must convert this to the  radius in feet to be
                                                      able to use the equation.

                                                      The volume per linear foot for monitoring wells of
                                                      common size are as follows:
                                                      Well diameter

                                                          2-inch
                                                          3-inch
                                                          4-inch
                                                          6-inch
                       v (volume in gal/ft.)

                               0.1632
                               0.3672
                               0.6528
                               1.4688
If you utilize the factors above, Equation 1 should
be modified as follows:

Well volume  =  h(v)    [Equation 3]
                                                      where:
                                                          h   =
                                                          V   —
               height of water column (feet)
               volume in gallons per linear  foot
               from  Equation 2
                                                      6.9    QUALITY ASSURANCE/
                                                             QUALITY CONTROL

                                                      There are no specific quality assurance  activities
                                                      which  apply  to  the  implementation  of  these
                                                      procedures.  However, the  following general QA
                                                      procedures apply:

                                                          •  All data must be documented on standard
                                                             chain of custody forms, field data sheets or
                                                             personal/site logbooks.

                                                          •  All instrumentation must  be operated in
                                                             accordance with  operating instructions as

-------
       supplied  by  the  manufacturer,  unless       6.11   HEALTH AND SAFETY
       otherwise  specified in the  work  plan.
       Equipment   checkout   and   calibration       When working with potentially hazardous materials,
       activities   must   occur   prior   to       fonow U.S.  EPA, OSHA, and specific health and
       sampling/operation  and  they  must  be       safety procedures.
       documented.
6.10  DATA VALIDATION

This section is not applicable to this SOP.

-------
               7.0    CONTROLLED  PUMPING TEST:  SOP #2157
 7.1     SCOPE AND APPLICATION

 The  most reliable and commonly used method  of
 determining aquifer characteristics is by controlled
 aquifer pumping tests.  Groundwater flow varies in
 space and time and  depends  on the hydraulic
 properties of the rocks and the boundary conditions
 imposed on the groundwater system. Pumping tests
 provide  results  that are more  representative  of
 aquifer characteristics than those predicted by slug
 or bailer  tests.  Pumping tests  require a greater
 degree of activity and expense, however, and are not
 always justified  for all  levels of investigation.  For
 example,  slug  tests may be  acceptable at the
 reconnaissance  level whereas pumping tests are
 usually performed as part of a feasibility study in
 support of designs for aquifer remediation.

 Aquifer characteristics which may be learned using
 pumping tests include  hydraulic conductivity  (K),
 transmissivity (T), specific yield (Sy) for unconfmed
 aquifers,  and storage coefficient (S) for confined
 aquifers.  These parameters can be determined by
 graphical  solutions and  computerized  programs.
 This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) outlines
 the protocol  for conducting  controlled  pumping
 tests.
7.2    METHOD SUMMARY

It is desirable to monitor pre-test water levels at the
test site for about 1 week prior to performance of
the pump test.   This information  allows for the
determination of the barometric efficiency of the
aquifer, as well as noting changes in head, due to
recharging or pumping in the area adjacent to the
well. Prior to initiating the long term pump test, a
step test is conducted to estimate the greatest  flow
rate that may be sustained by the pump well.

After the pumping well has recovered from the step
test, the long term pumping  test begins.  At the
beginning of the  test, the discharge rate  is set as
quickly and accurately as possible. The water levels
in  the  pumping  well and  observation wells are
recorded accordingly with a set schedule.   Data is
entered  on  the Pump/Recovery Test Data Sheet
(Appendix  C).    The   duration of the  test is
determinated  by project   needs  and   aquifer
properties, but rarely goes beyond 3 days or until
water levels become constant.
7.3    SAMPLE PRESERVATION,
       CONTAINERS, HANDLING, AND
       STORAGE

This section is not applicable to this SOP.
7.4    INTERFERENCES AND
       POTENTIAL PROBLEMS

Interferences and potential problems include:

    •  atmospheric conditions
    •  impact of local potable wells
    •  compression of the aquifer due to  trains,
       heavy traffic, etc.
7.5    EQUIPMENT/APPARATUS

    •  tape measure (subdivided into tenths of
       feet)
    •  submersible pump
    •  water pressure transducer
    •  electric water level indicator
    •  weighted tapes
    •  steel tape (subdivided into tenths of feet)
    •  generator
    •  electronic  data-logger  (if   transducer
       method  is used)
    •  watch or stopwatch with second hand
    •  semilogarithmic graph paper (if required)
    •  water proof ink pen and logbook
    •  thermometer
    •  appropriate references and calculator
    •  a barometer or  recording barograph  (for
       tests conducted in confined aquifers)
    •  heat shrinks
    •  electrical tape
    •  flashlights and lanterns
    •  pH meter
    •  conductivity meter
    •  discharge pipe
    •  flow meter
                                               39

-------
7.6     REAGENTS

No chemical reagents are used for this procedure;
however,  decontamination   solutions   may   be
necessary.  If decontamination  of  equipment is
required, refer to  ERT SOP  #2006,  Sampling
Equipment  Decontamination  and the site-specific
work plan.
7.7     PROCEDURES

7.7.1   Preparation

1.   Determine the extent of the sampling effort, the
    sampling methods to be  employed, and which
    equipment and supplies are needed.

2.   Obtain  necessary  sampling  and  monitoring
    equipment.

3.   Decontaminate  or  preclean  equipment, and
    ensure that it is in working order.

4.   Prepare scheduling  and  coordinate with staff,
    clients, and regulatory agency, if appropriate.

5.   Perform a general site survey prior to site entry
    in accordance with the site-specific health and
    safety plan.

6.   Identify and mark all sampling locations.

7.7.2   Field  Preparation

1.   Review the site work plan and become familiar
    with information on the wells to be tested.

2.   Check and  ensure the proper operation of all
    field equipment.  Ensure that  the electronic
    data-logger  is fully  charged, if appropriate.
    Test  the  electronic  data-logger  using   a
    container of water.  Always  bring additional
    transducers in case of malfunctions.

3.   Assemble a sufficient  number  of field data
    forms to complete the field assignment.

4.   Develop the pumping well prior to testing, per
    ERT SOP #2156, Well Development.

5.   Provide an orifice, weir, flow meter, container
    or other type of water  measuring device to
    accurately measure  and  monitor the discharge
    from the pumping well.

6.   Provide  sufficient  pipe  to  transport  the
    discharge  from the pumping well to an area
    beyond  the  expected  cone  of  depression.
    Conducting  a  pumping  test in contaminated
    groundwater may  require  treatment, special
    handling,  or a discharge permit before the
    water can be discharged.

7.   The  discharge pipe must have a gate valve to
    control the pumping rate.

8.   Determine if there is  an outlet near the well
    head for water  quality  determination  and
    sampling.

7.7.3  Pre-Test Monitoring

It is desirable to monitor pretest water levels at the
test site for about 1 week  prior to performance of
the test.   This  can be accomplished by using a
continuous-recording  device such  as  a Stevens
recorder. This information allows the determination
of the barometric efficiency of  the aquifer  when
barometric records are available.  It  also  helps
determine if the  aquifer is experiencing an increase
or decrease in head with time due to recharge or
pumping in  the  nearby area, or diurnal effects of
evapotranspiration. Changes in barometric pressure
are recorded during the test (preferably with an on-
site barograph) in order to correct water levels for
any possible fluctuations which may occur due to
changing atmospheric  conditions.   Pretest water
level trends are projected for the duration of the
test. These trends and/or barometric changes are
used to "correct" water levels during the test so they
are representative of the hydraulic response of the
aquifer due to pumping of the test well.

7.7.4  Step Test

Conduct  a step test prior  to initiating a long term
pumping test.  The  purpose of a step test is to
estimate   the  greatest  flow  rate  that  may  be
sustained during a long  term test.  The test  is
performed by  progressively increasing the flow rate
at 1 hour intervals. The generated drawdown versus
time data is plotted on semilogarithmic graph paper,
and the  discharge  rate is  determined  from this
graph.
                                                 40

-------
7.7.5  Pump Test

Time Intervals

After the pumping well has fully recovered from the
step test, the long term pumping test may start.  At
the beginning of the test, the discharge rate should
be set as  quickly and accurately as possible. The
water levels in the pumping well and observation
wells will be recorded according to Tables 4 and 5
below.

Water Level Measurements

Water levels will be measured as specified in ERT
SOP #2151, Well Level Measurement. During the
early part of the test, sufficient personnel should be
available to have at least  one person at each
observation well and at the pumping well. After the
first 2 hours,  two people  are usually sufficient to
continue the test.  It  is not necessary that readings
at the wells be taken simultaneously.  It is  very
important that depth to water readings be measured
accurately  and readings recorded at the exact time
measured.      Alternately,  individual   pressure
transducers and electronic data-loggers may be used
to reduce  the number  of field personnel hours
required to complete the pumping  test.  A  typical
aquifer pump  test form is shown in  Appendix C.

During a pumping test, the following data must be
recorded accurately on the aquifer test data form.

1.  Site ID — A number assigned to  identify a
    specific site.
                           Table 4:  Time Intervals for Measuring
                               Drawdown in the Pumped Well
Elapsed
Time From Start of Test (Minutes)
0- 10
10- 15
15-60
60-300
300- 1440
1440 - termination
Interval Between Measurements
(Minutes)
0.5- 1
1
5
30
60
480
                     Table 5:  Time Intervals for Measuring Drawdown
                                   in an Observation Well
Elapsed Time From Start of Test (Minutes)
0-60
60- 120
120 - 240
240 -360
360 - 1440
1440 - termination
Interval Between Measurements
(Minutes)
2
5
10
30
60
480
                                              41

-------
2.   Location -- The location of the well in which
    water level measurements are being taken.

3.   Distance  from Pumped  Well  --  Distance
    between the observation well and the pumping
    well, in feet.

4.   Logging Company -- The company conducting
    the pumping test.

5.   Test  Start Date -- The date when the pumping
    test began.

6.   Test  Start Time — Start time, using a 24-hour
    clock.

7.   Static Water  Level (Test  Start) -- Depth to
    water,  in feet and  tenths  of feet,  in  the
    observation  well  at   the  beginning  of  the
    pumping test.

8.   Test  End Date -- The date when the pumping
    test was completed.

9.   Test  End Time ~ End time, using a 24-hour
    clock.

10.  Static Water  Level  (Test  End)  -- Depth to
    water,  in feet and  tenths  of feet,  in  the
    observation well at the end of the pumping test.

11.  Average  Pumping Rate -- Summation of all
    entries recorded in the Pumping Rate (gal/min)
    column divided by the total number of Pumping
    Rate (gal/min) readings.

12.  Measurement Methods — Type of instrument
    used to  measure  depth-to-water  (this  may
    include  steel  tape, electric sounding  probes,
    Stevens recorders, or  pressure transducers).

13.  Comments -- Appropriate  observations  or
    information  which have  not  been recorded
    elsewhere, including notes on sampling.

14.  Elapsed Time (min)  — Time of measurement
    recorded continuously from start of test (time
    00.00).

15.  Depth to Water (ft) -- Depth to water, in  feet
    and tenths of feet, in the observation well at the
    time of the water level measurement.

16.  Pumping Rate (gal/min) -- Flow rate of pump
    measured from an orifice, weir, flow meter,
    container or  other  type  of water-measuring
    device.

Test Duration

The duration of the test is determined by the needs
of the project and properties of the aquifer.  One
simple test  for determining adequacy  of data  is
when the  log-time versus drawdown for the most
distant observation well begins to plot as a straight
line on the semilogarithmic graph paper. There are
several exceptions to  this simple rule  of thumb;
therefore,  it should be  considered  a minimum
criterion.  Different hydrogeologic conditions can
produce straight  line  trends  on  log-time versus
drawdown plots.  In general, longer tests produce
more definitive results. A duration of 1 to 3 days is
desirable, followed by a similar period of monitoring
the recovery of  the  water level.   Unconfined
aquifers and partially  penetrating wells may have
shorter  test durations.  Knowledge  of the  local
hydrogeology, combined with a clear understanding
of the overall project objectives, is  necessary in
interpreting just  how  long the  test  should  be
conducted. There is no need to continue the test if
the water  level becomes constant  with time.  This
normally indicates that a hydrogeologic source has
been  intercepted  and  that   additional   useful
information will  not  be collected  by continued
pumping.

7.7.6  Post Operation

1.  After   completion  of  water  level recovery
    measurements, decontaminate and/or dispose
    of  equipment  as  per ERT  SOP  #2006,
    Sampling Equipment Decontamination.

2.  When using an  electronic data-logger, use the
    following procedures.

     •  Stop logging sequence.
     •  Print data, or save memory and disconnect
        battery at the  end of the day's activities.

3.  Replace  testing   equipment  in  storage
    containers.

4.  Check  sampling   equipment  and supplies.
    Repair or replace all broken  or damaged
    equipment.

5.  Review field  forms for completeness.
                                                 42

-------
6.   Interpret pumping/recovery test field results.
7.8    CALCULATIONS

There are several accepted methods for determining
aquifer properties such as transmissivity, storativity,
and conductivity. However, the method to use is
dependent on  the characteristics  of the  aquifer
being tested (confined, unconfined, leaky confining
layer, etc.).  When reviewing pump test data, texts
by Fetter, or Driscoll or Freeze and Cherry may be
used to determine the method most appropriate to
your case. See the reference section on page 69.
7.9    QUALITY ASSURANCE/
       QUALITY CONTROL

Calibrate  all gauges, transducers, flow meters, and
other equipment used in conducting pumping tests
before use at the site.
Obtain records of the instrument calibration and file
with the test data records.  The calibration records
will  consist of laboratory  measurements.   If
necessary, perform  any on-site zero adjustment
and/or calibration.  Where possible, check all flow
and measurement meters on-site using a container
of measured volume and stopwatch; the accuracy of
the meters must be verified before testing proceeds.
7.10  DATA VALIDATION

This section is not applicable to this SOP.


7.11  HEALTH AND SAFETY

When working with potentially hazardous materials,
follow U.S. EPA, OSHA, and specific  health and
safety procedures.
                                              43

-------
                           8.0     SLUG TEST:  SOP #2158
8.1    SCOPE AND APPLICATION

This procedure  can  determine  the  horizontal
hydraulic conductivity of distinct geologic horizons
under in situ conditions. The hydraulic conductivity
(K) is an important parameter  for modeling the
flow of groundwater in an aquifer.
8.2    METHOD SUMMARY

A slug test involves the instantaneous injection of a
slug  (a solid  cylinder  of  known  volume)   or
withdrawal of a volume of water.  A slug displaces
a known volume of water from a well and measures
the artificial fluctuation of the groundwater level.

There are several advantages to using slug tests to
estimate hydraulic conductivities.  First, estimates
can be  made  in situ,  thereby  avoiding errors
incurred in  laboratory testing of disturbed soil
samples. Second, compared with  pump tests, slug
tests can be performed quickly and at relatively low
cost, because pumping and observation wells are not
required.  And last,  the hydraulic conductivity  of
small  discrete  portions of  an  aquifer  can  be
estimated (e.g., sand layers in a clay).
8.3    SAMPLE PRESERVATION,
       CONTAINERS, HANDLING, AND
       STORAGE

This  section is  not  applicable to  this  Standard
Operating Procedure (SOP).
8.5    EQUIPMENT/APPARATUS

The following equipment is needed to perform slug
tests.  All equipment which comes in contact with
the well should be decontaminated and tested prior
to commencing field activities.

    •  tape measure (subdivided into tenths  of
       feet)
    •  water pressure transducer
    •  electric water level indicator
    •  weighted tapes
    •  steel tape (subdivided into tenths of feet)
    •  electronic   data-logger   (if  transducer
       method is used)
    •  stainless steel slug of a known volume
    •  watch or stopwatch with second hand
    •  semilogarithmic graph paper (if required)
    •  waterproof ink pen and logbook
    •  thermometer
    •  appropriate references and calculator
    •  electrical tape
    •  21X micrologger
    •  Compaq portable computer or equivalent
       with Grapher installed on the hard disk
8.6    REAGENTS

No chemical reagents are used in this procedure;
however,   decontamination  solvents  may  be
necessary.   When  decontaminating  the  slug or
equipment,  refer to  ERT  SOP  #2006, Sampling
Equipment  Decontamination, and the site-specific
work plan.
8.4    INTERFERENCES AND
       POTENTIAL PROBLEMS

    •   Only the hydraulic conductivity of the area
       immediately   surrounding  the  well  is
       estimated, which may not be representative
       of the average hydraulic conductivity of the
       area.

    •   The storage coefficient, S, usually  cannot
       be determined by this method.
8.7    PROCEDURES

8.7.1  Field Procedures

When the slug test is performed using an electronic
data-logger and pressure transducer, all data will be
stored internally or on computer diskettes or tape.
The information will be transferred directly  to the
main computer and analyzed.  Keep a computer
printout of the data in the files as documentation.

If  the  slug test  data is  collected and  recorded
manually, the slug test data form (Appendix C) will
                                              45

-------
be used to record observations. The slug test data
form should include the following information:

    •   site ID - identification number assigned to
        the  site
    •   location ID -- identification of  location
        being tested
    •   date — the date when the test data were
        collected in this order:  year, month,  day
        (e.g., 900131 for January 31,  1990)
    •   slug  volume   (ft3)   -   manufacturer's
        specification for  the known  volume  or
        displacement of the slug device
    •   logger ~ identifies the company or person
        responsible  for   performing  the  field
        measurements
    •   test method -- the slug device  either is
        injected or  lowered  into  the  well, or is
        withdrawn or pulled-out from the monitor
        well.  Check the method that is applicable
        to the test situation being run.
    •   comments — appropriate observations or
        information for which no other blanks are
        provided.
    •   elapsed time (minutes) -- cumulative time
        readings from  beginning of test to end of
        test, in minutes
    •   depth  to water (feet)  -- depth  to water
        recorded in tenths of feet

The following general  procedures may be used to
collect and report slug test data.  These procedures
may be modified to reflect site-specific conditions:

1.  Decontaminate the  transducer and cable.

2.  Make  initial  water level  measurements  on
    monitoring   wells    in   an   upgradicnt-to-
    downgradicnt sequence, if possible, to minimize
    the potential for cross-contamination.

3.  Before   beginning   the   slug   test,  record
    information into the  electronic data-logger.
    The type of information may vary depending on
    the model used. When using different models,
    consult  the operator's manual for the proper
    data entry sequence to be used.

4.  Test wells from least contaminated  to  most
    contaminated, if possible.

5.  Determine the static water level  in the well by
    measuring the depth  to water periodically for
    several  minutes  and taking the average of the
    readings,   (see  SOP  #2151,   Water  Level
    Measurement).

6.   Cover sharp edges of the well casing with duct
    tape to protect the transducer cables.

7.   Install the transducer and cable in the well to
    a depth below the target drawdown estimated
    for the test but at least 2 feet from the bottom
    of the well. Be sure the depth of submergence
    is  within  the design range stamped on the
    transducer.  Temporarily tape the transducer
    cable to the well to  keep the transducer at a
    constant depth.

8.   Connect the transducer cable to the electronic
    data-logger.

9.   Enter the  initial water  level and transducer
    design  range   into  the  recording  device
    according to the manufacturer's  instructions.
    The  transducer design range will be stamped
    on the side  of the  transducer.   Record the
    initial water level on the recording device.

10. "Instantaneously" introduce or remove a known
    volume or slug of water to the well.  Another
    method is to  introduce  a  solid  cylinder  of
    known volume to displace and raise the water
    level, allow the water  level  to restabilize and
    remove the cylinder.  It  is important to remove
    or add the  volumes  as  quickly  as possible
    because the analysis assumes an "instantaneous"
    change in volume is created in the well.

11. Consider the  moment of volume  addition  or
    removal as time zero. Measure and record the
    depth to water and the time at each reading.
    Depths should be measured to the nearest 0.01
    foot.  The number of depth-time measurements
    necessary to complete the test is variable. It is
    critical to  make as  many  measurements  as
    possible  in  the early  part of the test.  The
    number and  intervals between  measurements
    will be determined from previous aquifer tests
    or evaluations.

12. Continue measuring and recording depth-time
    measurements until the water level returns to
    equilibrium conditions or a sufficient number of
    readings have  been made to clearly show a
    trend on a semilogarilhmic plot of time versus
    depth.

13. Retrieve slug (if applicable).

-------
 Note:   The time required for a slug test to be
 completed is a function of the volume of the slug,
 the hydraulic conductivity of the formation  and the
 type of well completion. The slug volume should be
 large enough that a sufficient number of water level
 measurements can be made before the water level
 returns to equilibrium conditions. The length of the
 test may range from less than a minute to several
 hours.  If  the well is to be used as a  monitoring
 well, precautions against contaminating it should be
 taken. If water is added to the monitoring well, it
 should  be from an uncontaminated  source  and
 transported in  a  clean container.    Bailers or
 measuring  devices should be decontaminated prior
 to the test. If tests  are performed  on more than
 one monitoring well, care must be taken to avoid
 cross-contamination of the wells.

 Slug  tests  should  be conducted  on  relatively
 undisturbed wells.  If a test  is conducted on a  well
 that has recently been pumped for water sampling
 purposes, the measured water level must be within
 0.1 foot of the static water level prior to sampling.
 At least 1 week should elapse between the  drilling
 of a well and the performance of a slug test.

 8.7.2  Post Operation

 When  using an electronic data-logger, use  the
 following procedure:

 1.  Stop logging sequence.

 2.  Print data.

 3.  Send data  to computer by telephone.

 4. Save memory and disconnect battery at the end
    of the day's activities.

 5.  Review field forms for completeness.
8.8     CALCULATIONS

The simplest interpretation of piezometer recovery
is that of Hvorslev (1951).  The analysis assumes a
homogenous,  isotropic medium  in which soil and
water are incompressible. Hvorslev's expression for
hydraulic conductivity (K) is:

   K = r*ln(L/R)
        2LT.,
    for L/R > 8

where:
K
r
L

R
T.
where:
hydraulic conductivity [feet/second]
casing radius [feet]
length of open screen (or open borehole)
[feet]
filter pack (borehole) radius [feet]
Basic Time Lag [seconds]; value of t on
semilogarithmic plot of (H-h)/(H-H0)
vs. t, when (H-h)/(H-H0) = 0.37
H  =   initial water level prior to removal of slug
H0 =   water level at t = 0
h   =   recorded water level at t > 0

(Hvorslev, 1951; Freeze and Cherry, 1979)

The Bower and Rice method is also commonly used
for K calculations.  However, it is much more time
consuming than the  Hvorslev method.  Refer to
Freeze and Cherry or  Fetter for a discussion of
these methods.
8.9     QUALITY ASSURANCE/
        QUALITY CONTROL

The following general quality assurance procedures
apply:

    •   All data must be documented on standard
        chain of custody forms, field data sheets, or
        within personal/site logbooks.

    •   All instrumentation  must be operated in
        accordance with operating instructions as
        supplied  by  the   manufacturer,  unless
        otherwise  specified  in  the  work  plan.
        Equipment   checkout   and   calibration
        activities   must   occur   prior    to
        sampling/operation,  and they must   be
        documented.

The following specific quality assurance activity  will
apply:

    •   Each well should be tested at least Iwicc in
        order to compare results.
                                                47

-------
8.10   DATA VALIDATION

This section is not applicable to this SOP.


8.11   HEALTH AND SAFETY

When working with potentially hazardous materials,
follow U.S. EPA, OSHA, and specific health and
safety procedures.
                                           48

-------
    APPENDIX A



Sampling Train Schematic
          49

-------
                             Figure 1:  Sampling Train Schematic

                                       SOP  #2149
VACUUM
  BO
                                           SCREENING
                                             PORT
                                                          1/4" TEFLON TUBING
                                             1/4"  I.D. THIN  WALL-
                                               TEFLON TUBING
                  SAMPLING
                   PORT
"QUICK CONNECr
    FITTING
                                                   1/4"  S.S.
                                                 SAMPLE  PROBE
                                                                             MODELING
                                                                               CLAY
                                                           SAMPLE
                                                            WELL
                                           50

-------
 APPENDIX B



HNU Field Protocol
       51

-------
                                       HNU Field Protocol
                                           SOP  #2149
Startup Procedure

1.   Before attaching the probe, check the function
    switch on the control panel to ensure that it is
    in  the 'off  position.   Attach  the  probe by
    plugging it into the interface on the  top of the
    readout module.  Use care in aligning  the
    prongs in the probe cord with the plug in; do
    not force.

2.   Turn the function switch to the battery check
    position.  The needle on the meter should read
    within or above the green area on the scale. If
    not, recharge the battery.  If the red indicator
    light comes on, the battery needs recharging.

3.   Turn the function switch to any range setting.
    For no more than 2 to 3 seconds look into the
    end of the probe to  see if the lamp is on.  If it
    is on, you will see a  purple glow. Do not stare
    into the probe any longer  than  three seconds.
    Long term exposure to UV light can damage
    eyes. Also, listen for the hum of the fan motor.
4.   To zero the instrument, turn the function switch
    to  the  standby position and rotate  the  zero
    adjustment until  the  meter  reads  zero.   A
    calibration gas is not  needed since  this is an
    electronic zero  adjustment.   If  the   span
    adjustment setting is changed after the zero is
    set, the zero should be rechcckcd and adjusted,
    if necessary.  Wait 15  to 20 seconds to ensure
    that the zero reading  is stable.  If necessary,
    readjust the zero.

Operational Check

1.   Follow  the startup procedure.

2.   With the instrument set on the 0-20 range, hold
    a solvent-based Magic Marker near the probe
    lip.     If  the meter  deflects  upscale, the
    instrument is  working.

Field  Calibration Procedure

1.   Follow   the   startup   procedure   and  the
    operational check.
2.  Set the function switch to the range setting for
    the concentration of the calibration gas.

3.  Attach  a  regulator  (HNU  101-351)  to  a
    disposable cylinder of isobutylene gas. Connect
    the regulator to the probe of the HNU with a
    piece of clean Tygon tubing.  Turn the valve on
    the regulator to the 'on' position.

4.  After 15 seconds, adjust the span dial until the
    meter reading equals the concentration of the
    calibration  gas used.   The  calibration gas is
    usually 100 ppm of isobutylene in zero air. The
    cylinders are marked in benzene equivalents for
    the  10.2 eV  probe (approximately  55  ppm
    benzene equivalent) and for the 11.7 eV probe
    (approximately 65 ppm benzene equivalent).
    Be careful to unlock the  span  dial  before
    adjusting it. If the span has to be set below 3.0
    calibration, the lamp and ion chamber should
    be inspected and  cleaned as appropriate. For
    cleaning of the  11.7  eV probe, only use an
    electronic-grade, oil-free frcon or similar water-
    free, grease-free solvent.

5.  Record in the field log: the  instrument ID #
    (EPA decal or serial number if the instrumcnl
    is  a rental); the initial  and final span settings;
    the date and time; concentration and type of
    calibration  used;  and the name of the  person
    who calibrated the instrument.

Operation

1.  Follow  the  startup  procedure,   operational
    check, and  calibration check.

2.  Set  the function  switch to  the  appropriate
    range.  If the concentration of gases or vapors
    is unknown, set the function  switch to the 0-20
    ppm range.  Adjust it  if necessary.

3.  While taking care not to permit the  HNU to be
    exposed  to   excessive  moisture,  dirt,   or
    contamination, monitor the  work activity  ;is
    specified in the site health and safely plan.

4.  When the activity is completed or al the end of
    the day, carefully clean  the outside of the HNU
    with a  damp disposable towel to remove any
                                                 53

-------
    visible dirt.  Return the HNU to a secure area        plastic to prevent it from becoming contaminated
    and place on charge.                                and to prevent water from getting inside in the
                                                       event  of precipitation.
5.   With  the  exception of the  probe's  inlet  and
    exhaust, the HNU can be wrapped in clear
                                                  54

-------
APPENDIX C




   Forms

-------
Well Completion Form



    SOP #2150
PAGEOF
Cllenti
Total
ฃ
**
a.
n
a
—
MDNITDR WELL INSTALLATION
Job Wn.. riflt. QrllUdl U*IL Nn.t
, , flปwซtinni Pnrf . Tnn of St**l Cactnoi
Depth
f-ftซinp $i?r 4- Typt1 . , , . , Srr-Pปn Stzu


Synbol
Stratigraphy


Sanple Description

Conplp-tion Data


         56

-------
Groundwater Level Data Form
       SOP  #2151
PAGE  OF
SITE NAME:
LOG DATE: LOGGER NAME:
MEASUREMENT REFERENCE POINT: 	 TOP OF GROUND 	 TOP OF CASING
LOCATION '






















TIME






















DEPTH TO
WATER (FT)






















COMMENTS






















           57

-------
Pump/Recovery Test Data Sheet



        SOP #2157
PAGE  OF
SITE ID:
LOCATION:
TEST START
DATE:
TIME:
STATIC WATER LEVEL (FT):
AVERAGE PUMPING RATE (GAL/MIN):
DISTANCE FROM PUMPED WELL (FT):
LOGGER:
TEST END
DATE:
TIME:
STATIC WATER LEVEL (FT):

MEASUREMENT METHODS:
COMMENTS:
ELAPSED
TIME
(MIN)
0.00









-
PUMP TEST
DEPTH TO
WATER (FT)











PUMPING
RATE
(GAL/MIN)











RECOVERY
TEST ELAPSED
TIME (MIN)
0.00










DEPTH TO
WATER (FT)











            58

-------
Pump/Recovery Test Data Sheet (Continued)



             SOP #2157
PAGE  OF
SITE ID: DATE:
LOCATION: LOGGER:
ELAPSED
TIME
(MIN)























PUMP TEST
DEPTH TO
WATER (Ff)























PUMPING
RATE
(GAL/MIN)























RECOVERY
TEST ELAPSED
TIME (MIN)























DEPTH TO
WATER (FT)
























-------
Slug Test Data Form



   SOP #2158
PAGE  OF
DATE:
SITE ID:
LOCATION ID:

SLUG VOLUME (FT3):
LOGGER:
TEST METHOD: 	 SLUG INJECTION 	 SLUG WITHDRAWAL
COMMENTS:
TIME (Begin Test #1):
TIME (End Test #1):
ELAPSED TIME
(MIN)
















DEPTH TO WATER
(FT)
















TIME (Begin Test #2):
TIME (End Test #2):
ELAPSED TIME
(MIN)
















DEPTH TO WATER
(FT)
















        60

-------
                                           References
Barcelona, MJ., J.A. Helfrich, E.E. Garske, and J.P. Gibb.  Spring 1984. A Laboratory Evaluation of
        Groundwater Sampling Mechanisms.  Groundwater Monitoring Review,  pp. 32-41.

Barcelona, M J., J A. Helfrich, and E.E. Garske.  1985. Sampling Tubing Effects on Groundwater Samples.
        Anafy. Chem. 57: 460-463.

Boateng, K., P.C. Evens, and S.M. Testa.  1984.  Groundwater Contamination of Two Production Wells: A
        Case History. Groundwater Monitoring Review. 4 (2): 24-3L

Boulton, N.S.  1954.  T,he Drawdown  of the Water-Table under Non-Steady Conditions Near a Pumped Well
        in an Unconfined Formation.  Paper 5979 in Proceedings of the Institution of Civil Engineers.  3:
        564.

Boulton, N.S.  1963.  Analysis of Data from Non-Equilibrium Pumping Tests Allowing for Delayed Yield
        from Storage, Paper 6693 in Proceedings of the Institution of Civil Engineers.  26: 469-82.

Bower, H.  1978.  Groundwater Hydrology.  McGraw-Hill,  New York, New York.

Bower, H. and R.C. Rice.  1976.  A Slug Test for Determining Hydraulic Conductivity of Unconfined
        Aquifers with Completely or Partially Penetrating Wells.  Water Resources Research. 12 (3): 233-238.

Bredehoeft, J.D. and S.S. Papadopulos. 1980. A Method of Determining the Hydraulic Properties of Tight
        Formations.  Water Resources Research.  16 (1): 233-238.

Cooper, Jr. H.H., J.D. Bredehoeft, and S.S. Papadopulos.  1967. Response  of a Finite-Diameter Weil to an
        Instantaneous Charge of Water.  Water Resources Research.  13 (1).

Cooper, Jr., H.H., and C.E. Jacob.  1946.  A Generalized Graphical Method for Evaluating Formation
        Constants and Summarizing Well-Field History.  American Geophysical Union Transactions. 21 (4):
        526-534.

Driscoll, F.G.  1986.  Groundwater and Wells (2nd ed.) Johnson Division, UOP Inc., St.  Paul, Minnesota.
        1089 pp.

Earlougher, R.C.  1977.  Advances in  Well Test Analysis.  Society of Petroleum Engineers of AIME.

Ferris, J.G., and D.B. Knowles.  1954.  The Slug Test for  Estimating Transmissivity.  U.S. Geological Survey.
        Ground Water Note 26.

Fetter, Charles W., Jr. 1980. Applied Hydrogeology. Merrill, Columbus, Ohio.

Freeze, R. Allen  and John A. Cherry.  1979.  Groundwater.  Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, New
        Jersey.

Gibb, J.P, R.M. Schuller, and RA. Griffin. March 1980.  Monitoring Well Sampling and Preservation
        Techniques.  EPA/600/9-80/010.

Giljan Instrument Corp.  1983.  Instruction Manual  for Hi Flow Sampler:  HFS113, HFS 113 T, HFS 113U,
        HFS 113 UT.

HNU Systems, Inc.  1975.  Instruction Manual for Model PI 101 Photoionization Analyzer.


                                                 61

-------
Hyorslev.  1951. Time Lag and Soil Permeability in Ground Water Observations, Bulletin No. 36, U.S. Army
        Corps of Engineers,  p. 50.

Instrument Specialties Company. January 1980. Instruction Manual, Model 2100 Wastewater Sampler.
        Lincoln, Nebraska.

Johnson Division, UOP, Inc.  1966.  Ground Water and Wells.  St. Paul, Minnesota.

Keely, J.F. and Kwasi Boateng.  1987.  Monitoring Well Installation,  Purging, and Sampling Techniques -
        Part 1:  Conceptualizations.  Groundwater. 25 (3): 300-313.

Keely, J.F. and Kwasi Boateng.  1987.  Monitoring Well Installation,  Purging, and Sampling Techniques -
        Part 2:  Case Histories.  Groundwater.  25 (4): 427-439.

Korte, Nic, and Dennis Ealey. 1983. Procedures for Field Chemical Analyses of Water Samples. U.S.
        Department of Energy, GJ/TMC-07, Technical Measurements Center, Grand Junction Project
        Office.

Korte, Nic, and Peter Kearl.  1985.  Procedures for the Collection and Preservation of Groundwater and
        Surface Water Samples and for the Installation of Monitoring Wells:   Second Edition, U.S.
        Department of Energy: GJ/TMC-08, Technical Measurements Center, Grand Junction Projects
        Office.

Lohman, S.W. 1982.  Ground Water Hydraulics. U.S. Geological Survey. Paper 708, p. 70.

National Council of the Paper Industry for Air  and Stream Improvement, Inc.  January 1982.  A Guide to
        Groundwater Sampling. Technical Bulletin No. 362.  Madison, New York.

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. October 1985.  Occupational  Safety and Health
        Guidance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities.

Neuman, S.P. 1972. Theory of Flow in Unconfined Aquifers Considering Delayed  Response of the Water
        Table.  Water Resources Research.  8 (4): 1031.

New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection. February 1988. Field Sampling Procedures Manual.

Nielsen, David M. and Yeates, Gillian L.  Spring 1985. A Comparison of Sampling Mechanisms Available
        for Small-Diameter Groundwater Monitoring Wells.  Groundwater Monitoring Review, pp. 83-99.

Papadopulos, S.S., J.D. Bredehoeft, H.H. Cooper, Jr.  1973. On the Analysis of Slug Test Data.  Water
        Resources Research.   9 (4): 1087-1089.

Roy F. Weston,  Inc. 1987. Weston Instrumentation Manual.  Volume I.

Scalf M. J., et al.  1980.  Manual for Groundwater Sampling Procedures.  R.S. Kerr Environmental Research
        Laboratory, Office of Research and Development.  Ada, Oklahoma.

Sisk, S.W. 1981. NEIC Manual for Ground/Surface  Investigations at Hazardous Waste Sites.
        EPA/330/9-81/002.

Todd, David K. 1980. Ground Water Hydrology (2nd ed.) John Wiley & Sons, New  York, New York.

U.S. Department of the Interior. National Handbook of Recommended Methods for  Water-Data Acquisition.
        Reston, Virginia.
                                                 62

-------
U.S. Department of the Interior.  1977.  Ground Water Manual, Bureau of Reclamation.  U.S. Government
       Printing Office, New York, New York.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. August 1977. Procedures Manual for Groundwater Monitoring at
       Solid Waste Disposal Facilities.  EPA/530/SW/61L

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.  1981. Manual of Groundwater Quality Sampling Procedures.
       EPA/600/2-81/160.  Washington, D.C.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.  1982. Handbook for Chemical and Sample Preservation of Water
       and Wastewater.  EPA/600/4-82/029. Washington, D.C.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.  1983. Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Waste.
       EPA/600/4-79/020.  Washington, D.C.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. December, 1984. Characterization of Hazardous Waste Sites - A
       Methods Manual: Volume II, Available Sampling Methods, 2nd Edition.  EPA/600/4-84/076.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.  1984. Test Methods for Evaluation of Solid Waste.  EPA-SW-846.
       Second Edition.  Washington, D.C.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. September 1985. Practical Guide for Groundwater Sampling.
       EPA/600/2-85/104.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. April 1, 1986.  Engineering Support Branch Standard Operating
       Procedures and Quality Assurance Manual.  U.S. EPA Region IV.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. September 1986. RCRA Groundwater Monitoring Technical
       Enforcement Guidance Document. OSWER-9950-1.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.  1987. A Compendium of Superfund Field Operations Methods.
       EPA/540/P-87/001.  Office of Emergency and Remedial Response.  Washington, D.C.  20460.
                                               63

-------